The Grizzly G1026 stands out as the top choice for its flexibility, power, and build quality. While the Shop Fox W1702 boasts a well-designed table for improved work surface, the Jet JWS-35X5-1 offers added versatility with multiple rotational speeds.
Wood shapers are woodworking machines that shape wood using rotating cutters. They create profiles, edges, and moldings on wooden pieces with precision, making them valuable tools in carpentry and furniture making.
Wood shapers are typically used for cutting, trimming, and shaping wooden surfaces. This woodworking machine can shape a door stile, trim a wardrobe or a cabinet, or cut a large lumber piece into smaller segments. Let’s take a look at the best wood shapers on the market today!
Here are top-rated wood shapers ideal for home woodworking:
Grizzly Industrial G1026: The Grizzly Industrial's G1026 offers affordability and durability, boasting two spindle speeds and a robust build from industrial-grade alloy steel. However, it lacks an efficient dust collection system.
Shop Fox W1702: The Shop Fox W1702 impresses with its large cast iron table, providing convenience for handling sizable loads. Despite its durable build, the product suffers from poor delivery and post-sale support.
Jet JWS-35X5-1: The Jet's JWS-35X5-1 features a powerful five HP motor with multiple reversible spindle speeds. Its convenient height adjustment wheel and well-placed dust collection port enhance usability, though it comes at a higher price.
Powermatic PM2700: The Powermatic wood shaper stands out for its powerful motor, digital readout meter, and precise fence adjustments. While its integrated casters aid mobility, the bulky design and high cost may deter budget-conscious users.
Jet JWS 25X: The Jet's JWS 25X caters to professional woodworkers with a three-HP motor and versatile usage. The convenient height adjustment and sturdy build quality make it suitable for heavy workloads, despite the relatively small table size.
1. Grizzly Industrial G1026 - Best build quality
What We Like
Affordably priced
Two different spindle speeds
Durable build quality
Good versatility for wood shaping
What We Don't Like
Lacks a good dust collection and disposal system
Grizzly Industrial is a renowned manufacturer of heavy-duty industrial tools, such as wood routers, jointers, planers, table saws, and so on. On that note, the brand’s G1026 wood shaping machine is particularly popular, thanks to its relatively affordable price and high-quality build.
With this wood shaper machine, you get two different spindle speeds of 7,000 RPM (revolutions per minute) and 10,000 RPM. Similarly, the motor has an output of three HP (horsepower). It is a single-phase, 220-volt motor that comes with a reversing switch. And based on my first-hand experience, I can say that this machine is more than capable of handling heavy loads.
As for the build quality, I found the G1026 to be fairly durable. That’s because it is made of industrial-grade alloy steel, which can last for a very long time. The blade is made from high-speed steel, which means that it won’t get damaged or deformed when shaping rigid materials like hardwood.
It comes with three interchangeable spindles, whose lengths are 0.5 inches, 0.75 inches, and 1 inch. This ensures a good degree of versatility when shaping wood. However, one issue that I noticed with this particular option is that it doesn’t include a good dust collection and disposal system. As a result, it generates a lot of loose dust, which can make the cleanup process a bit frustrating.
Motor Power: 3 HP | Spindle Size: 0.5", 0.75", 1" | Spindle/Variable Speed: 7,000 and 10,000 RPM | Spindle Travel: 3" | Table Size: 28.25" x 30.5" | Table Material: Cast iron | Fence Quality: With safety guard | Fence Adjustability: Independently adjustable, spring-steel hold-downs on fence | Dust Collection: N/A
2. Shop Fox W1702 - Best table design
What We Like
Large and convenient table surface
Durable cast-iron build
Good usage flexibility
Relatively safe to use
What We Don't Like
Poor delivery and post-sale support
Do you want a wood shaping machine for handling large-sized loads? Then you should consider the Shop Fox W1702, which has a large shaping table made from precision-ground cast iron. Its dimensions are 28.25 inches by 30.5 inches, and it consists of removable table inserts for better work convenience. My findings show that this cast iron table is big enough to accommodate large pieces of lumber with ease.
The rest of the body is made from high-quality cast iron as well, meaning that it is quite durable. It includes three different spindles of 0.5 inches, 0.75 inches, and 1 inch, and the spindle travel length is 3 inches. Similarly, the maximum diameter capacity for the cutter is 5.5 inches. Furthermore, there is a T-slot miter gauge on the work table for improved precision and convenience.
In terms of power, it comes with a three-HP electric motor that is capable of handling most loads. It can rotate the spindles at two different speeds, which are 7,000 RPM and 10,000 RPM, which offers good flexibility. Besides a reversing switch, this 220-volt single-phase motor comes with a magnetic switch too. This switch protects the machine from thermal overload, which is a great safety measure.
That said, I found the delivery and post-sale support for this product to be pretty sub-par. So, if you encounter any issues with it after purchase, you might have to go through a lot of hassle to get it resolved.
Motor Power: 3 HP | Spindle Size: 0.5", 0.75", 1" | Spindle/Variable Speed: 7,000 and 10,000 RPM | Spindle Travel: 3" | Table Size: 28.25" x 30.5" | Table Material: Cast iron | Fence Quality: Heavy cast iron, split fence | Fence Adjustability: Independently adjustable, allows full-edge profiling | Dust Collection: Built-in 3" dust port
3. Jet JWS-35X5-1 - Best rotational speeds
What We Like
Powerful electric motor
Multiple reversible spindle speed settings
Convenient height adjustment wheel
Well-placed dust collection port
What We Don't Like
Not very budget-friendly
Next, I reviewed the JWS-35X5-1 wood shaper machine by Jet. This brand is a fairly renowned manufacturer of heavy-duty industrial tools and equipment. The JWS-35X5-1, in particular, comes with a powerful electric motor of five HP, which can handle almost every load with ease. Additionally, it supports four different reversible speeds of 4,000, 6,000, 8,000, and 10,000 RPM.
You can conveniently change the diameter of the wood shaper cutter heads according to the workload. There is also a chrome handwheel that allows you to adjust the height of the wood shaper. This chrome wheel is large in size and is conveniently located on the machine so that you can adjust the spindle height accurately on the go.
After a thorough inspection, I noticed that the table surface has dimensions of 32.25 inches by 26.75 inches. The table surface is made from precision-ground cast iron for improved durability. Apart from that, the wood shaper includes an extruded aluminum fence that has two feather board hold-down mechanisms along with T-slots.
For the sake of convenience, it comes with a 4-inch dust port that is built into the fence. As such, you can hook it up conveniently to any dust collection system. That way, you won’t have to worry about any extensive cleanups after you are done shaping the wood.
However, one limitation of this product is that it comes at a steep price. So, if you have a limited budget, you might not find this option to be very feasible.
Motor Power: 5 HP | Spindle Size: 0.75" | Spindle/Variable Speed: 4,000, 6,000, 8,000, and 10,000 RPM | Spindle Travel: 4" | Table Size: 32.25" x 26.75" | Table Material: Cast iron | Fence Quality: Extruded aluminum fence | Fence Adjustability: T-slots, 2 feather board hold-downs for adjustability | Dust Collection: 4" dust port built into fence
4. Powermatic PM2700 - Best precision
What We Like
Powerful motor
Digital readout meter included
Highly accurate fence adjustment
Durable cast-iron base
Integrated casters for better mobility
What We Don't Like
Bulky design
Expensive to purchase
Powermatic is one of the biggest and most well-known brands that makes high-quality woodworking and industrial equipment. That is why I included the PM2700 wood shaper machine in my list. It comes with a powerful 230-volt motor that has an output of five HP. As indicated by my tests, it can handle any type of wood-shaping task seamlessly.
I noticed that this particular wood shaper comes with a highly accurate digital readout meter. This meter tells you the exact height of the spindle and allows you to adjust its height in 0.001-inch increments. On top of that, it includes a micro-adjustment feature for the fence. It allows for incredibly precise fence adjustments so that you can minimize errors.
The electric motor supports two reversible speeds for better versatility. For durability, the machine includes a heavy-duty cast iron base. In that context, this wood shaper is pretty bulky by design.
This reduces its usability and convenience to some extent, especially for small, individual woodworkers. However, it comes with integrated casters near the bottom that can be easily raised and lowered. Thanks to that, you can move the machine around easily instead of carrying it around on your shoulders everywhere.
If you want to purchase this machine, though, you will need to have sufficient funds, for it comes with a very high price tag. Thus, it is not a suitable investment for those who have a tight budget.
Motor Power: 5 HP | Spindle Size: 0.75", 1.25" | Spindle/Variable Speed: 7,500 and 10,000 RPM | Spindle Travel: 4" | Table Size: 40" x 30" | Table Material: Cast iron | Fence Quality: Extruded aluminum fence | Fence Adjustability: Dual feather boards, T-slots, micro-adjust control knobs allow for precision adjustment | Dust Collection: Dual 4" ports for attachment to dust collection system
5. Jet JWS 25X - Best for professionals
What We Like
Suitable for professional woodworkers
Versatile usage
Convenient height adjustment
Sturdy build quality
What We Don't Like
The table is relatively small
For this review, I have selected another product by Jet, which is the JWS 25X wood shaper. It comes with a three-HP motor, which has a voltage rating of 230 volts. This indicates that it is great for individual woodworking professionals who handle heavy workloads.
I noticed that this cutting tool comes with two interchangeable spindles that have lengths of 0.5 inches and 0.75 inches. Also included are some router collets that can be used with router bits and shaper cutters. What’s more, you can adjust the height of the table with the help of a large chrome handwheel located conveniently on the side of the machine.
In my time with the product, I found that it is quite versatile for different types of wood-shaping tasks. This aspect is further complemented by the fact that it features two different spindle speeds of 7,500 and 10,000 RPM.
Moreover, the table surface is made from cast iron for optimal durability. It includes an extruded aluminum fence that consists of T-slots and a pair of feather board hold-downs. That said, the table dimensions are a bit limited, which can be a problem for many woodworkers. It has a size of 25 inches by 25.5 inches, which is smaller than other similar wood-shaping tables.
Motor Power: 3 HP | Spindle Size: 0.5", 0.75" | Spindle/Variable Speed: 7,500 and 10,000 RPM | Spindle Travel: N/A | Table Size: 25" x 25.5" | Table Material: Cast iron | Fence Quality: Extruded aluminum fence | Fence Adjustability: T-slots, 2 feather board hold-downs for adjustability | Dust Collection: 4" dust port built into fence
6. Shop Fox W1674- Best for small-scale projects
What We Like
Compact design
Built to last
Great for small-scale projects
Highly affordable
What We Don't Like
Generates too much noise and vibration
Here, I have reviewed the W1674 wood shaper machine by Shop Fox. This option is a compact wood shaper that is a great option for casual woodworkers, DIYers, and hobbyists. It comes at an affordable price point and has all the features of a wood shaper as well as a wood router. As a result, it is a pretty versatile tool that you can use for small-scale woodworking projects.
The W1674 wood shaper comes with an electric motor that has an output of two HP. Yeah, I know that it might seem a little less, but hey - this is not exactly a professional grade shaper, is it? In fact, after giving it a go, I can safely say that the motor is more than sufficient for most DIY needs.
This machine has a small footprint of 18.5 inches by 18.5 inches, meaning that you can easily store it in your garage, basement, or any other work area. Do not be fooled by its size, though, for it can shape wood just like any other option. This is all thanks to the motor, which can rotate the spindles at speeds of 7,000 and 10,000 RPM.
It also includes a convenient dust port of 3 inches, along with a forward/reverse switch. The table surface is made from cast iron, and the stand has been painted with powder coating to prevent rust and corrosion. On the flip side, the table generates quite a bit of noise and vibration when in use, which is the only complaint I have with it.
Motor Power: 2 HP | Spindle Size: 0.5", 0.75" | Spindle/Variable Speed: 7,000 and 10000 RPM | Spindle Travel: 3" | Table Size: 24" x 21" | Table Material: Cast iron | Fence Quality: N/A | Fence Adjustability: Micro-adjustable split fence system | Dust Collection: Dust port built into fence
Which wood shaper offers the best features for your woodworking needs?
Enhance your home improvement endeavors with a selection of wood shapers, each boasting unique attributes such as motor power, spindle size, speed control, table material, fence adjustability, and dust collection capabilities. Explore how these features can elevate your woodworking projects.
After going through my list of the best wood shapers, have you decided on which one you want yet? Yeah, I wish it were that simple to decide, but it’s not.
Given the complexity of this tool, there are a lot of factors that you need to consider before purchasing. After all, you wouldn’t want to waste your hard-earned money on the wrong product, would you?
That’s why I have made this brief buyer’s guide that discusses some of the most important aspects that you should keep in mind. Read on!
1. Motor power
Possibly the most important factor to consider when buying a wood shaper is the motor power. Most wood shapers nowadays use electric motors, and the output is measured in horsepower or HP.
Naturally, the higher the HP, the more powerful the motor is. With that being said, not every woodworker requires a powerful wood shaper with a high horsepower output. Most individual woodworkers will find motor outputs between one and three HP sufficient for their needs.
If you work in an industrial setting or have to deal with heavier workloads, then you can consider getting a powerful machine of three HP or more. Or better yet, you can use a commercial-grade wood CNC machine, which offers even more power and versatility.
2. Table
All wood shaping and cutting tools come with a working surface on top, which is known as the table. This table is where you cut and shape the wood, which makes it an important component of the machine. Thus, you will need to check out this aspect before purchasing the wood shaper.
You will need to check both the size of the table surface and its durability. The former attribute helps you to make sure that you have sufficient space for undertaking different wood shaping and trimming tasks. On the other hand, the latter aspect ensures that the table surface can withstand extensive usage without significant wear.
Obviously, a larger table surface will be better since it can hold large lumber pieces easily. But for small-scale woodworking projects, you can make do with smaller tables. Likewise, table surfaces made from strong materials like cast iron or alloy steel are fairly durable.
3. Spindle
The spindle is another crucial component in a wood shaper. As a matter of fact, this is the primary workpiece that helps in shaping the wood. In other words, it performs a similar function as a drill bit in a wood router, or the blade in a table saw. That is why a wood shaper is otherwise known as a spindle shaper.
This also means that you need to consider this aspect carefully before purchasing a shaper. More specifically, you will need to look into two primary areas - the specifications and the customization options of the spindle.
By specifications, I am referring to the size of the spindle. In most cases, wood shapers come with multiple spindles of different sizes, where each spindle is suited for a specific type of woodworking task.
That eventually brings me to the aspect of spindle customization. If your spindle comes with multiple size options, it means that the machine is highly customizable, which improves its versatility. In that context, you should check for other customization features, such as the speed and directions of spindle rotation, as well as its height.
4. Fence
The shaper fence is designed to guide the wood stock so that you can get an even finish throughout the surface. It usually works in conjunction with a power feeder that feeds the wood stock to the router table.
If you want the best results, you will need to make sure that the fence is adjustable and durable. An adjustable fence will help you to get a precise cut, while a durable fence will prevent the fence from wearing out with extensive usage. Most brands today use an aluminum or cast iron fence since they offer good durability.
Did you find the information in this guide helpful so far? Then be sure to check out my guide of the best trim routers available today, which will help you find the woodworking trimmer for your needs.
What is the difference between a wood shaper and a wood router?
The difference between a wood shaper and a wood router lies in their motor power, rotation speed, and focus on accuracy versus power. A shaper has a more potent motor but its cutters or spindles rotate at a slower speed than router bits. Shapers tend to prioritize power over accuracy while routers, on the other hand, concentrate more on precision even with less motor power.
What are the safety precautions when using a shaper?
There are several safety precautions to observe when using a shaper due to its dangerous nature. Protective gear is crucial, including gloves, full-sleeve shirts, goggles to shield your eyes from dust, and a mask or respirator to prevent fine sawdust inhalation. Adherence to all recommended safety guidelines is essential when handling a shaper.
How long do wood shapers last?
Wood shapers generally last for a minimum of five years, as indicated by the common five-year warranty offered by various manufacturers. That being said, the lifespan can be significantly influenced by usage patterns and maintenance practices. With conscientious use and regular maintenance, the longevity of these machines can be substantially extended.
What are some good convenience features to look for in a wood shaper?
Some good convenience features to look for in a wood shaper include an efficient dust management system and a reliable spindle locking mechanism. An effective dust port can reduce post-task cleanup, and a positive detent spindle lock can ensure stability, yielding cleaner and more precise results.
That brings me to the end of this detailed review-based guide on woodworking shapers. So, I hope that your mind has been made up by now. Before I wrap it up, I would like to mention my top picks from the list:
The Grizzly Industrial G1026 is my favorite option overall, thanks to its sturdy build quality, well-rounded versatility, and power. And it comes at a relatively affordable price, which is another advantage. But if you want an option with a better working surface, you can get the Shop Fox W1702, which comes with a well-designed table. And if you want a wood shaper with even more versatility and multiple rotational speeds, then the Jet JWS-35X5-1 should be your pick.
A router is one of the most useful woodworking machines that you can get. Many different types of routers exist, but the trim router is one of the most common router types. It is used for trimming wood surfaces and cutting through laminate materials. You can improve the utility of such a router with a jig, which is a type of woodworking template for different kinds of tasks.
But first, you’ll need to pick the best router jig, which can be a bit challenging. That’s why I have made this guide reviewing some of the best options available today.
Listed below are the best trim router jigs for home woodworking projects:
Jasper 290 router jig: The Jasper 290 stands out for its versatility, accommodating various routers and offering precise circle cutting in 268 sizes (1-1/2” to 18-3/16”). Though effective, its higher cost is worth considering.
BTMIEY circle cutting jig: The BTMIEY jig, recognized for its simplicity, offers an easy setup with three variants tailored to specific uses. Crafted from durable bakelite, it provides a reliable cutting diameter of 20 mm to 690 mm.
Broyeur jig router templates: The Broyeur templates, blending affordability and durability, are crafted for cutting radii on wood boards. Constructed from robust aluminum alloy, it features four radii options (10 mm to 30 mm). While not the most versatile, it excels in creating rounded corners on furniture.
1. Jasper 290 router jig - Best versatile trim router jig
What We Like
Highly versatile
Compatible with a variety of routers
Durable build quality
Easy to use
What We Don't Like
Not very budget-friendly
The Jasper 290 is possibly one of the best trim router jigs that you can get. It can help you cut perfect circles on the workpiece in a wide range of sizes.
To be more precise, this trim router accessory comes with a large number of cutting holes that allow you to cut circles in 268 different sizes. The radii of these circles range from 1-1/2” to 18-3/16”, thereby making it a highly versatile tool.
It can be used with a wide range of routers, which further enhances its versatility. What’s more, as I tested it, I found it incredibly easy to use as well. Additionally, the jig is made from premium-quality, hardened acrylic materials, which makes it quite durable.
However, I noticed that this particular option comes with a fairly high price tag compared to other trim router jigs. This can make it a bit difficult to purchase, especially if your budget is low.
Material: Acrylic | Cutting Range: 25 mm to 460 mm | Weight: 11.3 oz.
2. BTMIEY circle cutting jig - Best ease of use
What We Like
Easy to set up and use
It comes in three different variants
Built to last
Good cutting diameter range
What We Don't Like
Compatible with only a few router models
For this review, I have selected the circle cutting jig by BTMIEY. This option has a simple design, which makes it very easy to set up on your trim router. And once you have completed the setup, you can use it for cutting circles and performing other similar woodworking tasks.
I noticed that it comes in three different variants, with each having specific use and compatibility options. Based on my personal trials, I would say that the first type is great for general drilling activities on plywood and hardwood.
The other two have pre-drilled holes for specific trim router models. While it makes the tool easy to use, it does hamper its versatility to a great extent. That’s because you won’t be able to fit the jig into any router except the compatible ones.
This jig is made out of hardened bakelite, which is quite durable. Also, you get a cutting diameter that ranges between 20 mm and 690 mm, which is well-suited for most tasks.
Material: Aluminum | Cutting Range: 20 mm to 690 mm | Weight: 24.32 oz.
3. Broyeur jig router templates - Best durability
What We Like
Affordably priced
Easy to use
Highly durable
Available in different radii
What We Don't Like
Not very versatile
Next, I reviewed the Broyeur jig router templates, which can be used for cutting perfect radii on wood boards. My hands-on review showed that it is very easy to use - just place the jig at the corner of the workpiece and drill through the surface with your router. As such, it is particularly great for making rounded corners on tables and other furniture.
This router jig is made from highly durable aluminum alloy, which keeps it protected from scratches and damage. Likewise, the surface has been treated by anodic oxidation, thereby making it rustproof and dust-resistant.
Compared to other types of router jigs, this option is very affordable, which makes it a worthy investment. The packaging includes two router templates that have four different radii - 10 mm, 15 mm, 20 mm, and 30 mm.
However, the router templates are not very versatile since they can only be used for cutting circular corners and a few other woodworking tasks.
Material: Wood, aluminum | Cutting Range: 10 mm to 30 mm | Weight: 10.2 oz.
What makes a trim router jig the best choice in terms of material, cutting range, and weight?
Explore the key features of top trim router jigs, vital tools for DIY woodworking enthusiasts. These jigs vary in material, cutting range (in millimeters, mm), and weight (in ounces, oz.), making them valuable assets for various home improvement projects.
In this section, I have discussed some key factors that you need to keep in mind when choosing a woodworking jig for your trim router. Read on!
1. Intended usage
The most important aspect that needs to be considered is the intended usage of the jig. That’s because these woodworking tools are usually designed to perform a specific set of tasks. In other words, you will need a specific kind of router jig for a given task. Therefore, if you perform different types of woodworking activities, you will need separate jigs for each task unless otherwise specified by the manufacturer.
For instance, if you wish to create a dovetail joint, you will need a dovetail jig. Likewise, if you want to create a dado or a mortise and tenon joint, you will need an appropriate tool for those tasks as well.
2. Ease of use
One of the primary purposes of a router jig is to reduce the complexity of a woodworking task and make it easier by providing a suitable working template. That’s why the jig needs to be easy to use, or else the entire point of the tool will be defeated.
You need to ensure that the jig can be easily set up and attached to the main router machine. Similarly, it should come with all the necessary usage details and instructions, along with spare components, such as the screw, router bits, drill bit, clamp, attachment pins, and so on.
3. Durability
Another important factor that you need to keep in mind is durability, which is determined by the materials used for making it. Most routers are used on different types of surfaces, such as hardwood, plywood, medium-density fibreboard, and even metal in some cases.
If the jig is made from low-quality materials, it won’t be able to withstand these loads, thereby becoming damaged or worn out. Therefore, you need to ensure that the jig is made from high-quality, sturdy materials like steel, aluminum, and so on.
4. Compatibility
There are different types of routers available today, which is why you will need to determine the compatibility of the tool before purchasing.
For instance, a trim router is not the same as a regular router, which means that the jigs for these two routers will be different as well. Similarly, some jigs are compatible with certain brands of routers and incompatible with others. So, you’ll need to check this aspect before spending your hard-earned money.
What types of woodworking tasks can be done with jigs?
The types of woodworking tasks that can be done with jigs encompass a wide variety. They can be used for machining lumber, drilling holes, creating patterns, and establishing joineries such as dadoes, dovetails, and mortise joints. Please note that if a jig is specifically designed for a certain task, it should be used exclusively for that, unless otherwise specified.
Do I need to use a router table with a jig?
Whether or not you need a router table with a jig largely depends on the specific woodworking task you're undertaking. For some tasks, such as making joineries like dadoes, dovetails, or mortise joints, a router table may enhance precision and control, especially when used with a jig. Certain tasks or jig types may not necessitate one.
Is it safe to use a trim router jig?
Yes, it is safe to use a jig with a trim router tool. A typical router jig won’t cause any additional damage or wear to the trim router. Some routers are designed to have the opposite effect, where they can protect the blade and drill bits against damage.
Similarly, a router jig won’t cause any injuries or harm to you either. Of course, you will need to follow the necessary safety precautions before starting the task.
What are the biggest benefits of using jigs?
The biggest benefits of using router jigs are their accuracy and simplicity. Woodworking tasks can be fairly complex, and if you do not have good accuracy, the end product might not be what you expect. Luckily, a jig helps to reduce this complexity to a great extent, which consequently improves the accuracy of the router.
So, those are the top three trim router jigs you can purchase. My personal favorite is the Jasper 290 router jig, as it offers great versatility for creating perfect circles on wooden workpieces and is compatible with a wide range of routers. Be sure to check out the buyer's guide and FAQs for valuable information to aid in your purchase decision.
Electric hand planer jigs are tools that make it easy to use electric planers by ensuring consistency and precision in the planing process. The most common types of planer jigs include standard planing jigs, tapering jigs, beveling jigs, thickness planing jigs, and rabbet jigs.
An electric hand planer is a must-have tool that allows you to plane wooden surfaces by shaving off small amounts of the material. It generally has two or three blades and can remove up to ⅛” of wood when used in a single pass. The main difference between manual hand planers and electric hand planes is that the latter have blades that operate at high speed with the help of a powerful motor. Electric hand planers also tend to be more versatile and easier to use, especially if you have no experience with woodworking tools. They are generally used with jigs, which reduce the effort involved in the woodworking process while ensuring accuracy.
A jig can be defined as a woodworking accessory that attaches to a planer and guides it along a specific path. Since the effort involved is reduced, the user does not experience as much fatigue as when using a planer directly. Using a hand planer jig means your hands and fingers are away from the cutting edges, which ensures greater safety. Depth control mechanisms or adjustable stops are also often present on jigs and can be used to control the depth of cut. Finally, there are clamps that allow securing the workpiece to the jig so that it does not move or shift during the planing process.
A hand planer jig provides a stable platform on which the planer can rest or connect to. Depending on the type of jig you use, the manner in which it connects to the planer can vary, as indicated by our tests. It may have a secure platform where the hand planer can be inserted and locked into place with clamps. Alternatively, it may have tracks or guide rails that align with the hand planer.
1. Electric hand planer planing jig
Hand planer jigs, often called planing jigs or hand plane jigs, are tools in the woodworking industry that make it easy to use hand planers. They help guide the hand planer across the surface along a specific path to remove the material uniformly, both on smaller and bigger projects.
A standard electric hand planer planing jig is designed to help you achieve straight and even planing results. It is the most common type of planing jig and can be used for different purposes, such as creating straight edges on lumber, leveling uneven boards, and smoothing surfaces.
Before you can use an electric hand power planer, it is crucial to follow certain safety precautions. This involves putting on safety gear, including safety goggles, a dust mask, and ear protection. These can help protect you from wood chips, dust, and noise while using the planer.
The wooden piece you are working on must be placed on a flat surface, such as a workbench. Ensure that it is stable and will not move during the planing process. Clamps can be used to secure it and are usually required for irregularly shaped or larger workpieces.
Connect the electric hand planer to the jig, which may have clamps, brackets, or other features for connecting to the planer. Once you’ve properly inserted your electric planer inside the jig, it should be positioned over the wooden surface that has to be shaped.
To start shaping the wood, turn on the electric planer and place it on top of the lumber. Push it forward slowly so that the blade can precisely remove the required amount of material. Ensure the pressure is even and consistent while moving the planer across the surface.
2. Tapering jig
A tapering jig is different from a regular planing jig and is most suitable for creating tapered cuts. It is used when one end of a cut has to be kept narrower than the other.
As such, tapering jigs are used for chair legs, table legs, or other old furniture pieces with tapering components. This type of jig ensures tapers are highly precise and uniform, which is impossible with freehand procedures.
Like when using a planing jig, it is advisable to wear proper safety clothing when using a tapering jig. You first need to decide on the length and degree of the taper to be created. This is important as the manner in which the tapering jig will be set up and positioned will depend on this.
Select the taper length and angle before positioning the tapering jig accordingly. Tapering jigs generally have markings or a scale that can make aligning it with the surface easy and are often used with a table saw. They have to be secured to the rip fence of the table saw.
The wooden board you will be working on has to be placed on the platform of the tapering jig. Make sure that it does not wobble and is supported properly. This may require the use of clamps or other fixtures. The workpiece should be aligned with the fence or guide of the tapering jig.
And the end of the lumber that needs to be tapered has to be positioned close to the narrow end of the tapering jig. The wider end of the piece aligns with the wider section of the jig, and the height of the saw blade should be adjusted according to the depth of the taper. Finally, turn on the jig to start shaping the wood.
3. Chamfering or beveling jig
The chamfering or beveling jig is commonly used to create consistent and precise bevels of chamfers on the corners of the workpiece edges. Bevels and chamfers are angled cuts created by removing material from the edges. They can either be used for functional or decorative purposes.
Generally, chamfers or bevels are created using hand power planers to soften sharp edges, providing the workpiece with joinery features or adding aesthetic details. Such jigs have a base on which you can rest the wooden board and a guide fence against which the board is rested and positioned.
They also have adjustable angle mechanisms, which are used to set the required bevel or chamfer angle, and a clamp to secure the workpiece while cutting. Some beveling jigs have a depth adjustment mechanism that allows controlling the depth of the bevel or chamfer cut.
To use a beveling jig, you first need to determine the angle at which the bevel or chamfer has to be created and adjust the angle mechanism accordingly. Then, place the workpiece on the base of the jig while aligning it with the fence. The portion to be cut should extend beyond the jig edge.
If present, the depth adjustment mechanism can be used to control the amount of material to be removed. To secure the wooden piece, hold the clamp before turning on the electric planer and pushing it along the edge of the workpiece. Multiple passes may be required to get the right bevel or chamfer depth.
4. Thickness planing jig
A thickness planing jig is used with thickness planers to achieve a consistent level of thickness when planing wood surfaces. It is most useful when thicknessing or planing irregularly shaped wooden pieces or rough lumber. Like other types of jigs used with manual planers or electric planers, a thickness planing jig has a base.
This is the platform on which you place the workpiece while working on it. It also has brackets and blocks on the underside that elevate the wooden board slightly above the base. This allows the cutting head or blade of the planer to remove the material uniformly and evenly. Clamps and other mechanisms are also usually present to secure the workpiece to the base and prevent it from moving.
Using the thickness planer jig is not very different from using jigs commonly used with cordless hand planers or bench planers. First, you need to place the jig on a flat surface, such as a workbench, ensuring it does not move. Then, you need to adjust the height of the supports on the underside of the jig depending on the thickness of the piece and the amount of material to be removed.
The workpiece has to be placed on the base of the jig while ensuring that it is in contact with the supports to ensure consistency regarding the thickness level. It should be aligned in the direction you intend to use the planer. In this case also, the segment to be planed should extend beyond the edge of the jig.
Secure the workpiece using the clamps, and adjust the thickness planer as per the required thickness. Turn on the planer and feed the workpiece and the jig through the tool. After each pass, inspect the material until it achieves the desired level of thickness.
5. Rabbet or cut-out jig
A cut-out or rabbet jig, also known as a router rabbet jig, is used to create consistent and precise rabbet cuts. These are open-sided or recessed channels used for fitting or joining purposes, including inset panels, creating strong joints, or using other materials like glass in woodworking projects.
Because of this, this type of jig is generally used with routers, which are heavy-duty power tools used for woodworking, rather than planers be it molding planers, joinery planers, or block planers. A rabbet or cut-out jig has a base where the workpiece can be placed and guide rails that help the planer make straight and precise cuts.
Adjustable stops are also present in this jig, which help control the depth and width of the rabbet cut and clamps help securing the workpiece to the jig. Different types of rabbet jigs are available, so putting enough time and effort into selecting the right jig is crucial.
The wooden block should be of the right shape and size for making the rabbet cut and it should be clean and flat to get accurate results. Then, the rabbet jig has to be placed on a flat surface before using the adjustable stops to set the desired depth and width of the cut-out. When placing the workpiece on the jig base, ensure it aligns with these stops.
Use the clamps to secure it to the base so it does not move during the process, and then install the right router for the cut-out to be created. You can adjust the depth setting of the router as needed to get the desired cutting depth. Finally, turn on the power tool and pass over the surface as many times as needed to get the rabbet.
How to adjust an electric planer?
Adjusting an electric planer is vital to achieve the desired thickness of the material to be removed and to ensure precision and smoothness during the planing process.
The best electric hand planers generally have adjustment mechanisms that allow you to control the cutting depth of the blade, to get the desired level of thickness. That said, safety is of utmost importance when making any adjustments to power tools. As such, it is strongly recommended to disconnect the planer from the power source before you make any adjustments.
A dial or front knob is usually present on electric planers that allows altering the cutting depth. The condition of the blades is another factor that affects the performance of the planer. Undamaged and sharp blades can make the shaping and cutting process faster, cleaner, and more efficient. Some planers may have an adjustable sole plate or shoe for beveling or chamfering.
Fences or edge guides are also common on electric planers and help ensure a straight edge and control the width of the cut. Besides these, there may be additional features that further simplify the ease of use of electric planers. This can include a dust extraction port, and drawing from experience, we can say that great care should be taken to ensure it remains free of obstructions at all times.
Depending on the make, model, and type of the planer, it may be possible to switch the sides from which shavings are removed during the planing process. You can even use a vacuum hose or attach a dust bag to collect and remove the debris.
Tip
Before using a planer on the work surface, make sure to test the settings and always plane in the direction of the wood grain.
Even with top-notch modern electric hand planers, achieving smoothness, flatness, and straightness in woodwork can be challenging. Electric hand planer jigs simplify the process by providing stability and guidance, reducing fatigue during prolonged use.
The best jigs offer features like adjustable stops, dust collection ports, and a built-in kickstand for safety, efficiency, and a better user experience. Choosing the right electric planer jig is crucial, as it depends on the project, wood type, and size, among other factors, to achieve optimal results.
Electric hand planers may leave lines because of blade defects, poor alignment, or a blocked blade. These can be resolved by sharpening or replacing the blade, adjusting its position, and cleaning it regularly.
An electric hand planer can be a great tool to shave off small amounts of wood for fine sculpting or final smoothing purposes.
This tool can be versatile when used for shaping doors, cutting grooves, chamfering edges, and more. Based on my observations, the hand planer may showcase issues like leaving lines on the wood, thereby leaving an unsightly mark on the woodwork.
Let’s look at the reasons why this happens, as well as ways to prevent and fix it for a better finish on your wood projects.
In principle, an electric hand planer operates in the same way as a manual one. The purpose of this tool is to flatten the edges and corners of wood while smoothing out irregularities through force. And both kinds of tools feature a thin steel blade to perform the task.
An electric hand planer features a rotating blade that can cut off more material quicker than a manual model. This blade sits between two metal plates that can be adjusted to move up and down, which dictates how much wood the blade will cut off. The depth of the cuts that this blade makes is usually limited to a little less than a tenth of an inch.
Typically, the RPM of the rotating blade sits between 10,000 and 20,000, which makes its cut edges smooth.
Due to its precise nature, an electric hand planer can be used in the refinement stages of any woodwork project. Here is a brief list of the projects it can be used on:
Reshaping swollen doors to fit the door frame better
Straightening the framing of the house by cutting some wood off studs, joists or rafters
Giving a project a hand-scraped look by removing the oxidized top layer
Campher edges by keeping the tool at a stable angle
Cutting rebates into doors, cabinets, or other smaller pieces of furniture
The reasons for electric hand planer leaving lines
When working with an electric hand planer, it’s only natural to expect clean results during usage. Any small perfections can be sanded off, should they be minor and few. But that may not always be the case, particularly if your device or its blades are a little older.
There are three primary reasons why your electric hand planer might be leaving lines. Let’s explore each to see how they affect the performance of the hand planer.
1. Dull blades
Like most woodworking tools, if the blades of an electric hand planer become too dull, the device won’t function properly. You will be left with jagged cuts or unsightly lines, which is far from the desirable outcome.
Consider checking your blades to see if they have a sharp and straight edge. Dull blades appear smooth and somewhat rounded, which will necessitate the usage of a sharpening stone.
To sharpen your dull hand planer blade, place the stone against it and swipe it against the blade several times. You will see the blade slowly reach the appropriate levels of sharpness as you continue to move it against the stone.
Tip
Try to ensure that you maintain an equal amount of pressure on the stone while sharpening the blades. This will make sure that the blade is evenly sharp across its circumference.
2. Poorly adjusted blade
An incorrectly adjusted blade can spell trouble for your wood projects that stretch beyond just lines. It can result in an uneven finish or, in severe cases, messy ridges and gouges on the wooden surface.
This can be fixed rather quickly through a blade adjustment technique. The key is to understand the angle at which your planer cuts and make adjustments accordingly.
Start by ensuring that the blades of your planer are aligned properly by using a feeler gauge. Next, use the planer model-specific wrench or screwdriver to adjust the planerblades one at a time. You must be careful while doing so, as any errors can affect the balance of the tool, necessitating even more work on blade adjustment.
Finish by checking the alignment with the feeler gauge and seeing whether the blades have aligned properly or not.
3. Blocked or damaged blade
The blades of electric hand planersbeing blocked is an issue that will present itself every once in a while. Should the blade of your hand planer end up being blocked, it can end up overworking or burning the motor out.
While working, this may be observed as your planer ends up creating lines in the woodwork because of the inconsistent blade rotation. This can be resolved fairly easily by clearing out the clogs and repositioning the blade appropriately.
Prevent electric hand planer from leaving lines
Fortunately, you can prevent your electric hand planer from leaving lines quite easily through a few preventive measures. These measures only require vigilance on the user’s part, so prevention is a simple matter of checking the tool every once in a while.
Here are the ways you can prevent the planer from creating lines on your wood surface.
1. Check the planer blade regularly
If you spot any blade-related issues before they cause major trouble, you can fix them before they occur at all. For dull blades, you may sharpen them before ever needing to replace them. And to prevent the blade from being misaligned, check its alignment before and after you use the tool.
2. Adjust blade depth properly
Much like the blade-related issues, preventing the planer from cutting too deeply or not deeply enough can be fixed by checking the tool beforehand.
Simply rotate the adjustable knob to raise or lower the cutting depth. While the depth range may vary from one model to the next, it typically ranges between 0 and 3 mm.
A low cutting depth means your wood project will receive a smoother finish.
3. Keep the blade clean and free of debris
Keeping the blade clean and free of debris can stop it from clogging up, so be sure to clean the blade periodically.
To do so, you must turn the power off first and unplug the tool. Use a small brush to remove the debris clogging the blade from within the guard fence and around the blades and feed rollers. Try to make sure you’ve removed all the debris before using the tool again.
Tip
Consider using compressed air to force any large debris out of the tool if you face issues with a brush.
Removing the lines left by an electric hand planer
Fortunately, hand planer defects like lines are fairly straightforward to fix. There is a simple solution to each type of machining defect through the use of other manual and power tools.
Here’s how you can remove the lines left behind after performing a hand plane with the tool.
1. Using an orbital sander or a belt sander
The easiest way of removing fine lines on your woodwork is to sand it down. While you can work manually using sandpaper, a random orbit sander or a belt sander is quicker and does a better job.
These machines are easy to find and are affordable to boot, which can make them a mainstay in your woodworking toolkit. Simply attach the belt sander to a power drill and move it over the wooden surface in slow circular motions. Within a few minutes, you’ll begin to see the beginning stages of a smooth finish.
Be sure to use very little force as you move the belt sander to scrub plane marks.
2. Using a jointer
If you have it in your toolkit, a jointer can smoothen the hand plane marks left behind by the tool quite well. Jointers are also electrically-powered but are faster and require less effort to make a cut.
The blade in a jointer can closely shave the wooden surface smooth, effectively flattening and eliminating the lines made by the planer. You can also use it to create a beveled or straight edge and chamfering over a planer, if you need to.
That said, it’s worth noting that the control over jointer plane thickness is not as precise as that of a thickness planer. If you’re not careful, you may be left with a bigger machining defect than a simple line.
3. Adjusting the blade depth
When using an electric hand planer, it’s imperative to be careful with the cut depth. You can always make multiple passes over the wood surface to remove more, after all.
If your planer has left lines in the woodwork, you can readjust the blade depth to even the surface out. Checking it after making one pass can help you keep the surface consistently smooth. Additionally, you can ensure that the blade sits in the middle of the floor plate and isn’t angled.
You can also use a different type of planer, like a table-top power planer, if you need such tools frequently. These machines ensure that wood surfaces remain smooth and accurate, requiring very little effort on your part.
What are the machining defects that can be left by an electric hand planer?
The machining defects that can be left by an electric hand planer include lines, ripples, grains, or snipes which can put a damper on your woodworking spirit. Fortunately, similar to lines, they are easy to remove.
A snipe occurs when the ends of a piece of wood are cut thinner than the rest of the flat board. It can happen if the lumber isn’t secured well enough on the planer jig. To solve this, you can use multiple rollers to secure wider boards, after which you can start using the planer.
Sometimes, you may find that a piece of wood has developed ripples instead of being smooth. This can happen due to the planer blade being defective or misaligned, which can be solved using the methods listed earlier.
Lastly, the lumber may be riddled with grains instead, which can happen with woods with a large difference in density within individual annual growth rings. You can see it happening if the planer blade pushes the hard latewood into the soft earlywood instead of slashing through the wood fibers. This can be fixed through sanding or by making smaller cuts with sharp knives.
How much should a planer blade be sharpened?
A planer blade should be sharpened to about 600 grit, which strikes a balance between sharpness and durability. Any sharper, and the blade will grow dull within a few uses. And any less sharp, and the blade will not be sharp enough to perform a lighter cut through rough lumber.
Is a manual hand planer better than an electric hand planer?
A manual hand planer is not generally considered better than an electric hand planer as it has a smaller working area and can be prone to producing more defects. Thus, hand planing with a manual planer is not preferable over an electric one with the results in mind.
Like most tools, electric hand planers have the potential to leave a few defects on your working surface. Defects like lines, grains, and ripples can occur, but they can be solved just as easily too.
Removing the possibility of a power planer leaving lines is a matter of taking care of the device and being mindful of the working surface. Often, the issues that may crop up can be resolved by sharpening or changing blades, adjusting the blade depth, or declogging the blade.
It’s best to approach any defects left by the hand planer with a calm mind and the right tool set. After all, they’re rarely complex and require very little effort to be eliminated entirely.
Adjusting an electric planer can be done in a few simple steps that involve checking and adjusting the positions of the blade. Through regular cleaning and maintenance, the planar can become a precise and reliable woodworking tool.
When smoothing a wooden surface with an electric planer, it’s important to keep the blades set correctly.
The blade alignment, cutting depth, and blade depth have a significant impact on the quality of your project. Adjusting them is the key to achieving a clean and seamless finish.
Here’s a complete guide on adjusting an electric hand planerto keep your woodwork smooth and prevent the planer blades from wearing out.
A poorly aligned electric hand planer can lead to a host of issues with your woodwork that can set your work back significantly. While these issues are solvable, it’s better not to encounter them entirely. After all, fixing any defects in your woodwork is a time sink of its own.
If the blades of your electric planer are not aligned properly, you can encounter the following issues:
Poor finish quality
Snipes
Uneven cuts
Reduced blade lifespan
Unwanted gouges and ridges
A properly aligned blade will not run into such issues, giving you the desired result with minimal effort. An efficient tool is what precise woodwork needs, and a well-adjusted electric planer can fulfill the role well.
8 Easy steps to adjust electric planer
Step 1: Put on protective gear
Even if you consider blade adjustment the safest possible thing, it’s still better to be cautious. Planer blades can be fragile, and they can snap off under pressure, which can lead to unfortunate injuries. Accidents do happen while in the workshop, so it’s always best to put on some protective clothing as you work.
At the very least, you should put on safety glasses and earplugs to protect your eyes and ears while working with an electric planer.
Step 2: Unplug the planer
Let’s start the adjustment process by unplugging the device from the power socket to ensure there are no electricity-related accidents as you adjust the blade. After all, an electric shock or the blades turning on while working is far from an ideal circumstance.
Once you pull the plug from the power socket, you can safely begin the blade adjustment process.
Step 3: Check and adjust the blade depth
Before proceeding to blade adjustment, you should check the length that requires adjustment. You can do this by checking if the blades are below the rear parking shoe and if they need to come out even further.
Use the blade depth knob to check its length. As you move the front knob to its highest blade depth setting, look how far the blade comes out. If the blades don’t come out at all or only protrude slightly, they need to be adjusted further until they are at the correct setting.
You can also check the condition of the blade during this step, as it forms an important part of smoothening a piece of lumber. Dull blades lead to wood surfaces being full of defects like rough grains and ripples as they tear through wood fiber instead of slicing through.
Step 4: Prepare the working surface
The working surface of the planer helps you set the blade depth properly, be it a table or a working station. Set the blades slightly above the rear of the planer, which is where the out-feed table is usually positioned. Ensure that the blades are parallel and at the same height as the working station or planer jig.
If the blades are too low or too high, they can cause the planer to gouge more wood out of a lumber plank.
Step 5: Clean and dust the blades
Next, clean the blades and the area around them using a brush or compressed air. This can help remove any chips and debris that may be present around the blades, taking care of the clogged blades problem in the process.
Additionally, clearing the area around the blade holders before you begin working can help reduce the likelihood of the planer jamming.
Step 6: Align the blades
A well-aligned planer is crucial to its success, as it can outright prevent issues like lines or unsightly marks from occurring altogether. This can be done by understanding how your planer cuts and the angle it works.
You will need a feeler gauge to align the blades properly. Use a wrench or screwdriver that works with your planer and use it to adjust the planer blades one by one. Take care not to misalign them, as even minute inaccuracies can lead to the tool becoming unbalanced.
Use the feeler gauge again to see if the planer blades have aligned well or not.
Step 7: Adjust the blades
After aligning the blades, use the tool-specific screwdriver to undo the screws in the blade holders. You’ll need to turn the screws anticlockwise to the point where they come in contact with the end of the notches.
You can loosen or tighten the plates that clamp the blade holders in place to adjust the blade space. Be careful while doing so, as a poorly adjusted plate can make working with the planer difficult. Once you’re done, use the screwdriver to fit the gauge plate back in place with the screws.
Next, use a pencil and a ruler to set the blade correctly. Reset the planer blade depth to 1 mm and set the ruler to zero, after which you can mark the distance needed for precise cuts. Try to ensure that you don’t end up with the same length measurement on all edges.
Step 8: Test the planer
Once everything’s been fitted back into place, it’s time to test the electric planer. Plug the machine into the power socket, feed the machine a plank of wood, and power it on.
For each pass that you make over the timber, check for any defects or unusual deformities left behind. If you spot a groove, snipe, line, or grains, you may need to repeat the steps listed above to fix the issue.
After all the adjustments are made, your electric planer is ready to be used again.
Electric planer maintenance
No matter how frequently you use an electric planer, you will need to maintain it periodically. Even when not in use, the device can lose its effectiveness over time because of aging.
Periodic maintenance can add years to the life of a power tool, making it more efficient and saving you money in the process. And while the nitty-gritty of electric planer maintenance may vary from one model or planer typeto the next, the overall maintenance steps remain the same.
Here are a few tips you may use to maintain and extend the life of your power planer.
1. Store in a safe place
While storing a power planer, you must ensure that it receives no undue damage when not in use. If possible, try not to store it in a high place or on a thin shelf to minimize the risk of injury.
Additionally, ensure that the tool doesn’t come in contact with moisture at all. Not only can it cause the planer to rust over time, but it can also make it fragile and unfit for use. So, picking the right place to store is the only way to prevent the wood planer machine from rusting.
2. Lubricate well
Friction is an issue that can lead to several undesirable outcomes when working with an electric hand planer. Too much friction can produce a lot of heat, which can damage the planer blades, blade holders, motors, cables, and electrical systems. Additionally, the more friction the blades encounter, the more power the tool consumes.
So, it’s important to lubricate the hand planer well before using it. While it’s not strictly necessary to lubricate the tool each time before use, it’s still a good practice to do so. This is particularly the case if you use the power planer frequently.
3. Sharpen the blades
A good way to prevent rough cuts is to check the sharpness of the cutting edge before using the planer. Dull blades can be spotted easily with their rounded corners and smooth appearance.
You can sharpen your planer blades by using a sharpening stone. Simply swipe the stone against the straight edge several times until you see the cutting edge reaching the appropriate sharpness level.
Tip
Make sure that the pressure you apply with the stone remains consistent with each swipe on both sides. Such a way of applying pressure will allow the planer to perform as if it were fitted with new blades.
4. Replace planer parts
At some point, your planer parts will require replacement, which may include motor parts and blades. For this, you will need to find spare parts compatible with the model, as incompatible parts will either not fit well or work poorly.
Try to ensure that the planer parts you choose are the ones recommended by the manufacturer. This will help the device function as close to its previous performance after the replacement.
You can purchase electric planer spare parts directly from the manufacturer’s website or offline and online hardware stores.
Tip
If you’re replacing a crucial component like the motor, it’s best to leave its installation to a specialist. A specialist can ensure that your device doesn’t run into unexpected problems through proper installation techniques.
Are there any safety tips related to electric planer operation?
Here are several tips related to electric planer operation:
You must wear safety glasses and hearing protection
Do not wear rings, ties, watches, loose clothing, gloves, and jewelry
When the stock is fed into the planer, refrain from raising or lowering the table
Run dirt and dust collection using the planer after operation
Keep your fingers at least four inches away from the in-feed area
Perform cuts at a slow and steady speed
Don’t use the planer on lumber that is less than 0.25 inches thick
The lumber should be at least 10 inches long to be planed
Clean the workpiece before using the planer on it
Follow the wood grain when you hand plane a wood surface
Check for loose knots, splits, chips, and wooden defects in the lumber
Remove metallic elements from the lumber before planing
You can find other safety tips that can help your working space be as free of accidents as possible on the manufacturer’s instructions. These are model-specific tips that can help you cut lumber without risking injuries.
What is the cutting angle of an electric planer?
The cutting angle of an electric planer commonly lies between 45 to 60 degrees, although this can vary depending on the make and model of the tool. This angle is the orientation of the cutting blade relative to the workpiece.
A lower angle is preferable for softwoods while a higher angle performs better with hardwoods. Check the user manual for precise specifications for your particular model.
How can I avoid uneven cuts or cracks while using a planer machine?
You can avoid uneven cuts or cracks while using a planer machine by considering a few factors. Firstly, adjusting the cutting depth to a lower setting is recommended for most surfaces, especially for achieving a smooth finish.
Secondly, be mindful of the pressure applied against the wood and ensure it is low and applied towards the front of the plane, while also moving in the direction of the wood grain.
Lastly, regularly check the condition of the planer blades and replace or sharpen them as needed to ensure optimal performance.
Adjusting an electric planer is a fairly straightforward process. With some vigilance and a little elbow grease, you can have the planer ready to work within a few minutes.
Of course, it’s worth mentioning that prioritizing your safety is the most important thing in the process. It’s always risky to work with dull or chipped blades, after all. Drawing from experience, a few safety precautions and operation tips can go a long way in keeping you and your planer safe from any mishaps.
If you run into any issues with the planner, you needn’t panic. The solutions to many troubles with these tools are usually fairly simple to DIY-solve, so keep calm and get to troubleshooting!
A benchtop jointer has a compact design and is more convenient to use for beginners and DIYers. On the other hand, a stationary jointer has a large size and is more powerful, which makes it better suited for professional woodworkers.
One of the signature tools of a woodworker is a jointer. If you have done some DIY woodwork, you’d know how useful this tool is.
This handy piece of equipment is used for making the surface of wooden birds flat and smooth so that they can be joined together. On that note, there are two types of jointer used by woodworkers today, which are benchtop and stationary jointers.
So, if you are relatively new to woodworking and would like to know the differences between them, then dive right in!
Before proceeding further, let’s briefly discuss what a jointer actually is. As I have mentioned before, it is a tool that is used to smoothen the outer surface of the wood so that it can be joined to other wooden surfaces.
A typical wood jointer consists of different components, such as the in-feed and out-feed tables (which are together known as the bed), the cutting head, and the fence. The lumber piece is placed on the in-feed table, where it is held in place firmly by the fence.
Then it is pushed through the blade, which shaves off a layer of wood from the surface. The finished piece of lumber that comes out on the out-feed table contains a smooth surface without any warps or irregularities.
A wood jointer is different from a planer, even though the latter is available in benchtopand stationarymodels and can be used for shaping uneven wood surfaces. The cutting blade of a planer is located on top of the wood, while the jointer blade is located underneath. Thus, the jointer is better at shaping wood for tight, seamless joints, whereas the planer only smoothens the wood surface.
What are benchtop jointers?
Now that you have a basic idea of a jointer let’s talk about what a bench-top jointer is, along with its advantages and disadvantages. To put it simply, a bench-top model is a small-sized jointer that is used for shaping and flattening wooden surfaces for joining.
It follows the same working principle as a typical jointer, which I have discussed in the previous section. However, it is a compact power tool that you can use for woodworking.
With that in mind, here are some of the advantages and disadvantages of benchtop machines.
A. Benchtop jointer advantages
1. Portability
Thanks to its smaller size, a benchtop jointer is a highly portable woodworking option. It has a compact form that is lightweight, which means that it can be carried easily by one person. So, if you like to move around a lot, you will find a benchtop jointer to be quite beneficial.
2. Space-saving design
Since a benchtop jointer has a smaller size, it means you can use it to save space in your home. This can be especially useful if you live in a small apartment or have minimal storage space in your garage or basement.
3. Convenience
Using a benchtop jointer is pretty easy, which can be attributed to its lighter weight and smaller size. You can set benchtop jointers up in a short time and without any hassles, and it is fairly easy to clean and maintain, too.
4. Affordability
Another significant advantage of using a benchtop jointer is its price. You can purchase a benchtop model at a comparatively lower cost than other types of woodworking tools. As such, they can be a great investment for beginners or DIY woodworkers.
B. Benchtop jointer disadvantages
1. Low capacity
Because of the small size of a benchtop jointer, the bed size is extremely limited. You can use this machine only for small pieces of wood. This can pose a significant disadvantage for large-scale woodworking projects, where you need to shape and smoothen large lumber pieces.
2. Low power
Limited power is another major disadvantage of using a benchtop jointer. This machine is mostly used for small-scale projects, which means that it has not been designed to handle heavier workloads. So, if you have a large lumber piece that needs to be shaped, you will find this machine to be grossly inefficient.
3. Less stable
Based on my first-hand experience, I can say for a fact that benchtop jointers have very poor stability. This is due to the fact that such a jointer is not firmly attached to the ground. Therefore, it is more prone to wobbling or moving around when in use.
What are stationary jointers?
As the name suggests, a stationary jointer is a tool that is fixed to the ground. It is considerably larger and can handle larger loads. Because of these reasons, it is otherwise known as a floor-standing jointer or cabinet jointer.
In that context, the advantages and disadvantages of these jointers have been described below.
A. Stationary jointer advantages
1. Higher capacity
A floor-standing model has a longer bed length, which means that it is capable of handling large pieces of lumber. What’s more, you can use it to shape a high volume of wood in a short time.
2. Greater power
Compared to a typical bench-standing model, a cabinet jointer has greater power. This means that you can use it for shaping rough lumber, hardwood, or big furniture pieces with greater effectiveness and accuracy.
3. Better stability
Since a Stationary jointer is fixed to the floor, it has no chance of moving around or wobbling while in use. This makes the floor model a lot more stable than the bench-top model.
B. Stationary jointer disadvantages
1. Expensive
It will cost you a lot of money to buy a stationary jointer. So, if you are a DIYer or a small woodworker, you might not find it feasible enough to purchase.
2. Inconvenient
Stationary models have a large footprint, which means that they are not very suitable for small spaces. The higher weight and the stationary nature means that you won’t be able to carry them around as easily as benchtop models.
Besides, it will take you a lot of time to assemble the components of a cabinet joiner. Apart from that, cleaning this machine can be a fairly complicated task as well. All of these aspects make it highly inconvenient to use, especially for beginners.
3. Loud and messy
Since a stationary jointer has a more powerful motor than a benchtop model, it will generate a lot of noise and dust. Yeah, I admit that benchtop models generate noise and dust too, but after trying it in various situations, I can say that it is not as great as floor-standing models. This can make it a challenge to use within a household setting.
Benchtop jointer vs stationary jointer - Which option should you choose?
Now that you know about both these types of jointers, it is time to address the most important question - which jointer should you pick? Well, the answer to this question depends on a range of factors.
The most important factor to consider is the budget. If you are a beginner or an occasional DIYer, you will naturally have a smaller budget. In that case, it is more feasible to buy a benchtop jointer. Conversely, if you are a professional woodworker with a higher budget, then you should go with a stationary model.
Tip
You should always try to stay within your budget while buying a jointer, which means that you should refrain from purchasing extremely pricey options. That said, you should not settle for an unbelievably cheap option either since such low prices often indicate the presence of quality issues.
Another factor to consider is the scale of your woodworking projects. Benchtop jointers are a better option to consider in the case of small-scale woodworking processes. But if you usually undertake bigger projects, then it would be better to get a cabinet-style jointer.
There are some other factors to consider as well, such as the available space and ease of use, to name a few. If you have a small apartment or if you want a convenient usage experience, then it is better to get a benchtop model. However, if you have ample space, and prioritize accuracy and effectiveness over convenience, then a stationary model will be a better choice.
How to maintain a wood jointer?
Maintaining your wood jointer is important so that you can improve its efficiency and lifespan. In order to do that, you will need to clean it periodically. Make sure to clear out the dust collector and clean the countertop or bed. If the blades have become dull or damaged, you’ll need to replace them as soon as possible.
How is a wood jointer different from a table saw?
A wood jointer is different from a table saw in the sense that a jointer is used to shave the surface of the wood to make it flat and smooth. On the other hand, a table saw is a machine that is solely used for cutting wood. Apart from that, the blade of a table saw is much more powerful since it is designed to cut wood and other types of solid materials like plastic.
Which type of jointer is the most durable?
The type of jointer that is most durable tends to be the stationary jointers as they have a build quality that is slightly more durable than benchtop jointers. This is due to the heavy-duty materials used in the construction of such jointers. That being said, if they are maintained properly and used as intended, then both of these jointer types will last for a long time.
What are the best brands for benchtop and stationary jointers?
The best brands for benchtop and stationary jointers are plentiful, with numerous manufacturers producing both kinds of tools. But based on my own tests, I recommend going with brands like Porter-Cable for benchtop jointers. Likewise, if you want stationary models, you can try out brands like Powermatic, which manufactures powerful and versatile stationary jointers.
Concluding this guide, understanding the disparities between a benchtop and a stationary jointer should simplify your decision-making process. By considering the factors mentioned, you can choose the most suitable jointer for your needs. For refining wooden furniture, a molding planer may be preferable, while a jointer/planer combo offers versatility by combining the functionalities of both tools.
Start by adjusting the tables of your benchtop jointers and the position of their fence according to the cuts you want to create on your wood board. With benchtop jointers, you can create different edges, flatten boards, and employ several other advanced techniques.
Whether you wish to flatten, straighten, or square up the edges of your rough boards - benchtop jointers can do it all for you.
Also referred to as jointers, they can help massively with your woodwork projects by creating the foundation of a tight-fitting joint and removing knots. In this blog post, I will walk you through all the basics of using benchtop jointers, necessary safety precautions, and the major techniques you can use while working with them.
Let us begin!
Basic anatomy of a benchtop jointer
1. Table
The jointer table is a support surface as you feed the board to the cutterhead. It consists of two components - an infeed table and an outfeed table. You can adjust the height and angles of these parts to control the depth and angle of the cuts.
2. Fence
Whenever you put the edge of your wood board near a cutterhead, it is important to ensure that it stands straight. A fence is a vertical guide that helps you do that, and I like adjusting its position to control the width of the cut.
3. Cutterhead
One of the most important parts of any jointer is the cutterhead. It consists of a set of very sharp blades that rotate at high speed. This way, when you feed the edge of your wood board to the cutterhead, the latter cut small amounts of material from the former.
The height of the blades of your cutterhead is adjustable so that your cuts can be as precise as you want them to be. I like to replace the blades as they wear out, but you can sharpen them too.
4. Dust port
If you ever visit someone working on a woodwork project (or even watch videos), you will know that a lot of debris is produced in the process. A dust port is responsible for collecting dust, which can help you maintain a clean environment to work while using tools like jointers and planers.
How these parts work together to create smooth edges and flat surfaces
All the parts of a jointer work together to create a smooth edge and a flat surface in your woodwork projects. For instance, as the infeed table supports the board fed into the cutterhead, the outfeed table supports it as it exits the cutting region.
Each component of a benchtop jointer has a specific function, which further contributes to smoothening the edges and flattening the surfaces of your wood board. The table and fence ensure the board stands straight and effectively goes in and out of the cutterhead. Then, the cutterhead removes any high spots or imperfections to easily create smooth and flat boards.
Safety precautions to keep in mind while using benchtop jointers
Importance of wearing protective gear
I always strongly advise everyone who wants to work with a benchtop jointer to never overlook the importance of wearing protective gear. Such gear can help prevent injuries to a great extent, and you should wear them to protect all the exposed regions of your body. Here is a list of a few protective gears that I use while working with planers and jointers:
Safety glasses to protect my eyes from flying debris
Hearing protection to protect my ears from the loud noise of the tool
Mask to prevent inhalation of debris
Tips for preventing accidents when using a benchtop jointer
The key to using benchtop jointers with wood effectively is to follow every safety tip and measure. Some of the most important ones that you should always keep in mind are:
1. Instructions and guidelines
Most benchtop jointers come with an instruction manual with all the necessary steps and additional information you need to know while working with them. It would help if you always went through all the guidelines of such manuals properly before you start working with the settings of planers and jointers.
2. Wear appropriate clothes
It is best to avoid wearing loosely fitted clothes while assembling the settings of your jointers (and also while using them). This can help prevent accidents due to your clothes being stuck in the tool. Similarly, avoid wearing jewelry while working with tools like jointers and planers.
3. Keep your fingers at a distance
It would help if you tried to keep your fingers as far as possible from the cutter blade. I like to use a push stick to feed the wood board through the cutterhead of my jointer, but you can use a push block too.
Setting up your benchtop jointers
How to choose the right cutterhead and blades for your project
Choosing the right cutterhead and blades is crucial for achieving the desired results from your woodwork project. Hence, your cutterhead must be compatible whether you use a benchtop or stationary jointer.
While browsing through my cutterhead options, I keep the type of wooden board and the thickness I wish to cut in mind to make a smart purchase. Further, it is important to ensure that the blades of the cutterhead are sharp enough to create smooth edges in your wood boards. The blades should also be durable, so you do not need to repurchase them too frequently.
How to adjust the fence, and the infeed and outfeed tables
You must understand how to adjust the fence, infeed, and outfeed tables to ensure your wood board is flat and straight while feeding it into the cutterhead. The first step in adjusting these components is to fix the infeed table to the same height as the cutterhead and the outfeed table.
Then, adjust the fence to such an angle that makes cutting the edges of your wooden board up to your desired results easier. However, you should not worry if you can't find the perfect position or adjustment immediately. Through trial and error, I discovered that making small adjustments is the perfect way to go about the settings of these components.
Tips for securing your workpiece to the table
1. Use clamps
If you do not properly secure your workpiece to the table, there is a high chance it will slip and cause uneven cuts. Hence, it is best to use securing elements like clamps to pin down your workpiece to the table properly and prevent damage while using benchtop jointers.
2. Refrain from using excessive force
It is extremely important to be careful while feeding your workpiece board through the cutterhead. While it may be tempting to apply excessive force to finish the job quickly, doing so can result in the board shifting unnecessarily - thus causing uneven cuts.
Basic techniques for using a benchtop jointer
How to create a straight edge on a board
If you want to create a straight edge on a wood board, align it against the fence of the benchtop jointer and adjust it to your desired angle. Next, gently push the board through the cutterhead while keeping it flat against the infeed table and fence.
I like to make small adjustments in the fence angle and position along the way to get even better results. As your workpiece exits the cutterhead, ensure its position is flat against the outfeed table. You can keep repeating this process until you achieve your desired edge on the board or log.
How to square up the edges of a board
To square up the edges of a board, you should first create a straight edge (as mentioned in the previous technique). Once done, adjust the fence to the table at a 90-degree angle.
Feed the board into the cutterhead carefully while keeping it flat against the infeed table and the fence - and this is how you square up one edge. Once you finish the first one, flip the board over and repeat the process with the next edge you want to square up.
How to flatten a board
The first step to flattening a board, like squaring up the edges, is creating a straight edge. Then, feed the board into the cutterhead so it is flat against both tables. Once you are done with that step, adjust the infeed and outfeed tables to the desired height.
I also like to create small adjustments during this process to alter the settings of my tool placements to achieve my desired results. It would help if you kept repeating the process until your target region of the board was smooth and flattened.
Tip
Ensure you only remove a little material while flattening the board, or else you might have to deal with uneven surfaces.
Advanced techniques for using a benchtop jointer
How to create chamfers and bevels
Step 1
The first step to creating the angled cuts of chamfers and bevels is to adjust the fence. Set the fence at your desired angle using the angle adjustment on your benchtop jointer. Whenever I want a 45-degree chamfer, I prefer setting the fence at a 45-degree angle to the bed of the machine too. However, you can measure according to your preference for a bevel.
Step 2
Next, using the depth adjustment knob, adjust the depth of the cut on your wood log to the desired amount. This will help you determine how deep the cut will be.
Step 3
Turn on the benchtop jointer and carefully feed your board through the cutterhead. Make sure that the board is flat against the fence and the tables (both infeed and outfeed) while you create the cut.
Step 4
Once you are done creating the chamfer or bevel on the first edge, flip the board 180 degrees and create similar cuts on the opposite edges.
How to make tongue and groove joints
Step 1
Adjust the height of your cutter blade and fence on your benchtop jointer to compliment the width of your workpiece appropriately. I would advise you to keep the blade height at half of the thickness of your board. Then, position the fence such that you cut the tongue or groove in the center of your workpiece.
Step 2
Keeping the face of your board against the fence, run the board through your benchtop jointer, making a groove along one edge. This is how you can easily create a groove.
Step 3
Next, flip the second board over and run it through the jointer. But this time, keep the opposite edge against the fence without altering the blade height and the fence position. Now, you’ve created a tongue.
Step 4
Fit the tongue into the groove, and ensure the two fit tightly.
How to make rabbets and dadoes
Step 1
Adjust the blade height and fence position of your benchtop jointer to the appropriate settings for the width of your wooden boards. To determine the appropriate blade height, I measure the depth I want to create in my rabbet and dado and then adjust the height accordingly. Similarly, the fence should be positioned to cut your desired width of the joints.
Step 2
Keeping the face of your board against the fence, run it through the cutterhead of your benchtop jointer. Ensure that the board is held firmly in this step to prevent any movement resulting in uneven cuts.
Step 3
Create the same cut on the corresponding edge of the other piece that will fit into the recess, all at 90-degree angles. This will ensure a snug fit between the pieces of rabbet and dadoes.
Tips for maintaining your benchtop jointer
1. Regular cleaning and maintenance
Sawdust and debris buildup can lead to various issues in equipment like benchtop jointers. Hence, cleaning them regularly and right after every use is best. To clean the components of your jointer, wipe the table, fence, and blades using a dry cloth or brush. However, if you are dealing with tough grime buildup, you may also have to use some mild cleaning liquid to clean the components.
2. Proper storage of your tool
Storing your benchtop jointers properly is one of the most important aspects of maintaining them. Ensure that you store them in a cool and dry place whenever not in use, and cover them with a dust cover to protect against debris buildup.
3. Troubleshooting common problems
If you want your benchtop jointers to last long, you should troubleshoot common problems as soon as you identify them. Some of the several problems that you might encounter while using such jointers are uneven cuts, vibrations, difficulty adjusting the blade height and fence position, etc. You can refer to the instruction manuals to solve such issues or call a professional for help.
How to install benchtop jointers?
To install a benchtop jointer, position it on a stable workbench that is centered and leveled. You can secure it properly to the stand using components like clamps. Once you are done positioning, adjust the blade height and fence position to complement your project requirements.
Then, plug in your jointer and check if it is working properly. You should also go through the instructional guide provided with the equipment to see if there are any further steps that you should follow to install your benchtop jointers properly.
Which one is better, a benchtop or a stationary jointer?
Whether a benchtop or a stationary jointer is better will strongly depend on your needs and preferences. Benchtop jointers are generally more compact and portable, making them suitable for smaller workshops and DIY projects. Stationary jointers, on the other hand, offer wider tables and more power, which are beneficial for larger, professional-grade projects.
Ideally, consider your project size and scope, available space, and budget when deciding between the two.
Benchtop jointers serve various purposes, including creating straight edges, flattening boards, and executing advanced techniques like rabbets and dadoes. It's crucial to prioritize safety measures, such as wearing protective gear and avoiding contact with the cutterhead.
Utilize a benchtop jointer for your next project to achieve precise cuts and joints. For more information, explore my other blogs on the best stationary and benchtop jointers. That concludes this post—goodbye!
Installing a benchtop jointer involves gathering the necessary tools and identifying an optimal workspace, continuing by assembling the base and table. Subsequently, the motor and cutterhead are mounted, and the final step involves connecting the dust collection system to ensure a complete setup.
Learning benchtop jointers installation and maintenance serves as an essential woodworking skill for woodworkers seeking to achieve precision in their craft. This article focuses on the meticulous process of installing benchtop jointers, a pivotal tool in woodworking for producing straight and smooth lumber surfaces. It underscores the necessity of accurate installation techniques and an in-depth understanding of these machines.
Additionally, the article encompasses vital aspects of jointer maintenance, crucial for the tool's longevity and optimal functionality. By equipping readers with detailed knowledge on both installation and upkeep, the guide aims to aid woodworkers in overcoming challenges related to uneven or rough lumber edges, thereby enhancing the quality of their work.
What is a benchtop jointer?
The benchtop jointer, a small but powerful tool, is a woodworker’s best friend, capable of transforming rough and uneven planks into smooth and polished masterpieces. With their razor-sharp blade and precise cutting action, benchtop jointers effortlessly shave off imperfections, flatten surfaces, and create seamless joints, bringing out the natural beauty of wood in all its glory.
The importance of properly installing your benchtop jointer
As you embark on your cabinet or sink installation project, take notice of the significance of installing your benchtop jointer carefully. With the right tools and knowledge of how to install benchtop jointers, you can ensure that your benchtop or stationary jointeris securely and tightly set, level, and in alignment with your wall.
Don’t let a poorly installed benchtop jointer mar the beauty of your new kitchen. Take the time to check your work, and you’ll be rewarded with aflawless finish that will last for years to come.
Installation of a benchtop jointer: An overview
A benchtop jointer is a pinnacle of craftsmanship and design, and a symphony of form and function. Installing this fine piece of machinery is an art in itself.
Set aside time to read the how-to-install benchtop jointer manual, check your tools, and assess your space design. Start by checking your wall or cabinet to ensure it’s level, then join the jointer to the edge with care. Secure it tightly, and give it a little wiggle to check its stability. Now set the jointer at the perfect height, and tighten the bolts.
Whether you’re a seasoned craftsman or an amateur hobbyist, the benchtop jointer is an indispensable addition to your workshop, offering unparalleled accuracy and efficiency in every project.
Prepping the perfectly polished benchtop jointer
Gathering necessary tools and materials
Drawing from experience, before crafting that perfect edge, you must first gather all the necessary tools and materials.
You’ll need a cabinet or workbench to mount the jointer. This surface will need to be level, so it is important to check this before beginning. Once you have a suitable surface, I’d suggest gathering the required tools, such as a drill, screws, a screwdriver, and a wrench.
Choosing a suitable location for the benchtop jointer
Before diving into the woodworking world, it’s time to check the level of your workspace and set the right location for your benchtop jointer. Are you tight on space? Consider mounting it on the cabinet and securing it tightly. Are you looking for a more central location? Place it near your kitchen countertop, allowing easy access and maximum efficiency.
Measuring and marking the area for installation
Measuring and marking an area for installing the benchtop jointer is a crucial step in crafting a beautiful and functional workspace. With the right tools, this task can be accomplished with ease and precision.
Begin by carefully considering the design of your space and the placement of other fixtures, such as the cabinet, sink, or cooktop. Then, using a level and measuring tape, mark the area where you plan to install the benchtop jointer. Re-check your measurements to ensure a perfect fit and then use your tools to join the edge of your benchtop to the wall securely.
How to install your benchtop jointer and get woodworking in style
1. Assembling the base and table of the jointer
Assembling the base and table of your benchtop jointer is a truly exciting undertaking that requires a delicate touch and a keen eye for detail.
Begin by securing the base to a level surface, whether it be a sturdy workbench or a wall-mounted cabinet. Ensure that the base is level, and then attach the table using the screws and bolts. Tighten each fastener until it’s snug, but be careful not to overtighten and risk damaging the threads.
2. Mounting the motor and cutterhead
Next, it’s time to join the motor and cutterhead to your tool. With the design and efficiency of modern-day benchtop jointers, I feel this process is as simple as ever. Align the cutterhead with the edge of the jointer table, ensuring that the blades face the right direction. Then, set the motor in place and secure it with bolts or screws, checking to see that it’s tightly fastened.
It’s essential to ensure the jointer is level, so take your time to adjust the height of the table and blade as needed. And while you’re at it, check to see that the blade is sharp, as a dull blade can lead to a splintered and unsightly wood.
3. Connecting the dust collection system
Once you’ve set the benchtop jointer in place, you’ll need to join the jointer and the dust collection system together. Make sure to secure and tighten the connection to prevent leaks.
The jointer should be perfectly aligned with the dust collection system so you don’t have to worry about pesky dust and debris getting in the way of your masterpiece.
4. Adjusting the infeed and outfeed tables
There is a certain finesse to adjusting the infeed and outfeed tables of a benchtop jointer, one that requires both a delicate touch and an unwavering commitment to precision.
Keep the edge of your board firmly against the fence. Then, join it against the spinning blade and carefully move it forward, checking to make sure that the infeed and outfeed tables are set at the same height. Adjust as necessary, tightening the bolts to ensure that everything is securely in place.
5. Testing the jointer for accuracy and functionality
As you embark on a journey to test the benchtop jointer for accuracy and functionality, the excitement and anticipation can be palpable. As you turn on the machine, the sound of the motor whirring to life will fill the air, and you will know that it’s time to get to work.
With a steady hand, guide your material towards the rotating cutterhead, and watch it as it glides effortlessly across the surface, transforming rough, uneven edges into smooth, straight lines. As you finish each pass, tighten the fence, adjusting it slightly to achieve the perfect angle for your project.
Jointer maintenance
1. Clean the jointer after use
After spending time in your woodworking studio, using your jointer, it’s time to indulge in the task of cleaning it up. The intricate design of this tool may leave behind shavings, dust, and debris, but restoring your jointer to its pristine state is a breeze.
The first step is to switch off the machine and unplug it from the wall, ensuring it is secure and stable on the benchtop. Then, check and tighten all bolts and screws to ensure the jointer is level and stable.
Remove any excess debris using a brush or air compressor, and carefully clean the edge of the blade, ensuring it is free of any residue that may cause damage to the wood. You can then finally wipe the surface down with a damp cloth.
2. Sharpen and replace the blades as needed
First, you must carefully remove the old blades, not damaging the edges or surrounding parts. Replace them with new blades, tightening the screws just enough to secure them in place without over-tightening.
Before you fire up your newly sharpened benchtop jointer, it is important to check that everything is in place. So, run a test board through the machine, making any necessary adjustments to ensure a perfect edge.
3. Lubricate moving parts
I noticed that to maintain the effortless movement of a benchtop jointer, one must take time to lubricate the machine properly.
The jointer effortlessly glides over the surface, edge to edge, cabinet to cabinet, creating a perfect, smooth finish. But to keep those parts moving like a well-oiled machine, you must take the time to lubricate them properly.
4. Proper storage of the benchtop jointer
When it comes to ensuring the longevity of your tools, the process of properly storing your benchtop jointer after use is paramount. Taking the time to store your benchtop jointer shows respect for the tool and the art of woodworking.
A well-maintained cabinet or a wall-mounted shelf is the best option, where it can rest safely and securely until its next use.
Warning: Some benchtop jointers may have improperly aligned cutterheads, causing dangerous kickback. Always ensure proper setup and use with caution to avoid injury.
Can a benchtop jointer flatten and level non-wooden surfaces?
Using a benchtop jointer to flatten and level non-wooden surfaces is possible but it is not recommended. Through my practical knowledge, I can say that the high-speed rotary cutterhead is designed specifically for wood and may cause damage to other materials.
The jointer table is not typically large enough to accommodate non-wooden surfaces, making achieving a level and consistent result difficult. It is best to seek out specialized tools designed for your specific material.
Can a benchtop jointer be used for curved or angled cuts?
A benchtop jointer is typically not used for making curved or angled cuts but based on my observations, it is possible to achieve some curved or angled cuts with the right technique and accessories.
Consider using a sled or jig to guide your material through the cutterhead while maintaining the desired curve for curved cuts. For angled cuts, you can adjust the fence on your jointer and use a miter gauge to guide your material through the cutterhead at the desired angle.
Keep in mind that these techniques require precision and practice to achieve consistent results.
Can a benchtop jointer be used to create decorative edges or profiles on wood?
Benchtop jointers can be used to create simple decorative edges or profiles on wood with the right cutterhead technique although keep in mind that they are primarily designed to flatten and square wood surfaces. Some tools likebenchtop and stationary jointers have specialized cutterheads for creating decorative edges, such as bevels or chamfers. After flattening your wood on the jointer, you can also use a handheld router to create more intricate profiles.
Installing a benchtop jointer elevates your woodworking capabilities significantly. It's a transformative addition that can enhance your craft. Yet, proper maintenance is equally crucial. Neglecting it is akin to planting a beautiful garden and then disregarding it—resulting in a withered, useless mess.
Regularly cleaning, sharpening, and lubricating your jointer is essential for smooth and efficient operation. This upkeep ensures precision, turning rough boards into smooth masterpieces. A well-maintained benchtop jointer opens endless possibilities, yielding results that are nothing short of a symphony of craftsmanship.
A table saw can be operated by ensuring that all of its components are in order, placing the workpiece properly, and pushing it through steadily. Being mindful of personal safety is a critical aspect of operating a table saw, no matter which type of cuts the operator wishes to make.
A table saw is one of the most central tools in any woodworker’s arsenal for its ability to produce clean and quick lumber cuts. That’s why we’ve created this guide to cover all aspects of table saw operation to help you use the power tool safely.
Now, the name "table saw" creates a clear picture of what the tool is: a table with a saw on it.
Typically, table saws, like the contractor saws, include an electric motor-powered circular saw blade that is mounted on a mandril or arbor. The blade sits in the middle of the table, with a fraction of it peeking above the table for cutting wood or other material.
That said, there is a clear distinction to be made between table saws and other saw types like track saws, miter saws, and circular saws. A track saw is the closest to table saws, with the difference being that it includes a track for steadying the material for straight cuts.
As for miter saws and circular saws, they operate completely differently from table saws, utilizing different mechanisms entirely. A miter saw makes use of a blade mounted in a miter box for precise cuts, whereas a circular saw includes a circular blade in a handheld frame.
Safety Warning: Following the proper safety procedure while operating any power tool is paramount. This is particularly true for table saws, as improper operation has led to many professionals and hobbyists being injured and losing a digit in the process. Consider checking the “Table Saw Safety” section later in this guide.
Making the cuts
Woodworkers often rely on various tools and special cutting techniques like dado cuts and compound angles to get started on an elaborate project. And while these special cutting techniques are quite useful, none are as prevalent and useful in the woodworking world as the three basic ones. These cutting techniques are known as ripping, crosscuts, and angled cuts.
Let’s examine each of these in detail and find out how you can use them to make your woodworking job much simpler.
1. How to rip
Ripping is one of the easiest to make cuts of all the cutting techniques, being a simple straight cut made along the wood grain. And it is also the type of cut that every saw type can make without issues.
Typically, woodworkers use the fence set on a table saw as a guide to measure the desired width of the lumber. This keeps the cut perfectly straight and free of any resistance or issues when the lumber is pushed into the blade.
3 Steps to rip a piece of wood
Step 1: Prepare the table saw
First, adjust the table saw to make rip cuts on your desired material. A good starting point is to choose the correct saw blade for ripping lumber.
Typically, the saw blades used for ripping have fewer teeth than those used for crosscuts to keep the results as smooth as possible. A 10-inch diameter ripping saw blade will have about 24-30 teeth.
Once you have chosen the right saw blade, set the blade depth and angle to prepare the table saw for ripping. It’s always a good practice to have the blade depth be around ⅛th of an inch more than the width of the material. That way, the teeth of the blade will always be visible to you, reducing the chances of an accident.
To finish preparing, make markings on the material according to the desired measurements, after which you can move on to the next step.
Step 2: Adjust the table saw fence
Place the material on the tabletop and close to the saw blade in a manner that its teeth only barely touch the lumber. Ensure that the table saw miter gauge can firmly hold the material tightly, snap the miter lock, and make adjustments as necessary before starting the table saw.
Note that you must continue to adjust the position of your material while cutting. Table saws tend to shift the material they come in contact with by a small degree, which is usually close to the width of the blade.
Step 3: Begin making the rip cut
Before powering up the table saw, it’s important to don safety goggles, ear protection, and gloves. Make one final check to ensure that every element of the table saw, such as the power feed, lumber position, fence, etc., is in order.
Next, turn on the table saw and begin pushing the workpiece through the saw blade slowly. Keep applying light pressure on the fence and ensure that the blade cuts through the piece in one smooth motion. It’s imperative that you don’t vary the pressure much, or else the cut may end up being jagged or misaligned.
As you reach the end of the workpiece, use a push stick to finish making the cut. That way, your right or left hand will stay out of any danger of being harmed.
After completing the cut, power the table saw down and wait until the spinning blade has stopped completely. Be sure to unplug it as well to avoid any unfortunate accidents.
2. How to crosscut
Crosscuts, or crosscutting, is a type of cut that involves making a clean cut across the wood grain. Being at a 90-degree angle to the wood grain, these types of cuts are typically more taxing on the saw blade as their teeth encounter more resistance. And because of this higher resistance, cross-cutting saw blades need to have more teeth to make clean and straight cuts.
While the most commonly used tool for crosscutting is a miter saw, most table saws can perform the task perfectly well.
3 Steps to make a crosscut
Making crosscuts is functionally identical to ripping, except for the angle of the plywood you will be sawing. That said, there are some key differences that you should be mindful of, as detailed in the steps listed below.
Step 1: Prepare the table saw for crosscuts
As with ripping, the first step to making cross-cuts is to prepare the table saw for the task. Start by inserting the correct saw blade for crosscutting the material.
Typically, a crosscut saw blade will have between 60 and 80 teeth for the cleanest possible finish. You can choose a blade with up to 80 teeth of a cleaner finish, but that is not strictly necessary.
Follow the table saw adjustment procedure as listed in the first step of the ripping process.
Step 2: Adjust the miter gauge
Position the workpiece close to the table saw miter gauge and lock it in place. Ensure that the piece does not move in an unexpected direction to prevent accidents from happening during the sawing process.
As with ripping, you will have to make minute adjustments to the position of the workpiece to prevent any cutting offsets. With crosscuts in particular, making a cut that deviates from the 90-degree angle can create jagged results and may even end up causing kickbacks.
So, it’s important that you maintain that specific angle throughout the cutting process.
Step 3: Make the crosscut
With your safety gear on and all safety checks made, plug in the table saw and power it on. Begin pushing the material through the blade while keeping it as steady as possible while applying light pressure on the miter.
Continue pushing the material until you reach the end, where you should use a push stick to finish the crosscut. Try to make sure that the speed of feeding the workpiece into the blade remains roughly the same throughout the process.
Once the cut is complete, you can power the table saw down and collect your newly crosscut workpieces.
3. How to make angled cuts
Angled cuts are cuts made at a particular angle and are not necessarily aligned with or against the wood grain. These require a bit more finesse in comparison to rip cuts and crosscuts since positioning both the blade and workpiece correctly can be challenging.
These cuts are typically more difficult to make using a table saw due to their relative lack of mobility. Additionally, since the saw blade must be able to work at any angle, you will need to use a combination saw blade. Typically, a 10-inch combination saw blade comes with 50 teeth, which increase as the size of the blade increases.
That said, it is still fairly simple to make angled cuts using even the largest cabinet saws with one of two cutting methods.
2 Methods for making angled cuts
Method 1: Changing the saw blade angle
Usually, table and cabinet saws have a mechanism that allows you to change the saw blade angle up to 45 degrees at least. Some models may allow you to tilt the blade even further for particularly steep cuts.
To do so, use the handle on the crank system to move the blade freely. You can also check the saw angle on the indicator scale, which is typically located close to the crank. Of course, there is a chance of these indicators being a little off, so feel free to use a measuring instrument to check for errors.
After that, it’s just a matter of operating the table saw, as detailed in the previous sections. The overall cutting philosophy remains the same, save for the angle of the blade.
Tip
If your saw has no crank system, then it’s likely that its blade tilts using a pivot system. This system also operates using an adjustment handle that unlocks upon the first pull. Once you’ve adjusted the angle, you can lock it back in place to prevent further movement.
Method 2: Change the workpiece angle
The other method for making angled cuts is slightly more involved than changing the blade angle. But if you are more comfortable rotating the workpiece instead of the blade, you can make use of a miter gauge.
A miter gauge is a protractor that is affixed to the metal foot of a table saw. This foot can adjust the angle of the wood by sliding up and down, and it can be operated using a handle. Once you turn the wheel handle, the angle of a ledge will change to the precise degree that you desire.
Simply set the angle using the handle, place the wood against the ledger, and push it into the blade to make the angled cut. The overall saw operation, like in the first method, remains the same.
Note: Supporting your workpiece using a miter sled is always a good idea. A miter sled is a small and shallow box that includes slots at the bottom, which you can use to position your workpiece. You can go for an after-market miter gauge and a crosscut sled, or consider making one on your own since its construction is rather simple.
Setting the blade height
Setting the blade height is, arguably, one of the most important steps of operating a table saw. In essence, there are two ways one can try to set the blade height.
The first approach suggests that the saw blade should be positioned so that only about ⅛-th of an inch is above the workpiece. This is a safer approach as it prevents a large portion of the blade from being exposed but may result in fraying or tearing out at the bottom of the workpiece.
And that is where the second approach is often considered, which involves positioning the blade significantly above the workpiece. While this eliminates the chances of fraying and tearing, it is also a much more dangerous procedure. Any slips or accidents are much more likely to cause major damage to the operator.
At the end of the day, the first approach is still preferable for safety reasons. Plus, in some cases, the fraying and tearing can be fixed using sandpaper and wood filler.
Fence adjustment
The table saw fence plays a critical role in making sure that the length of each cut remains accurate. Square fences are typically operated using the lever present at its front edge.
You can adjust the square table saw fence by lifting the lever and sliding it laterally. Additionally, you can also lift the saw blade for more accurate length measurements, after which you can return it to its original position. Consider using a tape measure to double-check the measurements.
It’s important to note that fences of certain sliding table saws when lifted as high as possible, may become misaligned with the blade. This can become problematic if it goes unnoticed, which is why you must ensure that all the measurements remain correct before operating the table saw.
You can solve the misalignment by using a combination square, a miter gauge, and a ruler, as detailed below:
Place the combination square inside the miter gauge slot and align it with the edge
Set the fence close to the ruler and lock it
Slide the combination square along the tracks
Pay attention to the position of the fence and make adjustments for deviations
Changing the blades and inserts
The table saw insert is a metal plate located close to the center of the table, which can be removed and replaced. It acts as a frame for the table saw blade, surrounding its edges to prevent the saw blade from touching the table.
Depending on the type of cuts you make, you will need to change the blades and inserts of the table saw. And since woodworkers change these parts often, manufacturers typically make the swapping process fairly straightforward.
Changing the insert of a table saw and inserting a zero-clearance insert is fairly straightforward. Simply lift it up from the front or push it down near the back. Doing the latter will pop the front up, allowing you to remove the insert completely. Once that is done, position the rounded side of the new table insert facing upwards and slot it where the old one used to be.
As for swapping the table saw blade, follow the instructions listed below:
Clear the debris off the existing saw blade and the surrounding area
Remove the insert, blade guards, and miter gauge
Adjust the height of the saw blade to access the arbor nut and remove it using a wrench
Set the screw set and nuts aside and take the blade out completely
Replace the old blade with a new one and ensure that its teeth are pointed towards you
Replace the blade arbor nut and lower the saw blade back in its place
Reinstall the insert, blade guards, and miter gauge
Note that this process can vary slightly based on the table saw model. So, consider reading through the instructions manual for standard model-specific directions to remove the table saw blade.
Table saw operation procedure
Operating a table saw can be a fairly involved process, considering the number of moving parts even a basic model has. That said, it can be simplified if tackled in a step-by-step manner, as detailed below.
Before starting the table saw, put on protective gear
The workpiece must have a machined surface against the table, miter gauge, and fence
Adjust the fence and miter gauges as necessary
Set up the workpiece between the fence and the blade
Adjust the saw blade height to the desired height
Keep push sticks at the ready for finishing the cut
Be sure to have someone help you or use a table extension for long boards
Set workpiece size using miter gauge or fence
Clamp a spacer block to the fence to ensure it is about 1” back from the saw blade front
Ensure that the safety guards, splitter (even those part of the blade guard), and kickback devices are in order
Open the blast gate and turn the sawdust collection system on
Power the table saw on and stand on either side of the blade
Feed the workpiece into the blade while keeping your hands away from its teeth
Ensure that the workpiece moves steadily and apply slight pressure to the fence
Use a push stick to move the final edge of the workpiece into the blade
Push the workpiece past the back of the saw blade to prevent kickback
Stop the blade completely and brush off any leftover dust and scrap
Repeat the process until your work is finished, after which power the table saw down
Wait for the blade to come to a complete stop, and then lower the blade below the table
Turn off the blast gate and dust collection systems
Clean up the table and the surrounding area
Kickback: Table saw kickback occurs when a stray piece of wood gets caught in the blade and shot in your direction. The speed at which the piece of wood gets thrown at you is often much faster than a human is capable of reacting to. Thus, it often leads to injuries if the machine operator is not wearing any safety gear.
Table saw safety
Professionals and carpentry hobbyists alike have faced injuries because of improper table saw operation. These injuries can be as minor as small cuts and nicks or as major as a severed digit or a lost eye. Needless to say, it’s important to keep safety in mind while operating dangerous tools like a table saw.
One of the most common reasons for injuries is kickback, the chances of which can be reduced by following these table saw safetypractices:
Refrain from starting the saw while the workpiece is touching the saw blade
Use nothing but the table saw’s rip fence while ripping a workpiece
Use nothing but the miter gauge for crosscuts
Ensure that the material lies completely flat against the table while making the cut
Additionally, as mentioned in the table saw operation section, always have your safety gear on. Make sure you understand the manufacturer’s instructions as well to understand how the saw reacts in certain situations.
Lastly, remember to unplug the table saw completely before accessing its internal workings, aligning the blade, or changing parts.
What are the types of cuts that a table saw is the most proficient at?
The types of cuts that a table saw is most proficient at include crosscuts, ripping cuts, and dado cuts. A crosscut is made across the grain of the wood, a ripping cut is made along the grain, and a dado cut involves creating a square-walled, flat-bottom groove across the grain using dado blades.
What are the three types of table saw blades?
The three types of table saw blades are ripping, crosscutting, and combination blades. Ripping and crosscutting blades are used to make their namesake cuts, whereas combination blades can be used to make either kind of cut.
These blades differ in the number of teeth, thickness of the kerf, and tip coating, which makes each blade more efficient at its respective task.
By tackling the operation of a table saw in a systematic manner, cutting small pieces of lumber, plastic, steel, etc., can be a simple undertaking.
Making a rip cut, crosscut, or angled cut is a simple task when using a table saw. Even so, it’s important to remember that these cuts require different blades and a slightly different operation method.
Additionally, be sure to keep the table saw safety guidelines in mind. Even professional woodworkers face unexpected situations with workpieces, which makes the role of safety gear even more critical in the safe operation of a table saw.
Thus, it’s important to take the process one step at a time and try to take every detail into account while operating a table saw.
The most important table saw safety rules include going through the user manual, wearing the right type of clothing, and using personal protective equipment (PPE). Maintaining a clean working area and using clean blades can also help ensure safety.
The chances of accidents are high if proper safety rules and precautions are not followed when using table saws. So, we’ve decided to cover the important table saw safety rules and guidelines in this article for your benefit.
Now, the name "table saw" creates a clear picture of what the tool is: a table with a saw on it.
Typically, table saws, like the contractor saws, include an electric motor-powered circular saw blade that is mounted on a mandril or arbor. The blade sits in the middle of the table, with a fraction of it peeking above the table for cutting wood or other material.
Despite being indispensable tools in woodworking, table saws pose significant safety risks when used incorrectly. These risks include kickback, incorrect blade usage, removing protective features like blade guards, and more.
Kickback happens when the material being cut is forced back toward the operator at high speed.
Other dangers associated with incorrect table saw usage include poor material support and inadequate training. Not providing enough support to the workpiece can cause it to bind or tip, while poor training can result in incorrect techniques that can cause accidents.
According to a recent study, more than 30,000 table saw injuries occur every year in the US, resulting in around ten amputations daily. As such, it becomes all the more important to follow table saw safety rules and regulations to minimize such risks.
Safety Warning: Safety regulations provided here are only meant to serve as guidelines. It is strongly recommended for users to go through the table saw manual, and lab safety rules, and undergo proper training before using such tools.
What is saw kickback in woodworking?
In woodworking, saw kickback refers to a situation when the stock is pushed back suddenly and forcefully. It can occur when using different types of saws, be it atable saw, chainsaw, or circular saw. Saw kickback can be highly dangerous and can result in extremely serious injuries.
It mainly occurs when the energy of the spinning blade gets transferred to the wooden piece being cut, which can happen due to various reasons.For instance, the rough lumber or stock being worked on can sometimes get trapped between the rip fence used for guiding the material and the side of the saw blade.
Additionally, if you feed the material into the saw very quickly, it can move off the worktable and ride up on the saw blade. This results in instability, increasing the chances of the material getting caught on the blade when it returns to the table. One of the most common reasons this happens is the use of a dull or incorrect blade.
Another factor that can result in kickback is setting the cutting blade very low. When the blade is set too low, more teeth come into contact with the material. This means the saw will require more power for cutting and may stall or slow down, resulting in kickback.
Based on our first-hand experience, there are a few ways by which you can prevent kickbacks when using table saws.
Always use a sharp blade to prevent binding issues
Use guides, jigs, or stands to support the workpiece properly
Maintain a well-balanced and firm stance while cutting
Avoid applying excessive force or overloading the saw
Use safety equipment, such as safety goggles, push sticks, ear protection, etc.
Be aware of the safety features of the saw, like riving knives and blade guards
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and safety guidelines
Table saw safety rules
Awareness of various safety rules can help you avoid accidents and prevent woodworking injuries. Here, we've mentioned some of the most important safety rules that should be followed when using a table saw.
Go through the instruction manual
Always go through the instruction manual beforehand when using power tools like table saws. Instruction manuals explain the working of the tool and the proper method of using it to get desired results while ensuring safety. And drawing from experience, we suggest familiarizing yourself with the various parts of the table saw, its safety features, and how it can be adjusted for different tasks.
If you no longer have the manual, search for it online using the manufacturer's name and the model number of the saw.
Wear suitable clothing
Wearing the right clothing is an essential but often overlooked safety rule when using woodworking tools. Avoid wearing loose-fitting clothing, jewelry, and long sleeves, and if you have long hair, make sure to tie it back so it does not get in the way. Besides clothing, accessories like footwear need proper attention.
Based on our experience, the best options are closed-toe, non-slip shoes, which provide much better protection than flip-flops and sandals. You may want to wear gloves for hand protection, but avoid doing so as they can get trapped in the saw blade, like loose clothing and hair. They also reduce your sense of touch, which is vital when operating cutting tools.
You can check out online articles or woodworking books to learn about the best clothing and accessories that can be worn when using tools like a table saw.
Use personal protective equipment
When using a power tool like a regular or sawstop table saw, you should always use personal protection equipment (PPE). Such equipment can include safety glasses that protect wood chips and debris that can enter your eyes.
Additionally, earmuffs or earplugs help protect your ears from the noise such tools make, preventing hearing problems. A respirator is another piece of equipment that is crucial when using woodworking tools. Table saws and similar tools produce a considerable amount of sawdust, which includes microscopic particles that cannot be seen with the naked eye.
Exposure to these particles for an extended period can lead to various health issues, which can be prevented using a respirator.
Maintain a clean working area
In most cases, workshops and garages where woodworking projects are undertaken are cluttered and messy. But with various tools and pieces lying around, the chances of accidents become very high. So, you should always keep your working area clean by removing all unnecessary objects, materials, and tools.
Ensure the floor is free of tripping hazards, such as power cords and cables. Also, check that the workpiece you are working on has adequate space to exit. If the space is limited, consider moving the table saw next to a wall to free up some room. You can push the saw back to the middle of the room when it needs to be used.
Get rid of distractions
Distractions in your workshop can lead to serious accidents, especially when using tools like table saws. Some common distractions in workshops include TVs and phones. If your workshop has a TV, turn it on only when not using a power tool, such as during a break or when cleaning up.
Similarly, messages and calls on your phone can be highly distracting, so keeping it somewhere else instead of in your pocket is a good idea. The biggest distraction, however, tends to be people walking into the workshop.
Set rules for friends and family members so that they avoid entering the workshop when they hear the noise of the table saw.
Disconnect the power when changing blades
When changing the blades of your table saw, always disconnect the power so the tool does not turn on accidentally. If you turn off the tool without removing it from the power outlet, it may turn on if the switch is hit, leading to serious injury.
Ensure the blades are clean
Wood contains resin and sap, which can stick and accumulate on the blades of your table saw over time. When these substances cover the edge of the blades, they can affect their sharpness and adversely affect the performance of the blade.
Using a table saw with unclean blades means more feed pressure is needed, requiring greater force. In addition, such substances can burn the edges of the material you are working on, and resins can corrode the blades.
Frequent cleaning of the table saw blades can prevent these problems, and this can be done using a cleaner and a stiff brush.
Tip
Consider using caustic oven cleaners containing sodium hydroxide as the primary ingredient to clean your saw blade.
Wax the fence and the table
As with the saw blade, resins can collect on the fence and the saw table, creating difficulties moving the workpiece across its surface. One of the most effective ways to deal with this problem is to apply wax to the surface of the work table. This helps reduce friction so that the material can move smoothly over it without requiring much effort.
Wax also prevents resins from accumulating on the surface and reduces the chances of oxidation. However, it is crucial to select wax that does not contain silicone because wooden surfaces do not acquire finishes and stains when silicone-based wax is used. Because of this, using automotive wax is not recommended.
Use roller stands or outfeed tables
The cut pieces of the workpiece fall on the ground while exiting from the back of the table saw. In the case of larger and heavier pieces, instability can occur and cause the entire material to shift. When this happens, the workpiece can catch on the saw blade, causing kickback.
Roller stands and outfeed tables can prevent this from happening by providing support to the material, reducing the chances of kickback.
Allow the blade to stop
For obvious reasons, avoid putting your hand or body near the spinning blade until it stops. People often turn off their table saws and immediately tend to move toward the workpiece to check it out, leading to accidents. Waiting until the blade stops spinning can help prevent injuries and avoid costly treatments.
Table saw uses
There are multiple ways in which a table saw works for making different types of cuts. These cuts can include:
I. Ripping
Ripping is the process of cutting a workpiece along its length, making it narrower. Table saws are well suited for creating rip cuts, and their rip capacity can be adjusted to accommodate different board widths.
II. Crosscutting
The primary purpose of a table saw is to make rip cuts, but this tool is also commonly used for crosscutting. You can use a crosscut sled or miter gauge to make perpendicular cuts across the wood grain. The adjustable miter gauge of your table saw can be adjusted to the required angle for such purposes.
III. Bevel cuts
Many table saws allow you to adjust the angle of the blade and can be used for bevel cuts. These cuts are used to create chamfers, angled cuts, or beveled cuts across the thickness or width of the material.
This can be done by tilting the table saw to the angle needed and ensuring that the angle is accurate using an angle measure. Once the correct angle is obtained, turn on the saw to make the cuts.
IV. Grooves and rabbets
Joint cuts like grooves and rabbets can be created easily using a table saw. Both these cuts are in the form of narrow and long channels but are created differently. Grooves are created by making cuts near the center of the board, while rabbets are created by cutting near the edge.
Our findings show that these cuts can be quite dangerous since the riving knife and the blade guard need to be removed. So, make sure to follow the safety tips mentioned above.
V. Cutting joints
Table saws can be used to create different types of cutting joints besides grooves and rabbets. Again, some of these joint cuts require blade guard and riving knife removal, so following table saw safety rules is important to avoid serious injury.
The most common joint cuts created using a table saw include lap cuts, tenon cuts, dado cuts, dovetail cuts, reinforced miter cuts, and finger cuts.
VI. Kerfing
Kerfing is the process of removing sections of a board by making cuts on both sides of the board. This also separates the strip while providing flexibility to the wood so that even the thickest boards can get a curve. The resulting curve is tighter when the spaces between the cuts are smaller.
Should I use the fence and miter gauge together when using a table saw?
You should not use the fence and miter gauge together when using a table saw as doing so can cause pinching of the material, causing kickback, so only use one of them at a time.
Why should I not cut the material freehand when using a table saw?
You should not cut the material freehand when using a table saw. Freehand cutting means the workpiece cannot be steadied and can easily catch on the blade. So, it is better to use accessories like a sled, miter gauge, or rip fence.
What is the purpose of a push block?
The purpose of a push block is to help guide the workpiece during the cutting process while helping protect your hands. It offers more control than push sticks and does not create a pivot point that can result in accidents.
When used correctly with proper safety precautions, table saws can provide results that few other tools can match in woodworking. However, the large number of accidents and injuries resulting from incorrect use is a testament to the fact that many users ignore the safety rules that should be followed.
While adhering to these rules and guidelines may appear tedious, it can help you avoid accidents and the resulting medical expenses. Moreover, by adopting the right practices, such as undergoing proper training, you can get better results when working on various woodworking projects.
So, make sure to always go through the instructions and warnings provided by the manufacturer of your table saw, familiarize yourself with the tool, and utilize the safety features provided.
The basic operation of wood routers is fairly straightforward, requiring users to understand feed and speed settings, feeding techniques, the importance of making small passes, and more. By employing advanced routing methods and avoiding common pitfalls, woodworkers can continue to use this power tool to great effect.
Wood routers are among the most versatile tools in a woodworker’s arsenal, making it important to delve into their workings and routing techniques.
Routers are employed for hollowing out specific areas in materials such as wood and plastic, creating channels or routes with a motor. Their versatility stems from the various routing techniques that can be executed using these machines.
In this comprehensive guide, we will explore router tips for beginners, maintenance, advanced routing techniques, pitfalls to avoid, and how to upgrade the machine.
What are routers and how are they used?
A wood router is a tool that consists of a rotating blade that protrudes from a flat base, which can rout more material effectively. The power tool draws its power from a motor, which can either be of the electric or pneumatic variety.
Carpenters and woodworkers can use a router to shape their workpieces to the precise degree that they desire and create smooth decorative edges and corners. Moreover, it can be used for carving out cut patterns and adding channels to slot in other pieces of wood. Thus, it can be used for both the creation and the finishing phases of a woodworking project, providing the user with a high degree of flexibility.
Of course, there are several types of routers that are made specifically to tackle a particular phase of a project better than others. While their basic function remains the same, certain design elements elevate their performance in a particular way. Plunge routers, combination routers, variable-speed routers, CNC wood routers, electric router, and laminate trim router tools are just a few examples of these router tools.
Modern wood routers, such as those made by Bosch and DeWalt, are a direct upgrade to the manual routing tool known as the router plane. In basic terms, these tools share the same working philosophy, as a router plane includes a wide base with a small blade protruding from it.
Router basics you should know
Being such a versatile tool, there are plenty of elements in a wood router that you must be aware of. Getting familiar with basic techniques such as feeding, speed settings, routing passes, and more can help you get started with routing quickly.
So, let’s look at the basics of router operation and a few tips to make your initial experience with the tool less daunting.
1. Optimal feed and speed settings
A critical consideration of the machine providing you with the desired finish is the rate of chips produced during the routing process. If the produced chip load is too small, the router bits being used will become duller too quickly. Conversely, an excessively high chip load creates a poor surface finish and may even cause damage to the router bit.
Managing chip load is a matter of optimizing the feed and speed settings of your wood router. By using the correct settings, you can control the chip load and keep your router bits intact for a long time.
Note that measuring the precise speed of the router bit can be rather difficult, which is why it’s usually better to measure it in RPM instead. With that in mind, use the following table as your guide to the most optimal router bit speed settings.
Router Bit Diameter
Maximum RPM (+/- 10%)
Up to 1 inch
22,000
1 to 2 inches
20,000
2 to 2.5 inches
18,000
3 to 3.5 inches
10,000
Tip
If you do need the exact measurement of speed, you can calculate it using the following formula:
Router Bit Speed = Router Bit Circumference x Bit RPM
This will net you a result in inches-per-minute, which can be converted to miles-per-hour by multiplying the result with 60/63360 or 0.000946.
2. Proper feeding techniques
As a general rule, it’s always best to feed your workpiece in the direction that is on the opposite side of the spinning bit. This technique prevents the material from being forced or shot out, causing loss of control over the piece.
To find out the right feeding direction, you can use the right-hand technique. Curl your fingers and have your thumb stick out. Now, your thumb will either point upward for a router table or downward for a handheld router.
Adjust the position of your hand so that the curled fingers face the same direction as the cutting bit. Based on the position of your fingers, you can determine the spinning bit direction. And with that knowledge, you should be able to feed the workpiece through the blades without any issues.
Of course, keep the machine powered down while you determine the feeding router direction for safety.
3. Benefits of small pass routing
A good rule to follow when routing is to refrain from cutting more than half of the width of the bit you are using. So, for ½-inch bits, you should not cut more than ¼-inch of the material with each pass.
Single large passes are almost always inferior to multiple small passes when it comes to cutting quality. Multiple cutting passes are safer and provide better results while ensuring that your bits don’t wear off as easily. Moreover, one pass causes the ability to make accurate cuts to suffer as well, as it is much more likely for the router to cut more than desired.
Lastly, small passes reduce the chances of kickback drastically, preventing your workpiece from harming you or the machine by the time you make the final pass or rotation. Needless to say, small pass routing is simply the better option.
4. Mastering depth stops on the plunge base
A wood router depth stop has an adjustable rod and a rotating turret, which enable you to adjust the cutting depth of the router bit sticks. You can approach adjusting depth stops in one of two ways, as detailed below.
Method 1
To cut a ¾-inch deep mortise and tenon using a plunge router, you can adjust the depth stop in the following way:
Keep the turret at the highest graduation setting.
Lower the plunge base until the bit comes in contact with the workpiece, and then lock it in place.
Lock the stop rod after lowering it enough to touch the turret (this acts as the zero stop).
Next, lower the turret by ¼-inch, which is where the next lowest graduation is.
Make the first router pass and continue making further passes by lowering the turret.
Repeat the process until you reach the lowest graduation.
Method 2
For making a cut that isn’t at ¼-inch intervals, follow these steps.
Bring the plunge router base down to align the router with the cut depth line.
Lower the turret to the lowest graduation, then the depth rod to mark the final depth.
Bring the turret and the router up to the highest graduation to begin making passes.
Use the adjustable screw on the turret to stop at desired heights.
5. Starting smoothly with ramp-up
Using a starting ramp is always advisable, particularly if you are using the machine for pattern routing. Its role is to provide the router bit with a safe place to come into contact with the template before it can begin cutting.
Consider adding an exit ramp on the other end of the template for a safe exit as well.
Picking and maintaining router bits
While having a selection of router bits can be a good thing for advanced woodworkers, it’s not necessarily always so, particularly for beginners. There are a few varieties of router bits that can help you finish any project without any issues, eliminating the need for specialized router bits.
Additionally, let’s go over a few tips to maintain router bits and keep them working for a long while.
1. Essential router bits guide
As far as the basic router bits go, there are eleven bits that you can rely on without any hesitation, grouped into three types. These router bits can cover nearly every carpentry need, making them a vital part of your woodworking arsenal.
Here are the three types of router bits, along with a brief glance at the eleven router bits.
A. Grooving bits
The primary function of grooving bits is to help you create grooves, and the type of grooves they create is based on the bit tips. You can use straight bits for basic square-shaped grooves or V-groove bits for creating V-shaped profiles.
B. Joinery bits
Primarily meant for creating notches into a material for durable joints, joinery bits can be a crucial part of your bit collection. These include the following sharp bits:
Rabbet router bits can create an L-shaped shoulder to form a rabbet joint or hinge
A dovetail bit can be used to fashion a strong dovetail joint
Flush trim bits can trim the overhanging material after cutting the surface edge
Glue joint bits can create identical tongues to help two blocks join
C. Edge-forming bits
Edge-forming bits are designed to be able to sculpt the edges of the material, making them a useful tool for all carpenters and workshop owners. These include the following bits:
A round-over bit can cut a rounded profile for a more finished appearance
Molding router bits can create molding that runs along the top and bottom of the material
Roman Ogee bits can help you make S-shaped profiles for molding, furniture, etc.
Chamfer routing bits can make bevel cuts on the decorative edge of the material
Cover router bits create a concave rounded profile often seen on tables or stools
2. Achieve chip-free cuts
Creating smooth and chip-free cuts with regular bits can be a bit of a challenge. To overcome this challenge, you can consider using a spiral bit instead for higher cutting accuracy and better overall finish.
When it comes to spiral bits, you can choose either an up-cut bit, a down-cut bit, or a compression bit, based on what you need. Up-cut bits are better suited for creating mortises in wood, as they can drive wood chips out and away from the cutting surface. On the other hand, a down-cut bit forces the chips downward, which is more suitable for creating chip-free dados in melamine and plywood.
A compression bit has spirals that run in both the upward and downward direction, forcing chips to stay in the middle instead. This makes it better for edge routing when working with melamine or plywood, as the finish remains consistent on both sides.
Note that down-cut router bits are a poor choice for router tables as they tend to force the workpiece off the table.
3. One bit for multiple dado sizes
If you want to save the setup time and effort, you can use a single bit and a custom-made baseplate to make four dados at once. Every baseplate side is farther away from the bit by a factor of 1/16-inch. This means that if one side is close to the bit, the next would be 1/16-inch away from it, the following one would be ⅛-inch away from it, and so on.
Begin by making the first cut space at the 0-inch setting, after which you can rotate the router and the baseplate. Doing so will enlarge the dado, and you can continue working with each side until you have the desired results. Alternatively, you can also make it so that the baseplate has smaller progressions of 1/32 inch or 1/64 inch to accommodate undersized plywood in dados.
Note that precise measurements are necessary for making an accurate baseplate. So, the best way to go about this is to make it oversized at first and then mount it upon the router.
4. Two-step process for thick parts
Shaping thick workpieces is an inevitable part of carpentry, one that many beginners tend to struggle with.
You can make identical parts with a thick workpiece, which can be simplified by using a template and top-bearing pattern bits. While it may appear that top-bearing pattern bits cannot be used for thicker parts, this is not the case, as shown in the following steps.
Step 1: Work on the bottom half of the workpiece
Using the top-bearing pattern bit, work on the bottom half of the workpiece. By routing the bottom half of the part, you will be able to remove the workpiece from the template and proceed to the next step.
Step 2: Use a bottom-bearing flush-trim bit
Install the bottom-bearing flush-trim bit into the wood router and adjust its height to match the surface of the pattern bit. All that is left to do is to finish shaping the workpiece.
Precise routing methods
Wood routers are tools that are inherently reliant upon precise routing methods for successful results. As such, the importance of precise routing methods cannot be understated.
So, here is a brief overview of the subject and how you can improve the results of your wood routing efforts.
1. Dual featherboards for accuracy
Two feather boards are better than one for straight and smooth cuts, particularly when narrow moldings are concerned. And while it’s not feasible to try and feed the stock completely through, you can consider making the molding longer.
Leave some uncut wood at the end, which will serve as the handle for when you begin cutting. Once you have pushed the workpiece as far as you were able, simply switch the router off and cut the handle off.
2. Jointer-free straight edges
You can use a router to join boards and make a long straightedge without any issues. For this, you can use an 8 x 12-foot plywood, along with an 8-foot x 1-inch x 1-inch aluminum angle, 8 feet of T-track, and commercial clamps for the T-tracks.
Begin routing the plywood to make it so that the T-track and the angle are flush with the surface. Glue the T-track onto the groove using epoxy adhesive, and drill and countersink holes in the aluminum angle. This will allow you to screw it to the plywood.
Now, clamp the board to make it so that the uneven edge hangs over the straight edge. Install a bottom-bearing flush-trim bit and begin routing.
3. Secrets to perfect miter joints
Getting a miter joint to be perfect is quite difficult for many woodworkers, but it needn’t necessarily be so. Here are three tips that can make your miter joints nearly perfect.
A. Remove most of the waste before routing
Consider using a table saw or bandsaw to clear out the waste from the wooden material before routing. The efficiency of router bits, and chamfer bits, in particular, skyrockets when working on smaller workpieces.
B. Make a zero-clearance opening
You can make a zero-clearance opening around the bit to keep the workpiece steady and prevent it from tipping into the blades. This can be done by cutting the fences of your router table.
C. Use backer boards to prevent blow-out
A backer board can be used to prevent blowouts from the router. Simply hold the backer board behind the workpiece while operating the machine and try leaving a spot at the end of the workpiece. Make a note not to shorten the length of your material, which may require you to adjust the fence or the height of the bit.
4. Squaring large surface tops
Squaring large table tops is a simple matter of using a large pattern bit with your router. To prepare for the task, use a table saw or a bandsaw to cut the surface top and make it as close to the final size as possible.
Now, use a piece of plywood or fiberboard as a guide, along with two adjacent factory edges that help you ascertain the cutting angles. Position the guide piece on a pencil marking that indicates where the table top will end, after which you can lamp one edge of the guide piece to the top.
Install a standard ½-inch flush-trim bit to proceed with the final step of the process and finish making the cuts.
5. Long board tenon cuts
Cutting tenons on rails can be made rather easy using a router in tandem with parallel guide blocks. These blocks are two pieces of wood that are connected by alignment pins.
Shorten the length of the rails until they are a couple of inches longer than the desired length. Use a ½-inch bit and mark how far the router table can cut from the edge of the baseplate, and then clamp the guide blocks onto the rail.
Once you ascertain that they are square to the rail, you can begin routing. Start by keeping the cutting depth of the blade at 1/16-inch less than the desired depth and begin making passes. Continue measuring the thickness of the tenon and lowering the bit depth until you are satisfied with the result. And lastly, finish by cutting off the waste pieces.
6. Baseplate hole alignment tips
An additional baseplate for a router is always welcome, particularly when you use it often on larger surfaces. That said, it can be a little difficult to align the screw holes meant to fasten the baseplate to the router.
To make the job easy, you can use special cone-pointed screws. These are available in several thread sizes, and you can match them with the right nut to use them as baseplate screws.
Now, mark diagonal lines from one corner to the other and drill a small ¼-inch hole where the straight lines cross each other. Install the baseplate screws in the router table base and fit the baseplate over the bit by sliding it on. And lastly, you can softly strike the baseplate over the position of each screw, which creates a small divot for centering the drill bit.
Avoiding router pitfalls
Like shapersand other power tools, it’s important to avoid performing certain actions that may harm either the wood router table or the workpiece. Not only do such actions end up wasting time, but they may also damage either the router table or the material, neither of which are desirable outcomes.
Here are a few tips on what to avoid while operating a wood router.
1. End-grain tear-out prevention
A tear-out is something that no woodworker wishes to see while using a router. To avoid this, consider routing end grain edges before working on anything else.
Additionally, you can use a backer board and hold it up against the workpiece in order to align their wood grain edges at the end. Now, begin making the first pass through the workpiece and continue until you route over the scrap with the final pass.
2. Efficient small molding cuts
Routing the workpiece profile on wider boards is generally preferable due to the safer and easier nature. Any shaped edges can then be cut off using a table saw.
3. How to flatten wide boards
Wideboards, such as those found in a door, typically don’t fit through planers and are difficult to flatten. You can flatten wide boards using a router, as detailed below:
Lay the wide board atop a large, flat workbench
Position shims under the wide board to prevent it from moving
Create two guide boards that are about 1 foot longer than the workpiece
Clamp the guides to the workbench and ensure that they are an equal distance apart
Create a sliding carriage for the router using two pieces of aluminum angle
Attach the angles to two cleats
Affix a large-diameter bit to your router table and begin making passes
4. Correcting your edge guide
Even newly purchased edge guides may end up failing to help you make an accurate cut, which can cause errors and frustration. That said, fixing edge guides is quite simple and can be done within a matter of minutes, as described in the following steps:
Loosen the screws on the sides of the fence
Move the sides of the fence closer until they come in contact with one another
If not available, make an auxiliary fence by screwing a piece of plywood to the front
This will ensure that your edge guide produces no errors and helps you achieve the desired results.
Upgrading your router setup
If you are left wanting more with the existing router setup, you can easily upgrade it. Not only will it increase the efficiency of your cuts, but it will also help your router age rather gracefully.
Here is a list of a few quality-of-life upgrades for your routing machine.
1. Simplified groove jig guide
A simple two-board groove jig can be all you need to finish even the most elaborate woodworking projects, which can be made by doing the following:
Create two square pieces of plywood
Glue them together at 90 degrees and add a few screws to add stability
Use a pencil or marker to mark the desired unit of measurement
Create a groove along the bottom edge using your router
This jig can be set up on any workpiece, with its grooved edge in contact with the material. Its highly adaptive nature makes it suited for any groove or dado cut, which is ideal for any woodworker. Just ensure that its measurements are correct.
Tip
You may need to create variations on this specific jig based on the groove widths you work with, but they are rather simple to make.
2. Ultimate routing sled tips
A common issue with sleds and toggle clamps is that they may create a misaligned joint, which can be attributed to the ¼-inch thick base. The base tends to bend under pressure, causing the misalignment. To solve this, simply use a board close to the front of the sled, along with two top boards to bridge over the workpiece.
3. Router base trim solutions
Leveling screw-hole plugs can be done very quickly, as shown below:
Use two pieces of plywood, each ½-inch thick, to act as a baseplate
Adjust the cutting depth of the router bit to cut a sliver above the bottom of the baseplate
Trim the plugs with the router and sand them with a piece of sandpaper.
4. Quick mortise jig methods
Within a few minutes, you can create a mortising jig that only needs a plunge router to assemble. Listed below are the steps for doing so.
Affix a 3- or 4-inch square block to the workbench.
Attach a 5-inch stop block close to one of its ends.
Push the workpiece against the stop block and clamp it down.
Place the mortise above the workpiece.
Adjust the edge guide of the router to cut within the desired area.
Place two stop blocks above the large block to prevent any undesired router movement.
Proceed to cut all of the mortises after ensuring that they are all centered.
5. Large bit box fence guide
A custom-made fence can help you operate a large raised-panel bit without worrying about your own safety or that of the workpiece. You will only need a large box that has a plastic top, along with a dust port, to create this fence. Close to the front of the box is a faceboard that can be adjusted up and down.
This large-bit box fence guide can be placed on the panel in a way similar to a feather board for smooth cuts.
6. Advanced sandwich clamping
You can use a two-sided template in order to prevent tear-outs on curved pieces. Simply turn the template over to cut along the wooden grain.
What are the disadvantages of a wood router?
The primary disadvantages of a wood router include potential hazards and noise pollution. The operation of wood routers, especially with larger bits, can cause wood chips to scatter, posing a safety risk that necessitates appropriate protective gear. Moreover, these tools can be quite loud, often requiring the use of hearing protection during use.
What are the different types of wood routers?
The different types of wood routers include plunge routers, fixed-base routers, router tables, variable-speed routers, trim routers, etc. There are several subtypes of routers as well that are capable of tackling tasks that may not be possible with a normal router. Combo routers, for instance, can perform the functions of a plunge base router and a fixed base router tool without having to choose either.
Wood routers are highly versatile tools that can be used for a multitude of projects. Like any power tool, the router requires its user to understand the basics of its operation before moving to a more complex operation.
With the tips listed in this guide, you will be able to work using the power tool more efficiently and finish products with great results. Through regular upgrades and proper routing methods, you will be able to continue using your wood router for a long time.
When combined with the expertise of a seasoned woodworker, wood routers can be an inseparable part of any carpentry project.
Safety at the router table is critical. Always wear eye and ear protection, use a push block or stick, secure long hair, and avoid loose clothing during use. This article outlines key safety rules and provides a relevant safety test to ensure proper routing practices.
Using a router improperly risks serious injury, making adherence to safety tips and conducting tests vital to secure your router table. This practice maintains both the workpiece's integrity and the craftsman's well-being, allowing the pursuit of art creation with peace of mind. For more on router table safety, refer to this article. Remember, the challenges of routing should never jeopardize your safety.
Router table safety rules
1. Always wear safety glasses and hearing protection
It’s important to wear safety glasses when working with a router. The bit’s rotation can cause debris to fly out at high speed, potentially damaging your eyes. Additionally, wearing hearing protection will keep your ears safe from the noise the machine produces. After all, the router can reach up to 100 decibels, equivalent to standing near a chainsaw.
2. Keep hands away from the bit
This may seem like a no-brainer, but when you’re in the midst of routing, it can be challenging to resist the temptation to touch the spinning bit.
A wise craftsman knows how to keep their hands away, for a moment of carelessness could lead to disaster. Remember, it’s better to have ten fingers than to risk losing even one to tools like wood shapers and router tables.
3. Use push sticks and featherboards
When routing small parts or the edges of a workpiece, it can be difficult to maintain control and avoid contact with the rotating bit. This is where push sticks come in handy, allowing you to guide the workpiece safely while keeping your fingers intact.
Featherboards, on the other hand, are designed to support the workpiece and keep it stable against the fence, preventing it from being pulled away from the rotation of the bit.
4. Keep the workpiece flat and stable
To ensure a seamless routing experience, keeping your workpiece flat and stable on the router table is imperative.
Imagine routing a piece of wood with a wobbly edge that’s not secured in place. The rotation of the router bit can easily catch onto the uneven edge, causing your workpiece to slip or, worse, fly out of control. Not only will it create a huge mess, but it could also cause severe injury.
Also, always ensure the bit is securely in place with the correct shank and diameter bearing.
5. Avoid overloading the router
After spending time with it, I have found that any router, be it the Bosch or Dewalt router, needs just the right amount of power to do its job. And, if you overload it, it will struggle, overheat, and possibly burn out, leaving you with a useless tool and a pile of unfinished work.
That’s why it’s crucial not to overload your router. Adjust the speed according to the material you’re working with, and take breaks to let the router cool down.
6. Turn off the router before making adjustments
Times will arrive when you need to make adjustments to the router, such as changing the rotation of the bit, switching out the bit, or using a starter pin. Before you do all that, it’s important to unplug the machine and disconnect it from the power source. This will ensure the router bit doesn’t accidentally start spinning while your hands are near it, reducing the risk of injury.
Note:
Follow safety protocols and manufacturer’s instructions to prevent accidents and maintain operational safety.
Router table safety test
The Router Table Safety Test is crucial for verifying the equipment's operational safety and precision.
Preparation
Wear PPE: Safety glasses, ear protection, and a dust mask.
Clean Work Area: Clear obstructions, secure loose clothing, and tie back long hair.
Router table test procedure
Inspect and Secure Bit: Ensure it's correctly installed and tightened.
Adjust Bit Height: Set to the desired level and power down.
Secure Material: Fasten a test piece of wood to the router table.
Operate Router Safely: Power on, keeping hands and body away, and use push sticks or featherboards as needed.
Examine the Cut: Observe for signs of burning, tear-out, or chipping.
Power Down & Inspect: Switch off the router and assess the cut. If clean, the table passes the test.
Issues resolution
If issues are observed, rectify them before reusing and regularly maintain the equipment for safe operations. Always adhere to the manufacturer’s guidelines and safety protocols.
Importance of conducting the safety test regularly
Regularly conducting the router safety test is a crucial task. Drawing from experience, it can prevent accidents that may result in severe injuries, financial losses, and even permanent disability.
By conducting this test regularly, woodworkers can ensure that their router table is functioning correctly, its safety features are in place, and that their skills and knowledge are up-to-date. Remember, an ounce of prevention is worth a pound of cure, so take time to ensure your router table is safe before beginning any project.
Warning: Failure to properly secure the workpiece, adjust router bit height, or wear eye protection can result in severe injury or death while operating the router table.
Tips for passing the safety test
To navigate the treacherous waters of the router test, there are a few essential tips to keep in mind.
Always wear proper eye and ear protection.
Familiarize yourself with the machine’s components and operation manual, ensuring that you understand how to use it safely.
Keep your workspace clear of clutter and distractions, allowing for a clear focus on the task at hand.
Never rush to take shortcuts. Remember, safety should always be your priority!
What should the minimum distance be between the router bit and the fence during a cut to avoid kickback?
The minimum distance between a router bit and the fence to avoid kickback during a cut should be no less than ⅛ inch.
Is it safe to use a miter gauge on a router table?
Yes, it is safe to use a miter gauge on a router table, as long as the gauge is securely locked and the workpiece is firmly held down to avoid lifting and spinning into the bit.
Is it safe to wear gloves while operating a router table?
No, it is not safe to wear gloves while operating a router table. Wearing gloves can be dangerous as they might get caught in the bit, leading to severe injury. To keep hands safe, using push sticks or push blocks is recommended.
Woodworking can be a thrilling and rewarding experience, but it’s important not to let the excitement compromise safety. Remember, just like a good chef follows a recipe to avoid a kitchen disaster, a responsible woodworker follows safety rules and tests to ensure a successful project.
Prioritizing safety when using a router table can make the difference between a beautiful finished product and a tragic mistake. So, always keep your guard up, maintain a clear workspace, and use the proper safety gear to keep your fingers and your project intact.
Like a seasoned captain navigating a treacherous sea, a skilled woodworker should always be alert and prepared for any situation. Keep these safety tips in mind, test your router table regularly, and practice safe routing techniques to ensure that every woodworking project is smooth sailing.
Wood shapers and router tables are woodworking tools that shape and cut wood. Shapers are best for larger pieces and mass production, while router tables are good for small projects and versatility, both are essential for woodworking.
Wood shapers and router tables are machines essential for any woodworking shop. Whether you want to create a raised panel door or intricate molding, the right tool can make all the difference. This article will explore all the similarities and differences between these two tools, including cost, precision, speed, and much more.
Wood shaper basics
With its powerful motor, razor-sharp blades, and precise spindle, the wood shaper is truly the king of all woodworking tools. It is capable of transforming even the most unassuming piece of wood into a work of art.
Let’s take a closer look at some of the amazing features of the wood shaper.
First and foremost, we have the spindle - the heart of the machine. Whether you’re working with larger bits or smaller cutters, the spindle is available in various sizes so that you can choose the perfect one for your needs. With a wide speed range that can reach up to thousands of revolutions per minute, you can be sure that your wood will be cut with utmost precision.
Of course, the spindle wouldn’t be complete without the motor to drive it. That’s why they come with heavy-duty induction motors, capable of handling even the toughest woodworking jobs with ease. With more torque than a wood router, the wood shaper can cut through the thickest materials quickly and efficiently. Additionally, with a range of horsepower options available, you can choose just the right setting based on your needs.
Further, the wood shaper comes with other useful features, like the fence, which ensures that your workpiece stays in place and your cuts are precise. With a split fence that can be adjusted in multiple directions, you can work with the thickest grain directions.
Additionally, incorporating accessories like sliding tables and jigs allows even more precise cuts, while the dust collection system ensures that your workspace stays clean and safe.
Let’s not forget about the shaper cutter. With a range of options, including reversible shaper cutters, tile cutters, and raised panel cutters, you can easily create a variety of intricate designs. And my findings show that with the ability to make many cuts in one pass, you can save time and money on your woodworking projects.
So, how much does all of this incredible technology cost? Well, the total cost of wood shapers depends on various factors, such as the size of the machine and the number of features you choose.
But one thing’s certain - the wood shaper is a great tool for any serious woodworker. It may be more expensive than your average table saw or any other type of wood router, but it’s also more versatile and capable of performing many functions that these tools cannot.
Router table basics
Have you ever struggled with heavy-duty woodwork, sweating bullets while trying to make precise cuts on large pieces of wood with a handheld tool? Fear not, for the router table is here to save the day.
It consists of a tabletop, a spindle, and a motor. The spindle is the tool that holds the router bits, used to cut the wood material quickly and efficiently. And unlike a handheld router, the router keeps the wood stable while you work, making it easier to make precise cuts without worrying about vibration.
The tool comes in various sizes, and horse-powered motors to suit any need. Some router tables can even be paired with a spindle mount and a lifting system which can be paired with different router bits, allowing you to cut at tilting angles and add intricate details to your furniture. The speed range is also adjustable, making it possible to change the speed according to the material being used and the type of bit being employed.
Another great feather of the router is its fence, which can be adjusted to fit the size of the workpiece being cut. This feature helps to keep the wood in place and prevent the bit from wandering off track. Moreover, some router tables come equipped with a split fence that can be moved to either side of the bit to allow cuts in opposite directions.
The router table also can hold larger cutters than a handheld router. This means that it is possible to make a raised panel door and stile cuts in a single pass, saving you time and money. Some models even come with a power feeder that helps to move the wood through the cutter head automatically.
Dust collection is another important feature of the router table. This feature is especially helpful when working with smaller router bits, as the dust can quickly clog the cutter and hinder precision. Many tables come with a dust port that can be connected to a shop vacuum or a dust collector to help keep the workspace clean and free from sawdust.
Regarding the total cost of router tables, many options are available, ranging from simple tabletops to variable-speed router models with sliding tables and multiple functions. Regardless of the cost, this is an investment that will pay dividends through precise cuts and a smoother workflow.
Wood shaper vs router table compared
Now, we’ll explore the two wondrous machines in the woodworking arsenal, the wood shaper, and the router table, based on my first-hand experience. Both are mighty tools that shape and mold wood to our whims, but let’s compare them to know what makes them unique and necessary in their way.
1. Versatility
The router table can accomplish many functions with just one tool, making it a more versatile option. It can change the shape and size of wood according to your needs with its tilting spindle and wide range of spindle sizes.
However, the wood shaper is the most efficient tool for shaping larger pieces of wood with its large shaper cutters.
2. Speed
After spending time with the router table and the wood shaper, I have found that both spin their cutters at high speeds. Yet, the wood shaper can go even faster with a spindle reaching up to 10,000 revolutions per minute (RPM). This means it can cut through the wood quickly, making it perfect for heavy-duty work.
3. Precision
When it comes to precision, both machines can deliver, but the wood shaper takes the cake. Its heavier and larger motor provides more torque than router tables, making it better suited for working with harder woods. It can make a single pass on a larger workpiece, which saves time and effort compared to several passes on a router table.
4. Cost
The router table is more affordable than the wood shaper, making it perfect for hobbyists or those who want to save money. However, if you plan on creating large pieces of furniture, investing in a wood shaper may be a better long-term decision.
5. Dust collection
Both machines create a lot of sawdust, but the router table has an advantage with its split fence that allows for better dust extraction. This helps keep the workplace cleaner, especially when used with a shop vacuum.
However, a dust collection system can also be incorporated with the wood shaper, ensuring that your workspace stays hygienic and free of dust and dirt.
6. Fence
The router table has a universal fence that can be used with different sizes of bits, making it more versatile in terms of the type of cuts you can make. However, the wood shaper has a more heavy-duty fence that can handle larger workpieces and ensure that the wood doesn’t move during the cutting process.
7. Space
Regarding space, the router table is more compact and can fit smaller workshops or garages. The wood shaper takes up more space due to its sliding table and larger cutter head.
So, there you have it - the router table and the wood shaper, two great tools with similar functions but different specialties. Choose wisely according to your needs, budget, and space, among other factors. However, no matter what machine you choose, always pay attention to the grain direction, wear safety glasses follow the required safety rules, and have fun!
Shaper vs router table: What’s best for your workshop?
So, which is the true champion of the woodworking workshop? The answer lies not in one machine over the other but in the needs of the craftsperson. Drawing from experience, the router table is a versatile workhorse, capable of handling a wide variety of tasks with ease. And when it comes to shaping and profiling, the wood shaper is the king of the hill.
But why choose between the two when you can have the best of both worlds? The router table and the wood shaper can work together, each complementing the other’s strengths and weaknesses. With both of these machines at your fingertips, there’s no limit to what you can create.
So, will you choose the versatility of the router table or the raw power of the wood shaper? Or will you embrace them both and take your woodworking to new heights? The answer is up to you. But one thing is certain - anything is possible with either machine in your workshop.
Warning: Beware of the kickback zone. When using wood shapers and router tables, be vigilant near the rotational path of the cutter to prevent unpredictable wood ejection. Use protective gear and maintain proper workpiece control.
Can a router table be used as a wood shaper?
A router table cannot be used as a wood shaper despite having similar functions as they are distinct tools. A router table utilizes a handheld router mounted upside down, whereas a wood shaper has a spindle cutter. Although some tasks may overlap, they are not interchangeable due to their structural differences.
Is it possible to create a raised panel door using router tables?
Yes, it is possible to create a raised panel door using router tables with the appropriate router bits and a router table fence.
What safety precautions should beginners take when using router tables and wood sharpers?
A few safety precautions beginners should take when using router tables and wood sharpers are:
Always wearing safety goggles
Using push blocks or feather boards
Securing workpieces firmly
Remember to start with small cuts for better control and reduced kickback risks.
The debate between the wood shaper and a router tabletop is a thrilling contest of precision accessibility, and efficiency.
Wood shapers, with their powerful motors and adaptable spindles, excel at handling large workpieces and creating intricate profiles on wood. On the other hand, router tables offer the advantage of affordability and portability, making them ideal for small-scale operations and hobbyists.
Wood shapers embody raw power and precision, while router tables showcase flexibility and accessibility. Weighing these factors against individual needs will ensure a tailored decision for optimal woodworking outcomes.
In the end, the wood shaper and the router table have their unique advantages and disadvantages. As such, the final choice should be yours based on your woodworking requirements.
And that brings me to the end of this guide!
Bosch routers are versatile tools used for various woodworking tasks, while DeWalt routers are powerful and ideal for heavy-duty work, both brands are known to produce highly precise routers for professional woodworking.
Bosch, a subsidiary of Robert Bosch GmbH, and DeWalt are the two most popular brands in the power tool industry. These routers typesare equipped with state-of-the-art technology, such as electronic speed control and soft start technology. If you are in the market for a new wood router but can’t decide between the Bosch and the DeWalt read on to know which router comes out on top regarding usability, accuracy, and precision.
Bosch vs DeWalt routers compared
Now, let’s take a ride through the world of power tools, where the mighty Bosch and the sturdy DeWalt routers collide, and compare them to learn about their unique features.
1. Power and technology
Both Bosch and DeWalt routers come equipped with powerful electric motors that pack a punch, but it’s the technology that sets them apart. Bosch routers have a unique soft motor starter that reduces start-up torque, ensuring smooth and efficient cutting every time.
On the other hand, DeWalt routers come with full feedback control and electronic speed control that maintains constant speed throughout the cutting process, ensuring the most accurate and precise cuts.
2. Ergonomics and comfort
Regarding usability, both brands have stepped up their game with comfortable, user-friendly designs. Bosch routers have rounded hardwood handles that fit perfectly in hand, while DeWalt routers have dual ergonomic wooden handles that offer optimal grip and comfort.
These routers also have a plunge base router feature that makes them easy to handle, especially for beginners.
3. Dust collection system
Drawing from experience, Bosch routers come with a dust collection system integrated into the router, ensuring that all the dust and debris are collected for a clean work environment. Meanwhile, dust adapters can be used with DeWalt routers to capture dust and debris, reducing the need for a cleanup.
4. Depth adjustment
This feature allows for accurate and precise depth adjustments, making it easy to achieve the desired cutting line.
Precision is the key when it comes to woodworking, and Bosch routers take it to another level with their precise depth adjustment rings. DeWalt routers also have a depth adjustment rod for precise bit plunging and depth adjustments.
5. Material and construction
Bosch and DeWalt routers are built to last, but the materials and construction used differ.
Bosch routers are mostly made with aluminum construction, making them lightweight and durable. Meanwhile, DeWalt routers mostly have a steel and brass construction, making them strong and sturdy.
The materials also impact the weight, making Bosch routers more comfortable to handle and use for extended periods.
6. Speed and torque
Bosch routers have variable speed dial that allows for a broad range of speeds, while DeWalt routers have variable speeds that allow user control.
Regarding torque, Bosch routers offer a constant response circuitry that maintains torque throughout the cutting process. Meanwhile, DeWalt routers boast maximum motor horsepower for an extra power boost.
7. Kits and accessories
Both Bosch and DeWalt offer a range of router kits and accessories that cater to different needs. Bosch offers the 1617EVSPK router kit, which includes plunge and fixed bases, while DeWalt has the DW618PK combo kit, which also includes a fixed base and plunge router.
Bosch also has an edge tool guide that makes edge forming easy, while DeWalt has a slot-cutting feature that allows for efficient and precise cutting. No matter what you choose, both Bosh and DeWalt offer the best features, accessories, and router kits in the market, making them the go-to choice for both professionals and hobbyists.
Bosch vs DeWalt router product comparison
A. Bosch combination router vs DeWalt router
1. Power and performance
The Bosch MRC23EVSK Combination Router has a 15-amp motor with a 2.3 horsepower rating, which provides ample power for most routing tasks. On the other hand, the DeWalt DW618B3 has a 12-amp motor with a 2.25 horsepower rating, making it slightly less powerful.
2. Versatility
The Bosch MRC23EVSK Combination Router is a combination of plunge and fixed-base router kits. That means it can be used for a wide range of applications, including laminate trimming, dovetail joint routing, and template routing. The DeWalt DW618B3 also offers the same versatility as it comes with a fixed and plunge base, allowing for a variety of routing operations.
3. Collet and diameter
The Bosch MRC23EVSK Combination Router has a ¼ inch and ½ inch collet that accommodates a variety of router bits with different diameters. The DeWalt DW618B3 also has a ¼ inch and ½ inch collet that can accept a wide range of bit sizes.
4. Motor soft starter
The Bosch MRC23EVSK has a soft-start motor feature that provides a smooth and gradual start-up, which is beneficial in preventing unexpected potential jerks, reducing torque, and improving control. The DeWalt DW618B3 also has a soft-start feature that allows for better control and precision during routing.
5. Case and accessories
The Bosch MRC23EVSK comes with a hard case for storage and transport, as well as a range of accessories, including a plunge base, fixed base, vacuum adapter, and a wrench. The DeWalt DW618B3 also includes a hard case, plunge and fixed-bases, wrench, and dust extraction adapter.
6. Price
The Bosch MRC23EVSK Combination Router is typically priced higher than the DeWalt DW618B3. The price difference may be due to the higher horsepower, motor soft-starter feature, and natural rubber grips on the Bosch model.
7. Weight
The DeWalt DW618B3 weighs around 27.2 pounds, making it a bit heavier than the Bosch MRC23EVSK, which weighs around 25.8 pounds. This weight difference may impact user comfort during prolonged use.
8. Angle and lever
Both the Bosch MRC23EVSK and the DeWalt DW618B3 have a variety of features that allow for angle adjustments and lever controls, making them both highly customizable and easy to use.
9. Metal and aluminum
Both the Bosch MRC23EVSK and the DeWalt618B3 are made of durable materials, including metal and aluminum, ensuring long-lasting performance and durability.
B. Bosch wood router vs DeWalt router
1. Power and speed
The Bosch 1617EVSPK Wood Router Tool Combo is powered by a 2.25 horsepower motor, while the DeWalt DWP611PK Router has a 1.25 horsepower motor. The Bosch router also has a speed range of 8,000 to 25,000 RPM, which is slightly higher than the DeWalt’s range of 16,000 to 27,000 RPM.
2. Base types
The Bosch 1617EVSPK router combination kit includes both a fixed and plunge base, while the DeWalt DWP611PK router kit also includes both bases.
3. Ergonomics and comfort
The Bosch 1617EVSPK router has a comfortable grip made of natural rubber, while the DeWalt DWP611PK has a molded handle for enhanced control. The Bosch’s plunge base also has a dual-handle design with trigger control, whereas the DeWalt’s plunge base has a single-handle design with a lock button.
4. Depth adjustment
The Bosch 1617EVSPK router has a microfine depth adjustment system that allows for precise and accurate adjustments. Meanwhile, the DeWalt DWP611PK has a coarse adjustment system that requires the user to reset the depth every time making an adjustment.
5. Collet size
The Bosch 1617EVSPK router accepts both ¼ inch and ½ inch shank bits, while the DeWalt DWP611PK accepts only ¼ inch shank bits.
6. Machine body
The Bosch 1617EVSPK router is made of aluminum, while the DeWalt DWP611PK has a machine body made of metal.
7. Lamination capability
The Bosch 1617EVSPK router has a lamination capability with a special attachment, while the DeWalt DWP611PK does not offer this feature.
8. Dust collection
The Bosch 1617EVSPK router has a vacuum adapter for dust collection, while the DeWalt DWP611PK comes with a dust-sealed switch and vacuum adapter.
9. Dovetail joint capability
The DeWalt DWP611PK has a dovetail joint capability with a template guide, while the Bosch 1617EVSPK router combo kit does not offer this feature.
10. Price
The DeWalt DWP611PK router kit is generally more affordable than the Bosch 1617EVSPK router combo kit. Ultimately, choosing the best router between Bosch and DeWalt models depends on personal preference, the specific requirements of your woodworking projects, and the amount of money you’re willing to invest.
Warning: Some Bosch and DeWalt routers may emit harmful electromagnetic radiation that could interfere with pacemakers and other medical devices.
Can a Bosch router be used as a hand-held planer?
No, a Bosch router is not intended to be used as a hand-held planer. While both tools share some similarities in functionality, they are designed for different purposes.
A hand-held planer is primarily used to quickly remove large amounts of material, whereas a router is used for precision cuts and shaping edges. Attempting to use a Bosch router as a hand-held planer can damage the tool and create an unsafe working environment.
Using the right tool for the job is essential to ensure efficiency, safety, and quality results.
How does the depth adjustment system work in a DeWalt router?
The depth adjustment system that comes with DeWalt routers works by allowing you to adjust the cutting depth quickly and accurately.
The depth adjustment system works by adjusting the position of the motor relative to the base. The motor housing is attached to a threaded rod that moves the motor up and down as the adjustment knob is turned. As the motor moves, the distance between the bit and the base changes, controlling the cutting depth.
DeWalt routers come with clear markings and detents to make precise depth adjustments easier. Additionally, some DeWalt routers feature a micro-adjustment ring that provides even greater precision for fine-tuning your cutting depth.
Can I use a Bosch router with a DeWalt router table?
Yes, you can use a Bosch router with a DeWalt router table but ensure the router is compatible with the table before making any adjustments.
The most important thing is to ensure that your router is securely mounted to the table and that the bit is centered correctly. Most router tablescome with a variety of adjustment plates that can be used to fit different router models. Alternatively, you can make your adapter plate to fit your Bosch router.
With the right adjustments and precautions, you can use a Bosh router with a DeWalt router table to achieve professional-grade cuts and finishes.
Choosing the right router is like picking the perfect paintbrush for an artist - it can make or break the masterpiece.
After careful consideration and evaluation, it is clear that the Bosch MRC23EVSK takes the crown as the ultimate router kit. Its 15-amp, 2.3 horsepower motor provides an impressive speed control range, making it versatile enough to handle all woodworking projects impeccably.
The combination of plunge and fixed-base design allows for more flexibility, providing the freedom to switch between tasks without missing a beat. And with the bonus of a durable hard case, it’s a no-brainer for serious woodworkers who demand the best.
While the Bosch 1617EVSPK and the DeWalt DW618B3 come close in terms of power and versatility, the DeWalt DWP611PK falls short with its lower horsepower and torque. In conclusion, if you want the ultimate routing experience, the Bosch MRC23EVSK is the one you should go for.
Wood routers are often categorized based on their form or size. There are seven types of routers based on the form, which are plunge, fixed-base, combo, compact, cordless, trim, and CNC routers. And in terms of size, there are three types, which are light-size, medium-size, and heavy-size routers.
A router is one of the most essential tools of a professional woodworker these days, thanks to its versatility.
Not only is it used for cutting and shaping wood, but it is also used for trimming and detailing on plastic, metal, and a range of other materials. However, if you are new to woodworking, you may not know what a router exactly is and what its types are.
That is why I have discussed the different types of routers in this guide. So, if you are curious to know more, then dive in!
What is a wood router?
Before I get into its types, let me give you some idea about what this tool is. As I have stated before, a router (woodworking) is a machine that can be used to trim and shape different types of materials. It consists of a flat base at the bottom, along with a rotating blade or spindle bit that extends past the base.
The electric motor present inside the machine spins the blade or the router bit at speeds of over 30,000 revolutions per minute (RPM). That, in turn, allows the machine to shave off materials from the surface. Because of that, you can create grooves and patterns on the surface.
You can use a router for different types of tasks, such as creating straight, rounded, or concave edges, making a chamfer or a bevel, and so on. If you are skilled enough, you can use it for precision tasks like making complex curves and grooves. It can also be used for creating joinery structures like a dado (joinery), dovetail joint, mortise and tenon joint, and others.
A router is typically a handheld tool, but you can mount it on top of a router table (woodworking), converting it into a stationary machine with a fixed base. In this scenario, it becomes similar to a table saw, which is another common tool that is used for cutting wood. However, it is not nearly as versatile as a router.
Routers can be classified into different types based on factors like form and size. In the following sections, I have discussed the different types of routers in greater detail.
7 types of wood routers based on form
When I say form, I am referring to the overall design of the router. In that context, there are three different types of wood routers based on the form, which have been described below.
1. Plunge router
This is one of the most common types of wood routers that is used today. Also known as a plunge base router, this woodworking tool can be used to create deep groove patterns on wood, as well as dadoes and templates.
A typical plunge router has a body that is attached to the base with the help of two metal bars. The body houses the motor and the cutting bit, raised just above the working area. This pair of metal bars allows the body to move up and down repeatedly. The vertical movement of the housing helps to bore through the working surface.
So, to use a plunge router, you will have to position it directly over the object. When you turn the machine on, the router bit will drill into the surface to create holes and grooves.
If you use a good drill bit or cutting blade, you can use a plunge router to perform high-precision tasks. Likewise, plunge routers usually come with variable speed settings, which allow you to adjust the rate at which the drill bit cuts through the material.
2. Fixed-base router
The fixed-base router is another common option used by woodworkers. Fixed-base routers are highly versatile tools that can be used for a wide range of cutting and drilling tasks. Thus, if you are looking for a multipurpose router, you should consider getting this option.
That said, a fixed-base router has a fairly complex design, which can make it a bit intimidating for beginners. It consists of a powerful electric motor that is attached to a flat metal base. Adjacent to the motor housing, you will find handles to hold the machine, as well as depth and speed adjustment knobs.
The handles are necessary because the tool generates a considerable amount of centrifugal force when in use. If you do not hold on to it firmly, then you will lose control of the machine easily, which can be dangerous.
Warning: I noticed in my testing that the router bit of a fixed-base model moves clockwise in most cases. So, you should try to move the device in a left-to-right direction to make sure that the bit does not spin away from you without cutting into the surface.
3. Combo router
As you can guess from the name, a combo router combines the features of both plunge and fixed-base models. Such a type of router comes with a frame that can be used interchangeably with a plunge base and a fixed base.
Naturally, a combo router can be used for different types of woodworking and cabinetry tasks. You can use it for creating joints, dadoes, and grooves, as well as trimming lumber edges, beveling door and window frames, creating patterns, carving shapes, and many more.
However, the versatility and features come at a steep price, which is a drawback of this type of router. Also, based on my observations, beginners may find combo routers fairly complicated to use.
If you are not very experienced with routers, you may have difficulty deciding on which base to use for specific tasks. Similarly, it might take you a long time to set up the router before you can start using it.
4. Compact router
Unlike the two types of routers that I have described before, a compact router features a small and lightweight design (hence the name). It is essentially a small-scale version of a regular fixed-base router that you can hold in the palm of your hand. Because of this reason, it is otherwise known as a palm router.
Do not be fooled by its small size, though, for this type of router can pack a punch! As per my expertise, the compact router models that are sold today come with relatively heavy-duty motors. While it may not be as powerful as a full-sized plunge or fixed-base router, it is good enough for most types of woodwork, such as drilling, cutting, or trimming.
Thanks to that aspect, you will get the same work quality with these tools as you get with a regular fixed-base router. Moreover, the smaller size of this router makes it easy to use, especially for beginners and casual DIYers.
Since the drill bit is comparatively small, you will get better precision and accuracy with this type of router. Its small size makes it better suited to reach the tough corners of a furniture piece. However, using it on large surfaces and lumber pieces can be inefficient and time-consuming.
5. Cordless router
As the name suggests, a cordless router does not come with any cords. Instead, it is powered by a rechargeable battery, which sets it apart from other types of routers. It is pretty easy to use since you do not have to worry about pesky wires and power cords littered all over the workspace. That can consequently help to keep your workplace cleaner and more organized.
In terms of usability, cordless routers are best suited for light or medium woodworking jobs. Based on my trials, I can say that it is great for tasks like shaping edges or trimming. While the rotational speeds are almost as high as corded models in these tasks, it will start to slow down when used on hardwood, steel, or other rigid surfaces.
That’s because the motor is not as powerful as a conventional corded model in most cases. Also, you will need to recharge the battery more often if you use it extensively. These aspects can limit the scope of this tool for professional carpenters and woodworkers. However, if you are a beginner, you will find it quite beneficial.
6. Trim router
A trim router is a special type of router that is used for trimming laminate surfaces. Because of that reason, these routers are also known as laminate trimmers. After you perform plastic lamination on a plywood or metal base, you will need to trim their edges to get rid of any excess laminate. This task can be performed with the help of such a router.
In terms of size, these routers are even smaller than compact routers, and they are extremely lightweight. These features make the tool easy to hold and operate. Apart from that, the motor can spin the drill bit at a high RPM, which is particularly beneficial for trimming laminate surfaces. That’s because the high rotational speed prevents the lamination from shattering.
On the flip side, this type of router is not suitable for cutting or drilling through hardwood or other rigid materials. Similarly, the tool won’t be very efficient for trimming large lumber pieces either.
7. CNC router
A CNC router is another specialized tool that is used primarily by professional woodworkers in an industrial setting. The acronym CNC stands for “computer numerical controlled,” which means that this type of router is operated with the help of computer programs. Therefore, if you do not have adequate expertise, you won’t be able to use this machine.
This type of router is pretty expensive to purchase and has considerably large dimensions. That is why it is often used in woodworking industries, for regular people and individual woodworkers won’t be able to afford or accommodate it.
With that being said, CNC routers are designed for high-precision woodworking tasks. On top of that, they are extremely versatile and can perform any type of job, regardless of the complexity or scope. Aside from that, the tool is equipped for bulk processes, which is common within an industrial setting. In other words, it can perform a high volume of woodworking tasks in a short time.
3 types of routers based on size
The size of a router refers not only to the overall dimensions of the router but also to the capability of the machine to handle different types of workloads. Naturally, larger routers will be equipped with heavy-duty components, meaning that they will be able to handle heavier workloads with ease. Smaller routers, on the other hand, will only be suitable for small-scale woodworking projects.
In any case, I have discussed the different types of routers based on the size below.
1. Light-size router
Light-size routers have relatively compact dimensions and are designed to be lightweight. The internal components of these routers, such as the drill bits and collets, are comparatively small. As I experienced it first-hand, these routers can often accommodate drill bits that have a diameter of less than 0.25 inches.
Similarly, the collet diameter can go up to a maximum of 0.5 inches. Likewise, the motor found in this type of router is less powerful, and it cannot be used for a long duration or heavy loads. That’s why light-size routers are alternatively known as light-duty routers.
This doesn’t mean that a light-duty router is inadequate, though. They are highly preferred by amateur woodworkers, casual DIYers, and hobbyists. These routers are semi-professional tools that are great for small woodworking projects. Besides, using a light-size router is fairly simple, and it requires very little knowledge or expertise.
2. Medium-size router
A medium-size router, which is otherwise known as a medium-duty router, is a type of professional-grade tool. This type of router is a lot more versatile and powerful than a light-size router, which is why it is commonly used by experienced DIYers and woodworkers.
However, they are not as powerful as heavy-size routers, which gives them an intermediate level of proficiency and versatility. The drill bits and collets are larger than the ones used in light-duty routers but smaller than those used in heavy-size routers.
Based on my tests, I found that these components are around 0.5 inches in most cases. The motors have an intermediate level of effectiveness, too. They can be generally used for prolonged periods but are not suitable for hard surfaces.
These above reasons make medium-duty routers suitable for most types of woodworking jobs as long as they are performed in a controlled manner. So, if you intend to use these routers for heavy loads, you will find them to be relatively inefficient.
3. Heavy-size router
The last type of router that I will be discussing is the heavy-size router. Most routers of this type have considerable weight and large dimensions and are designed to handle heavy-duty woodworking projects. That is why they are also known as heavy-duty routers.
These routers have the largest collet sizes, and they can accommodate router cutters that are around 1.5 inches in diameter. Thanks to that, you can use them for drilling or cutting through the toughest materials, such as dense hardwood, plastic, steel, and so on.
Aside from that, a typical heavy-size router is equipped with a powerful motor that can be used for extended periods. This electric motor can spin the drill bit at extremely high speeds for maximum drilling effectiveness. On that note, such a motor generally comes with variable speed settings, which means that you can spin it at a lower speed, too, if necessary.
3 important router components to consider
Now that you know about the different types of routers, you should get some idea about some of the essential router components that can help with your woodworking projects. These components are mostly removable or interchangeable and can help to alter the specifications of this power tool.
1. Router bits
The router bit is one of the most crucial components in this machine since it helps to drill through the work surface. Normally, the shanks of router bits range between 0.25 and 0.5 inches in length. Apart from that, the tip styles differ depending on the type of task.
2. Router table
A router table is an optional component that acts as a fixed workstation, provided. It can make complex woodworking tasks fairly simple, which makes them a great choice for beginners. However, it sacrifices the mobility of the router in favor of convenience. Also, you have to ensure that the table is placed on an even surface, or else it will not be very useful.
3. Router jigs
Router jigs are tools that help in guiding the drill bit. This component can ensure higher accuracy, which makes it particularly effective when cutting joints or performing precision tasks.
What is a soft starter in a wood router?
A soft starter is a component in a wood router that gives you better control when starting up the motor. Many router models have motors that come with relatively high horsepower ratings and torque. On starting up such a powerful motor, you might experience a significant kickback, where the router will jump in your hands, making you lose control. That is why a soft starter is used, as it can prevent such kickbacks.
What type of router should I buy?
The type of router you should buy depends on what type of tasks you wish to do, as well as your expertise level. If you want to perform small projects or are new to woodworking, you can use light-size or even compact, cordless, or plunge routers. But if you have sufficient experience and want to undertake complex projects, you would be better off with any of the other types of routers.
Can I control the depth of the router drill bit?
Yes, you can control the depth of the router drill bit on many router models these days. Such a feature offers more flexibility to the machine, especially when used alongside variable speed settings and other similar features. Not all brands provide depth control settings on routers, though, which means that you will have to check this aspect before purchasing.
What are the best brands for routers?
Some of the best brands for routers that I would recommend are DeWalt, Makita, Milwaukee, and Bosch. Each of these recommended brands has demonstrated consistently high standards through rigorous testing and customer feedback.
Although there are numerous other brands in the market, not all maintain the same level of quality and performance. Therefore, it's wise to consider these trusted brands when purchasing a router.
With that, I have arrived at the end of this guide about the different types of routers. Now that you know all about this aspect, you can finally get to select the best one for your woodworking needs.
Of course, you will need to keep different factors in mind while making the final purchase. These factors include things like the power of the motor, the size and type of the drill bits and collets, handle configuration, dust collection, and disposal features, and others.
The above features will help you to get the best value for your money. So, you should not overlook them at any cost.
Trim routers and regular routers are essential tools in every woodworker’s arsenal as a trim router is more suitable for smaller projects and intricate work, while a regular router is ideal for heavy-duty routing tasks. The clear winner as the “best” router of the two depends on your use case and expertise.
A woodworking router is a versatile tool that can help you make intricate designs, precise cuts, and unique shapes on wood.
These tools are commonly used by woodworkers and carpenters to create decorative edges, cut dadoes and grooves, and create intricate inlays. However, with so many different router types, choosing the right one for your work can be a challenging task.
Hence, in this comparative guide, I have explained the difference between the two popular types of routers - trim routers and regular routers. For better understanding of the information, I’ve also listed the pros and cons of each, so make sure you read till the end.
What is a trim router?
A trim router (or a laminate trimmer) is a handheld woodworking tool designed for precision trimming and shaping wood. It is also used to trim laminate like Formica. These tools are typically smaller and more lightweight than regular routers, making them easy to handle and operate with one hand.
Moving on, a trim router is ideal for a range of projects, such as trimming laminate or wood veneer, routing small grooves, and more. They are also ideal for working on small, intricate projects that require precision and finesse, such as creating dovetail jointsor decorative inlays.
Additionally, a trim router comes in handy for trimming corners and making detailed cuts in small workpieces. This makes them a versatile tool for any novice woodworker or DIY enthusiast.
What is a plunge router?
A regular router (or a plunge router) is a powerful woodworking tool used for cutting, shaping, and trimming wood, plastic, and other materials. Regular routers have a larger motor and are designed to handle heavy-duty routing tasks. They are available in both handheld and table-mounted versions.
Moreover, standard routers are ideal for a wide range of projects, including cutting a dado, shaping a decorative edge, and making joinery cuts. They are also useful for carving, engraving, and curved-edge cutting.
Owing to their large size and motor, you could employ plunge routers for large-scale projects like house renovations, door construction, and cabinet making.
Trim router vs regular router - Different features
The primary distinction between trim routers and regular routers is the size. A trim router is essentially a more compact and lightweight version of a standard router that can be held with a single hand. However, there are some more functional differences between the two tools.
1. Output
Trim routers have a smaller motor, resulting in less power output. On average, trim routers have between ¾ and one horsepower, while regular routers typically have between 1 and 3 horsepower.
Because of the smaller output, trim routers may not accommodate larger bits like regular routers. Instead, they feature a guide bearing to prevent scratches on the material being worked on, particularly with lamination, which is susceptible to damage.
2. Trimming laminate
Using a trim routeron laminate reduces the risk of damaging the material and consequently wasting it. This is because while a regular router employs a router bit, a trim router employs a guide bearing that safeguards the laminate from scratches.
3. Portability
Another benefit of trim routers over regular routers is the increased portability, as they are typically intended for single-handed use. Due to this, you can hold a trim router while holding down the material with one hand. This is particularly important when performing complex tasks like profiling edges.
Moreover, the compact size enhances convenience when working in remote locations and frequently trimming material.
4. Price
A trim router is also less expensive while being more adept at producing intricate and angled cuts, rendering it an ideal tool for trimming corners.
However, despite its functional advantages over a regular router, a trim router does have certain limitations. For example, its small motor means it is typically not well-suited for heavy-duty routing activities. Plus, a trim router lacks the numerous optional accessories that are often available on purchasing regular routers.
Pros of trim routers
1. Precision
Trim routers are very precise, making them ideal for a small, detailed workpiece. They are especially useful for creating intricate designs or patterns in woodwork.
2. Usability
A single trim router can be employed for a wide range of tasks, like trimming and shaping wood, cutting slots and grooves, etc. This versatility makes them a valuable addition to any woodworking toolkit.
3. Ease of use
A trim router is easy to set up and use, even for beginners. It features simple controls and is compatible with a variety ofrouter bits, making it ideal for achieving different effects.
4. Cost-effective
Compared to other routers, a trim or fixed base router is generally less expensive, so I highly recommend it to DIY enthusiasts and hobbyists.
5. Portability
Owing to the small and lightweight build of a trim router, it is easy to carry on the go. This makes them ideal for working on projects outside of the workshop or for taking on the road.
6. Maneuverability
Adding to the previous point, a trim router is quite easy to handle and control. This factor is beneficial for beginners, especially when working with small or delicate wood pieces.
Cons of trim routers
Despite the multiple advantages of using a trim router, this tool is not devoid of drawbacks, which are as follows:
1. Limited size
The small size of a trim router, albeit a major advantage, can cause limitations in some cases. For instance, it is not suitable for making a large cut or working on larger wood pieces. That’s when a large plunge router will be more suitable.
2. Limited depth of cut
A trim router has a limited depth of cut, which means they are not ideal for making deep cuts or grooves. This can be a limitation when working with thicker wood pieces or when making certain types of joints.
3. Noise
A trim router is quite noisy, which is obviously a nuisance if you’re working in a shared space or if you’re sensitive to loud noises.
4. Vibrations
Like any power tool, a trim router can produce vibrations that can make it uncomfortable to use for extended periods of time. This can also affect the quality of your cuts if you are not careful.
5. Safety concerns
There’s always a risk of injury with power tools, and a trim router is no different. So, it is important to read the instructions carefully and take all necessary safety precautions, like wearing protective gear, using tools only as intended, etc.
6. Limited power
Trim routers are generally less powerful than larger plunge routers. This can make them less effective when working with harder materials or when making larger cuts.
Pros of regular routers
The advantages of a regular router or a plunge router are given below:
1. Size
A full-size plunge router sports a larger base, and hence, it is more stable than a trim router. This makes them easy to control when making cuts. It also features larger handles, which can make it more comfortable to use for extended periods of time.
2. Accessories
Unlike a trim router, a plunge router features multiple accessories, such as router tables, which make it even more versatile and easier to use. These accessoriescan help to increase precision and accuracy when making cuts.
Tip
Employing the accessories incorrectly may also cause accidents, so always ensure that you’re using the right size and type of accessories.
3. Power
A full-size plunge router offers more power than a trim router. This makes the former ideal for working with harder materials and making larger cuts. Plus, this factor is especially beneficial for professional woodworkers who need to work with a variety of materials and make precise cuts.
4. Versatility
As mentioned previously, a regular router can be used with a wide variety of router bits, which makes the tool a lot more versatile than a trim router.
5. Efficiency
A regular router is generally faster and more efficient than trim and fixed base routers, thereby being suitable for larger projects or professional use.
6. Depth of Cut
A regular router can cut deeper than a trim or fixed base router, so the former is more suited for making larger grooves and cuts. For this reason, I stick to a regular router for making joints or working with thicker pieces of wood.
Cons of regular routers
Some potential disadvantages of a regular router are as follows:
1. Safety concerns
There is always a risk of injury involved when using a full-sized regular router since it’s more dangerous than a trim router. Hence, it is imperative to take all necessary safety precautions during use.
2. Learning curve
Using a plunge-base router is more difficult to learn than a trim router. They require more skill and experience to operate properly and safely, which can be a disadvantage for beginners or those who are not familiar with woodworking.
3. Noise and vibration
A standard plunge router can be quite noisy, especially when used at high speed, and cause a lot of vibrations, which can be uncomfortable to work with for extended periods of time. This can also affect the quality of your cuts if you are not careful.
4. Maintenance
Compared to a compact router, a full-sized one can require more maintenance, which includes regular cleaning and lubrication. This can be a disadvantage for those who do not have the time or knowledge to perform these tasks.
5. Cost
Despite being a handy tool, a regular router base is generally more expensive, which can be a disadvantage for hobbyists or DIYers who are on a budget.
6. Size and weight
A plunge-base router is larger and heavier than a trim router, which can make it more difficult to maneuver and control. This can be especially true for beginners or for those who are working on delicate or intricate projects.
What safety precautions should you take when using a trim router or a regular router?
Below are some safety precautions should you take when using a trim router or a regular router.
A. Wear eye and ear protection
Routers can generate a lot of dust and noise, which can be harmful to your eyes and ears. Wear safety glasses and earplugs or earmuffs to protect yourself.
B. Use a dust mask
Breathing in wood dust is hazardous to health. So, always wear a dust mask or respirator to avoid inhaling unwanted particles.
C. Use proper clothing
Avoid wearing loose clothing, jewelry, or anything that could get caught in the router. Try wearing tight-fitting clothing, and tying back long hair.
D. Keep your workspace clean and organized
Ensure that your workspace is free from any tripping hazards and clutter to avoid mishaps.
E. Use a secure and flat surface
Make sure your router is securely mounted on a stable work surface, such as a router table or bench. This will help prevent the router from tipping or moving during use.
F. Use a suitable router bit
Only use a router bit that is specifically designed for the type of cut you need. Also, make sure the bit is properly installed and tightened before use.
G. Use the router with both hands
When using the router, keep both hands on the tool, with one on the handle and the other on the base. This will help you maintain control and stability while using the router.
H. Turn off the router when not in use
Once you’re done using the router, turn it off and unplug it from the power source. Also, keep it out of reach of children.
For woodworking, choosing the right tool for the specific job is crucial. While both trim routers and regular routers have their pros and cons, consider choosing one that best suits your needs and budget.
After putting each router test, I believe that a trim router is the best for beginners working on smaller projects. On the other hand, if you are a professional or working on larger projects, a regular router may be the better option.
But whatever you choose, be sure to follow all the safety precautions mentioned above and use the tool properly to achieve the best result.
Do you have a broken toilet tank, and you’re unsure what to do about it? A toilet has two components, a tank, and a bowl. The tank is quite susceptible to damage and corrosion, irrespective of the brand. This is usually because it has many sub-parts and is a little weaker structurally.
In addition to that, toilet tanks have a handle for flushing and two valves, which also tend to break down and crack fairly easily. However, you can seal the cracks yourself without much difficulty.
So, now, if you’re wondering how to fix this problem, you could get some epoxy glue that will effectively do the job. But are you unable to figure out which one to get? Don’t worry, because we’ve got you covered with this guide on the best epoxy for toilet repair, so read on to know more!
Listed below are the 5 best epoxies for toilet tank repair from our list:
J-B Weld. J-B Weld 8277 is a versatile, quick-setting epoxy that works on various materials. It impresses with its ability to create firm bonds underwater and heat resistance up to 350 degrees Fahrenheit.
Pratley Epoxy Glue for Porcelain. Pratley 85139 excels by offering a quick-setting epoxy adhesive that efficiently binds different materials, including glass, providing a clear finish.
Loctite. Offering a shock-resistant solution, Loctite 1919324 binds different types of materials effectively and stands out with its underwater application and curing feature.
PC Products PC-11 White Epoxy Paste. This epoxy offers durable, water-resistant fixes for porcelain toilets. Its no-drip consistency ensures easy and clean application in various orientations.
Are you looking for the best epoxy for toilet tank repair? We've got you covered! Here is a list of the 4 best epoxies for toilet tank repair that can help you fix your toilet tank quickly and easily:
1. J-B Weld - Best for Fast Setting
First up on our list is the J-B Weld 8277, which is a super-efficient glue that can fix porcelain surfaces, ceramic, plastic, concrete, and even marble. It can be used to plug holes and seal gaps in a toilet tank, which makes it handy to have around. What’s more, it can also help fix drains, fuel tanks, and underwater objects.
This is a two-part epoxy stick that can be mixed by hand and is ideal for repairing a broken toilet tank. Once both the compounds are mixed together, the epoxy takes only 25 minutes to set and one hour to cure. As such, we love the speed and efficiency of this glue, as well as the smooth white finish!
In addition to that, the epoxy has a tensile strength of 1300 PSI, and it can resist extreme heat too, up to 350 degrees Fahrenheit. It’s also non-reactive with chemicals like hydraulic fluid and petrol once it is fully cured.
We were impressed by how this adhesive can make firm bonds even underwater, which means that you can use it for marine repairs too. It’s also been certified by the NSE as safe for contact with drinking water which makes it super non-toxic and reliable.
Though our ultimate experience with the product was undoubtedly excellent, we did run into some issues. We received a defective product twice in a row, after which we lodged a strongly-worded complaint with customer support. After that, we got a functioning unit, but we did have some unnecessary hassle at the start.
2. Pratley Epoxy Glue for Porcelain - Best for All Material Use
The final entry on our list is the Pratley 85139, a two-part epoxy that can repair your porcelain toilet effectively. It comes in an easy-to-use tube and can also be used with materials like glass, ceramic, stone, and concrete that are commonly found in homes.
To begin with, we liked how quickly the glue sets in and dries and also has great adhesive strength. If you’re wondering how to fix your toilet problems without calling upon a professional, then this is a great tool to use.
Apart from the above, the adhesive can also be used when runny glue is needed for a matching joint. This is a versatile product that can also join together objects made of glass, with the best part being that the epoxy won’t show.
Moving on, this is a waterproof epoxy. Therefore, you can use it for repairing kitchen wares without worrying about water tampering with the bonds. Besides this, we dig into the design of the tubes that make it easy to dispense equal amounts of epoxy constituents.
The adhesive was effective but a hassle to apply properly. We needed to repair fine scratches on our toilet tank and used a brush to apply the glue. Unfortunately, the glue was too tacky to be applied in small amounts, and that’s why we don’t think this epoxy is great for use with smaller cracks.
What We Like
Fast-setting and drying
Versatile
Waterproof
Elegant bottle design
What We Don't Like
Glue too tacky to be applied in small amounts
Volume: 500 ml | Type: 2 Part Mixture | Strength: N/A | Waterproof: Yes | Versatility: Specifically for Porcelain | Curing Time: 1-2 Hours
3. Loctite - Best for Water-Resistant Repairs
The Loctite 1919324 is a versatile epoxy that can be used to bind different kinds of materials together. It is compatible with glass wood, plastic, and metal in addition to ceramic and porcelain and provides a shock-resistant adhesion that stands the test of time. In addition to this, its volume is 25 ml, and it gives a smooth white finish.
One of the features we really liked about this product was that even though it is supposed to be a marine epoxy, it does a great job of repairing toilet tanks and other ceramic objects. It is packaged in a syringe, which makes it convenient to use since it dispenses the same amount of the adhesive each time.
In addition to that, once the glue dries, it is extremely durable and can even be drilled into, with no signs of cracking. Moreover, it is solvent-resistant and can even be sanded or cleaned up easily without any damage.
Another cool thing about this adhesive that we liked is it can be applied and cured even while it's below the water. This makes it truly resistant to water and eliminates the need to drain out water before applying the adhesive.
This adhesive performed as we expected it to and did a great job of repairing our toilet tank. However, we did notice that once dry; it's a little shiny apart from being white. That worked for us since toilet tanks are usually a glossy white too, but that may not work with other products that need to be fixed.
This two-part epoxy is the perfect solution for those who need a way to undertake porcelain toilet repair such that it lasts. The product has a volume of 60 ml and comes in a soothing off-white color that blends perfectly with tank lids. Moreover, it is packaged neatly in an easy-to-use tube.
If you need to repair a toilet tank crack or scratches on the toilet bowl, you need something that is water-resistant yet effective. The PC Products PC-11 is the right fit for the job because it can be applied in wet, dry, and even underwater areas. Moreover, it is equally resistant to both fresh and saltwater.
In addition to the above, it has a thick consistency, which impressed us because this ensures that the glue won’t sag or drip whether applied horizontally or vertically. What’s more, if you want a white finish to your repair, which is free of cracks and stains, then this adhesive is an ideal pick.
We were also impressed by how fast-acting the epoxy is. It takes just 35 minutes to set, and up to 8-15 hours to cure, which is justified due to the industrial-grade strength of 1710 PSI that it provides.
When we used the product, it gave perfect results, and we were pleasantly surprised. However, reviews online state that the effectiveness of the product depends from batch to batch, and not all of them cure within the set period, or even after, for that matter.
What We Like
Water-resistant
Doesn’t sag or drip when applied
White finish that blends in with the toilet tank
Industrial-grade strength
What We Don't Like
Effectiveness varies across different batches of the product
This section features an in-depth comparison of epoxy products designed for toilet tank repairs. The table below provides a comprehensive evaluation of essential attributes, including Volume, Type, Strength, Waterproof capabilities, Versatility, and Curing Time.
Buying Guide for the Best Epoxy for Toilet Tank Repair
According to us, a number of factors must be kept in mind before getting an effective glue to mend your toilet tank. Toilet tanks are made of porcelain, and from our experience, most kinds of porcelain are waterproof but have porous surfaces.
This means that water seeps in through the otherwise glossy surface. That’s why we recommend getting an epoxy suitable for a toilet tank and waterproof; otherwise, it’ll be a waste of money and effort!
Apart from that, the other factors that must be considered are:
1. Tensile Strength
Not all manufacturers reveal the tensile strength of the epoxy in the product description or on the label. However, we strongly advise getting an epoxy that is strong with high tensile strength because porcelain objects can have a lot of weight. If you end up getting glue that doesn’t have much strength, you’ll go back to square one when it falls apart!
This is why we recommend the J-B Weld epoxy glue, because of its industrial-grade strength, which will ensure that it works on your toilet tank.
2. Viscosity
The thickness of the epoxy should depend on the kind of repair you’re thinking of carrying out. If you need to fix hairline cracks, we recommend thinner glues that flow and are easier to spread.
However, if you’re trying to fix larger cracks, then glue that is compatible with wide surfaces and has a thick consistency would be a better pick. This is why we recommend the PratleyPratley because once it is kneaded, it thickens and is perfect for sealing cracks that are significant in size.
3. Cure Time
The quicker the cure time the easier it will be to fix your toilet and make it operational once again. Ideally, a quick fix time translates into about 1 hour with 25 minutes of set time, these are the figures promised by the J-B Weld Waterweld in this guide, and thousands of reviews back it up too.
4. Water Resistance
If you are going to choose another product than the ones on this list, make sure the epoxy you choose is waterproof and resistant to the chemicals in the water. Look for an epoxy designed for use in wet environments and specifically formulated to be resistant to water and chemicals to ensure your fix is solid for years and years to come.
What is epoxy for toilet tank repairs?
Epoxy for toilet tank repairs is a specialized adhesive formula designed to fix leaks and cracks in your toilet tank. It is often made from two parts—a resin and a hardener—that mix to create a strong bond that can withstand the constant presence of water.
How to apply epoxy for toilet tank repairs?
Applying epoxy for toilet tank repairs involves several steps.
Start by draining the toilet tank completely and dry the area thoroughly.
Lightly sand the area around the crack or leak to enable better adhesion of the epoxy.
Mix the resin and hardener according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Apply the epoxy to the crack or leak, paying special attention to deeply fill in the damaged area.
Allow enough curing time as recommended by the manufacturer before refilling your tank.
How long does it take for epoxy to dry on a toilet tank?
The drying time for epoxy on a toilet tank can vary depending on the brand and formulation, typically, it could take from several hours up to 24 hours or more. Always ensure to check the manufacturer's instructions.
Can I use epoxy for all types of toilet tanks?
Yes, you can use epoxy for all types of toilet tanks – porcelain, ceramic, plastic, etc. However, always check with the manufacturer's guidelines because some epoxies may work better with certain materials than others.
How permanent are toilet tank repairs with epoxy?
The permanency of toilet tank repairs with epoxy can be highly durable but is also dependent on proper application and usage conditions within your bathroom. It may last several years in most cases but consider replacing your tank if the damage is severe or frequently recurring.
Is using a Repair Kit better than using an Epoxy?
Choosing between using a Repair Kit or an Epoxy will largely depend on the specific damage situation of your tank. Repair kits often include epoxy and can provide more comprehensive solutions for bigger cracks, while standalone epoxy can be more suitable for smaller, simpler repairs.
Can using epoxy for toilet tank repairs lead to further damage?
Using epoxy for toilet tank repairs should not lead to further damage if used correctly. Always ensure to thoroughly clean and dry the damaged area, apply the epoxy as per instructions, and allow proper curing time. If the damage is severe or the crack continues to extend even after repair, consult a professional plumber.
Can I use Epoxy to attach bathroom fixtures?
Yes, Epoxy can be used to attach bathroom fixtures as it forms a strong bond. However, ensure that both surfaces are clean and dry before application of the adhesive, and always adhere strictly to the manufacturer's instructions.
We often use cork in home decor art projects. Now, cork may need to be glued to different surfaces or another corkboard. For this reason, there are multiple varieties of glue available, which can range from hot glue, glue sticks, super glue, and contact cement, to construction adhesive, to name a few. But, most adhesives can be toxic and have to be used very carefully.
Also, we needed an adhesive that could hold many materials together as you might be attaching cork to other surfaces like metal or ceramic.
Hence, we decided to test out the top 7 glue for cork and cork boards, and after a testing period of 2 weeks, filled with trial and error, we discovered 7 of the top adhesive choices on the market so that you can find the best glue for cork, cork boards, and wine corks. Most of the options below are not toxic, making them safe to use. We have also spoken about the highlighted features to make it easier for you to choose.
Let's get started!
Are you looking for the best glue for cork, cork boards, or wine corks? You've come to the right place!
Listed below are the 5 best glues for cork from our list:
Elmer's Products, Inc E7000. Elmer's E7000 is a non-toxic solution that ensures effective carpentry work. It dries quickly, leaving a solid bond within 24 hours, and a brush is recommended for less messy use.
Loctite HC1060027. Loctite HC1060027 is applauded for its ease of application and wide surface versatility. It dries as a waterproof bond but is likely unsuited for smaller projects due to the one-time-use applicator.
Gorilla 5201204-2. Gorilla 5201204-2 offers high strength and powerful bonding ability, working perfectly with cork surfaces. It requires glove usage to avoid hard-to-remove residue.
Loctite PL 1451588. Loctite PL 1451588 is a robust construction adhesive that offers heightened strength and durable bonding, perfect for both indoor and outdoor projects. Be sure to wipe excess glue before it dries.
Elmer's E1321. Elmer's E1321 is a fast-drying multipurpose adhesive ideal for various home and school projects. Buy in small quantities to avoid mold growth over time.
Here is the list of the 7 best glues for cork that you can use to adhere cork surfaces together:
1. Elmer's Products, Inc E7000 - Best Non-Toxic
If you are looking for a non-toxic option that will help you with carpentry projects, then Elmer's Products, Inc. E7000 is going to be a great choice. We were trying to build a few pieces of furniture on our own, and this turned out to be very helpful.
This is a non-toxic wood glue that comes with no harmful fumes. You can safely use it indoors without having to keep the windows open. You can also easily clean up the extra glue with water, making the work much easier.
Next, we have to tell you about how fast it can dry. We have found from using this product that you will need to give it around 20 to 30 minutes for it to dry to the touch. And it will take around 24 hours to dry completely. We were able to sand and paint the cork surface the next day, making it a convenient option. Also, you can expect a permanent bond, thanks to the strong wood glue.
Unsurprisingly, professionals, including carpenters, tend to use this glue because of its effective nature. It comes in a 4-ounce bottle, which can store enough glue for small projects. You can purchase more bottles if needed.
The only issue that you might face while using this glue is that it can be messy, and you might get it all over the place. To prevent this from happening, we recommend using a brush for proper application. That should take care of the job without making a mess.
What We Like
Takes 24 hours to bond fully
Easy to clean up with water
Perfect for carpentry DIY projects
Forms a strong bond
What We Don't Like
Messy application
Adhesive Type: PVA | Bond Strength: 350 PSI | Drying Time: 45 mins | Heat Resistant: Yes | Shelf Life: 2 years | Color: White
2. Loctite HC - Best in Ease of Application
If you are searching for a good glue that can be applied easily, then the Loctite HC1060027 will fit the bill. It will not shrink after application, which makes it perfect for bonding. When we trialed this product we had to work with cork boards as well as ceramic, and the adhesive helped us with the entire process.
This wood glue comes with a high-strength formula in a precision applicator pack. You will get a syringe applicator that can be used to precisely apply the glue to smaller parts. It can be used on wood cork, plastic, glass, metal, ceramic, and tiles, to name a few. We were very impressed with the versatile usage that is offered.
Next, the glue is waterproof once it has dried up completely. You can use pigments and different kinds of cement to add color or texture to the glue. This can be done so that the adhesive matches the color of the surface on which it is applied.
What’s more, you can use this strong formula as a filler for surfaces and binding gaps. It can help with repairing surfaces and for lamination purposes.
If you need a minute amount of epoxy glue for a DIY project, then this may not be the right product. That is because you will be getting two nozzles with the pack. The instructions say that you will have to throw them off after a single use. Hence, the bottle can only be used twice.
What We Like
Self-mixing and easy-to-use bottle
Can be tinted with various substances
Waterproof formula
Recommended for fiberglass and wood
What We Don't Like
Not for smaller projects
Adhesive Type: Cyanoacrylate | Bond Strength: 3200 PSI | Drying Time: 15-20 mins | Heat Resistant: Yes | Shelf Life: 1 year | Color: Clear
3. Gorilla - Best in Bonding
One of our top choices is the Gorilla 5201204-2, which is known for its high strength as well as bonding power. You can use it for indoor and outdoor projects as it is not only water-resistant but is 100% waterproof as our investigation demonstrated. Read on to learn more about its bells and whistles.
Gorilla glue has been around for a long time, and it is well known for the strength and adhesive qualities that it offers. It is indeed one of the popular glues on the market, which can be used with foam, wood, glass, metal, ceramic, concrete, as well as stone. Yes, it pretty much works on everything around the house.
All you need to do is dampen the surface and apply the Gorilla glue in a thin layer. Then, clamp it for the next two hours. After that, you will need to leave it for 24 hours for it to cure fully. Once it dries, you will be able to see a white layer, and it should be able to form a permanent bond.
Moving on, you will receive two bottles of this wood glue, which should meet all your needs. We bought it for our corkboard projects, and it has worked perfectly while gluing cork surfaces.
Gorilla glue is extremely difficult to remove from fingers in case you have got it all over your hand. You might have to struggle a bit, which can be totally avoided if you wear gloves. We will recommend safety gloves during the application so that you face no further problems.
Loctite PL 1451588 is also known as a construction adhesive and is a very popular choice. While researching the best glue for cork, we came upon this 100% polyurethane adhesive, which will work for all kinds of professional purposes, we have found from using this product that it works with cork too.
This is a tan-colored glue that works very well with both wood and cork surfaces. You can use it for making objects inside and outside the house. Since it is made of polyurethane, the wood glue is guaranteed to last for a long time.
What is even more remarkable is that it is known to be 8x stronger than the general construction adhesive that you get on the market. The product can be used with wood, hardwood, treated wood, cork, concrete, marble, stone, masonry, flooring of all kinds, as well as bricks. In a nutshell, it is known to be a construction adhesive for a reason.
Moving on, you will be happy to know that the wood glue is completely waterproof. Once it dries completely, you can paint on top of it, when we trialed this product we painted over the glue with acrylics with excellent results.
And in case you live in an area with a cold temperature, do not worry, as the glue will dry up well even in cold weather.
If you are purchasing this adhesive, remember that you need to clean any excess adhesive immediately before it dries up. This is very important; otherwise, you might have tan-colored spots permanently on the surface. Keep a cloth nearby so that the job can be done at once.
What We Like
Waterproof and safe to use
Can be painted
Works with a variety of surfaces
Can be used in cold temperatures
What We Don't Like
Excess glue needs to be cleaned immediately
Adhesive Type: PVA | Bond Strength: N/A | Drying Time: 24 hours | Heat Resistant: No | Shelf Life: 2 years | Color: Clear
5. Elmer's E1321
If you are looking for a fast-drying formula for quick DIY cork projects, then Elmer's E1321 will work very well. It can be used around the house for different craft projects. We used it with cork boards, and it has been working fine. Moreover, it can be kept as an emergency adhesive in your tool kit, based on our firsthand experience, it will not disappoint.
While looking for the best glue for cork, you must be wondering how quickly you can get done with the projects at hand. This option will provide you with the exact solution. It dries very quickly, and you can finish the project at hand in a day.
On the other hand, this adhesive is known for its multi-purpose capacity. It can be used for repairing parts, engaging in craft projects as well as bonding wine cork, corkboards, and wood to other surfaces. The adhesive works with paper, leather, and fabric, to name a few kinds of fabric.
Moving on, this can be used to make homemade slime. If your kids are asking to play with slime, make them some using baking soda, food coloring, contact lens solution, and this adhesive. It can be used for school and craft projects too, but with adult supervision.
If you are purchasing this glue, we will recommend buying it in smaller quantities. You should be able to work with it within a few months, as otherwise, mold can grow. We were unable to save half a tube because of this issue. But now that you know about it, there should not be any further problems.
One of our final suggestions is the Krazy Glue KG94548R, which will solve the problem of bonding surfaces that are hard to reach. You will be able to complete all kinds of jobs easily, thanks to the convenience offered.
A great advantage of this adhesive is that it comes with a brush-on applicator, we have found from using the Krazy glue that the applicator will help you cover large as well as small surfaces with utmost ease and precision. You can also put glue on difficult areas with the brush, which would otherwise not be reachable.
Adding on, the glue comes in a no-clog bottle, which will enable you to use the product for a long time. You will be surprised to know that the bristles of the brush do not stick together at any point, ensuring that you can keep using the brush multiple times. Just close the cap properly after every use, and it should work incredibly well.
Because of its efficiency and great bonding capacity, you can use it for repairs at the office and at home. It can help you attach the cork to plastic, vinyl, metal, and ceramic to name a few.
While you should have a great experience with the glue, the only drawback is that it takes a lot of time to dry. Now, if you need to rearrange the surfaces, this will be beneficial. But if you wish to finish the project quickly, it might hinder the process slightly.
What We Like
Perfect for home and office use
Can be used in hard-to-reach areas
Bristles do not stick together
Will last for a long time
What We Don't Like
Takes time to dry
Adhesive Type: PVA | Bond Strength: 300 PSI | Drying Time: 60 mins | Heat Resistant: Yes | Shelf Life: 2 years | Color: Clear
7. Barge
The Barge DA081 is for those who need to purchase a lot of glue for large-scale projects. You will love the bonding power, and you can order in gallons or place a bulk order by calling the brand. We got a pack of 2 fluid ounces, and we were not disappointed.
We were looking for the best glue for cork surfaces in the house when we came across this. The adhesive is so powerful that you can work with a lot more surfaces. Some customers say that they have been able to fix their leather boots with this glue, it has been the cobbler's choice for a long time, making it perfect for emergency repairs around the house based on our observations.
That is not all; you can attach wine corks to metal or rubber surfaces for different kinds of DIY projects. Many professionals also use it to make leather items. The glue will stay in place for a long as it has incredible bonding powers.
What’s more, you can bond surfaces within 24 hours. We will recommend holding and clamping the surfaces for a few minutes after application before leaving them to dry for the next 24 hours.
When you are applying this to white or clear surfaces, be careful about any excess glue as it will dry to form a yellow layer. This layer does not look good, and it can be difficult to remove after it has dried. Hence, be careful during application, and you should have no further issues.
What We Like
Comes in a 2-ounce pack
Only a thin layer is required
Works with wine corks and corkboards
Quickly dries within 24 hours
What We Don't Like
Dries to form a yellow layer
Adhesive Type: PVA | Bond Strength: N/A | Drying Time: 24 hours | Heat Resistant: No | Shelf Life: 1 year | Color: Clear
What is The Best Glue for Cork and Cork Boards?
This section provides a comprehensive comparison of the most effective adhesives tailored specifically for cork and cork boards. The table below meticulously evaluates key attributes including Adhesive Type, Bond Strength, Drying Time, Heat Resistance, Shelf Life, and Color.
After countless hours of playing with cork, glue, and sticky fingers, we have determined through our tests that there are multiple kinds of glues, and it can be difficult to pick the best adhesive. To make the job easier for you, we have a buyer’s guide for the best glue for cork in place, read on to find out what our trial and error testing has taught us to be important when choosing a glue for cork:
1. Purpose
What kind of surfaces are you going to deal with? There are cork flooring, cork tiles, and many other materials that you may need to work on at the same time. Also, you might need to attach the cork to other non-porous materials and porous materials.
Please make a note of the kind of surfaces that you might be working with. While glue might work with metal, it may not be a great option for foam. Then you need to consider paper, plastic, cardboard, ceramic, rubber, glass, and all kinds of possible surfaces that might need to bond with cork.
Once you are confident about your needs, read the product description carefully. See if the glue works with the kind of surfaces you have in mind before you actually go on to purchase.
2. Amount
Keep in mind how much glue can be needed for a specific project before purchasing. If you need to use glue in large quantities, then purchase bigger packs. Otherwise, settle for smaller ones.
Glue can dry up easily if not used within a short period of time. This is especially true if you have already opened the pack. Hence, please be aware of this.
3. Curing Time
When you are trying to bond two materials, it is going to take more than a few seconds, regardless of glue, as per our expertise. It is essential to know the curing time when you are working on outdoor projects or craft projects in general. Apply glue, and then you will have to wait for an hour or two for it to dry to the touch. Then depending on the substance, it can take 24 hours or more to dry clear.
Now while working with lightweight substances, you might not need a very strong glue; hence, it may dry faster. We recommend checking the curing time before purchasing. If you are in urgent need of gluing cork, you will need the best glue that can work the quickest.
4. Safety
While working with the best glue for cork, you could easily apply adhesive all over your hand, red gl. That could be difficult to remove, and you may have to look for rubbing alcohol to help remove it. Super glue can be removed from glass, tiles, along other ceramic surfaces with it too. In both cases, you can pour a lot of this substance and then wait for the glue to loosen.
To be on the safer side, after countless hours of gluing cork our team discovered that gloves make all the difference, we would advise you to wear gloves while working. That will keep your hands protected throughout the process, and you do not need to use strong synthetic substances on the hand.
Moving on, if you are working on large-scale heavy-duty projects, inhaling toxic fumes throughout the day is not a good idea. Read the factory instructions mentioned on the back of the pack carefully and wear a mask if you are sure about toxic fumes.
Can you use hot glue on cork and corkboards?
Yes, you can use hot glue on cork and corkboards, but it may not provide a very strong or durable bond. Hot glue is better suited for lightweight or temporary applications.
What is the difference between contact adhesive and PVA glue?
Contact adhesive is a type of glue that creates a strong, permanent bond between two surfaces. PVA glue, also known as white glue or school glue, is a water-based adhesive that is easy to clean up and dries clear.
How do you apply contact adhesive to cork and corkboards?
To apply contact adhesive to cork and corkboards, first, clean and dry the surfaces to be bonded. Then, apply a thin layer of adhesive to both surfaces and allow it to dry for a few minutes. Once the adhesive is tacky, press the surfaces together firmly and hold them in place for a few minutes.
Can you use glue to repair a corkboard that has come apart?
You can use glue to repair a corkboard that has come apart. Apply a small amount of contact adhesive or PVA glue to the edges of the cork and press them back together. Hold the edges in place until the glue dries.
Is waterproof glue suitable for cork and corkboards?
Waterproof glue is suitable for cork and corkboards, especially if the cork or corkboard will be exposed to moisture. However, it’s important to check the label or manufacturer’s instructions to ensure that the glue is suitable for use with cork.
Can you remove glue from the cork and corkboards?
You can remove glue from cork and corkboards using a scraper or a sharp blade. However, be careful not to damage the cork surface. You can also use solvents such as acetone or rubbing alcohol to dissolve the glue.
A dovetail is a strong and reliable joinery technique that can be cut by hand or with a router jig. Manually cutting it involves marking the wood, cutting the lines, and then trimming the cuts on both the pin and tail boards before assembly. With a router jig, you’ll need to set up the jig and the router first and then cut the wood.
Joinery techniques like dovetails are crucial in any woodworking task, for they help to create complex furniture items.
On that note, you can create dovetail joints by hand or with the help of a routing tool, like a trim router or handheld router. Unfortunately, creating such a joint may feel a bit complicated for beginners, which is why we have made this guide that discusses the process of creating dovetails.
Read on to learn more!
What is a dovetail joint?
Before we get into the meat of the topic, let’s briefly discuss what dovetail joints are. For those of you who are new to woodworking, the dovetail is a joinery technique that has been used in woodworking for a long time. This traditional joining technique helps in connecting two or more wooden surfaces together using interlocking elements cut into the wooden surface.
To be more precise, the woodworker creates a series of extended pins on the edge of one wooden board. On the other hand, a series of ridges or “tails” are created on the edge of another wooden board. These pins and tails are then interlocked to create the dovetail joint.
The pin and tail of a dovetail joint are shaped like trapezoids, and once they are put together, they do not come apart easily. Also, after it is glued together with adhesive, the joint requires no extra mechanical fasteners like nails or screws. The high tensile strength of the joint helps to secure it firmly in place and prevents it from breaking.
Creating dovetails
As we have mentioned before, the dovetail joint requires the woodworker to create trapezoidal pins and tails on the edge of a wooden board. Traditionally, these features are created on the face of a wooden board by hand using tools like saws and chisels.
Many woodworkers these days find using such manual tools to be dangerous and time-consuming. So, they prefer to use a router jig tool, which is more convenient by comparison. Drawing from experience, we can say that using router jigs is a much faster way to create dovetails than manual methods.
However, it comes with its own complexities since you need to use specialized tools in this case. If you are not well-versed with these tools, the dovetail joint will not be a satisfactory one. That is why we have discussed how you can create a dovetail joint using a router jig in a subsequent section.
For good measure, we have also discussed how to cut dovetail joints by hand here. You can create different types of dovetails using these two methods, such as single-lap and double-lap dovetails, through dovetail joints, and secret miter dovetail joints, among others. We have discussed these types in a later section, too.
How to hand-cut dovetail joints?
First, let’s discuss how you can hand-cut a dovetail joint. For those who like simplicity, the manual approach is obviously better, provided that the process is performed correctly. You can follow the procedure we have mentioned below to hand-cut dovetails easily.
Step 1: Gather the necessary tools
Collecting the necessary tools is the first step to hand-cutting a dovetail. In order to complete the task smoothly, you need to keep the following tools at hand:
Chisels
Saws
Clamps
Marking gauge
Adhesives like wood glue
Sharpening guide
Sharpening stones
Woodworking square
Cutting knife
Sliding T-bevels
Woodworking vise
Once you have gathered all of the above items, you can get started with the woodworking task.
Step 2: Mark the depth and lay out lines
Using the marking gauge, mark the depth of the dovetail on the wooden piece. Then, using the sliding T-bevel and a marking knife, lay out the lines and angles of the dovetail. Also, make sure to mark half pins on the two side edges of the pinboard. After that, extend the lines across the edge and to the other face of the board using a square.
Step 3: Cut to the lines
Now, you need to cut the board according to the marked lines using a dovetail saw. Make sure to cut the lines up to the depth line, and then chisel out the pin boards carefully. After that, you will need to chop off the wooden pieces from both sides.
Step 4: Trim the cuts
In this step, you need to pare the cuts made on the board using a chisel. Clamp the wooden board and carefully trim the inner edges of the cuts to ensure a smooth attachment surface.
Step 5: Mark the lines on the other board
Now that you have cut one board, you can use it to mark the lines on the other one. For this purpose, place the cut board on the edge of the second one and mark the lines and angles on its surface using a knife. This is to ensure that the tails and pins on both boards complement each other.
Step 6: Cut the lines and trim the cuts
Next, you need to follow a similar procedure as mentioned in step three for cutting along the lines and then chopping the wooden pieces from the board. Then, you need to trim the cut using a chisel, as we have done in step four.
Step 7: Test joint fit
Here, you need to test joints to see if they are a good fit. If you are not experienced, you will likely get a tight fit or a loose fit on the first try, which is completely normal.
You can do some fine-tuning by trimming the cut edges further. When you achieve the perfect fit, you only need to lightly tap the boards with a mallet to interlock the pins and tails.
Step 8: Assemble the joint and apply the finishing touches
In this step, you have to apply glue to the joint and assemble the wooden boards. Once that is done, you can apply the finishing touches by sanding the joint.
Warning: Avoid using too much glue on the surface as that can block the joints, making it difficult to attach the boards.
How to cut dovetail joints with a router?
Now, let’s talk about how you can create dovetail joints using a wood router and a jig. You can use a regular router or a trim router for this task. Also, make sure that the router jig is suitable for making dovetail joints. If you don’t use the right jig, then the cuts will not be consistent.
Furthermore, it is important to get a good router table for this task since that ensures a stable and supportive working surface. Apart from that, you need a few other tools like cutting guides and clamps to get started.
Once you get the above items, you can follow the procedure we have mentioned below.
Step 1: Set up the dovetail jig
The first step is to set up the dovetail jig for the router, which can often be a complex and time-consuming task. You need to ensure that the jig is properly aligned and adjusted so that it can cut the joint accurately.
We strongly recommend you go through the setup instructions for the dovetail cutter jig before using it. Also, use tools like calipers to fine-tune the orientation and positioning of the jig.
Step 2: Set up the router
Next, you will need to configure the router for the cutting task. You will need to select the proper router bit for the process, as that will ensure the consistency of the cuts. Then, you have to adjust the cutting depth of the router according to your preferences.
Step 3: Mark the wood
Here, you will need to mark the thickness of the tail boards and the pin boards using a square and a woodworking knife. For the best results, ensure consistency between the thickness of both boards.
Step 4: Start cutting the wood
Now that you have marked the wooden surface and set up the jig and the router, you can finally start cutting dovetails. Place the guide at the bottom of the router and simply move the tool in and out according to the metal guide. If your jig comes with guide bushings, then make sure to use those, as they can make the process easier.
On that note, a beginner is likely to make mistakes on the first try. That is why we would suggest performing some test cuts as practice before beginning the task. Based on our personal trials, we can say that this can considerably reduce the chance of mistakes and errors. So, once you are satisfied with the test cut, you can start making actual cuts on the wooden workpiece.
Step 5: Cut the pin board after the tail board
When you start cutting the wooden workpiece, make sure to cut the tailboard first. Once you have cut out the tails, you will need to mark the positions of the tail sockets on the pinboard. Make sure that the positions are consistent with the thickness that you marked earlier.
Following that, switch to the router’s pin-cutting bit and flip the metal guide to cut the pins. Then, move the router jig along the fingers of the metal guide to create the pin grooves.
Step 6: Test the fit
After you cut the tail and pin boards, you will need to test whether they fit well. If it is a perfect fit, it will slide in easily, requiring only a few light hits from a mallet. But if that’s not the case, then further trimming and adjustment will be necessary.
Step 7: Assemble the joint
Once you are satisfied with the fit, you can assemble the joint by applying wood glue. Allow the adhesive to settle for a while, and then finish off by sanding the joint.
Types of dovetail joints
When creating a dovetail joint, it is important to determine its type since that decides the wood router and jig you need to use. On that note, there are different types of dovetail joints, such as:
1. Through dovetail joints
The through dovetail joint is one of the most common types that is used by woodworkers today. Commonly known as the plain dovetail, it is the simplest dovetail joint that you can create. Here, the end grains for both wooden boards are visible. And while it is not necessary, many woodworkers prefer to cover up the wooden interlocking to protect it from wear.
2. Single lap dovetail joint
Single-lap dovetail joints are commonly used for furniture items like drawers. In this case, the end grain of the joint is not visible from the front since the tails are placed inside sockets at the end of the board. Because of such a design, these joints are otherwise referred to as half-blind dovetails.
3. Secret miter dovetail joint
The secret miter dovetail joint is commonly referred to as the mitered dovetail joint or full-blind dovetail joint. That’s because the end grains of both boards are concealed from view. It is a bit difficult to create but is incredibly sturdy. As such, the secret miter dovetail joint is commonly used in heavy-duty cabinets and boxes.
4. Double lap dovetail joints
Alternatively known as the full-lap dovetails, these joints are very similar in design to the secret miter dovetail joints. But instead of concealing the entire joint, the double-lapped dovetail has a thin section of end grain on one of the edges. It is slightly easier to make than a secret-mitered dovetail.
5. Sliding dovetail joints
The sliding dovetail joint is another popular type used by woodworkers. Such a dovetail joint is not placed at the edge of the board. Rather, it is placed within the field of one board, where the second piece is slotted in to assemble the joint. As a result, sliding dovetails usually do not require any chemical adhesive, making them easier to create.
How to use a router jig?
How to use a router jig is something that many DIY woodworkers don't know based on our findings, even though they know how to use a tool like a trim router. That is why we have discussed how you can use a router jig properly in this section.
A router jig is a useful woodworking tool that is used to rout or hollow out a wooden surface for creating joinery, making custom moldings, and performing other woodworking tasks. With that in mind, the first thing you need to keep in mind is the compatibility of the jig.
Typically, a router jig will only be compatible with a particular type or brand of router. For instance, if you are using a handheld router, you cannot use a trim router jig with it. Instead, you will need to use a jig that is compatible with handheld models.
In that context, there are some brands that make versatile routers that are compatible with most common router types. Ideally, we suggest getting dovetail jigs from brands like Leigh Industries or Porter Cable since they come with detailed instructions for cutting pin boards and tail boards.
Speaking of instructions, you will need to go through the usage guide provided with the jig carefully. That way, you will get a clear idea about things like thicknesses and material types that can be used with the jig. In this regard, most router jigs should be used with a guide bush, which helps you to get better control over the cutting process.
The type of joint should also be considered when choosing a suitable jig since there are different types of jigs that can be used to create different joints. So, to create a dovetail joint, you will need a dovetail jig.
A dovetail joint is undoubtedly one of the strongest types of woodworking joints. Thanks to this aspect, you can create sturdy furniture items like a drawer, cabinets, storage boxes, and others.
With the guide we have presented here, you will be able to craft a hand-made or a router dovetail joint easily. And with enough practice, you will be able to craft some of the more complex joints, such as the secret miter and the double lap dovetails.
In this regard, we advise you not to rush through the process since that can create unnecessary complications. Make sure to invest enough time in cutting the joint, which will ultimately reduce the chances of error.
To use a trim router, attach the base plate and adjust its depth to the ring level. Then, guide your router through your workpiece and maintain a steady pressure as you create the cuts. Ensure to remember safety precautions like wearing protective gear while using the trim router.
The best trim routerscan help you trim or shape wood, plastic, and laminate edges easily.
This handheld power tool is quite versatile and can be used to trim lamination pieces, cut decorative edges, make mortises, and so on. Moreover, trim routers can help you create intricate work at every inch of the edge of your workpiece with greater control.
So, in this blog post, I will walk you through a detailed guide on using trim routers. Let us begin!
Router safety precautions
1. Wear the necessary safety gears
As mentioned above, there are a lot of risks that come with using a trim router. However, most are avoidable if you wear the right safety gear. A few safety gear you can use while using a trim router are dust masks, safety goggles, earmuffs or earplugs, etc.
2. Use clamps
While you work on creating sharp edges, flush trimming, or even decorative edges, securing your woodworking projects is important. You can use devices such as clamps to attach your workpiece to your workbench. This will ensure that your material does not slip while you use a flush trim router bit on it.
3. Avoid awkward positions
While I understand that it may be tempting to create a, let's say, decorative edge as you sit in your comfortable position - I strongly advise not to get too creative with it. For instance, holding your wood piece above your head and using a trim router can put you at an exponentially high risk of injury.
How to set up the trim router
Parts of router and router parts diagram
1. Motor
The motor is one of the primary components of a trim router that supplies it with power. It drives the router bit at high speed to make cuts.
2. Collet
While rotating, the router bit needs to be firmly in place to work properly - and the collet does this. A collet also allows the bit to be changed easily.
3. Base plate
Whenever a trim router is used, it requires some support and stability in the process. The base plate, a flat surface at the bottom of the trim router, provides this support.
4. Depth adjustment ring
As the name suggests, a depth adjustment ring allows you to control the depth of the cuts you create on your woodwork using a trim router. It is typically located on the motor housing of the router and can help you create more precise cuts.
5. Speed control dial
A speed control dial helps you adjust the speed of the motor. It is an important component because you may need to alter the speeds based on factors like the material of your workpiece, desired depths of cuts, etc.
How to attach the base plate to the router?
Step 1. Turn off the power supply
Before beginning any work on your router - in this case, attaching the base plate - it is crucial to turn off the power supply to the tool to prevent any accidents. So, it would help to unplug it from the power source to eliminate any potential risks.
Step 2. Locate the base plate and screws
Find the components that will be required to assemble the base plate. Generally, the base plate and screws are included in the purchased trim router package; but if you can't find them, contact your manufacturer.
Step 3. Position the base plate
Next, position the base plate so that it is at the bottom of the router so that the holes of the former align perfectly with those of the latter. To ensure stability and balance, make sure that you keep the base plate at the center of the router.
Step 4. Insert the screws
Once the two components are aligned perfectly, start inserting each nut and screw through the holes of the base plate. You can use either a screwdriver or a drill to tighten the holes and make the attachment more secure.
How to adjust the depth of the router bit?
Step 1. Turn off the power supply
Before adjusting the depth of the router bit, you should unplug it from the power source. Doing so would ensure no accidents and that the depth is adjusted securely.
Step 2. Install router bit into the collet
To start adjusting the depth of the router bit, you need to install it into the collet. To do so, loosen the collet and insert the router bit. Once done, tighten the collet securely.
Step 3. Adjust the depth of adjustment ring
Locate the depth adjustment ring at the base of the router bit. Then, turn this ring anti-clockwise to loosen the ring. You should ideally slide this ring up and down the shaft in small increments until you achieve the desired depth. Once you do, tighten the adjustment ring securely by turning it clockwise.
Tip
A good way of determining the ideal depth you should maintain on your depth adjustment ring is to measure the thickness of the material you are working with. You can also use depth markings for the same.
How to choose the right router bit for your project?
1. Type of cut
One of the major aspects that should affect the kind of router bits that you go for is what kind of cut you want to create on your workpiece. For instance, consider using two-flute carbide-tipped router bits to create a straight cut. However, if you want to cut router dovetails, it would be best to go for dovetail router bits.
2. Material
The material of your workpiece should also influence the kind of router bits you purchase. For instance, I like going for chamfer router bits whenever I work with wood. Similarly, the kind of router bits you use shall differ depending on whether you want to go for other materials like plastic or metal.
3. Size and shape
Your motive for using a trim router should also affect your decision while choosing the ideal shape and size (diameter, for instance) of the router bits. For instance, I prefer the larger ones whenever my project requires me to get rid of a lot of material at once. But I go for smaller bits when I wish to create intricate details.
Similarly, drawing from experience, I have noticed that straight bits are great for cutting straight lines, and round-over bits are ideal for creating rounded edges.
4. Brand and quality
While such compact routers might be more expensive, the cheaper ones may not work or last as long. Hence, take a call based on your priorities! You should try sticking to reputable brands with decent reviews while choosing the right handheld/cordless router.
Tips for starting and stopping the router
While starting and stopping compact routers is not difficult, some tips can help you make the process even easier. You should consider keeping the following tips in mind while doing so:
Tips for starting the router
Make sure that the handheld router is installed properly and tightened securely.
Turn on your router and let it reach its full speed before you make the first cut on your workpiece.
Place the router on the workpiece before turning it on to avoid creating a rough cutting area.
Begin your cut slowly, then gradually increase the speed to tear the material evenly.
Tips for stopping the router
When you turn off the router, wait for the spiral bit to stop completely before you remove it from the workpiece to avoid injury.
Keep your hands away from the active routing, or you may injure yourself.
How to guide the router along the workpiece?
Step 1. Prepare for the cut
Before you begin to scrap wood (or whatever the material of your workpiece is) on your router table, it is crucial to plan the cut. You can do so easily by marking the path you want your palm router to follow on your workpiece before cutting. It is also good to secure workpieces to router tables using clamps to prevent the former from slipping.
Step 2. Use a guide
You can use a straight-edge guide to facilitate the process of cutting material from your workpiece. This will help you achieve a precise cut.
Step 3. Adjust the depth
Adjust the depth on your router base before using techniques such as flush trim on your workpiece. Ideally, you should keep the depth of the router a bit slightly deeper than the thickness of the material of your workpiece.
Step 4. Begin cutting
Begin the cut slowly, and gradually increase your speed as you guide your router base towards your marked path on the workpiece. Maintain consistent speed and pressure to create beautiful and clean cuts.
Tips for maintaining consistent speed and pressure
Keep moving the router at a steady pace to maintain a consistent speed.
While you should not move too quickly, you should also avoid moving too slowly to prevent uneven cuts.
Guide the router along your workpiece with a light touch.
Advanced techniques for using a trim router
1. Flush trimming
Using flush trim can help you trim one piece of wood to match the contour of another piece. Hence, people usually use this technique to create regions like joints. Here is how you can use this technique like a pro:
Step 1. Prepare for the trim
Generally, you need two pieces of wood to begin the process of flush trimming. One piece is the one that you wish to trim, and the second should be the one that you want to match the former's contour to. Clamp the two pieces together, and keep the one you want to trim on the top.
Step 2. Install a flush trim bit
Pick a flush trim bit with a bearing on the top. Install and tighten it securely.
Step 3. Adjust the depth
Loosen the depth adjustment ring at your router base and keep it slightly deeper than the thickness of the top wood piece.
Step 4. Begin cutting
Keep the router base flat against the wood and guide it along the edges you wish to cut. Ensure you maintain a steady pressure and consistent speed to create even cuts with this electric battery router.
2. Creating decorative edges
From creating beveled edges to ogee edges - you can get as creative as possible with a trim router. Here is a step-by-step guide on using it to create decorative edges:
Step 1. Choose the right decorative edge bit
Trim router bits come in various shapes and sizes, so you can choose the one that fits your needs best. You can go for anything from round over to cove bits to create your choice of decorative edges.
Step 2. Adjust the depth of the bit
Loosen the bit depth ring on your choice of routing tool. You can move the ring up and down the shaft until it reaches the desired level.
Step 3. Start cutting
Use a guide or jig to cut through your workpiece effectively. If you do not have a jig, use a router table with a fence to guide the workpiece along the routing bit.
Step 4. Sand the edges
Once you are done, create the decorative edge on each side and each edge smoothly. Doing so would eliminate any roughness or burrs left behind by the routing bit.
How to use jigs to guide the router along the workpiece?
You can use the best trim router jigs to guide your routing tool along the edge of your workpiece. Here is how you can use this tool:
Choose a jig that compliments the shape of the cut you wish to create.
Attach the jig to your workpiece using tools like clamps.
Install the appropriate bit in your router.
Turn on the router and guide it along the jig steadily.
Keep repeating the process to achieve your desired shape or cut.
Which is better, a trim or a regular router?
Whether a trim router or a regular router is better will depend on the task you wish to accomplish. Regular routers are better if you want to carry out heavy-duty tasks such as cutting deep grooves. However, if you want your cuts to have more finesse and wish to work with a lighter tool, it would be best to go for the trim routers.
What is the difference between a trim router and a molding planer?
The difference between a trim router and a molding planer is that a trim router - also known as a laminate trimmer - is used to trim and shape small workpieces. This compact tool can create a laminate veneer, decorative edges, etc. On the other hand, a molding planer is a stationary woodworking machine. Typically, the best molding planer tools can help you remove large amounts of wood quickly and accurately.
A good trim router can help you create precise and smooth edge profiles without many hassles. Before you begin using such routers, you must be aware of their components and the process of getting them together.
You can browse through a router bit types chartand create joinery points like mortise and tenon, rabbet and dado, etc. However, it is crucial to note that you should always take the necessary safety precautions while working with this tool to prevent any scope of injury.
Since using this small tool can help you massively while working on your next woodwork job, it would be best if you do it yourself too. Remember, you will not master it on your first go - the key is to consistently practice your skills until you reach your desired level of expertise!
Wood can be planed with a hand plane or mechanical surface planer. In the case of the former, you need to pick the correct hand plane, sharpen the blade, adjust its angle, and then run the planer over the wood. But when using a mechanical planer, you’ll need to set its thickness and depth stop before feeding the wood into the planer housing.
Planing is one of the most important tasks in woodworking, making wood planers very important tools for a woodworker.
However, not everyone may be experienced in using a planer tool. This is especially true in the cases of large and complex benchtop planers, molding planers, and other similar mechanical power tools. As such, these individuals may find it difficult to perform simple planning tasks.
That’s why we have discussed how you can plane wood easily with such tools in this guide. So, if you want to create flawless furniture items, then read on!
Planing with a hand plane
Using a hand plane is fairly simple, but it may take a lot of time and effort to complete the task with this tool. That’s because, unlike a mechanical plane, a hand plane needs to be manually operated.
In any case, here is the procedure for planing wood with a hand planer.
Step 1: Choose the appropriate hand plane for your job
The first and most important task in the process is to choose the correct hand plane, for if you pick an unsuitable tool, your task will become unnecessarily difficult. Besides, picking the wrong hand plane will give you unexpected results, which will lead to the wastage of wood and other resources.
There are different types of hand planing tools available today, with each having a specific usage scenario. That said, the primary aspect that differentiates these different types of hand planes is the size.
A plane with a long size can smoothen large areas of the wood at once, which improves the overall efficiency of the process. On the other hand, a short planer offers better control and is well-suited to perform precise planing tasks.
We have discussed the different hand planer types available today. It is important that you pick the one that best suits your work requirements.
I. Jointer plane
Jointer planes are typically the longest hand planer tools, having a body length of at least 22 inches (56 centimeters). These hand tools are highly effective for trimming or straightening doors, boards, and other long wooden surfaces.
II. Jack plane
A jack plane has a body that is between 12 and 17 inches (30 centimeters and 43 centimeters) long. Thus, it is slightly shorter in size than a jointer plane. However, it is much more versatile by comparison, which is why it can be used to shave both longboards and smaller lumber pieces.
III. Smoothing plane
As the name suggests, a smoothing plane is highly useful for creating a smooth surface from a rough lumber piece. It can also be used to trim medium-sized wood surfaces and even longboards to some extent.
Therefore, the smoothing plane is the most versatile hand-planning tool available today. This is thanks to its 10-inch (25- centimeter) body, which can cover a decent area in a short time and is easier to control than a jock or jointer plane.
IV. Block plane
With a body length of less than 10 inches, the block plane is the smallest hand planer tool that you can get. It has superior maneuverability, which makes it the perfect choice for planing tight corners or hard-to-reach spots on wood.
Furthermore, it is great for wooden boards with low thickness since it creates a very thin shaving. On the flip side, it is not very effective for trimming longboards or large pieces of rough lumber.
Step 2: Sharpen the blade of the plane
Once you have chosen the most suitable hand plane for this task, you will need to sharpen the plane blade. The blade (or the iron, as it is often called by carpenters) needs to be sharpened to a razor’s edge before starting the task. If you don’t do this, then the trim will not be perfectly flat.
Sharpening the blade is mandatory if you have used the hand planer before. As a matter of fact, even new plane blades need to be adequately sharpened before use. You can accomplish this task with the help of a sandpaper of suitable grit.
Ideally, we would recommend using 220-grit sandpaper here since it offers the best results. Hold the blade at an angle of 30 degrees over the sandpaper, making sure that the blade bevel lies flat on its surface. Then, rub the blade over the sandpaper in a circular motion by applying some downward pressure.
Stop rubbing once you see burr (fine metal shavings) accumulating on the back of the blade. After you remove the burr by wiping the blade’s back on the paper, you can use it for planing.
Warning: Do not change the angle when sharpening the blade, as that can lead to a non-uniform sharpening. Also, avoid applying too much pressure on the blade since that can wear it out quickly.
Step 3: Adjust the angle of the blade
Adjusting the angle of the blade is an important step that should not be ignored. That’s because this angle determines how thick the shaving will be.
If you increase the angle depth by too much, then the planer might tear into the wood or crack it. Besides, a high-angle blade can jam the planer, especially if the wood material is tough.
Thus, you need to carefully adjust the angle of the hand planer blade so that it reaches the optimal trimming angle. As a rule of thumb, you should start from a shallow angle and steadily increase it by turning the depth adjustment knob.
Step 4: Plane the surface of the wood
Now, it is finally time to plane the wood surface. To start, place the wooden board on a workbenchand set the hand planer at the edge of the wooden board. Then, gently push the planer forward in a straight-line motion by pushing on the rear handle. At the same time, use your non-dominant hand to apply a steady downward pressure by pushing on the front knob of the planer.
Make sure to maneuver the planer in a smooth and continuous fashion, avoiding any erratic or jerky movements. Try to maintain this technique as you work your way across the wooden surface. You need to pay extra attention to any uneven areas or irregular protrusions on the wood.
Step 5: Avoid tear-out by cutting along the grain of the wood
In order to get a flat surface of uniform thickness and smoothness, you need to cut along the grain of the wood. And since the grain direction does not always remain constant, you may need to change the direction of the planer accordingly.
However, you should avoid planing against the wood grain at all costs. If you do that, the blade will give rise to angled imperfections on the surface. These imperfections can lead to tear-outs, where small chunks of wood break off from the surface, thereby disrupting the finish.
Step 6: Check the accuracy of your planing
After you are finished planing the wood surface, you should check its accuracy to ensure the wood has a uniform finish. For this purpose, you will need to use a straight edge and a try square.
To check the uniformity and flatness of the main wood face, place the straight edge along its surface. If it has been shaved smoothly, then the straight edge will lie flush on the surface. But if there are any minor imperfections or protrusions still present, then it will leave a gap.
Similarly, you can use the try square to check the angle between two adjacent wood faces. Ideally, the adjacent faces should be perpendicular to each other, which means that the angle should be 90 degrees. If that’s not the case, then you will need to trim one of the faces further.
Planing with a mechanical surface planer
Now that you know how to plane wood using a hand planer, it is time to learn how you can use a mechanical surface planer to do the job. Mechanical planers are power tools that use a set of adjustable spinning blades and rollers to plane wood automatically. As per our expertise, the planing task can be completed very quickly with a power planer machine.
Due to this reason, it is preferred by veteran woodworkers. You can choose between different types of mechanical planers, such as handheld planers, stationary planers, and bench planers. However, most mechanical surface planers are fairly complicated tools, regardless of the type. That’s why beginners with no prior experience may have trouble using such a tool.
Besides, such a power tool generally performs relative planing that requires both the upper and lower surface of the wood to be flat. So, if the lower surface contains imperfections, those will be maintained on the upper surface as well. This can give rise to problems later on, which is why it requires proper expertise to use.
But there is no need to worry, for the procedure discussed below will allow you to use this tool easily and without any issues.
Step 1: Set the planer to your desired thickness
Before you start planing the wood, you need to adjust the thickness of the mechanical planer. This can be done by rotating the circular crank present on the planer manually. By adjusting the crank, you will be essentially lifting or lowering the planer’s housing.
If you move the housing higher, then the cut will be shallower, and vice versa. It is advisable to start with a shallow cut and gradually increase the depth. However, try not to keep it too shallow, as that will not yield the desired results.
In that case, you will need to make several passes, which can increase the time taken to complete the task. On the other hand, you should avoid increasing the cutting depth excessively, as that can tear the wood.
Based on our first-hand experience, we would say that it is unwise to cut deeper than 1/8 inches (0.32 centimeters) in one go. Doing that can strain both the wood and the planer machine.
Here, you should keep in mind that the displayed depth is not actually the depth of the cut but rather the thickness of the wood that you will get. So, you need to adjust the depth according to this aspect.
For instance, let’s say that you have a piece of wood that is three inches thick, and you want to shave off 1/16 inches of wood. In this scenario, you will need to adjust the crank so that the planer housing has a depth of 2-15/16 inches.
Step 2: Set the depth stop (optional)
Most mechanical planers these days come with a depth stop mechanism that allows you to lock the depth of the planer. In other words, you can prevent the planer from going beyond a certain cutting depth by using his mechanism.
For instance, if you set the depth stop to two inches, then the planer will not trim the wood once it reaches the specified thickness. Thus, it is a handy feature that can be used by woodworkers to prevent over-planing the surface.
However, it can cause problems if the wooden piece is thinner than the specified depth stop to begin with. For example, if you want to plane a two-inch thick wood in a planer that has a depth stop of two inches, then the machine won’t be able to perform the task.
In that situation, you may have to lower the depth stop setting to complete the task. Alternatively, you can skip using the depth stop altogether, in which case, this step becomes entirely optional.
Step 3: Turn the planer on and pass your wood through
Next, turn on the power to the planer machine and pass the wooden board carefully through the planer’s housing. It is important that you feed the wood along the grain and in a controlled motion to avoid any accidents or tear-outs. Once it reaches the rollers, though, the wood will begin feeding through the machine automatically.
Step 4: Pull up on the wood as it passes the rollers to avoid snipe
Using a mechanical surface planer to trim wood often gives rise to a condition known as “snipe.” Here, the wood exhibits a slight inconsistency in trimming thickness, where the leading or trailing edge of the board has a slightly deeper cut than the one at the center.
This occurs due to the blades of the feed table being set too high. It causes the leading and trailing edges of the wood to be pulled upwards, thereby causing a deeper cut. In order to resolve this discrepancy, you will need to slightly pull up on the opposite ends of the wood as it is fed into the roller.
Tips for planing wood effectively
By now, you will have gained a clear idea about how to plane wood using manual hand planes and mechanical surface planes. However, if you want the best results, you should keep some of the following tips in mind while undertaking this task.
1. Use protective gear for your eyes, ears, and mouth as needed
When planing wood, a lot of dust and debris is generated in the form of wood shavings. So, make sure to wear goggles and masks to protect your eyes and mouth, respectively. And if you are using a mechanical planer, you should wear a pair of earmuffs as well since the machine can be quite noisy.
2. Re-plane or sand the wood surface
If there are tear-outs on the wood due to errors in adjusting the depth or angle of the blade, you can re-plane the wood to get rid of the issue. Alternatively, you can try to sand the surface to smoothen the tear-out.
3. Store the blades properly
After you are done planing the wood, you should make sure to store the blades properly on their sides to preserve their edge.
Why is wood planing necessary?
Wood planing is a necessary and important woodworking task that helps to maintain the consistency of the material. Raw lumber pieces often have coarse and uneven surfaces. There may be loose splinters on the surface that can be harmful to the user. Besides, you’ll find numerous holes, crevices, and uneven protrusions on the surface.
Such uneven features can be found on newly crafted wooden furniture as well. Likewise, the surface of a wooden furniture item loses its consistency over time. So, by planing the wood, you can get rid of all the above problems.
How smoothly can a planer trim the wood?
How smoothly a planer can trim the wood depends on its configuration. If you use a properly configured planer, you can achieve a very high degree of smoothness on the wood surface. The blade of the planer needs to be sharpened well, and the depth and angle should be correctly adjusted before starting the task.
Is the smoothness achieved by a planer comparable to the smoothness achieved by sandpaper?
The smoothness achieved by a planer is superior to what can be achieved using sandpaper. The latter uses a rough surface or grit to smoothen the wood instead of a blade. The grit basically scratches into the wooden surface, which means that sandpaper does not give you the same level of smoothness as a planer.
Naturally, a higher grit creates rougher scratches and vice versa. On that note, the scratches are usually not visible to the naked eye, which is why the wood may appear relatively smooth at a glance.
What are some alternative tools that I can use to plane wood?
Some alternative tools that you can use to plane wood in case you do not have a planer are a table saw, drum sander, or wood router kit. They can achieve acceptable results but you will need to be extra careful while using them tools since planing wood is not their primary purpose.
As you can see from the above discussion, planing wood can be a fairly straightforward task. And as long as you follow the instructions we have provided, you can get it done in no time.
It goes without saying that prior woodworking experience can come in handy here. But even if you are a beginner, you can get the job done without any issues by following the tips we have mentioned. At first, you may make mistakes, but there is no need to become disheartened by them.
The more you practice, the more you will become familiar with the planing tools discussed here. And before long, you will be able to create flawlessly smooth wooden surfaces.
Let's face it; TIG welding needs the right kinds of equipment to ensure that the work process flows well without any hindrance.
Every piece of filler rod has to be carefully checked and only then used with these torches. They can then be used on different kinds of metal surfaces, but you will have to make a careful choice.
Now there are different types of TIG torches available in the market, and it might be difficult to choose one. So, to help you out, we have curated this list of the top 7 TIG torches right now!
There are options for everybody, be it a DIY enthusiast working on small projects or a professional welder. A list of pros and cons has also been added for each recommendation to give you a clear idea, and that is followed by a detailed buyer’s guide.
So, do not wait any longer. Dive in now!
Listed below are the Best TIG Torches:
RIVERWELD: At the intersection of affordability and performance is RIVERWELD WP-17F SR-17F. Its key feature is a flexible, durable copper head. Prone to overheat with long-term use.
CK17: Flexibility differentiates CK17 Air-Cooled TIG Torch Kit. Its silicon-nylon braided cable and brass head enhance versatility in welding. Hose fittings may be less durable.
Rstar WP17: The Rstar WP17 ranks high for elaborate welding with a 13-foot cord and a flexible copper head. Superior performance despite cost-effectiveness. Customer service could improve.
Miller Weldcraft: Unique to Miller Weldcraft A-150 WP1712RDI25 is a ribbed handle and a reaching flexible neck. Access to replacement parts adds convenience. Hose length may limit larger tasks.
WeldingCity: The WeldingCity TIG Welding Torch WP-17FV-12R is applauded for its remarkable performance on a budget. Notable are its ultra-flexible head and the durable rubber hose. Supplied gloves are considerably oversized.
With numerous options to choose from, selecting the perfect TIG torch can be a challenging task. Fear not, as we have researched and analyzed the top TIG torches based on performance, durability, versatility, and user reviews. In this article, we present to you the seven best TIG torches that stand out for their exceptional features and reliability. So, if you're ready to take your TIG welding experience to the next level, here's the list of the 7 best TIG torches you need to know.
1. RIVERWELD WP-17F SR-17F - Best for Cost-Effective Welding
One of our top recommendations is the RIVERWELD WP-17F SR-17F and it is known for its cost-effectiveness and brilliant functioning. We were very surprised by how great it felt when we held it in our hands. Considering the low price, we had not expected such a well-built product.
First of all, this comes with a flexible head that will not keep moving out of place. It is sturdy enough to be in place while you manipulate it when needed.
Secondly, it is made of copper and hence is pretty sturdy. We were happy with its 150-amp performance, and we were able to work with it for up to half an hour constantly.
Also, they provide brilliant customer service, so you can reach out in case of any issues. One of our friends faced a few issues with a faulty product, and the representatives agreed to replace it immediately. We were very happy to know about their quick and efficient service.
It also offers a complete refund of up to 30 days, which includes the shipping cost. You will have to ship it back, but it will not cost anything extra.
The only issue here is that the product gets hot if you use it for a long time. If this happens, let it rest for a while and cool down. Once it does, you can get back to using it again. This is the only issue that we had, and we believe it should not be a problem for occasional users.
2. CK17 Air-Cooled TIG Torch Kit - Best for Flexibility in Use
Up next is a brilliant product from the house of CK, which is well-known for its high-quality offerings. The CK17 Air-Cooled TIG Torch Kit is an excellent option for DIY enthusiasts and professionals alike. It is known for its perfect fittings and brass head. Read on to know more about it!
One of its top features is the cable which is made to be very flexible. It has a silicon body that is covered with nylon over the braid. Nylon and silicon have very little weight, and you can easily handle the product and work with it for long hours. The silicon also ensures that the body stays cooler as it is temperature-resistant.
Plus, it has a flexible head like the previous option, and you can move it to a maximum of 40 degrees from the center. This is very important while working on curved surfaces or narrow spots like pipe bends.
Next, we have to mention the brass head that is known to be self-lubricating when placed under pressure. It cools down fast, so you do not have to worry about thread seizing.
We were disappointed with the hose fittings as it was not very strong near the head. Now you can use a separate adhesive to keep it in place, but then you might face issues in case the head or the hose needs to be changed. Check the product on arrival for any such faults in the beginning so that you can contact customer care.
What We Like
Nylon braided cover
Made of silicon
Can access narrow spots
Lightweight and easy to work with
What We Don't Like
Hose fitting is not strong
Cooling Method: Air-Cooled | Torch Type: CK17-25-RSF FX | Amperage Rating: 150A | Flexibility: Flexible | Compatibility with Consumables: Yes
3. Rstar WP17 - Best for Detailed Welding Design
If you are a welder who needs to create very detailed designs, then the Star WP17 Tig Welding Torch will work out very well. It is known to be affordable and ranks high when it comes to performance. Many professionals have taken to using this because of the wide variety of features.
This product has a great advantage, and that is its long cord. It sports a 13 feet long cord which will let you move around easily. Also, with dimensions of 12.8 x 12.8 x 2.7 inches, it is easily portable and will not cause hand fatigue. The weight is also 3.74 pounds, and people with less physical strength can use it too.
Next, this is a very affordable option and will not burn a hole in your pockets. We were very impressed with the kind of performance that it showed for the low price.
Moving on, it has a flexible head that can tilt and will allow you to work easily. Professional welders find this quality to be the most important as it can help target all areas with ease.
Plus, the head is made of copper and is known to be very durable.
The product works well, but we would be happier if the customer service was improved. We had some doubts about this option on its arrival, but the customer care representatives could not be reached. We had to then talk to a local garage to solve our queries.
Now that we have reached the middle of this list, it is time to introduce the Miller Weldcraft A-150 WP1712RDI25. It is another lightweight option that will help you in going about your work without any hassle. We were impressed by the huge number of bells and whistles that are offered.
To begin with, this has a ribbed handle that will make it easy for you to use it. Its handle provides a soft grip, while the ribbed part prevents your hands from slipping to provide the most amount of comfort without causing any fatigue.
Next, this offers a lot of versatility, and you can use this for several welding projects. Also, the flexible neck helps a lot in this case. It will allow you to work in narrow areas easily without putting in any extra effort.
Moving on, one common problem with torches is that replacement parts are not available in most cases. If they are difficult to find, most people choose to buy a new one, and that increases expenditure. But the parts for this one are easily available, and you will not have to take any extra effort.
We were slightly disappointed with the short hose that came with this product. It made it difficult to work on large surfaces, and we will recommend that you buy an extension cord that will allow more movement. Other than this, there were no major problems.
If you are looking for great performance at a lesser price, then the WeldingCity TIG Welding Torch WP-17FV-12R works out well. It is perfect for outdoor projects, and you can use it for garage applications too. We were impressed with the value for money that is offered.
This comes with a head that is very flexible and can be tilted up to 135 degrees. You can work at different positions with this, thanks to the flexibility. Adding to this is a gas valve which is very easy to switch on and off. The placement is perfect, and you can look forward to a seamless work process.
Moreover, the cable length is 12.5 feet and will suit most cases. You can take it around your garage easily with the power cord in place.
Also, the cable hose is made of rubber which makes it very durable. Rubber does not react easily and is unbreakable until it gets brittle. So, you can easily work with this for years.
Next, the pack comes with all the needed supplies along with this device. It has a torch accessory kit, a nylon cable cover, and a cable connector. The nylon cover keeps its entire length safe, and it has a zip that makes it easy to cover the cable.
Although this product comes with work gloves to protect your hands during welding, the gloves are huge, to say the least. If you have medium or small hands, then this would not fit you at all. You will have to purchase gloves separately. The company should consider this and make the gloves a little smaller.
One of our final recommendations is the CK Worldwide CK20-25 which is known for its efficient performance and increased productivity. It works flawlessly and can be used by DIY enthusiasts and professionals alike. We also found the customer service to be really helpful in times of need.
One major issue with TIG torches is that the body heats up a lot. But this brand has thought it through, and the product stays cooler for a long time. We were able to work for long hours without needing gloves.
Secondly, it is very easy to connect it with hoses and cables. Most standard-sized cables will easily fit with this, so you do not have to worry about parts.
Plus, the product ranks high when it comes to durability. It has great welding quality and is very productive. Also, its weight of 2.95 pounds will help you work with ease without causing any fatigue. The lightweight body is accompanied by a small head that will ensure that you can reach tight spaces.
The first product that we ordered was leaking from a place, and we immediately filed a complaint. Although we were slightly disappointed, the customer care representatives immediately got back to us and replaced it. The next one turned out to be fine and worked well throughout.
If you are looking for an option with a great build and minimum leakage, then the WeldCraft 366-WP-20-25 TIG Torch Kit will serve you well. It is slim and efficient and will ensure that all the work is taken care of. Also, if you are worried about proper fitting, this one will let you work in peace with its perfect fittings.
First of all, this consists of a long vinyl cable of 25 feet. It will help you work on large surfaces on multiple objects without having to use an extension cord. Adding to the convenience is a slim profile which makes it easy to hold and work with. It only weighs 8 ounces and will not cause any kind of hand fatigue.
Also, the head is flexible and can be tilted to 70 degrees when needed. This, along with the compact body, helped us work in tight areas and cover the entire surface perfectly.
Moreover, it comes with excellent fitting, and every part is perfectly sealed. This prevents any kind of leakage, and you can work in harmony.
Lastly, parts can be replaced in case any of them malfunction. They are easily available, and you can safely use this for years without any worries.
The only issue with this one is its high price which sets it apart from the rest. It might be over the budget for the average homeowner but if you can spend a few bucks extra, go for it. Because it is durable, we feel that the extra amount ly worth it.
In the realm of welding, TIG (Tungsten Inert Gas) torches are pivotal tools. As such, selecting the best TIG torch can greatly influence the quality and efficiency of a welding job. This article presents a detailed comparison of several top-tier TIG torches, focusing on aspects such as cooling method, torch type, amperage rating, flexibility, and compatibility with consumables. These specifications substantially influence the performance and usability of the torch in a multitude of welding conditions.
Now before we take our leave, let us tell you about some important factors to consider. These will help you make an informed choice, and you can have a great experience while working. Always remember that the most expensive option may not be the right choice for everybody.
Power
The amount of power needed greatly depends on the kind of application that you are looking at. If you want a product for light use, then you will not need more than 200 amps. Anything lower will work out well for small projects in your house or garage.
But if you are looking to use one for heavy applications, then you will need a torch that is rated higher than 250 amps. This will give you enough power to tackle larger projects. Professional welders generally choose this over other options.
Flexible Head
A flexible head is extremely important in ensuring that you can work well without any hand fatigue. Also, some areas are difficult to reach, and then there are tighter spaces. These cannot be reached at all without a very flexible head. Also, check if the head is narrow so that you can make it enter tight spaces.
Grip
A good grip will allow you to work with ease, and the handle will not slip out of your hands. It is best to look for a rubber grip as that works the best. It is soft and firm and will give you the right grip.
Also, some handles have a ribbed surface, and we appreciate these. The ribs prevent the hand from slipping, and you can achieve flawless results.
Length Of Hose
We will suggest looking for a long hose as that will ensure that you cover large surfaces easily. This will also let you move away from the plug point and work without an extension cord.
What are the components of a TIG torch?
A typical TIG torch consists of several components. These include the torch body, which houses the electrode, gas nozzle, collet, collet body, and a gas lens or cup. The torch also has a handle with controls for adjusting the gas flow, amperage, and other settings. The cables connected to the torch deliver power and gas from the TIG welding machine.
What are the advantages of using a TIG torch?
Using a TIG torch offers several advantages in welding applications. Firstly, TIG welding produces high-quality, precise welds with excellent control over the heat input. The process allows for welding a wide range of metals, including stainless steel, aluminum, copper, and titanium. TIG welding also enables the use of filler rods, making it suitable for both fusion and filler rod welding.
Additionally, the TIG process produces minimal spatter, resulting in clean and aesthetically pleasing welds.
Can I use a TIG torch with other welding processes?
TIG torches are primarily designed for TIG welding applications. However, some TIG torches can be compatible with other welding processes, such as Stick (Shielded Metal Arc Welding) welding. This flexibility allows welders to switch between different welding techniques using the same torch, enhancing versatility and convenience.
Can I upgrade my existing TIG torch?
Yes, it is possible to upgrade certain components of your existing TIG torch. Upgrades can include replacing the handle for improved ergonomics, upgrading to a gas lens for better gas coverage, or upgrading the cables for increased flexibility and durability. However, compatibility between the torch and the upgraded components must be ensured. Consult with the torch manufacturer or welding supply specialists to determine suitable upgrades for your specific torch model.
Always remember to wear proper gear before beginning your work. Have safety gloves on and safety headgear too.
The glasses are very much needed to protect your eyes from any sudden sparks. If you keep this in mind, you should have an error-free experience. A good TIG torch should make the process simple and less messy.
Having said that, let’s now do a quick recap of our favorites before we take your leave. The RIVERWELD WP-17F SR-17F is our personal favorite because of its cost-effectiveness and excellent performance.
With this, we will now sign off. Let us know in the comment section about your favorite product.
Everyone loves a beautiful and elegant bathtub to unwind in after a long day, don't they?
And an alcove bathtub is designed to deliver that sought-after luxurious bathing experience. These tubs are ideal if you want to add a classic style to your bathroom that will remain fashionable for a long time.
Plus, they are a great option if you don’t have ample space in your bathroom. Besides, these are suitable for people with disability or limited mobility to have a comfortable bathing experience.
Whatever your purpose, an alcove bathtub is a valuable addition to your gorgeous bathroom. But they come in various sizes, shapes, and colors, which makes the selection even more difficult.
So, keeping in mind the various needs of our readers, we bring to you the 9 best alcove bathtubs available on the market. Without further ado, let’s dig in!
Listed below are the Best Alcove Bathtubs:
Kingston Brass Aqua Eden: This alcove bathtub is known for its heat-retaining resin-reinforced acrylic material. A notable drawback is the lack of an included drain kit.
American Standard Cambridge Left Hand: Acclaimed for its affordability and deep soaking depth, this bathtub may have an uneven bottom surface, which can lead to drainage issues.
American Standard Cambridge Right Hand: This bathtub follows ADA specifications, adding comfort and accessibility, although its floor surface might not be as slip-resistant as claimed.
Empava Alcove Whirlpool Bathtub: Offering an indulgent experience with adjustable hydromassage jets, the cost of this bathtub is significantly higher compared to others.
Fine Fixtures Alcove Bathtub: Ideal for smaller bathrooms due to its compact size and durable acrylic material, this bathtub's dimensions might be too small for some users, and it comes with a relatively short warranty period.
To help you in your search, we have curated a list of the best alcove bathtubs available in the market. Each bathtub on this list has been carefully selected based on its quality, design, features, and customer reviews. So, if you're ready to create a serene bathing sanctuary, here's the list of the 10 best alcove bathtubs to consider.
1. Kingston Brass Aqua Eden Alcove Bathtub - Best for Durability & Warmth
One of the top products on our list is an acrylic alcove bathtub by Kingston Brass that guarantees to please both your body and eyes. Kingston Brass is best known for its Aqua Eden Collection, including this unit. And buyers can choose from a variety of aesthetically pleasing and high-capacity bathtubs in this collection.
This perfectly-sized tub is suitable for everything, from a relaxing bath after a tiresome day at the office or spending an intimate evening with your better half. And the best part is that it’s available in various sizes, styles, and materials.
Not only does the acrylic construction with fiberglass and resin reinforcement deliver a classy look but they also add to its durability. Plus, the acrylic material keeps your water warm for longer and doesn’t stain easily.
Apart from that, it’s not much of a challenge to install this bathtub. You won’t have to make any changes in your space to fit it there. Just take the measurements of the space and get a suitable one.
In terms of capacity, this versatile tub holds up to 58.2 gallons of water, so you can immerse yourself in the water completely, making the bathing experience more relaxing. Also, you can choose the right-side or left-side drain for added convenience.
The Kingston brass bathtub doesn’t come with a drain kit included, and you need to purchase it separately. It’s not much of an issue unless the kit is out of stock, in which case you need to wait before using the bathtub till you have access to the drain.
What We Like
Sturdy construction
Large capacity
Right or left-side drain available
Stain-resistant
Keeps water warm for long
What We Don't Like
Doesn’t include the drain kit
Material: Acrylic | Dimensions: 60 x 30 x 22" | Capacity: 64 Gal | Drain Placement: Left | Jet System: No
2. American Standard Cambridge Left Hand Soaking Bathtub - Best for Scratch Resistance
Next on our list is a lightweight, affordable, and durable acrylic soaking tub by American Standard, a company known for manufacturing award-winning designs for kitchen and bathroom products. Creating a perfect harmony between style and function, this unit has become one of the most desirable products on our list.
With a glossy porcelain enamel finish, this bathtub by American standards is a beautiful addition to any bathroom. Boasting a sleek style, it blends in any bathroom, regardless of the decor or size, and the porcelain enamel finish is scratch resistant and durable. And with a 14-inch depth, it delivers the ultimate soaking comfort.
The unit is made of durable americast, which is lighter than cast iron, and much easier to handle. Plus, the material retains heat, so that you can enjoy warm water for prolonged periods.
Apart from that, its durable and easy-to-clean floor surface is Staysure slip-resistant, which eliminates the risk of falling.
Lastly, a formed steel center layer adds stability and strength to dump away your worries of corrosion and saggy surfaces. Overall, this bathtub takes the beauty of your million-dollar bathroom to a whole new level and lets you have a peaceful bathing experience for a long time.
When we used the bathtub, we discovered that the bottom surface was not very flat. It may not be a big deal if you're just lying down in the water. However, because of the uneven surface, it may cause drainage issues.
What We Like
Made of durable and high-quality material
Lighter than cast iron
Scratch-free
Slip-resistant floor
Steel layer is durable
What We Don't Like
Bathtub floor is not that flat
Material: Porcelain | Dimensions: 60 x 32 x 17.75" | Capacity: 60 Gal | Drain Placement: Left | Jet System: No
3. American Standard Cambridge Right Hand Soaking Bathtub - Best for Hydromassage Jets
This is yet another soaking alcove bathtub by American Standard that is also made of robust and durable Americast material. It's designed in a left-hand layout and comes with three color options: linen, white, and arctic color. And similar to the sibling product, it comes with a glossy porcelain enamel finish and is suitable for any bathroom.
It's built with an American porcelain material, which is patented by American Standard and guaranteed to be heavy-duty, just like the right-hand layout model. And, the glossy enamel is scratch-resistant while promoting insulation and making its maintenance somewhat easy.
The most noticeable feature that differentiates it from its counterpart is its ADA-compliant technology. In simple words, it’s designed to deliver a safe, easy, and comfortable bathing experience for people with disabilities or limited mobility. Users can install a seat in the head end if required.
Besides, installing this unit is much easier, especially if you’re a DIYer. It features an integral tile flange on three bathtub slides that allow the tub to stay in its place.
Also, its classic design establishes harmony between style and comfort. Moreover, it’s integrated with a beveled headrest and a lumbar supportive contour to ensure optimum comfort for users.
Many customers reported that the surface of the floor is not resistant to slips, as has been described by the company. Its counterpart is much more effective in this respect. So, it’ll be necessary for the company to take note of the issue and address it properly.
What We Like
IS ADA compliant
Easy to install
Americast construction
Delivers a great bathing experience
What We Don't Like
Not slip-resistant
Material: Porcelain | Dimensions: 60" x 32" x 14" | Capacity: 50 Gal | Drain Placement: Right | Jet System: No
4. Empava Alcove Whirlpool Bathtub
This whirlpool bathtub is a premium quality modern alcove unit that delivers the best possible bathing experience. It comes with 11 hydromassage jets that can be controlled to feel pampered and relaxed every time. Apart from that, it comes with a range of other exciting features, which we’ll discuss shortly.
This alcove tub by Empava comes with a range of advanced features, but we absolutely loved the 11 hydromassage jets. Out of them, four jets are located in the lumbar region, three are around the body, and the rest are around the foot region. Furthermore, you can easily control their angles and flow rates to have a relaxed bathing experience.
The unit comes with a modern design, a tempered, transparent glass front panel, a slip-resistant floor, and an acrylic body with a stainless steel bracket, making it robust, durable, and long-lasting. Plus, defined lines on the rectangular body make the bathroom seem more spacious.
Moreover, it comes with a 60 minutes auto shut-off protection technology that prevents any pump failures. And lastly, with pre-installed and pre-drilled accessories, the tub is much easier to install.
The only downside of this unit is its price, as its cost is much higher than a traditional alcove bathtub. Regardless of the advanced features and luxury, we believe the price could have been much lower.
What We Like
Delivers an optimum relaxing experience
Easy to install
Prevents any pump failures
Modern and sleek design
What We Don't Like
Premium price
Material: Acrylic | Dimensions: 59.49 x 29.53 x 22.05" | Capacity: 42 Gal | Drain Placement: Center | Jet System: Yes
5. Fine Fixtures Alcove Bathtub
As we’ve reached halfway through our list, we present a small-sized alcove bathtub by Fine Fixtures. Irrespective of its size, the tub features everything one seeks in a bathtub. Be its high-quality construction, easy installation, or convenience, it comes with everything to make your investment worth it.
This alcove tub by Fine Fixtures is probably one of the most compact alcove bathtub models available, measuring 48 inches x 32 inches. Its compact and small size makes it suitable for people with small bathrooms or those who don’t have the space to accommodate a large bathtub.
In terms of construction, it boasts a premium-quality acrylic material with a glossy porcelain finish and fiberglass reinforcement that is durable and is resistant to any scratch or crack. Also, it’s safe against any kind of oils and salts.
Moving on, its installation is pretty straightforward, meaning you won’t have to call a plumber for it. The models also come with a pre-fixed tile flange that prevents water from seeping out of the walls. And its sloped lumbar support delivers an exquisite bathing experience.
Last but not least, the tub’s ledge can accommodate items like shavers, soaps, and other toiletries for convenient accessibility.
If you’re looking for a large and spacious bathtub to spread your legs and relax, this unit might not be the ideal option. For taller people, the tub might be much smaller to fit in. Apart from that, the unit comes with only a 1-year warranty, which is not much for such products.
What We Like
Compact design
Easy to install
Accommodates bathroom items and other toiletries
High-quality finish
What We Don't Like
Might be too small for some users
Comes with only a 1-year warranty
Material: Acrylic | Dimensions: 48 x 32 x 21" | Capacity: 43 Gal | Drain Placement: Center | Jet System: No
6. Kingston Brass VTAP543022L Aqua Eden
Next, we have another model by Kingston Brass that has a decent tub capacity and water depth. The model belongs to their Aqua Eden series, primarily engineered to become cost-effective and affordable for most buyers.
Like any other product on our list, this unit also boasts an acrylic construction with resin reinforcement and fiberglass. So, you have a robust and lightweight bathtub that is resistant to any scratches or cracks. Moreover, the material possesses a superheated resistance quality that keeps your water warm for a long.
Talking about its convenience, it has a dimension of 57 x 32 x 23.5 inches. Now, this may come across as a little smaller, but its 55.6-gallon capacity makes up for it to a large extent. After a tiresome day, just immerse yourself completely in hot water and eliminate all your anxieties or tiredness.
Talking about the installation, it’s incredibly user-friendly and doesn’t require much effort to get installed in your space. Furthermore, its acrylic construction makes it easier to clean and maintain.
As reported by most customers, the finish of the unit could’ve been much better. And people taller than 74 inches might find it difficult to fit inside the bathtub properly. So, the unit might not be the go-to for taller people.
What We Like
Lightweight and robust
Easy installation
Large capacity
Keeps water warm for long
What We Don't Like
Finish could’ve been better
Not suitable for tall people
Material: Acrylic | Dimensions: 54 x 30 x 21.63" | Capacity: 55.6 Gal | Drain Placement: Center | Jet System: No
7. KOHLER Expanse
Kohler has been committed to improving people's living standards by delivering exceptional plumbing products. Likewise, the KOHLER K-1118-RA-0 Expanse is a stylish, comfortable, and compact bathtub that delivers a graceful elegance to your bathroom. And its modern design blends with several bathroom fixtures and bathroom decor.
We loved the modern design of the bathtub by Kohler that works well with any bathroom decor. This curved basin design looks absolutely classy, especially with an integrated apron, which adds to the look. Plus, its acrylic construction and glossy finish make it scratch-resistant and long-lasting.
Due to its compact size, it fits into any bathroom and makes space for other accessories to fit in. But despite having a small size, it has a capacity of approximately 56 gallons, thereby holding a lot of water.
Apart from that, this unit has a tile flange design that doesn’t allow water to seep through walls and holds the tub in its place. Plus, its floor surface is textured, which minimizes the risk of falling. All in all, it is a great compact tub with a lot of advantages.
KOHLER K-1118-RA-0 Expanse has a depth of 13 inches, which might not be enough for some people. And, the curve takes up some extra floor space, which might be off-putting for some as being disqualifies its original purpose of being compact-sized.
What We Like
Unique design
Slip-resistant
Large capacity
Tile-flange design holds the tub in its place
What We Don't Like
Depth might not be adequate
Curve takes extra floor space
Material: Acrylic | Dimensions: 62.63 x 40.63 x 21" | Capacity: 60 Gal | Drain Placement: Center | Jet System: No
8. KOHLER Bellwether
Next, we have another product by Kohler that boasts a cast iron construction, making it their staple product. Most of the alcove tubs of Kohler are made of enameled cast iron, which, although heavy, is robust and durable. Also, the bathtub is available in three different colors, white, biscuit, and dune, and each finish is glossy and smooth.
Apparently, with clean and sleek lines, the bathtub gives out an elegant and classy look. In fact, its clean lines and integral apron deliver a complete and comfortable bathing experience. The manufacturer offers three different color options to its customers, each of which has a smooth finish and glossy outlook.
As the unit is constructed with premium-quality cast iron, the material is durable and features stain, scratch, and impact resistance mechanisms. Besides, the tile flange holds water to seep out of the wall and makes it easier to install.
The unit is installed with a safeguard slip-resistant surface, so you won’t worry about slipping off while bathing. And lastly, it keeps the water warm for an hour or longer, so you can enjoy a warm shower for a longer period.
Being made of heavy-duty cast iron, this unit is much heavier compared to the ones made of acrylic material. And if your current bathtub has product galore lined on its side, this might not be an option for you. The narrow and sloping sides are not suitable for keeping bottles on.
What We Like
Durable and long-lasting
Easier to install
Slip-resistant
Keeps water warm for long
Elegant looks
What We Don't Like
Very heavy
Narrow and sloping sides
Material: Cast Iron | Dimensions: 60 x 30.25 x 14" | Capacity: 60 Gal | Drain Placement: Center | Jet System: No
9. PROFLO
One of the final products in our list of top alcove bathtubs is a heavy-duty and high-capacity drop-in tub by Proflo. Its 75-gallon capacity might be the highest on our list and is designed to fit in an average-sized bathroom. And, it is backed by as high as five years of warranty, which is quite reasonable compared to other big brands.
There are a lot of exciting features of the product to look forward to. For one, its pre-leveled tub bottom makes for an easy installation process and comes with a slip-resistance surface that offers a solid and firm grip footing for standing on the bathtub. Having a textured bottom surface minimizes the risks of accidents, making it a suitable choice for aged people.
Further, its massive 75 gallons capacity makes it stand out amongst many big names on the market, you have a quality alcove soaking bathtub. And, being 15-inch deep, it is probably one the deepest alcove tubs you’ll get.
Like other models on our list, it's made of heavy-duty acrylic material, with properties like scratch resistance, crack resistance and heat holding. Plus, the model is backed by a whopping five years of warranty, more than some notable brands.
So, the Proflo alcove tub is ideal for those seeking high capacity and depth.
Here, we must mention it is a very bulky and big drop-in bathtub that might not be suitable for people with small or congested spaces. Drop-in tubs provide more aesthetic benefits than a standard three-wall alcove bathtub, but they are typically much more expensive and difficult to install. You might need an experienced plumber for this purpose.
What We Like
Durable construction
High capacity and depth
5-year warranty
Easy maintenance
What We Don't Like
Not suitable for small bathrooms
Heavy and difficult to install
Material: Acrylic | Dimensions: 63 x 45 x 22" | Capacity: 75 Gal | Drain Placement: Left | Jet System: No
What Is the Best Alcove Bathtubs?
The table below provides a detailed comparison of the top-rated alcove bathtubs, factoring in their respective materials, dimensions, water-holding capacities, drain placement positions and the presence or absence of a jet system. It's important to note that the dimensions are typically reported in inches, whereas the bathtub's water capacity is calculated in gallons.
Now it’s time to explain the factors to consider when selecting the best bathtubs for your bathrooms. It will help you select a product that fits your needs.
Material
The first and probably one of the most important factors to consider when selecting the best alcove tub is the material it’s made of. These are available in multiple materials like fiberglass, acrylic, cast iron, etc.
A fiberglass material warps and is prone to breaking down in the event of a heavy fall. Plus, it’s not durable or solid as acrylic, porcelain, or cast iron, they are more expensive and can handle heavy falls or color fading over the years. Most of the products on our list are made of acrylic material and are resistant to cracks, scratches, or color fading.
On the other hand, an alcove cast iron bathtub keeps bath water warmer longer, so if you love bathing in warm water for long, we’d recommend going for these. Plus, it’s also suitable for houses with children running around.
Use
When taking note of the shape or size of your alcove bathtub, consider how you will use it. Whether you’re only used to washing or soaking pets, or if your family is going to take a bath in it, bathtubs serve different purposes.
Pay attention to its height and width, as taller people need longer tubs with a minimum of 8 inches step-over height. Fatter people need ones with greater width.
Design
The different shapes and sizes of an alcove bath fulfill various needs. An alcove bathtub makes the most of the space you have got. When selecting a suitable unit, you need to consider the available space you have and if the unit looks good there or not. So, first, measure the size of your bathroom space and the overall interior decor like mirrors or window treatments before you make a purchase decision.
If you have ample space in your bathroom, a freestanding tub is also a viable option.
Weight And Size
Before putting on your shopping glasses, think about the weight and size of your alcove bathtub. For instance, enameled steel or cast iron bathtubs are much heavier compared to acrylic bathtubs. So, you need reinforced flooring before you place such a heavy load on them. Keeping them over poorly structured flooring can damage them over time.
And if you don’t want to change the flooring anyway, go for a lightweight alcove bathtub option.
Installation
Alcove installation is pretty much a straightforward process. Firstly, ensure your bathroom has enough space to accommodate your new bathtub, and then screw the studs on either side of it. Ensure the drainage pipes are placed in an appropriate direction from where water can flow out.
Floor And Safety
The bathtub is enclosed in an alcove that is generally surrounded by tiles. There are two kinds of flooring in an alcove bathtub, smooth surface, and textured surface. The former is best for peaceful soaking, while textured is best when you have elderly people or children in your house. A textured floor minimizes the risk of accidental falling down.
Features
Most modern alcove bathtub comes with water jets which turn it into a luxurious spa, where you can have a peaceful bathing experience. You also have features like different neck grooves or seating depths. More the features, the more costly your alcove bathtub will be. So, make sure you have in mind your budget before opting for these.
How long are alcove bathtubs expected to last?
Alcove bathtubs generally have a lifespan of around 10-15 years. And its lifetime depends on the kind of material your bathtub is made of. For example, a cast iron bathtub lasts more than 25 years, while the porcelain ones have a lifespan of merely 5-6 years.
Does the weight of alcove bathtubs matter?
Yes, the weight of the alcove bathtub matters as your floor needs to be reinforced to install a heavy alcove bathtub, the installing process can be extremely challenging with a heavy alcove bathtub. With fiberglass-reinforced or cast iron bathtubs installation is much easier.
Are alcove bathtubs suitable for daily use?
Yes, these bathtubs are a perfect addition to your everyday bathing needs. Every member of your family can use these anytime they want with ease.
Is it safe to order large bathtubs from e-commerce websites?
Yes, it’s perfectly fine to order these alcove tubs from online stores. Like in physical stores, these products are delivered right to your doorstep, and you won’t have to worry about any damage or wear during shipping.
With this, we've come to the end of our in-depth review-based guide to the best alcove bathtubs on the market. We hope these alcove bathtub reviews pave the way toward purchasing an ideal bathtub for your space. But before we leave, we’d like to mention a few of our favorites.
The Kingston Brass Aqua Eden Alcove Bathtub would be the best acrylic alcove bathtub, as it brings a perfect blend of style and functionality. Its glossy enamel top layer delivers an aesthetic look to the space and blends well with any interior decor. Plus, its robust and sturdy material makes it durable and long-lasting.
Our next favorite from the list would be American Standard Cambridge Left Hand Soaking Bathtub. Although its right-side model offers almost similar features, its ADA complaint makes it suitable for people with mobility issues.
The Senville LETO is the most powerful option that can be used for a large garage. You can also get the Pioneer Diamante, which is one of the best ductless mini-split ACs available today. And if you want portability, you can pick the Whynter ARC-14S air conditioner.
While it is not as lived in as the other rooms of your house, a garage (residential) surely has its uses.
Besides storing your car, it can be used for different other activities. But whatever you intend to use it for, it is important to keep the garage cool, dry, and clean. This is where garage air conditioners come into the picture.
Now, the real question is - what is the best garage air conditioner? That’s what this review-based guide seeks to answer. So, if you want to learn about some of the top garage ACs available today, jump in!
Listed below are the Best Garage Air Conditioners:
Senville LETO: The Senville LETO Air Conditioner is ideal for large garages with 24,000 BTU capacity and compatibility with Alexa. The issue includes unstable Wi-fi connectivity.
Pioneer Diamante: The Pioneer Diamante Air Conditioner is known for easy installation and energy-saving ECO mode, it falls short in cooling larger garages with its 12,000 BTU capacity.
Whynter ARC-14S: Whynter ARC-14S Air Conditioner specializes in quick cooling and high dehumidification, but it lacks a heating function.
Cooper & Hunter Mia: Cooper & Hunter Mia Air Conditioner delivers powerful cooling and easy maintenance, but installation requires professional assistance.
Olmo Alpic: The Olmo Alpic Air Conditioner is versatile with cooling, heating, dehumidification, and defrosting features, yet can be notably noisy during operation.
Here’s the list of the 8 best garage air conditioners to keep your space cool, dry, and comfortable for all your activities.
1. Senville LETO Air Conditioner - Best For Large Garages
What We Llike
Highly energy efficient
Silent but powerful operation
Offers complete climate control
Compatible with Alexa
What We Don't Like
Wi-fi connectivity is a bit erratic
When it comes to air conditioning solutions, Senville is a reliable brand. Its focus on quality is behind the popularity of the LETO series of air conditioners. In fact, this particular option is the best mini split air conditioner that you can get for a large residential or commercial garage.
This two-ton mini-split AC comes with a powerful cooling unit that has a rating of 24,000 BTU. Despite that, it is highly energy efficient and can save almost 40% more energy compared to other air conditioner systems.
Moreover, the AC unit has been designed to be attractive and has a very silent operation. Because of these aspects, you can use it in any room of your house apart from the garage. And it is durable too, which keeps it protected from damage and improves its lifespan.
Another notable feature of this particular option is its 4-in-1 functionality. In addition to the air conditioning system, it comes with a heat pump, dehumidifier, and fan with a turbo function. So, it is fully equipped to take care of any air-quality issues in your garage.
Besides, the unit is compatible with Alexa, which makes it highly convenient to use. You can make use of digital and voice control systems to operate it from anywhere in your home. However, the wi-fi connectivity of the unit is a bit erratic at times, especially when you are in another room. But it shouldn’t be an issue if you are close enough.
2. Pioneer Diamante Air Conditioner - Best Ductless Mini-Split Air Conditioner
What We Like
Easy to install
Highly convenient operation
Good energy efficiency
Durable outdoor unit
What We Don't Like
Not very effective for large garages
Pioneer is another renowned brand in the domain of air conditioning and similar HVAC (heating, ventilation, and air conditioning) systems. The Pioneer mini-split ACs are particularly popular due to their high efficiency and robust performance. That’s why I have included the Pioneer Diamante air conditioner on my list, which is possibly one of the best ductless mini-split ACs that you can get today.
The ductless design of the indoor unit makes it easy to install. Conversely, the outdoor unit is made from durable galvanized metal and coated with epoxy paint. Moreover, it comes with automatic double-swing air louvers and permanent washable air filters, which help to improve user convenience.
Speaking of convenience, I noticed this model features an attractive front panel LED display with dimmable light intensity. It works well with the wireless LCD remote, which allows you to control the different functions of the unit conveniently. You can swap between heating, cooling, ventilation (architecture), and dehumidification functions, giving you full control over the air quality of your garage.
The appliance comes with a DC inverter compressor with a cooling capacity of 12,000 BTU, making it an ideal choice for small to medium-sized spaces. It is not that effective for larger rooms and garages, though, which is a drawback of this particular option.
Furthermore, I noticed that it comes with a unique ECO mode that optimizes energy usage without compromising cooling efficiency. So, if you use it in this mode, you can keep your monthly electricity bills in check.
3. Whynter ARC-14S Air Conditioner - Best Portable Air Conditioner
What We Like
Offers quick and effective cooling
Good dehumidification capability
Drains the wastewater automatically
Environmentally friendly
What We Don't Like
Lacks heating functionality
Whynter is a brand that specializes in manufacturing compact but powerful air conditioning systems. Because of this reason, the ARC-14S is widely regarded as one of the best portable air conditioners for indoor spaces. It is a dual-hose air conditioning unit that offers sufficient cooling for small to medium-sized garages.
The dual hose system offers quick and effective cooling, which gives it an edge over other similar options available today. This portable AC unit has a cooling capacity of 14,000 BTU, which effectively covers an area of 500 square feet. It recycles the moisture collected from the air and uses it for the cooling process, which improves its functional efficiency.
Aside from that, the unit comes with a fan and dehumidifier, which gives it a fair bit of versatility. There are three fan speeds available, and the dehumidifier can remove almost 71 pints of moisture from the air every day. Here, I noticed that it comes with an auto drain feature, which eliminates the need to drain the wastewater manually, improving convenience.
However, there is no heating functionality in this portable air conditioner, which makes it unsuitable for use in cold climates. But if you live in warm regions, that won’t be much of an issue. Apart from that, the machine comes with a remote control that makes it convenient to use.
The ARC-14S uses a CFC-free green R-32 refrigerant, which makes it environmentally friendly. To further improve on this aspect, Whynter has used lead-free, RoHS-compliant components for this product.
4. Cooper & Hunter Mia Air Conditioner - Best Efficiency
What We Like
Powerful and efficient cooling
Silent operation
Versatile fan settings
Easy to maintain
Supplies fresh and clean air
What We Don't Like
Difficult to install
USB adapter for wi-fi needs to be purchased separately
For this review, I bring you the Mia air conditioner from Cooper & Hunter. It is known for its energy-efficient cooling solutions, and the Mia series is the most popular single-zone air conditioner sold by the brand.
This one-ton air conditioner has a cooling capacity of 12,000 BTU, which makes it a great choice for garages, living areas, or other light commercial buildings. However, I found that despite being a ductless AC, it has a relatively complex installation process that can only be done by a professional.
When it comes to functionality, this option meets all of the expectations. The AC uses inverter technology for powerful cooling and highly efficient energy use. Similarly, the heating functionality works at temperatures as low as five degrees Fahrenheit, which keeps your garage adequately warm during the winter months.
The fan comes with multiple speed settings, which improves the versatility of this option. There is also a turbo function which improves the ventilation provided by this unit. Despite that, it has a pretty silent operation to reduce disturbance.
Another thing I noticed about this air conditioner is its self-cleaning function, which makes it easy to maintain. Likewise, the activated carbon filters ensure you get clean and hygienic air inside the garage.
The AC unit is wi-fi ready, which makes it compatible with smart home systems like Amazon Alexa and Google Nest. But you will need to purchase an additional USB adapter for this purpose, which can be a mild inconvenience for users.
Olmo is a relatively lesser-known brand that manufactures HVAC equipment. It specializes in combining new-age technologies in conventional HVAC systems to improve their usefulness. The Alpic air conditioner is one such example, which is why I have included it on my list.
This ductless, mini-split air conditioner has a heating capacity of 9,000 BTU, which makes it a perfect choice for small garages. That said, I found its cooling power to be suitable enough for medium-sized rooms too. Besides cooling, the unit provides heating, dehumidification, and defrosting functions, which improve its overall versatility.
The air conditioner comes with intelligent defrosting and pre-heating features, which help to improve user convenience. It also has a self-diagnosis feature, which makes it easier to maintain. There are other convenient features as well, such as the inclusion of an LED display panel and remote, auto-restart functionality, turbo mode, sleep mode timer, and others.
Its compressor utilizes a power inverter to provide energy-efficient cooling and heating. The energy usage for this model is roughly 25% to 50% less than other electric zonal HVAC systems. Its heat pump is equipped to provide adequate heating and cooling under most temperature conditions - hot or cold.
Another notable aspect of this air conditioner is the outdoor condenser, which has a unique GoldFin coating to protect it from corrosion. Furthermore, it comes with a two-way drainage connection on either side, which makes for a flexible installation. However, I noticed that this unit is comparatively noisier than other air conditioners, which can be annoying for many users.
6. Midea Portable Air Conditioner - Best For Small Spaces
What We Like
Space-saving design
Easy to install
Can be used as a widow AC
Silent operation
Easy to use and maintain
What We Don't Like
Not suitable for large spaces
Heating functionality not available
Midea is a globally renowned brand that manufactures a wide range of electrical home appliances, ranging from lighting to refrigeration solutions. It has considerable expertise in the domain of manufacturing HVAC systems like air conditioners. In that context, the Midea Portable air conditioner is one of the most popular products of this brand.
This particular option comes with a highly compact design that makes it perfect for small spaces. You can easily set it up in the corner of your garage, and you will still have ample floor space for keeping other things.
The installation is pretty straightforward too, and you can easily do it yourself without any professional help. On that note, it comes with a window kit that allows you to install it on your garage window. Thanks to that, it can be effectively used as a window air conditioner as well.
This portable air conditioner has a cooling capacity of 8,000 BTU and can cool an area of 150 square feet. If you have a small room or garage, this won’t be much of a problem. But if you have a medium or large garage, you will find this option to be highly inadequate.
You also get a dehumidifier and a fan with this model, which should take care of the air quality in your garage. However, I found that the lack of a heating function reduces its usability when the weather is cold. Nevertheless, it has a very silent operation, which gives you a peaceful ambiance. And it is easy to use and maintain, which further improves user convenience.
7. ApooDr Mini Split Air Conditioner - Best For Silent Operation
What We Like
Offers powerful and efficient cooling
Features five different operational modes
Runs silently
Easy to maintain
What We Don't Like
The installation instructions are difficult to follow
Here, I have reviewed the ApooDr Mini-Split air conditioner, which is a frequently overlooked option for a garage AC. This ductless option comes with a powerful and efficient inverter system and offers five different operational modes for increased versatility.
The cooling capacity of this particular option is 12,000 BTU, and it can easily cool up to 550 square feet of space. Thus, it can be used for small and medium garages. Aside from cooling, you get heating and dehumidification modes with this model. There is also a fan with a turbo function that provides quick and efficient air circulation.
For enhanced user convenience, the AC comes with an auto mode. You can easily switch between these five modes with the LCD backlit remote. Furthermore, I noticed that it has a silent operation, which makes it great for other living areas besides your garage.
This AC unit uses a tube that has a large number of groove teeth. That, in turn, increases the heat transfer area, which ultimately improves the cooling efficiency. What’s more, the heat exchangers have a golden fin coating that prevents corrosion and keeps microbes away.
The packaging includes an installation kit for convenience. However, I noticed that the installation instructions in the manual are a bit hard to follow. So, if you have limited DIY experience, you might find it challenging to set up. With that being said, the unit is easy to maintain, thanks to the washable air filter.
8. Daikin Mini Split Air Conditioner - Best Warranty Coverage
What We Like
Great energy efficiency
Offers uniform air circulation
Comes with a 10-year warranty
Generates very little noise
What We Don't Like
Difficult to install
Daikin is another globally renowned brand that makes high-quality air conditioning solutions. The Daikin Mini-Split air conditioner is a product that has a great energy efficiency rating for its class. It has a cooling capacity of 9,000 BTU and a SEER efficiency rating of 19. Due to this reason, it is a great choice for those who are looking to cut down on their monthly energy bills.
The unit has a coverage area of 350 square feet, which makes it ideal for small and medium-sized garages. It uses smart inverter technology along with a variable-speed compressor for optimal cooling and heating within a single room. And thanks to the turbo mode, it can reach the desired temperature within minutes.
To enhance user comfort, the AC comes with a wide-angle louver that dissipates cool or hot air over a large area. There is an auto-swing function that not only eliminates the need to control the airflow manually but also distributes the air uniformly inside the room.
While in use, I noticed that the indoor unit generates very little noise, making it great for your bedroom or living room as well. Conversely, the outdoor unit generates only 51 dB (decibel) of noise, which makes it a lot more silent than other models.
Additionally, the product comes with a lengthy 10-year warranty on the parts, along with free technical support. With that being said, you will need professional support to install the unit because it is a fairly complicated process for a DIYer.
The quest for the best garage air conditioners necessitates a comparative analysis of various air conditioning units' critical features and performance characteristics. This article presents a comprehensive comparison table of several top-rated garage air conditioners, particularly focusing on their Type, Capacity (measured in British Thermal Units, or BTU), Voltage (measured in Volts, or V), Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio (SEER) Rating, Noise Level (measured in decibels, or dB), and Coverage Area (measured in square feet, or sq. ft).
This is the most important aspect to consider when looking for a good garage AC. There are several types of air conditioning units available today, and I have discussed each of them briefly in this section.
1. Ductless Mini-Split Air Conditioner
The ductless mini-split AC consists of an indoor unit pumping warm or cool air inside the room and an outdoor condenser unit that contains the compressor. A supply line circulates refrigerant from the outdoor to the indoor unit, while an exhaust line drains the excess water generated from condensation out of the garage.
In a central heating and cooling system, you have ducts that need to be placed according to the room size. A ductless mini-split AC needs no such considerations, which makes them a lot more convenient by comparison. And on top of that, they have good heating and cooling efficiency. However, mini-split air conditioners are generally quite expensive, which deters most users from buying them.
2. Portable Air Conditioner
A portable AC is a compact unit to heat and cool your garage. Unlike a ductless mini-split AC, a portable unit can be easily transported between different rooms, and does not need to be mounted on the window, wall or the ceiling which increases its versatility. Besides, most portable air conditioners have a fairly reasonable cost, which makes them a decent choice for your garage.
However, their smaller size means that they have limited cooling capacities. Moreover, they need to be placed on the floor, which can eat up some of your garage space, no matter how small. Thus, you may have difficulty storing your car or other things in the garage. Not only that, but it also increases the risk of being bumped into, which can damage the unit.
3. Window Air Conditioner
As you can guess from the name, such an AC unit needs to be installed on the garage window. The window unit contains the compressor, refrigerant, fan, and thermostat in a single compact package. On that note, window air conditioners are quite affordable, which offers excellent value for your money.
However, you will need wide garage windows to set them up, or else the installation process will become a lot more complicated. And if you have a windowless garage, you will not be able to install a window AC at all.
4. Evaporative Cooler
This is another viable type of air conditioner that you can use in your garage. Evaporative coolers reduce the temperature inside a room through the process of evaporation. In addition to being affordable, they are extremely energy efficient, which makes them a great investment. Besides, they can help improve indoor air quality by absorbing dust and allergens from the air.
On the flip side, they are not as versatile as conventional air conditioners. They do not work well in humid environments either, which is due to the presence of excess moisture that interferes with the evaporation process.
B. Size Or Cooling Capacity
If you want the air conditioner to heat or cool your garage effectively, you will need to consider its cooling capacity, which is typically measured in BTU (British Thermal Unit). It is also referred to as the size because the dimensions of your room (such as the length, width, and height) play an important role here.
For instance, if you have a large garage, you will need an AC that has a high BTU output. If you don’t, your garage air will not be adequately conditioned. On top of that, the machine will become overloaded, which will reduce its lifespan.
C. Energy Efficiency
Running your AC requires energy because it is an electrical appliance, after all. And if you require a lot of heating or cooling, your AC’s energy usage will naturally be higher. In this regard, it won’t be very feasible if you have to spend a sizable amount of money on your monthly energy bills. That is why you need to consider the energy efficiency of your garage AC unit.
To achieve that goal, you need to check the seasonal energy efficiency ratio (SEER) rating or Energy Star rating. An AC with a high SEER rating consumes little energy to heat or cool your garage. This, in turn, reduces your monthly energy spending, which will benefit you in the long run. On a side note, it will reduce your carbon footprint and improve environmental sustainability.
D. Additional Features
If you want the best value for your money, you should try to get an option that comes with different extra features. For example, if an AC has wi-fi connectivity, you can control the app via your smartphone, which will improve convenience. Likewise, if it is compatible with smart home systems like Amazon Alexa or Google Nest (smart speakers), it will be even easier to use.
Some air conditioners use air quality monitors to eliminate dust, allergens, and harmful gasses (such as carbon monoxide) from the air. They also prevent the growth of mold and mildew, giving you a clean and fresh air supply. This is even more beneficial for a garage since most garages have comparatively poor air quality compared to the rest of the house.
Similarly, if your AC comes with maintenance features like washable filters and automatic drainage, you will be able to keep it in top shape for a long time.
Is getting an air conditioner for your garage worth it?
Yes, it is absolutely worth it to use an air conditioning system inside your garage. In fact, it is strongly recommended by experts that you do so, given that the garage tends to get hot more quickly than the rest of your home.
And if you live in a region with a humid climate, the high moisture levels in the air will make it even more uncomfortable inside your garage. But with an AC, you can keep the temperature and humidity levels in check.
Can you use a central air conditioner inside the garage?
Using a central air conditioning system inside your garage is not safe, which is why I would strongly advise against that. A central AC uses a system of return air vents to circulate air throughout your home.
If you put these air vents inside your garage, they can suck in exhaust fumes from the vehicles that you keep here. These fumes will then be circulated throughout the house, which can be potentially dangerous for the inhabitants.
How to increase the efficiency of a garage air conditioner?
Increasing the insulation of your garage is the best way to improve the efficiency of your garage AC. The greater the insulation you provide, the more efficient your system will be. For this purpose, you need to insulate the garage doors, windows, and walls against ambient heat.
Use heat-resistant paint to keep the walls and doors cool. Likewise, install shades over the exterior walls and windows of the garage so that they are not exposed to direct sunlight. Subsequently, seal all the cracks or gaps in the windows and doors.
How to vent your garage air conditioner?
If you have a portable air conditioning unit, then the best way to vent it is through the garage window. Pass the exhaust pipe through the window opening during installation, which will take care of the venting needs. However, if your garage lacks windows, then you will have to cut a hole in the walls or under the garage door for the venting pipes.
In the case of a window or a mini-split AC, you won’t need to vent them manually, as they come with built-in exhaust channels.
How often do you need to maintain your garage AC?
Since this room tends to get dirty quickly, you will need to maintain your garage AC at frequent intervals. Ideally, I would suggest that you clean your AC at least once every six months. However, you can pick a schedule that suits your usage habits better.
Of course, the above routine should be followed for the internal components, such as the filters, fans, water trays, and so on. I would suggest that you keep a hand duster near your AC at all times. With it, you can clean the external surface of the machine at least once daily.
Many people use the garage as a workshop for their do-it-yourself projects, while others use it for music practice or as a garage gym. In any case, its versatility makes it an important part of your house.
That is why you shouldn’t ignore the air conditioning in your garage. And I hope that with this guide, you can purchase the best garage AC to eliminate air pollution and humidity, and make this room comfortable enough for your needs.
Before I wrap it up, though, I would like to mention my personal favorites from the list. The Senville LETO is a great pick for those who have large garages. Besides, I found its smart features to be highly convenient.
Apart from that, there’s the Pioneer Diamante, which is the best ductless mini-split AC, thanks to its efficiency and cooling performance. Or you could go with the Whynter ARC-14S, which is the best portable air conditioning option.
Frustrated with the inconsistent water outflow of your defective shower? It’s high time you get a dual showerhead.
These amazing models are relatively new on the market but have already gained great popularity. The reason? A good quality dual shower head offers the consistency, flexibility, and comfort that you desire and comes in various attractive designs.
So, going for such a model would definitely be a wise decision. But, given the availability of a ton of options out there, choosing the ideal one becomes difficult.
That’s why we’ve tried to make the task simpler for you by curating this comprehensive guide on the 10 best dual shower heads on the market. We’ve also included a buyer’s guide to help you make a well-informed decision.
With that said and done, let’s dive in!
Listed below are the Best Dual Shower Heads:
AquaDance: The AquaDance 3328 excels in ease of installation and offers versatile shower experiences through its six shower settings. Its disadvantage is the absence of water-saving technology.
Hydroluxe: Hydroluxe 1433 offers 24 water-flow patterns and five shower settings, allowing impressive flexibility by operating both shower heads simultaneously or separately. Its aesthetic design may not appeal to all users.
DreamSpa: The DreamSpa 1684 is notable for its unique square design and wide 4.75-inch shower heads, providing a modern showering experience. The limited variety of shower modes is a shortfall.
BRIGHT SHOWERS: BRIGHT SHOWERS PSS3919-06 stands out with its modern and stylish design, built from heat-resistant ABS plastic, and a wide 8.9-inch shower head. It falls short in the lack of diverse shower settings.
Waterpik Showerhead: The Waterpik High-Pressure Showerhead stands out with its therapeutic PowerPulse water massage technology. A potential shortfall for those seeking broader coverage is the 5-inch diameter shower head.
From high-pressure spray to multiple spray settings, these shower heads have it all. So without further ado, here's the list of the 10 best dual shower heads.
1. AquaDance 3328 - Best for Tool-Free Installation
Tested by experts to meet the highest US standards for performance and quality, this dual shower head can make every shower enjoyable and comforting. It is equipped with a slew of top-notch features that work to provide ultimate user convenience. In fact, this model can also be a great out-of-the-box gift option for any occasion.
First things first, this dual shower head consists of an overhead and a handheld option, each with a diameter of 7 inches. This large diameter gives you a thoroughly immersive experience with every shower.
Another great benefit of going for this model is that its installation doesn’t require any tools. On the contrary, it can be completed just by tightening the shower heads by hand. The two fixtures also fit any of the standard shower arms.
Last but not least, these shower heads come with six different settings, viz. pulsating massage, rain massage, power rain, rain mist, and the water-saving pause mode. This allows you to regulate the water flow as per your need so that you can enjoy the desired style of showering at any point in time.
In addition, the three-way diverter valve allows you to utilize a single shower head or both of them at once, thereby providing additional convenience and flexibility.
This dual shower head needs more frequent maintenance than many other models. As such, you’ll have to clean it at least once a week to ensure too much dust or dirt doesn’t accumulate on the two heads. But we don’t have any other complaints regarding this one as it delivers a commendable performance.
What We Like
Comes with a handheld and overhead option
Installation is completely tool-free
Six shower settings help you get the desired showering style
Both shower heads can be used at once or separately
Next, we’ve chosen this efficient model from Hydroluxe that’s also a great option if you want to have a pleasant and refreshing shower each time. Customers from across the country have praised it for its range of highly effective features. From our experience with this model, we are sure you’ll be delighted with its performance.
We found the most noteworthy feature of this shower head to be the availability of 24 water-flow patterns, including full as well as combined ones. For activating any of these patterns, you just need to click the lever dial provided on the shower head. This feature facilitates user convenience to a great extent by letting you bathe in the style you prefer.
What’s more, the model offers five shower settings like our previous pick, which include massage, economy rain, stay-warm mist, power rain, and a pause function. It also has flow limiters fixed within, which ensure that the water pressure never exceeds 2.5 GPM. This results in a reduction in water wastage, thereby putting it a step ahead of other models.
Furthermore, the model comes with a durable 3-way diverter which enables you to operate both shower heads at the same time or separately as per your needs.
The only downside of this dual shower head is that the packaging material used is not strong enough. This makes it prone to damage while being delivered. So, make sure you check all the parts of the model thoroughly to ensure it’s in the right condition. Apart from that, it delivers a pretty consistent performance.
What We Like
Boasts of 24 water flow patterns
Flow limiters reduce water wastage
Shower heads can be operated at once or separately
If you’re searching for something that looks different from the general round-shaped shower heads, you would love this model for sure. Coming with utility-based features, it also ranks high in terms of performance and durability. So, let’s move on and have a closer look at all that it offers.
To begin with, each of the shower heads in this model has a diameter of 4.75 inches, which facilitates a wider coverage. We were also impressed with the push-button control on the handheld shower head, which lets us operate it with one hand. Thus, you don’t require turning any dial as in the case of ordinary models.
The highly fashionable square shape of the shower heads, along with a superior-grade chrome finish, is another factor that sets it apart from other models. Plus, they have rub-clean jets that help you clean mineral buildup easily; just rub each nozzle with your fingers, and it’s done.
You even get really effective customer support that tries to resolve all sorts of queries. And finally, there’s an instant return or replacement policy if you’re not satisfied with the performance.
Some customers complained that the Teflon sealing tape in the package that has to be used after tightening the shower heads is much thinner than the standard size. Hence, they suggested that it was best to purchase thicker Teflon tape for the purpose. But they were pleased with how the model worked.
4. BRIGHT SHOWERS PSS3919-06 - Best for Modern Design
This Bright Showers model is another good choice if you want a showerhead that stands out from many others in terms of looks. It also makes each shower ultra-comfortable; in fact, it offers a spa-like experience that’s bound to impress you. Plus, this model is available in 4 attractive colors.
Firstly, the ABS plastic material of this dual shower head enhances its strength and durability to a great extent and also provides great heat resistance. This ensures it delivers consistent and long-lasting performance for the years to come. In addition, the rectangular shape of the fixed shower head and the wand-like design of the handheld one is visually quite appealing.
Another advantageous feature is the 5-feet long hose that’s flexible and also comfortable to handle.
There’s also an adjustable swivel connector on the shower head, which can be adjusted 360 degrees to position it at the desired angle. Plus, its stainless steel material is very sturdy and damage-resistant and is coated with a beautiful oil-rubbed bronze finish.
And that’s not all; the 8.9-inch width of the fixed shower head ensures much wider coverage than most other models on the market.
We felt its only drawback was the availability of just two shower settings, which makes it lag behind other models in terms of user convenience. As such, some users may choose another one coming with more shower settings over this model. But performance-wise, we didn’t spot any issues with it.
What We Like
ABS plastic material enhances strength and durability
5. Waterpik High-Pressure Showerhead - Best for Therapeutic Massage
Halfway through the list, we’ve included this dual shower head from Waterpik that not only offers the ideal comfort but also heals the body with each shower. In fact, many homeowners all over the country have expressed their satisfaction with its performance. The brand also offers efficient and reliable customer service.
The single biggest advantage of this model is that it uses a highly efficient PowerPulse water massage technology to make each shower truly therapeutic and rejuvenating.It enables a deep massaging effect and provides up to twice the massage force to help soothe the tension in muscles and increase body flexibility.
You can even get a more restful sleep by using this model regularly. Sounds great, doesn’t it?
For this purpose, it utilizes a combination of three spray modes, viz. full body, massage, and PowerSpray to offer eight spray settings.
A water-saving spray mode is also included along with these therapeutic massage settings. To activate any of these, you just have to move the small knob attached to the lower part of each shower head.
Moreover, the 5-inch diameter of the fixed shower head helps in providing the desired coverage consistently.
The stainless steel material used for the hose is not as durable as that offered by other models. As such, it might not remain in the right shape after a few years of use. We also didn’t find any information related to the warranty offered by the brand.
What We Like
Uses a highly efficient water massage technology
Provides relief from muscle tension
Lets you change the spray settings easily
5-inch fixed showerhead provides the desired coverage
What We Don't Like
Less durable stainless steel material of the hose
Material: Plastic | Flow Rate: 1.8 GPM | Number of Settings: 9 | Showerhead Shape: Round | Hose Length: N/A
6. HotelSpa 1440
HotelSpa is well-known for its range of good-quality showers, and this model from the brand is definitely one of its best dual shower heads. Coming with an advanced and sophisticated design, it offers the right combination of comfort, convenience, and efficiency that most users desire.
What we liked the most about this shower head was its SpiralFlo design which provides superior-grade flow performance and water pressure. You won’t have to worry even when the water pressure at the source is lower, as it efficiently maintains the flow at the desired intensity.
Besides, the model offers six spray settings that include pulsating massage, power rain, rain massage, power mist, economy mode, and rain mist. These help suit the different bathing styles of users, thereby facilitating greater convenience.
Beyond that, we found the overhead bracket to be highly suitable as it allows you to point each of the shower heads at the desired angle. The model also has a switch that you must turn to direct the water flow between the two showers. Lastly, we liked the thick sealing tape included in the package that provided a firm fixture.
Many customers expressed their disappointment over the lifetime warranty offered by this brand. They pointed out that it didn’t cover all the issues that might be faced with the model. As such, this won’t be an ideal choice to go for if the effectiveness of the warranty is a primary lookout for you.
What We Like
Provides superior-grade flow performance
Spray settings designed to suit different bathing styles
Lets you point the shower heads at the desired angle
This shower head from the Taiker also comes in a different design and offers a considerably durable performance in the long run. As for the comfort and convenience on offer, it can provide you with a shower experience at par with some of the best hotels. Well, who wouldn’t love that?
The large fixed showerhead with dimensions of 8 x 8 inches is the best feature of this model in our opinion. Such a large size promotes a coverage wide enough to provide you with a full-fledged and highly relaxing shower.
Plus, it comes in an attractive square shape and is made from an extremely strong stainless steel material that gives it immense durability.
Each shower head also has a water outflow of as much as 2.5 gallons per minute (GPM) which ensures it works consistently even when the water pressure is low. Coupled with this is an air-in, ultra-thin technology that optimizes the performance for any pressure level, thereby promoting sustainable water usage.
In addition, there’s a flow regulator that can adjust the pressure according to your needs. And you’ll be glad to know that the shower head is 60 inches long and hence making the handheld option more flexible and convenient.
The swivel connector on the fixed shower head might not work properly sometimes. Thus, you may find it difficult to adjust it to the desired angle so that the water can be dispensed in an improper direction. If you face this issue, make sure you report it to the manufacturer as soon as possible.
Our next pick is yet another Bright Showers model, which works perfectly to provide a fulfilling shower experience. Coming in three appealing colors, it is built to suit the bathing needs of every home and also has an eye-catching design that would complement any bathroom quite well.
We found the handheld shower head to be really convenient as it came with an ultra-comfortable grip and three efficient spray settings. Each set is well equipped to provide ultimate relaxation to the body and can be activated quickly with the push button positioned on the front face.
While the saturating mode enables full coverage, the massage mode provides a relaxing water spray. The third mode, it enables a combination of the two others to give users a full-fledged relaxing water massage.
You will also like the overhead rain shower as it consists of 200 super-efficient nozzles spread over the 8-sq-inch area to offer ample coverage. These nozzles would never clog and have a self-cleaning property that helps push out water at a faster pace.
Finally, the durable shower holder for the handheld option can be fixed without having to drill the wall and can be adjusted by two angles.
The only issue that you might face with this model is that the connection between the shower heads and the diverter can’t be tightened firmly. As a result, it may not be able to prevent the shower head from turning. But it does the job quite well otherwise.
What We Like
Comfortable grip of handheld shower head
3-spray settings provide ultimate relaxation
200 nozzles offer ample coverage
Shower holder can be fixed without drilling
What We Don't Like
Poor quality connector between the shower head and diverter
The next model we have for you is the Moen 26009, which comes in a classic design and blends beautifully with any decor. Its chrome finish is highly reflective and hence provides it with an appealing mirror-like look. Performance-wise, the product also lives up to the expectations of any homeowner.
This model uses a unique magnetic technology for docking the handheld shower head with a magnet to provide greater convenience. If you’re taking a shower for a long time, this will relieve you from hand fatigue while also providing the desired comfort.
In addition, the multiple spray settings give variety and flexibility to the shower system in your bathroom so that you can enjoy every shower to the fullest. The high-quality metal hose is also completely kink-free and gives greater flexibility and reach to the user.
Beyond that, the brand offers a limited lifetime warranty that ensures you don’t incur additional expenses for any repair or replacement. Even the instruction manual is well illustrated, making the tool-free installation quick and easy.
The shower head may be delivered with certain parts missing in the package. So, make sure you check all the contents carefully, and if you face such an issue, don’t delay informing the manufacturer about it. But other than that, we were pleased with how this model worked.
What We Like
Handheld shower can be docked by a magnet
Kink-free hose gives greater flexibility and reach
Towards the end of our list, we’ve included this good-quality model from Delta, which also comes in an attractive design. It gives you an intensely rejuvenating shower experience all throughout and is built to last for years. On the whole, it would be a pretty decent choice to go for.
Straight off the bat, this model lets you choose between a powerful full-body spray with forceful water streams and a relaxing massage with focussed water jets. We also loved the 2-in-1 design that allows you to use the hand shower head either separately or securely docked within the larger fixed shower head.
Moreover, the spray nozzles on each shower head are very easy to clean as you just have to use your fingers to wipe away the lime and calcium buildup. This rules out the need to use chemical cleaners, as in the case of ordinary models.
It even comes with a WaterSense label which ensures you enjoy a drenching shower while using much less water. As a result, it lets you save money while making sure the performance is never compromised.
The chrome finish on this model is not very durable, due to which it might lose its shine after a couple of years. So, if you’re looking for a model with a better-quality chrome finish that would last longer, it’s best to go for another model.
What We Like
2-in-1 design facilitates convenient use
Spray nozzles are easy to clean
WaterSense label promotes sustainable water usage
Offers full body sprays as well as relaxing water massages
The table below provides a comparative review of some of the best dual shower heads available on the market. The products are assessed in terms of their material construction, water flow rate (measured in gallons per minute or GPM), number of adjustable settings, shape of the shower head, and the length of the accompanying hose (measured in feet).
Going through the specifications of some high-performing dual shower heads won’t be enough to make a suitable choice. You will have to consider some key features of these models to ensure that you get the right performance. So, in this section, we’ve listed some essential factors to keep in mind before proceeding to choose an ideal dual shower head.
Versatility
When it comes to choosing shower fixtures, you must decide how versatile you want them to be. Ask yourself which spray patterns you would prefer, and try to decide the shower functions needed. Note that in case you prefer greater versatility, you’ll have to go for a model with lots of spray features. Also, it must have adjustable shower heads or ones that feature many clearly distinct spray patterns.
The Diverter
Since these models have two shower heads, the setup would come with a diverter valve to direct the water flow from the plumbing to any one or both fixtures. So, it must be efficient enough to ensure this mechanism works in the proper way.
To be sure regarding its efficiency, you can check the customer reviews on the product page. Also, note that some models may have 2-way diverter valves which allow you to use only one shower head at a time. This makes it essential to check the type of diverter valve used in the product while going through its details.
Build Quality
The material of the dual shower head is one of the most crucial factors to consider as it would determine its durability and longevity. We’d suggest going for metal fixtures as they are tougher and more long-lasting than the majority of models.
However, if you still wish to go for a plastic dual shower head, it would be best to choose a model made from ABS plastic as it’s much tougher than the more prevalent standard plastic material.
Can I install a dual shower head myself?
It depends on your plumbing skills and experience. If you have some plumbing knowledge and feel comfortable working with pipes and fittings, then you can probably install a dual shower head yourself. However, if you are not confident in your abilities, it’s best to hire a professional plumber to do the job.
Can I use both shower heads at the same time?
Yes, you can use both shower heads at the same time. However, the water pressure will be split between the two shower heads, so the water flow may be weaker than when using a single shower head.
Do dual shower heads use more water than a single shower head?
It depends on the water flow rate of the shower heads and how long you shower for. If the dual shower heads have a higher water flow rate than a single shower head and you take longer showers, then you may end up using more water. However, if you keep your shower time and water flow rate the same, then using a dual shower head may not significantly increase your water usage.
How do I clean a dual shower head?
To clean a dual shower head, you can use a mixture of white vinegar and water to dissolve any mineral buildup. Fill a plastic bag with the vinegar mixture and attach it to the shower head with a rubber band. Leave it for a few hours or overnight, then rinse with water. You can also use a toothbrush to scrub the shower head and remove any remaining buildup.
Do I need special plumbing to install a dual shower head?
You do not need special plumbing to install a dual shower head, but you may need to make some modifications to your existing plumbing. This may involve installing a diverter valve or upgrading your water supply to handle the increased water flow. It’s best to consult with a professional plumber to determine what modifications are needed for your specific situation.
By now, we hope all the doubts in your mind regarding dual shower heads have been cleared. Choosing a suitable model is not that difficult after all; just remember to consider your needs and preferences before making a choice. So, go ahead and purchase a good model to enjoy a more refreshing shower experience.
But before we bring down the curtains, here’s a quick recap of our favorites from the list. The Hydroluxe 1433 is the best budget buy in our opinion. On the other hand, if you prefer a high-performing model with a more visually appealing design, the DreamSpa 1684 would be an ideal choice.
With that, we’ll call it a day. Till next time, take care!
How often have you postponed renovating the flooring because you didn't want to pry open floor cabinets fixed to walls? We have got a way out!
With a toe-kick saw, you can efficiently work on the flooring, including corners that are difficult to reach because of furniture lining up the wall. The best of the lot would cut very close to walls with exact precision.
Now, we know how problematic it can be to select one out of the numerous choices in the market. To make it easier, we have curated our very own list of the top 2 products, taking into consideration the price, depth capacity, and other essential features.
And that’s not all; a buyer's guide has also been included to help in your decision-making process.
Dig in to know more!
Listed below are the Best Toe Kick Saws:
Crain 775: The Crain 775 Toe-Kick Saw is notable for its ease of use, smooth cutting along walls, and high power capacity of 11 A, suitable for wood surfaces. The blade can't be adjusted and is primarily designed for wood cutting.
Chicago Electric Power Tools: The Chicago Electric Power Tools Heavy Duty Toe-Kick Saw excels in its cutting depth adjustability and maintaining steady control due to dual handles. It withstands long usage durations without overheating. Users may find corner-cutting challenging.
Here's the list of the 2 Best Toe Kick Saws of 2023, perfect for precision cutting in tight spaces, complete with a buyer's guide to simplify your choice
1. Crain 775 Toe-Kick Saw
The Crain 775 Toe-Kick Saw is one of the best options when it comes to taking care of subfloors. It cuts through the floor flush with utter smoothness, leaving you with a clean cut while the cabinets stay in place. We were impressed to see that this could cut through wood like butter, removing all kinds of undesired underlayment in the process.
First of all, we found that the toe kick saw deals with corners efficiently, making sure that every curve is worked on. It has a clutch mechanism that disengages, and that’s how it reduces kickback while working around edges and curves.
Besides, the blades can penetrate up to a depth of ¾-inch. This is mostly enough and will deal with traditional tiles easily. But if you need to go deeper, other blades can be ordered separately and used along with this saw.
It also came with a safety case that not only kept the equipment protected but also prevented its sharp edges from causing scratches on the surface.
Overall, it saved us a lot of time and effort. Usually, it would take more time to tear 4 layers of flooring to reach the hardwood below, but this made the task so much easier.
The only drawback is related to the efficiency of the blade. The length cannot be adjusted, and the blade that you get will only work with wood. This is the only problem but it can be resolved by purchasing blades separately. Make a note of the length you need and get the blades accordingly.
What We Like
Cuts very close to the walls
Has a case for safekeeping
Easy to use
What We Don't Like
The blade cannot be adjusted
Blade: High Speed Steel | Dimensions: 16 x 8 x 15 inches | Weight: 14.2 pounds | Volatage: 120 V | Amperage: 11 A
2. Chicago Electric Power Tools Heavy-Duty Toe-Kick Saw
With a powerful machine and efficient safety features, the Chicago Electric Power Tools Heavy Duty Toe-Kick Saw has occupied the 4th position. It is equipped with adjustable blades and works well with all kinds of surfaces. We could work with cutting away thick wooden subfloors with precision.
There is one common issue with most toe-kick saws. The depth in most cannot be adjusted, but this one stands apart. With 4 cutting depth positions ranging from ¼ inch, ⅜ inch,⅝ inch and ¾ inch, you can rest assured that every material can be penetrated for precise cuts.
There is an additional safety button on the trigger switch, which will help you escape any kind of dangerous situation. The placement is vital, and the company has made sure it can be reached immediately.
To add to the ease of usage, the gadget has dual handles. This helps in holding on to the body more steadily. Stay in control with this added measure.
Besides this, it is known to be a perfect device for professionals as it does not heat up even when used for long. You can cut subfloor plywood with ease, and it will keep working until you retire for the day.
After we started working on the corners, we realized that inside corners could not be reached with this product. This led to us damaging the face board in trying to reach it. We would have liked it more if it could reach corners in an easier way.
What We Like
Dual handles for steady control
The blade can be easily adjusted
Good for tight cuts
Has high power and works efficiently
What We Don't Like
Using it around corners is tough
Blade: High Speed Steel | Dimensions: 11.5" x 11" x 7.25" inches | Weight: 10 pounds | Volatage: 120 V | Amperage: 6.8 A
What Are the Best Toe Kick Saws?
Comparing the essential features of toe kick saws help identify which saws are best suited to a specific kind of job. This comparison includes blade type, dimensions, weight, voltage and amperage. All these factors contribute towards the overall functionality and efficiency of the tool.
A good toe-kick saw can help a lot in renovating a house without having to move anything around. It is essential that you buy one which fits your purpose and not necessarily the one which works best for us or is the most expensive.
Make a choice carefully after you assess the kind of material, depth, and other features that you would require. We have noted down the criteria you should keep in mind. So, let's get to it!
Depth
When working with a kick saw, the depth of the blades is the most important feature. There are some options that will let you adjust the depth. This is vital for you if you are a professional working with varied surfaces every day. Check the thickness of the flooring you are dealing with before choosing one.
A fixed depth means you can only use it for one kind of material as the blade cannot be adjusted. This is good for personal use wherein you know the thickness of the floors of the house. But using it on a large scale would require you to buy additional blades that would fit with the machine.
Safety Measures
Because the blades are very sharp, one has to be extremely careful around these. Do not let kids anywhere near the unit at all. Also, see if you would be getting a cover along with it. A cover would help you keep your peace of mind and keep surfaces free from scratches. Not to forget, it will also ensure that even if kids touch it, they will not get hurt.
Size and Weight
Toe-kick saws are not generally very heavy. So, transferring it is not a difficult job. What matters is your own physical strength. A heavy saw is mostly preferred as these are more durable than lighter ones. But then it would need more muscle strength, and if you are not physically very strong, this may not be the right choice.
There are lighter saws available for the rest, which are more comfortable to use and carry about. But if you are a construction worker, it is best to go with the heavier option as you would need a sturdy one for constant usage.
Construction Quality
Always check for the construction quality of the gadget. If one is made of cheaper materials, it will not be durable and will crash if you use it too much. Also, there is a problem of heating that may affect the longevity of its parts. You can opt for these if you are looking to work on a single project as these are cheaper choices.
On the other hand, a steel body that is sturdy and can handle heavy-duty work is perfect for professionals or home decor enthusiasts who plan to work on their flooring often.
Choosing a toe-kick saw should not be difficult anymore, considering you have all the information needed to choose one. We have had a wonderful experience with our flooring, and we are sure that you would too.
Before we take our leave, let us tell you about our favorites from the list. The Crain 775 Toe-Kick Saw pleased us the most with its incredible bells and whistles and its affordable price. This gave us the perfect combination of efficiency and affordability.
If you want a versatile product, the Dremel US40-03 Ultra-Saw Tool Kit will be the best option. It comes with all the other essentials needed to conduct the whole process of taking apart the subflooring.
With a good unit, look forward to the house of your dreams with the exact kind of flooring you would want. It is time to impress guests with an ambiance you will have created all by yourself.
Happy shopping!
T2000 headlamps are an ideal companion for all kinds of situations, be it in your daily life or during camps, trips, and excursions.
Headlamps free up your hand so you can explore and do more rather than being restricted while holding a flashlight. And with an increasing number of campers and adventurers, new companies are emerging almost regularly with quality headlamps.
Therefore, selecting the best among them is a challenging task, especially if you have never used these lights. And getting out with a sub-par quality headlamp can land you into major troubles.
So, our team of experts and we have handpicked some of the top-notch T2000 headlamps available on the market. Without further ado, let’s dive in!
Listed below are the Best T2000 Headlamps:
GearLight LED Headlamp: Superior for weather resistance with an impressive 10-hour runtime. The dependency on AAA batteries marks its limitation.
Elmchee LED Rechargeable Super Bright Headlamp: Stands out with exceptional 12,000-lumen brightness and eight working modes. Lower run-time on a single charge marks its shortfall.
SLONIK Headlamp Rechargeable: Highly durable with aero-grade aluminum construction. Powerful in illumination, its limitation is low battery backup.
LHKNL Headlamp: Unique for its motion sensor convenience, it misses the robustness due to the nonexistence of a waterproof design.
Everbrite LED Headlamp: Offers long-lasting lighting with a 100,000-hour lifespan. Its shortcoming is the inability to withstand harsh weather conditions.
Here's the list of the 10 best T2000 Headlamps that will illuminate your path and enhance your outdoor experiences.
1. GearLight LED Headlamp - Best for Weather Resistance
GearLight specializes in designing and delivering quality, dependable, and highly affordable LED products. Its S500 LED headlamp comes with powerful LED lights, a versatile design, weather resistance, and many others, making it one of our top recommendations. Let’s discuss these in detail.
There are several things that we liked about this unit. GearLight S500 features a powerful and hands-free led headlight that generates a long-lasting and brilliant light beam with daylight definition and color. These lights run more than 10 hours at a stretch on a single AAA battery.
Comfort was another basis for our comparison, and this unit excelled in this respect. The washable, adjustable, and removable headband fits everyone, be it children or adults. And the overall unit weighs only 3 pounds, making it easy to carry around.
Not only that but featuring a 45-degree adjustable head, you can direct the light anywhere you need. Being shockproof and waterproof, it can handle the harshest of conditions, rain, snow, or hailstorm, making it an ideal companion for your outdoor adventures.
Last but not least, it comes with a set of two headlamps, qualifying as a value-for-money purchase.
The only minor issue we found is that the LED headlamp runs on an AAA battery, so once it drains out, you need to replace it with a new one. It can be a minor inconvenience if you are outdoors and don’t have spare batteries. However, you can easily avoid this by carrying a few extras in your backpack.
What We Like
Long-lasting and bright lights
Easy to wear
Adjustable lights
Easy to carry around
What We Don't Like
Runs on AAA batteries
Lumens: 200 | Beam Distance: 300 ft | Battery Type: AAA (3x) | Waterproof Rating: IPX4 | Number of Modes: 7 | Weight: 3 oz
2. Elmchee LED Rechargeable Super Bright Headlamp - Best for Multiple Modes
The next product on our list is a rechargeable, long-lasting, reliable headlight that brightens the environment, allowing you to read, work, or explore anything you want. And, with eight working modes, this headlamp is suited for all your lighting needs, whether you’re indoors or outdoors.
Elmchee headlamp is not only one of the most affordable and diverse options out there. It comes with as many as six LED lights with eight different working modes. These modes include low beam and high beam, all bright, strobe, auxiliary light mode, and the coolest, S.O.S red strobe and red light.
The lights can rotate 90 degrees, so you can easily change the focus lights on anything you want. Moreover, they come with a brightness of 12,000 lumens, which is impressive considering that even a 1,000-lumen light is incredibly bright. There are mixed reviews from customers regarding brightness, so you need to try it for yourself. But we can assure you of an eye-scorching bright light output from these headlamps.
Apart from that, with 1,500mAh Li-polymer batteries, these LED lights have a whopping lifespan of 100,000 hours! Chances are there that you won’t need to replace these lights ever again.
The lights run up to 8 hours on a single charge, which is less, especially if you are camping outdoors. You generally won’t find a charging point in those areas. Hence, you might need to use them strategically and only when you need them the most in such situations.
What We Like
Easy to charge
Rotatable head
Multiple working modes
Super bright LED lights
What We Don't Like
Battery lasts 8 hours on a single charge
Lumens: 1500 | Beam Distance: 500 ft | Battery Type: AA (2x) | Waterproof Rating: IPX4 | Number of Modes: 8 | Weight: 8.8 oz
3. SLONIK Headlamp Rechargeable - Best for Durability
Slonik rechargeable headlamps are designed to assist explorers, adventurers, and others during harsh, dark, and outdoor conditions, allowing them to work efficiently, safely, and effectively. If you're one of them, you can rely on these lights to be the ideal outdoor companion.
After the Elmchee headlamp, we bring you another excellent little product by Slonik that won’t break the bank. The Slonik headlamp comes with 1,000-lumen LED lights that cast a super bright light, illuminating an area up to 60 feet. Plus, these come with six brightness levels and three modes, suitable for any lighting conditions.
In terms of durability, this dustproof and waterproof headlamp can handle any extreme environment and weather conditions so that you can take it on any hiking trip. We loved that the headband is made of aero-grade aluminum designed to handle extreme conditions.
Furthermore, it has an adjustable headband that is simple to use and perfectly fits anyone. The nylon headband ensures a comfortable fit and can be easily mounted on your head by clipping into the provided hooks.
Once fully charged, the batteries last an utmost of 3.5 hours, which is unmanageable if you’re on a week-long camping trip. So, it’s viable to use these lights only in an emergency and not for working on something or reading.
What We Like
Powerful illumination
High-performance LED light
Comfortable and easy to wear the headband
Durable
What We Don't Like
Battery backup is very low
Lumens: 1000 | Beam Distance: 600 ft | Battery Type: 2200 mAh | Waterproof Rating: IPX8 | Number of Modes: 6 | Weight: 4.12 oz
4. LHKNL Headlamp - Best for Motion Sensor Feature
LHKNL is committed to offering users quality products and services and has upgraded its headlamps to fit the needs of its customers. The 1,100-lumen rechargeable LED headlamp has almost everything a hiker or an adventurer looks for: the super-bright light, lightweight and adjustable design, among others.
Coming with a long press function, the LHKNL rechargeable headlight is now much easier to operate. You can just press and hold the switch-off button for three seconds to turn it off, rather than click and cycle through all modes.
The most exciting part of this headlight is its motion sensor mode, which allows you to turn it on and off just by waving your hand, adding to the overall convenience.
Talking about its convenience, this hands-free unit is flexibly rotatable from 0 to 60 degrees and allows you to illuminate the bright light in any direction. And its elastic headband is comfortable to wear; you can adjust its length, so the headlamp firmly sits on your head.
Aside from that, a battery indicator helps you master battery usage. The light flashes when charging and turns off when fully charged.
Compared to other products discussed above, it doesn’t come with a waterproof and shockproof design. Hence, the unit is unsuitable for outdoor adventures, rock climbs, hikes, or a bike helmet light. Moreover, the battery output of the unit is not that great.
What We Like
Easy to operate
Motion sensor
Flexible headband
Comes with a battery indicator
Comfortable to wear
What We Don't Like
Doesn’t come with a waterproof and shockproof design
Battery output is not great
Lumens: 1200 | Beam Distance: 300 ft | Battery Type: 1500 mAh | Waterproof Rating: IPX4 | Number of Modes: 8 | Weight: 29.9 oz
5. Everbrite LED Headlamp - Best for Set of Six Lights
As we have reached halfway through our list, let us present you with a high-quality, long-lasting, reliable, and super-bright headlampby Everbrite. This product is part of its commitment to providing customers with LED lighting solutions at a competitive price. It comes in a set of six lights, so you can always keep a spare when traveling outdoors.
To begin with, this light is one of the most powerful and brightest headlamp kits that is designed to last longer. Each light is powered by eight LEDs, each having a lifespan of more than 100,000 hours. They also have a 20-meter beam distance, so you can always see what's ahead of you.
Moreover, the LED headlamps are so compact and lightweight that one might not even realize they are wearing them. The super comfortable design adjusts comfortably to your head shape and is fit for all, children or adults. And because the lamp swivels and rotates up to 90 degrees, you can adjust the light to a certain extent without moving the head.
Everbrite headlamp allows you to choose between four different lighting modes. Whether working inside or exercising, hiking or outdoor night walking your dog outside, its multiple brightness levels let you do anything effortlessly.
Despite being made of high-end materials, this headlamp by Everbrite isn’t made to cope with extreme weather conditions. Hiking or outdoor adventure requires waterproof and shockproof headlamps, which this headlamp isn’t.
What We Like
Long-lasting lights
Compact and lightweight
Comfortable to wear
Long light range
What We Don't Like
Can’t cope with extreme weather conditions
Lumens: 150 | Beam Distance: 196 ft | Battery Type: AAA (3x) | Waterproof Rating: IPX4 | Number of Modes: 4 | Weight: 18.72 oz
6. Energizer LED Headlamp
Next on our list, we have a LED headlamp made by one of the largest manufacturers of batteries in the world, Energizer Holdings Inc. It has some unique and innovative features that make it a desirable product amongst hikers, mountaineers, and outdoor adventurers. So let’s get into details about what this product has to offer.
This Energizer LED headlamp has an illumination range of up to 80 meters and is the most popular product among people who go out at night for hiking, running, and exercising. With such a long illumination range with 260 lumens brightness, this headlamp can easily lighten up the entire campsite or room.
In terms of durability, this unit is made of high-quality and durable materials capable of withstanding a drop up to one meter. And featuring a water-resistant IPX4 body and shatterproof lens, the lamp is an ideal companion for both outdoors and indoors.
Apart from that, this headlamp comes with seven light modes powered by a convenient Smart Dimming technology that controls the light intensity. With such a variety of modes, you have optimal lighting for any situation.
And lastly, this light can run up to 35 hours in low mode, so you have a reliable power backup in case of camping or a power outage.
Everything about this headlamp is fantastic except for one fatal flaw: it shines light directly into your eyes. The bottom of the actual lamp is made of clear plastic, which "carries" the glow right into your eyes, effectively blinding you and negating the benefit of the flashlight.
Apart from that, you have to press and hold the button several times to change the brightness of the light, which can sometimes be tiring.
What We Like
Durable
Bright light that illuminates a longer distance
Light runs for longer
Water-resistant
What We Don't Like
Light glows in the eyes
Switching brightness levels can be difficult
Lumens: 260 | Beam Distance: 262 ft | Battery Type: AAA (3x) | Waterproof Rating: IPX4 | Number of Modes: 7 | Weight: 3.52 oz
7. Alyattes Lumen Headlight
Moving on to our next product, we have Alyattes 12,000 Lumen headlight. Because it is lightweight and portable, this headlamp is ideal for hikers, mountaineers, and other outdoor adventurers who cannot carry heavy items. And, with such a bright light, you can efficiently perform these activities even on the darkest of nights.
Alyattes 12,000 Lumen headlight is preferred for those looking for portable devices. It is one of the brightest headlamps out there. Made of aluminum alloy and air-tight rubber sealing, this headlight weighs only 12 pounds and is much lighter than normal ones. Plus, it comes with four lighting modes: lowest, broader, bright strobe, and most focused modes, making it suitable for any lighting conditions.
It is the only waterproof headlamp with a waterproof switch on the outside. And it has leakage-resistant, high-quality, and waterproof wiring on the inside, so the lightdoes not get wet even in stormy conditions. So you can go on new adventures every day without worrying about damaging the headlight.
What’s more, is the amazingly long life of the led headlamp rechargeable battery. The rechargeable flashlight use a CREE LED design, so its batteries last three times longer than other inferior headlamp batteries on a single charge.
Last but not least, the unit comes with a lifelong warranty and satisfaction guarantee against workmanship or material defects.
The main disadvantage of this unit is its short lifespan. Several customers have complained about the headband breaking after only a few uses. So, the headlight is not suitable for rough use. Aside from that, it lacks an adjusting light, which can be inconvenient in some situations, especially when working on multiple projects at once.
What We Like
Portable headlamp
Sweat-resistant headband
Long battery life
Multiple lighting modes
Lifetime warranty
What We Don't Like
Headband isn’t durable
Lacks an adjusting light
Lumens: 12000 | Beam Distance: 150 ft | Battery Type: 3600 mAh | Waterproof Rating: IPX4 | Number of Modes: 4 | Weight: 10.8 oz
8. SLOINK Lumen USB Rechargeable Headlight
Bringing you another quality headlamp by SLOINK made of high-tensile yet portable material, making it easy to carry around. It's super-bright light and long-lasting battery make it convenient for personal and industrial use.
This SLONIK rechargeable LED headlamp is a less expensive but still functional version of its sibling model, the SLONIK 1,000 Lumens headlamp. The number of lumens along with its illumination range is half of its sibling model, that is, 500 lumens and 30 feet, respectively.
The unit is made of solid and durable yet lightweight aero-grade aluminum alloy 6063, making it suitable to use in extreme heat and other weather conditions. Its adjustable elastic headband adds up a notch to its comfort. Furthermore, it is IPX8 waterproof and dustproof grade certified, so you can use it for both personal and industrial purposes.
Not only that but similar to its sibling model, it features a 2200mAh battery that you can conveniently charge anywhere and takes merely two hours to charge fully.
Even though the headband feels lighter on the head, it is not adjustable, limiting its use to people with small heads. So, if you don't want prints on your forehead, check its size before purchasing. Also, similar to its sibling model, the battery doesn’t last long, making it unsuitable to carry on a long night camping.
What We Like
Powerful and bright light
Durable construction
Waterproof and dustproof
Easy to charge
What We Don't Like
Limited-sized headband
Battery doesn’t last long
Lumens: 500 | Beam Distance: 30 ft | Battery Type: 2200 mAh | Waterproof Rating: IPX8 | Number of Modes: N/A | Weight: 4.12 oz
9. AUERVO Led Headlamp
The AUERVO Led headlamp is made to fit over your head like a baseball cap, and its high-quality and durable construction keeps it in place. It does not fall off even while crawling under rocks, climbing a mountain, or participating in your favorite outdoor activity. Furthermore, its cool white bright light is more than enough to illuminate even the darkest surroundings.
For one, the headlamp by AUERVO comes with four adjustable working modes for 1 LED, 2 LED, 3 LED, and strobe brightness, respectively. So, whether you’re working indoors or climbing a rocky terrain at night, this headlamp has got all of it covered.
The rechargeable headlamp use CREE LED bulbs that emit a maximum brightness of 10,000 lumens. And, once charged, it lasts longer than expected. Its head strap is made of a premium aluminum casing, and its adjustable soft elastic is comfortable to wear. It’s a lightweight hard hat light while you’re traveling and camping. Not only that, the head strap is compatible with all, irrespective of their head size.
Moreover, if you need a headwork light that survives extreme weather conditions and rainfall, this unit has got you covered. With an IPX5 water resistance certificate, you won’t worry about snow or rain.
Last but not least, this unit is adjustable up to 90 degrees, which adds up further to its convenience.
Many customers have complained about the faulty charging design of the headlight. They claimed that after charging the device for few times, it stopped working. Apart from that, the power of lamps starts degrading over time, which is not ideal.
What We Like
Comfortable head strap design
Super bright light
Waterproof
Battery lasts long
What We Don't Like
Faulty charging point design
Power of lamps degrades over time
Lumens: 10000 | Beam Distance: N/A | Battery Type: CR123A (2x) | Waterproof Rating: IPX5 | Number of Modes: 4 | Weight: 13.1 oz
10. Victoper Rechargeable Headlamp
As we’ve reached almost the end of our list, we bring you a super-bright LED headlamp by Victoper. Featuring more than eight lights, together, it can provide 18,000 lumens max, which can lighten up even the darkest of the environment. It also supports USB charging, and the battery life is longer than many headlamps.
This super bright light by Victoper is a quality piece that supports USB charging and is convenient for daily use. Coming with two rechargeable batteries, it runs a maximum of 5-10 hours at a stretch once fully charged. So, you won’t have to worry about draining out the battery anytime soon.
Being an IPX5-certified headlamp, it can survive water splashes from all angles and be used generally for fishing or hiking. Besides, wearing it doesn’t feel like much trouble. It weighs only 5.3 pounds, so you’ve got your hands on a powerful yet comfortable unit.
Moreover, a 90-degree adjustable angle adapts to various usage scenarios when we need to ensure safety in the darkest of the night.
The product significantly lacks in terms of durability. Although it feels comfortable in the head, one or two falls, and you have a broken headlamp in your hands. Furthermore, we were very disappointed with the time it takes to fully charge, making it an invalid choice in emergencies.
What We Like
Super-bright light
Comfortable to wear
Long battery life
90-degree adjustable angle
What We Don't Like
Headlamp isn’t very durable
Charging takes time
Lumens: 18000 | Beam Distance: 328 ft | Battery Type: 5000 mAh | Waterproof Rating: IPX5 | Number of Modes: 8 | Weight: 5.3 oz
What are the Best T2000 Headlamps?
The following table presents a comparative analysis of some of the best T2000 headlamps available on the market. They differ significantly on important parameters such as light intensity (measured in lumens), the reach of the light beam (measured in feet), battery type, waterproof rating, number of operation modes, and weight (measured in ounces).
Generally, we consider asking others about their experiences using the product. So, the first phase of research is “word of mouth”, which is why reviews are essential in modern-day marketing strategies.
But don’t worry, you don’t have to go through the stress of asking others if a product is worth buying or not. We hope our reviews of the best T2000 headlamps have given you some ideas about what to look for in a product. But if you’re still confused about what to do, we have prepared this curated guide for your convenience.
1. Price
Price is probably the first thing most of us look into when browsing through a product. These headlamps might not cost you a fortune, but if you still want to save big, we’d recommend purchasing these in combos. You’ll find great deals on e-commerce websites when buying products together.
Also, on websites like Amazon, a single product is sold by several sellers. So, it’ll be viable to browse all the available sellers and identify which one offers the product at the lowest price.
2. T5 Headlamp Brands
When it comes to buying T2000 headlamps, the brand is one of the most determining factors. Well-known brands charge more than lesser-known brands because they have already proven themselves on the market and established a reputation among customers for providing superior products and services. So, we'd recommend going for products offered by these brands because we believe they're worth every penny!
3. Function
After all, the decision to buy a T2000 tactical headlamp is based on the reason for the purchase. If you’re looking for a product viable for one-time use, then there’s no point in investing in something that’s more expensive. But if you’re looking for a companion for your outdoor sports and activities, a few things need to be looked into.
Firstly, determine the optimal brightness you need. The brightness of a light is measured in lumens, which range from 500 lumens to 12000 lumens. If you’re looking for something suitable for every situation, go for a headlamp with brightness levels ranging from 1000 to 2000 lumens.
Next, check if the lamp is adjustable or not. Some headlamps are adjustable up to 90 degrees, while it can go as low as 30 degrees for some. Having an adjustable elastic strap allows you to illuminate the light in any direction without turning your head much.
Besides, look into the number of modes your headlamp features, ranging from four to eight. Having more adjustable modes allows you to have light suitable for any lighting conditions.
So, look into these features carefully and decide what’s best for you.
4. Durability of Headlamps
Durability is another crucial aspect of a T2000 headlamp, especially if your motive behind the purchase is to participate in night camping, extreme outdoor activities, or hiking. Consider models made of high-quality materials that can withstand extreme conditions or falls.
But when looking for durability, do not neglect the comfort aspect. As you might need to wear the light for longer, purchase only those that are lightweight and comfortable to wear.
Also, make sure your products are waterproof and shockproof, as this is essential when working outside.
5. Customer Review
When browsing through customer reviews, consider the number of positive feedback and customer complaints regarding the product. If the proportion is high in favor of negative reviews, then stay far away from purchasing the product and vice versa.
6. Warranty
Along with the aforementioned factors, consider how long you’re planning to use the T2000 tactical headlamp. Go for manufacturers that offer at least 3-4 years of warranty on their product, but having a lifetime warranty or free replacement service is an added benefit.
Checking customer reviews is also crucial in this respect as it informs if the quality received from the company is good or bad.
When should we use a headlamp?
A headlamp is a valuable tool for hands-on activities like cooking or working in the dark. Also, it’s an excellent choice for nighttime endurance activities like trail running, hiking, or others. We’ve used headlamps for long hikes, search and rescue scenarios, walking home in the dark, and even backpacking.
Of course, headlamps are best for several outdoor house projects like electric wiring or auto repair. There are separate headlights for each of these activities, so select one suitable for you.
How many lumens should a quality headlamp have?
300-500 lumens should be appropriate for most needs, but if you’re into camping, scrambling, or other activities at night, you might want a more powerful unit. Something as bright as 1000-1500 lumens headlamps flashlights would work.
That said, headlamps with ample lumens need you to carry a separate battery case, and they can feel less comfortable and clunky to wear, especially during high-movement activities.
How do I choose a headlamp?
To begin, decide for what purpose you’ll need the headlamp. If you need to move through terrain with wildlife or obstacles, go for the highest lumens -at least 1,000. Also, you’ll want a band design that’s comfortable for your needs, including skin, head, and hair. Your lamp head must have a top strap if you’re bouncing around.
Plus, it’s important to consider the battery duration you need for your field trip. If it runs on AAA batteries, carry some spare along with you, or a portable power bank and a USB cable if it comes with rechargeable batteries.
Do we need a headlamp with a red strobe setting?
Yes, red light strobe settings are used by many of us in our headlights. Most of the models available on the market come with this setting. Although this light can’t generate enough brightness compared to white light, they are extremely handy.
In social gatherings, this setting offers visibility without blinding your friends with eye-scorching brightness. Plus, this helps maintain your night vision by illuminating nearby objects.
Are headlamps waterproof?
Yes, as you’ve already observed with many products on our list, many of them are. These headlamps are measured by IP or the International Protection Marketing code. You might have seen mentions of the letters IPX or IP in the specifications.
A unit with a rating of IPX4 can withstand sweat, mist, and rain. At the same time, ones labeled with IPX7 or IPX8 can be submerged in water for 30 minutes and will still work well. And, in case there are no ratings, it’s not waterproof at all.
That’s all we have to say about the top T2000 headlamps!
We hope to go through our list, and the buyer’s guide will help you select an ideal companion for your travel. But before we wrap up, it’d be unfair not to mention our personal favorites. After carefully evaluating the options, we feel the GearLight LED Headlamp is the best T2000 headlamp. It’s a versatile unit and packs everything one looks for in a headlamp.
Another unit that caught our attention was the Elmchee LED Rechargeable Super Bright Headlamp. Its super-bright light, multiple adjustable modes, and comfortable headband make it a suitable companion for those who look for quality devices but don’t want to spend much.
With that, it’s a wrap. Goodbye and take care!
George Eliot once said, "Life seems to go on without effort when I am filled with music."
Who doesn't relate to this quote? Life is tasteless without music, and we desperately require it to experience the high that narcotics fail to create. But, all of that gets ruined when the audio outlet is of subpar quality.
That's why you need to set your home theatre systems and music speakers entirely across the room to enjoy every last keynote to the fullest. But how’d it be possible when you don't have speaker stands that you can blindly rely on?
Due to these brands that keep launching just about anything, it keeps getting harder to choose a high-quality variant that best serves our needs. But don't worry, we've handpicked the six best VIZIO speaker stands, so that you enjoy a smart and satisfying purchase.
Without any further ado, let's dive into the deets!
Listed below are the Best Vizio Speaker Stands:
Atlantic Satellite 77305018: The Atlantic Satellite 77305018 is renowned for universal compatibility and adjustable height features. The positioning of the mounting bar could improve.
Sanus VuePoint: The Sanus VuePoint Adjustable Height Speaker Stand offers an appealing design and sturdy build quality. Best for speakers weighing under 3.5 lbs.
VideoSecu Heavy Duty: The VideoSecu Heavy Duty Satellite Speaker Stand is optimal for studio use, supports heavier speakers (up to 30 lbs), and allows for flexible positioning. The base is comparably small.
Sanus BF24B 24-Inch: The Sanus BF24B 24-Inch Speaker Stand (Pair) is an affordable choice with decent adjustability and stability. The quality of floor spikes and screws needs enhancement.
USX MOUNT Universal: The USX MOUNT Universal Speaker Stands are notable for wide compatibility and integrated cable management. Assembly might be unclear, and only supports speakers with specific mounting holes.
Here's the list of the 6 best Vizio speaker stands of 2023, carefully selected to enhance your audio experience and ensure a smart and satisfying purchase.
1. Atlantic Satellite 77305018 Adjustable Height Speaker Stand - Best for Universal Compatibility
When it comes to assurance of excellent quality and performance, Atlantic is the brand that most households rely on. And if we’re talking about speaker stands, the efficiency of the AS adjustable height model remains unmatched. In fact, it has a reputation for being sold the most with VIZIO speakers!
Check the ratings; this one might just be the highest-rated VIZIO speaker stand you'll come across. And that's not even an exaggeration - this product indeed ranks very high in terms of compatibility and price-to-quality ratio, making it the first choice for most customers.
The biggest reason for this is its universal compatibility with both surround and satellite speakers, which isn't the case with many high-priced alternatives. This way, in such a negotiable price range, this product offers more than enough to set a higher benchmark for quality.
Coming to its dynamics, we're pretty impressed with how easily you can play around with its adjustable height feature and set it as per your needs. Also, considering that VIZIO speakers aren't ultralight, you'd need to choose stands that can withstand a heavy load. In this case, you'd be happy with the sturdy build quality that it offers, making it strong enough to withstand the weight.
Furthermore, it's amazing how the support pole is so ultra-wide that you can easily conceal the dangling speaker cables behind to maintain the audio setup's visual appeal. Apart from that, the ample width also makes it a lot more stable on firm ground.
Quite frankly, this product doesn't have any essential aspect that needs to be improved, performance-wise. However, we've noticed that its mounting bar is located in an odd position, due to which it tends to stick outwards a little.
What We Like
Compatible with satellite speakers
Wide support pole for added safety
Convenient speaker stand
Affordable price range
What We Don't Like
The mounting bar needs improvement
Adjustable Height: Yes | Material: Metal | Height Range: 27 - 49" | Base: 3 point | Weight Capacity: Up to 10 lbs | Compatibility: Universal, fits most speakers
2. Sanus VuePoint Adjustable Height Speaker Stand - Best for Aesthetic Appeal
For those who don't mind paying a little extra for heavy-duty build and quality, the Sanus VuePoint is a brilliant choice. Although it's mainly famous for its dark and slick design, best believe that it's much more than just a living room souvenir. Let's take a look at its core features!
Beginning with the USP of this product, the VuePoint does certainly set a view worth staring at for hours. This product features quite an aesthetically appealing body, which transforms your living room into a professional studio. The best-in-class matte black-grey finish with zero leftover paint amplifies its appearance by a great deal indeed. Overall, apart from being an excellent speaker stand, it also makes a decent showpiece for interior decor.
However, as we've mentioned before, it's more than just an attractive speaker stand. The best way to reflect on it is by highlighting its premium-grade build quality. This product is indeed built with premium make and materials, which enables it to deliver the same efficiency for years without showing any sign of damage.
The product also maintains compatibility with almost any satellite speaker in the market, which puts it next in line after the Atlantic satellite speaker stands. However, there's a catch - it can support a maximum weight of 3.5 lbs, which is, again, good enough for fitting in bookshelf speakers or home theatre systems. Moving on to its robust height adjustments, it allows you to place it between 28-38 inches.
Although this product may appear easy to install at first glance, we can assure you that it's not. It becomes a little challenging to install the speakers on it with optimal stability, due to its limited support base. Furthermore, the only flaw in its build material is the subpar-quality plastic connector.
What We Like
Optimally satisfying product quality
Easy to assemble the stand
Maximum weight limit of 3.5 lbs
Remains very firm to the ground
What We Don't Like
A little hard to install the speakers
Adjustable Height: Yes | Material: Alloy steel | Height Range: 28 - 38" | Base: Round flat | Weight Capacity: Up to 3.5 lbs | Compatibility: Universal, fits most speakers
3. VideoSecu Heavy Duty Satellite Speaker Stand - Best for Studio Use
In case you're searching for heavy-duty stands that don't put you on dire straits while setting the speakers, VideoSecu is what you should be searching for. Although this product is mainly designed to be positioned in a home studio, we can't say that it doesn't make a normal speaker stand for your living room.
In general, if you're an aspiring musician looking forward to setting up a home studio at a meager budget, this is the ultimate solution to your needs. At first glance, you're bound to be amazed by its industrial-grade design that adds a touch of class and professionalism to a rather bland room.
Not to forget, we're huge fans of the minimalism the overall design beholds, for it's sure to compliment the taste of those who fancy subtlety.
When it comes to the weight-carrying limit, this VideoSecu stand crushes all competition with a monstrous limit of 30 lbs. Moving on, we're also impressed by how the product can offer a maximum height adjustment limit between 26.8 to 48 inches, which is a lot more than what you'd usually require.
On a side note, we don't find it fair to compare it with our other personal-use picks, mainly because it's primarily designed for commercial purposes.
But then again, such a premium build also has its benefits! For instance, you can pan the speakers through 180 degrees, thanks to its adjustable top base. Despite such flexible movements, it remains very stable and firm on the ground.
Let's not hype it as the best option in the game, as it does come with a few silly flaws. First and foremost, although very flexible, the base of this speaker stand is comparatively small. Besides that, we're also not very impressed with how the mount makes it extremely difficult for thick wires to pass through.
What We Like
Optimally strong build quality
Impressive panning ability
Very attractive-looking
Supports all types of VIZIO speakers
What We Don't Like
The base is tiny
Adjustable Height: Yes | Material: N/A | Height Range: 26.5 - 47" | Base: Square | Weight Capacity: Up to 30 lbs | Compatibility: Universal, fits most speakers
4. Sanus BF24B 24-Inch Speaker Stand (Pair)
Behold folks, for globally leading brand Sanus is back for the throne again- a lot stronger, this time. We've had the opportunity to test the Sanus BF24B speaker stand personally, and it didn't fail to blow our minds with the vast array of benefits it comes packed with. Let's take a more in-depth look at its core specs and functions!
As per our experience, the Sanus BF24B model is one of the most efficient picks under a meager budget. However, let's not only look at it as a mere low-priced model, because it still comes packed with several useful features to offer you the best values.
To begin with, its height is very well-synchronized with VIZIO and various other premium bookshelf speakers. In case you still don't find the height satisfactory, it enables you to take the wheel and set it exactly the way you prefer. At its maximum setting, you can adjust the speakers to a near-ear level and enjoy an incredible surround sound while you're chilling on your sofa.
Furthermore, we're also quite amazed that, even though its overall pricing is so low, the brand hasn't compromised with its overall quality. Its metal construction ensures a very long-lasting product life, and the premium coating adds life to its rather simplistic design.
Don't be afraid to load with bulky and bassy speakers, as the stand is capable of carrying a maximum load of 20 lbs. Other than that, the base is quite widespread to ensure fantastic stability. As a bonus, the bottom comes with a floor-spike pattern that dampens the vibrations caused when the speakers are blared at high volume.
Although the floor/carpet spikes initially sound like a great idea, let's be clear that your carpets aren't going to be like it. Due to being made of cheap quality, it's likely to tear out the carpets in the long term. Furthermore, the manufacturers must note that the screws provided during shipping are smaller than the grooves, which is concerning.
What We Like
Hides the speaker cables precisely
Low-profile design
Very easy to assemble
Reduces vibrations
What We Don't Like
Cheap-quality floor spikes
Adjustable Height: No | Material: Engineered wood | Height Range: 24" | Base: Square | Weight Capacity: Up to 20 lbs | Compatibility: Compatible with select brands
5. USX MOUNT Universal Speaker Stands
USX MOUNT Universal Speaker Stands are height-adjustable stands designed to accommodate satellite speakers and small bookshelf speakers up to 8 lbs. With their strong triangle base and wide compatibility, these speaker stands ensure stability and a clean, organized appearance for your home audio setup.
The USX MOUNT Universal Speaker Stands are liked because of their sturdy triangle base offering excellent stability and resistance to tipping. Their adjustable height and depth allow customization for different speakers, while their compatibility with numerous speaker brands makes them a versatile choice.
Additionally, the integrated cable management adds a neat and tidy appearance to the setup.
One downside to these stands is that the part C (M4) washers are not needed for assembly, which sometimes causes confusion during installation. Furthermore, speaker compatibility is limited to those with mounting holes on the back or bottom.
What We Like
High-quality, durable steel construction
Weight capacity supports up to 8 lbs per stand
Rubber feet provide protection for different floor types
What We Don't Like
Certain speakers may not meet mounting hole requirements
Certain parts may have unclear assembly instructions
Adjustable Height: Yes | Material: Alloy Steel | Height Range: 46” | Base: Triangle | Weight Capacity: Up to 8 lbs | Compatibility: Universal, multi-type of speakers
6. ECHOGEAR Speaker Stands Pair
ECHOGEAR Speaker Stands are height-adjustable stands made of solid steel, promising stability and quality acoustics. Compatible with speakers up to 4 lbs, these stands work with various brands such as Vizio, Klipsch, Bose, and Sony, making them a versatile choice for your surround sound setup.
These ECHOGEAR Speaker Stands are popular due to their universal compatibility with a range of small speaker brands. They also feature built-in cable management for a clean and organized appearance. The solid steel design ensures that the stands are stable and contributes to enhanced acoustics.
Additionally, these stands offer tool-free height adjustment up to 11".
A limitation of these speaker stands is the weight limit of only 4 lbs, making them unsuitable for all small speakers. Moreover, the cable management system might not accommodate thicker cords effectively.
What We Like
Easy installation with included brackets and hardware
Adjustable height for optimal speaker positioning
Improved sound with energy-absorbing steel construction
What We Don't Like
Limited weight capacity of 4 lbs per stand
May struggle to secure thicker cables effectively
Adjustable Height: Yes | Material: Rubber | Height Range: 11" | Base: N/A | Weight Capacity: Up to 4 lbs | Compatibility: Universal, fits most small speakers
What Are the Best Vizio Speaker Stands?
Vizio speaker stands offer a diversity of features making them an essential accessory for any audio enthusiast. Based on several key attributes, a comparative analysis has been conducted to highlight the standout Vizio speaker stands. The aspects compared include Adjustable Height (Yes or No), Material used in construction, Height Range (in inches), Base type, Weight Capacity (in lbs), and Compatibility.
Purchasing a VIZIO speaker stand might sound like the most straightforward job in the world, but it's not. There's so much info that's unknown to the average person that it's not surprising how the customers usually end up buying the wrong options that they end up regretting.
That said, we've added this concise buyer's guide to walk you through the fundamental areas to consider before buying a speaker stand.
Build Quality
When it comes to putting your money on a speaker stand, we must ensure that the product boasts excellent build quality. It's just modern furniture that's meant to carry a substantial weight at all times. Isn't it very likely for that customers to always be more inclined toward products that guarantee years of durability and reliability?
If you're feeling fancy, you can go for various products that feature aluminum or steel construction, which is also a smart move as per quality assurance. On the other hand, if you prefer to keep it old school and choose wooden alternatives, be a little more vigilant about its overall life.
Stability
Second, let's not forget that speakers don't come off as cheap. That said, it's essential to ensure that the stand you're investing in is exceptionally stable and wouldn't tip over by accident. It's the sole responsibility of the position to ensure the security of the speakers it carries, so you can't risk buying an unstable model at any cost.
Don't worry; every other day, we're seeing some brands coming up with unique ideas to stabilize the stands by a great deal. For instance, you'd notice features like carpet spikes that deepen the bond between the base and the surface.
Weight-Bearing Capacity
Honestly speaking, speakers can be cumbersome. If the product you've invested in fails to feature a decent weight-bearing capacity, installing it would be extremely disastrous. Either the legs of the stand will end up breaking off, or it'll tip over and slam the speakers directly on the ground.
We'd recommend you always choose products that offer a minimum weight carrying capacity of 3.5 lbs because it's better for your precious assets.
Design of the stand
Last but not least, the speaker stands are furniture with out-of-the-box efficiency. Nevertheless, it remains in the living room as a legitimate addition to the overall interior decor theme. That said, it's essential to invest in the models that go along well with almost any interior decor.
Why do I need a Vizio speaker stand?
Speaker stands provide stability and elevate the speakers to ear level, allowing for better sound projection and dispersion. They also help minimize vibrations and resonance, resulting in clearer and more immersive audio.
Are Vizio speaker stands adjustable?
Yes, many Vizio speaker stands offer height and tilt adjustments. This allows you to customize the positioning of your speakers to achieve the desired sound direction and optimize your listening experience.
Can I use Vizio speaker stands for other speaker brands?
While Vizio speaker stands are specifically designed for Vizio speakers, they can also be compatible with other speaker brands as long as the dimensions and weight capacities match.
Do Vizio speaker stands come with cable management?
Some Vizio speaker stands offer built-in cable management features, such as channels or clips, to help keep the speaker cables organized and hidden for a neat and tidy setup.
Can Vizio speaker stands be used for wall-mounting?
Vizio speaker stands are primarily designed for floor placement. However, some models may offer the option to be converted into wall mounts with additional accessories or brackets.
We hope that our detailed reviews and guide could help you learn more about VIZIO speaker stands and make a smart choice for yourself. Have you found the one that satisfies your needs precisely? Let us know in the comments.
In case you haven't, here's a quick recap of the editor's top picks. The Atlantic speakers make an excellent addition to your interior furnishing and design while offering universal compatibility with surround and satellite speakers.
But if you're a professional sound engineer looking for a performance upgrade, the VideoSecu model is what you should choose with your eyes closed.
That being said, we'll see you soon with more fun-filled articles. Till then, take care and stay tuned!
In order to use an electric hand planer, you’ll need to set it up first. Following that, you can use the machine to smoothen wood surfaces. You have to pay attention to the start and stop of the tool, as well as the pressure, speed, and handling at the edges. After you are done, you have to clean and store it away safely.
An electric hand planer is a nifty power tool that is carried by almost every veteran woodworker.
After all, this device can help in shaping uneven wood surfaces to make them smooth and clean. However, if you want the best results from this device, you have to know how to use it properly.
That is what I have covered in this guide today. So, if you are an amateur woodworker who wants to know how this device works, then keep reading!
First, let’s discuss what an electric hand planer actually is and how this machine really works. Simply put, a hand planer is a woodworking tool that is used to smoothen the surface of the wood and get rid of any warps or imperfections.
This machine shaves the surface of the wood in increments, where it takes off small amounts of wood at each pass. That ultimately helps to shape the wood so that it appears clean and uniform.
The tool consists of at least two or three blades to shave the wood surface. With each pass on the wood, the planer blade can shave off a maximum of 1/8 inches of material.
Hand planers can be of different types based on the size or the use case. In terms of size, there are three main types of planers, which are block plane, jointing plane, and smoothing plane. There are some other types of specialty planers, such as router planes, chisel planes, and bullnose planes, to name a few. All of these planers have specific usage scenarios in woodworking.
On that note, using a conventional hand planer can be a fairly tedious task, as it requires a lot of time and effort to shape the wood. This is where electric hand planers come into the picture.
Also known as a power planer, the electric hand planer consists of an electrical motor that rotates the blades. This distinguishes it from a traditional hand planer, and as such, the tool can shave off large amounts of wood in a single pass. Apart from this aspect, an electric planer follows a similar working principle to a regular plane (tool).
How to set up an electric hand planer?
Now that you have a basic idea of an electric hand planer let’s talk about how to use it correctly, beginning with the setup. For this purpose, you have to perform the following activities:
1. Adjusting the fence
The first thing you need to do is adjust the fence. But before that, you have to select the proper working area. Make sure that the workspace is clean, organized, and uniform so that you can operate the planer without issues.
When that is taken care of, you have to place the adjustable fence on the surface and secure it in place. The fence is the primary working platform where you will shape the wood. So, it is crucial that you adjust it according to your specifications. The fence should be evenly placed, and it should not wobble or move around while you are working on it.
2. Setting up the blade alignment
Next, you will need to align the blade so that it can shape the wood properly. For this purpose, you’ll have to place the front edge of the planer over the workpiece without the blades touching the surface. In other words, you’ll have to keep the blades just above the workpiece at the correct angle, as that will give you more control once the machine is turned on.
3. Adjusting the cutting depth
Here, you will need to adjust the depth of the front shoe, which will allow the blade to shave the lumber piece properly. You can use the depth adjustment knob provided on the machine to set the planer blade at the desired depth. Subsequently, you should adjust the depth of the chip ports if they are present on the sides of the planer.
Warning: Do not set the blade too deep, as that can scrape large chunks of wood from the surface. Likewise, you should avoid keeping the blade at a shallow depth, as that will not have the desired effect on the wood surface.
4. Setting the desired speed
Now, you will need to adjust the speed settings of the planer using the speed adjustment knob. If you wish to plane hardwood or other rigid surfaces, the blade should be set at a higher speed. But if you wish to shape soft lumber pieces, you can use a low-speed setting.
Using the electric planer
In order to make the electric planer work, you can follow the steps below.
1. Starting and stopping the hand plane
Press the start button or pull the trigger on the planer to spin up the blades. Here, you should let the blades spin for a while to get them up to full speed. Then, you need to ease the cutter head into contact with the wood surface.
Conversely, to stop using the tool, simply let go of the trigger or press the stop button and allow the blades to spin down.
2. Maintaining speed and pressure
For the best results, you will need to apply steady and consistent pressure on the wood surface. In the initial phase, though, you will need to apply more pressure toward the front to avoid any blade tilting or gouging issues. Similarly, you should try to maintain a steady pace while shaping the wood. If you move the blade too quickly or slowly, the likelihood of errors will increase.
Based on my first-hand experience, I suggest moving along the direction of the grain. If you do that, you will need to apply only a little pressure to get the job done. Planing against the direction of the grain will require higher pressure and is often difficult to control. If you wish, you can use an electric planer jig to control the direction and flow of the tool.
3. Handling edges and corners
Once you reach the end of the lumber piece, you will need to shift most of the pressure toward the rear handle. This will give you more control near the edges and corners and prevent the front shoe from dipping down and shaving off a large chunk of material.
Maintaining and storing the electric planer
Proper maintenance and storage are absolutely essential for keeping such power tools in optimal working condition. So, if you want your electric planer to last for a long time, you should follow the strategies below.
1. Post-usage clean-up
After you are done shaping the wood, you will need to clean the planer. You can wipe the exterior surface of the planer and the blades with a soft, clean cloth, or you can wash it with water. In the case of the latter, you have to make sure that the water does not get inside the machine.
2. Blade maintenance
The blade is possibly the most crucial component in this power tool, which is why you will need to take good care of it. Drawing from experience, I can say for a fact that a planer with blunt blades will do you more harm than good. So, if you notice the blades have lost their sharpness, you will need to resharpened them with a whetstone.
However, if the blades have become nicked or worn out due to usage, it is a better idea to replace them with new ones.
3. Storage
When you are not using the planer, you should keep it stored away in a safe place, which will prevent the machine from gathering dust. I recommend wrapping the tool with a plastic or fabric cover and storing it away from direct sunlight or extremely cold temperatures.
Safety precautions
If you want to use industrial tools like power planers, you will need to observe certain safety precautions, as I have listed below.
Thoroughly go through the instruction manual before using the machine
Protect your eyes, ears, and face by wearing goggles, earmuffs, and masks
Cover the surrounding area with sheets to prevent the accumulation of dust and debris
Secure the tool on the working surface firmly
Install the blade correctly and check it once before use
Keep the workspace clutter-free
When should I use an electric planer?
An electric planer should be used when you need to shape furniture or lumber pieces and create a smooth surface. It is a fairly versatile tool that can handle different kinds of tasks, such as scraping a wooden countertop or cabinet, tapering wood trim, and so on. And with the proper accessories, you can also use it for finesse work like beveling door and window frames.
Can I use an electric planer on metal?
Using an electric planer on metal such as plane iron, steel, or other metallic surfaces can be tempting, considering that the blade of a planer is made from stainless steel. I would strongly suggest against doing that since this tool is not designed to be used on metals. Giving it a try showed me that the blades can become easily damaged or worn when used against such tough surfaces.
Can I use an electric planer to scrape paint?
Yes, you can use a planer to scrape off paint from a wooden surface. Keep in mind that the paint material can dull the blade quickly. Besides, you will have to clean the paint from the blade after you are done, which can be an inconvenience for many users.
What is the difference between a planer and a jointer?
The difference between a planer and a jointer is that the former is used to make the wood surface smooth and uniform while the latter is used to make the sides of a wooden board or lumber piece flat so that it can be joined to another similar piece. A jointer is slightly more versatile but is not as effective as a planer when it comes to shaping wood.
That brings me to the end of this discussion about how to use electric hand planers. As you can see, using this tool is not that complicated at all.
First, you’ll need to set it up, and then, you can use the machine to make wooden surfaces smooth. Naturally, it is important to store and maintain the machine to ensure its longevity. And for your safety, you should follow all the precautions I have mentioned here.
Of course, the more you use it, the better you will be able to handle it. And eventually, you will be able to create professional-quality woodwork with it.
Engaging in a DIY project and not sure which PVC glue will be best for the purpose?
The kind of glue that would work best depends primarily on the requirements that you have. There are some adhesives that are particularly suitable for potable water, and then there are others that are best for industrial-grade use. When selecting a product, one of the most important things to look out for is ease of use.
However, what is not easy is selecting the right glue for PVC pipes, as the market is filled with hundreds of options. So, to help you, we compiled this list with the top 7 products that you can try. You will also find a buyer’s guide attached at the end of this article that would help you further in the selection process.
Without further delay, let’s dive right in!
Listed below are the Best Glue For PVC Pipe:
Oatey 30246: The Oatey 30246 is a comprehensive PVC glue kit comprising both primer and cement. It is known for its strong, versatile, and leak-proof bond. It may require multiple applications due to its runny consistency.
Weld-On 12496: A cost-effective option, Weld-On 12496 works with all PVC pipes and tolerates high temperatures. Its only limit is a quick-drying time, demanding rapid assembly.
Oatey 30876: Acclaimed for its versatility, Oatey 30876 delivers robust bonds across varied PVC pipes. Its rapid drying time necessitates speed during assembly.
Weld-On 10098: Weld-On 10098 ensures long-lasting bonds across all PVC pipe types. Its packaging could be improved for better product protection during transit.
Oatey 31017: Notable for its fast-drying formula, Oatey 31017 excels in quick repairs and withstands diverse weather conditions. Its customer service needs enhancement.
This list will provide you with the necessary information to make an informed decision and ensure that your PVC pipes are joined securely. So, without further ado, here's the list of the 6 best glue for PVC pipe.
1. Oatey 30246 - Best Overall
To avoid the hassle of looking for compatible primers for your cement, it is best that you give the Oatey 30246 a try. It is the best glue for PVC pipe and contains both cement and primer in the same pack. That way, you do not have to take the trouble of looking for a suitable primer for your cement separately.
With this kit, joining a PVC pipe will become super convenient. The PVC cement present in the mix delivers excellent strength and works on all types of PVC pipes. In combination with the primer, it provides a leak-proof and solid bond, offering a great deal of strength and versatility.
This primer and the adhesive combo work great on a range of PVC pipe fittings, including pool plumbing and high-pressure fittings. And gluing PVC pipe with this item is pretty convenient as the cement sets quickly but gives enough time to work with it before it dries. You have to provide the bond around 24 hours earlier for it to get cured.
Moreover, using this product for plumbing applications is super easy. Both the primer and the cement glue come with specially designed swabs to ensure that the application is easy and precise. They are of the right sizes for most PVC pipes and will make your experience of working with them super enjoyable.
Unfortunately, the consistency of this PVC pipe glue might not suit everyone’s liking. It is a little runny, and you might have to apply more than one coat to achieve the desired results. In case you face any trouble handling the glue, make sure you read the user instructions well.
What We Like
Easy applications
Delivers strong bond
Offers versatility
Leak-proof results
What We Don't Like
Runny consistency
Type: Cement | Color: Clear | Set Time (min): 15 | Max Pressure (psi): 200 | VOC Content (g/L): 250 | Temperature Range (F): -15 to 110
2. Weld-On 12496 - Best in High Temperatures
For our next entry, we have the Weld-On 12496, which is quite popular among users for delivering resistant and long-lasting bonds to PVC pipes. This industrial-grade PVC cement is the best PVC glue that you can try if you are on a budget.
The kind of versatility that this PVC cement puts on the table is nothing short of noteworthy. This PVC pipe cement works on all types of PVC pipes, irrespective of how rigid and stiff they are. Be it Type I or Type II PVC, this PVC cement will work perfectly as glue.
Moreover, what makes this one of our favorites is the fact that it has very low VOC content. This means that it does not produce any toxic emissions and is entirely environment-friendly. Even when you are working with it, there’s no need to take extra measures to ensure that it causes no damage to your skin.
Not to mention, this medium-bodied cement has the perfect viscosity, and therefore it is excellent for smooth application. The thickness is just right, and there’s no way this PVC glue will spill and create a mess. Plus, the cement is highly resistant and can easily withstand higher temperatures, even up to 180 degrees Fahrenheit.
The only thing that might be a problem is that this PVC cement settles very quickly, and you need to work pretty fast before it dries. This might be quite challenging if you have no prior experience of working with PVC solvent cement. In that case, keep all equipment closed before you begin working.
What We Like
Delivers excellent resistance
Can handle high temperature
Bond lasts for a long time
Short curing span
What We Don't Like
Dries up a bit fast
Type: Cement | Color: Clear | Set Time (min): 20 | Max Pressure (psi): 400 | VOC Content (g/L): 510 | Temperature Range (F): -15 to 110
3. Oatey 30876 - Best in Versatility
If you are on the lookout for a solvent cement glue that is easy to use, it is best that you give the Oatey 30876 cement a try. It is well-loved by users for the kind of versatility that it offers.
As we have already mentioned, this product is truly versatile and works well with a range of PVC pipes. The kind of bond that it delivers is durable and lasts for a long time, and ensures that there is no leakage.
This product is specifically designed for working with critical water pipes and PVC pipes that require full-proof and heavy-duty PVC cement. You will definitely love how this PVC glue delivers an industrial-quality bond.
Not to mention, it is a clear PVC glue, and it won’t show when you use it to join PVC pipes. This high-pressure PVC glue is perfect for filling in gaps, and loose pipe joints as the formula is pretty thick and does not require recoating.
To be honest, unless you have prior experience working with adhesives, you might face some difficulty as this PVC glue dries up pretty fast. So, it is essential that you are very fast with the work after you apply it and do not delay the process. In order to make things easier, we would suggest that you keep all your equipment handy.
What We Like
Easy to manage formula
Clear glue delivers better-looking results
Delivers strong bond
Thick formula
What We Don't Like
Dries up quickly
Type: Primer and Cement | Color: Purple | Set Time (min): 15 | Max Pressure (psi): 200 | VOC Content (g/L): 750 | Temperature Range (F): -15 to 110
4. Weld-On 10098
There’s no doubt that you want the bonds to be long-lasting when you are joining PVC pipes. And for that purpose, the Weld-On 10098 is the best bet. It never fails to deliver a strong, resistant, and leak-proof bond.
No matter how rigid the PVC pipes are that you are working with, this PVC glue will ensure that the bond is strong and durable. Be it Type I or Type II PVC, it will work on all. So, we scored this product well for the versatility it offers.
Moreover, we were pretty impressed with how easy it is to use this item. This medium-bodied polyvinyl chloride is of the right viscosity and therefore is pretty easy to apply. The thickness is perfect and ensures all your applications are smooth and mess-free.
Apart from that, you can use this for DIY projects that have a close deadline. The curing time is very less, and you can have your PVC pipes completely fixed within 24 hours of time. And not to worry, the bond will be rock-solid once it dries up.
There’s no doubt that this is one of the strongest glue that we tried. However, we were not really happy with its packaging. The box in which it was delivered was a little tapered around the corners, and we were worried that the product got damaged during transit. Luckily, that wasn’t the case.
What We Like
Suitable for all types of PVC pipes
Delivers excellent bond
Easy to apply
Bonds are long-lasting
What We Don't Like
Packaging needs improvement
Type: Primer and Cement | Color: Clear | Set Time (min): 20 | Max Pressure (psi): 400 | VOC Content (g/L): 775 | Temperature Range (F): -15 to 110
5. Oatey 31017
We are almost reaching the end of our list, and next up, we have the Oatey 31017. This PVC glue does a great job at joining pipes and ensures that they are entirely leak-proof. It settles pretty quickly and delivers excellent results.
The best thing about this PVC glue is that it can be used in all types of weather conditions. It is completely environmentally resistant and can be used in both hot and cold temperatures. This factor enhances its versatility and makes it score well on our list.
Other than that, applying this glue is as easy as pie. Right under the cap of the package, you will find a swab that you can use to apply the glue. With this, the application becomes super convenient and enables you to spread the cement precisely over the fittings as per your requirements.
Moreover, DIY enthusiasts love this product as it delivers quick results. It has a very small setting time, and you would just need to hold the pipes together for 30 seconds after you apply this glue. Once it dries, you can rest assured that the bond won’t break easily.
Unfortunately, their customer support team is not that great. We had some queries and reached out to them for help. They did not respond to our calls, and only after we dropped them a few emails did they get back to us. We expected better support from a brand as good as this one.
What We Like
Easy to work with
Fast curing time
Delivers strong bond
Bonds tend to last long
What We Don't Like
Customer service needs to be better
Type: Cement | Color: Blue | Set Time (min): 15 | Max Pressure (psi): 200 | VOC Content (g/L): 250 | Temperature Range (F): -15 to 110
6. Christy’s RH-RHBV-QP
We could not have wrapped up our list without having mentioned Christy's RH-RHBV-QP. This option is an excellent choice for joining PVC pipes as it delivers sturdy bonds and makes sure that there are no leakages once the glue dries up. To know more about it, keep reading!
The best thing about this item is that it is super convenient to work with it. You just have to give it 5 minutes, and the power of the glue will set in and join the pipes.
For best results, we suggest that you hold the pipes in place for a minute. And within a day’s time, the bond will get completely cured, and you will have a leak-proof pipe.
Moreover, it is pretty versatile and offers users a great deal of flexibility as it works well on all types of PVC pipes that are up to 6 inches in thickness. Therefore, it is an excellent choice for plumbing options, and you can use it for sewer, gas, or pool plumbing.
Apart from that, from the tests that we conducted, we noticed that the glue is pretty strong and delivers a long-lasting bond that won’t break under any circumstances. You can rest assured that the bond will stay in place for a long time with little maintenance.
The only problem that you might face while working with this glue is the kind of viscosity that it has. It is a bit runny, and unless you have prior experience of working with glues like this one, the chances are that you will create quite a mess. In order to avoid such a situation, we suggest that you take the help of an online tutorial.
What We Like
Durable hold
The bond lasts for a long time
Versatile
Easy to apply
What We Don't Like
Low on viscosity
Type: PVC Cement and Primer | Color: Clear | Set Time (min): 15 | Max Pressure (psi): 315 | VOC Content (g/L): 250 | Temperature Range (F): -20 to 180
What Is the Best Glue for Pvc Pipe?
For individuals seeking to bond PVC pipes, a number of adhesive options are available, each with distinct characteristics. The following table provides an overview of specific glues along with their properties for PVC pipe applications. Each product is evaluated based on its Type, Color, Set Time (measured in minutes), Max Pressure (expressed in psi, pounds per square inch), VOC Content (termed in g/L, grams per liter), and Temperature Range (denoted in Fahrenheit).
Now that we have given you a detailed round-up of the top products to try, were you able to make a choice? It is normal to still feel a bit confused. In order to help you eliminate that confusion, you need to take into consideration a few more important factors.
And in this section, we are going to take a look at some of the most important things that you need to keep in mind when purchasing glue for PVC pipes. Let’s quickly take a look!
1. Drying Time Of PVC Cement
One of the most important things to take note of when buying glue for PVC is to make sure that you get one that dries quickly.
It will be a mess if you have the PVC pipe hanging from the ceiling and the glue dripping all over the floor before it completely dries up. In order to avoid such a mess, it is best that you select an option that dries up within a few minutes.
2. Strength
Unless PVC glue delivers a strong bond, it is of no good. When you are selecting PVC cement, you need to keep in mind that it delivers a strong hold and does not break when faced with extreme pressure or weight. To give you a rough estimate, PVC bonds should be able to withstand at least 160 pounds per square inch.
So, before you purchase, make sure your glue can deliver a bond that can handle this weight. In case you find any difficulty understanding whether a particular product is up to the mark or not, make sure you talk to the seller about it.
3. Viscosity
The resistance of a liquid to flow is what determines its viscosity. A high-viscosity glue simply means that it is thicker and more likely to stay in place after you apply it. When you are purchasing glue for PVC piping, we would recommend that you go for an adhesive that is medium to high in viscosity.
However, it is essential to keep in mind that glues that are high in viscosity tend to take longer to set and might slow down your work speed. To play safe, we would suggest that you use medium viscosity glue for PVC piping. This is of the right thickness and perfect for smooth application and does not take forever to dry up.
4. Odor
When you are working on a DIY project, it becomes very problematic if the PVC cement glue you are using has a strong odor. In case you are allergic to this toxic smell, it is best to look for low on VOC products.
To know whether a product is odorless or not, make sure you read the label carefully as all necessary information is printed there.
5. Temperature Resistance
Before you decide on a particular PVC glue for the pipes, it is crucial to take note of the climatic conditions that you are working in. For the best results, it is vital that you check how much heat or cold an adhesive can withstand and still deliver a strong bond.
If you want the bond to last, choose a PVC glue suited to the temperature that you stay at. In case you are planning to work in very high temperatures, select a glue that can easily deliver strong bonds at high temperatures.
It is best to look for glue with a high-temperature resistance as most PVC pipes provide functionality up to 140 degrees Fahrenheit.
6. Working Time
When choosing an adhesive, it is best to go for one that is not too runny and sets quickly, but not so quickly that you are hardly left with any working time. You should get enough time to get all your bearings in place before the power sets up and sticks the pipes on its own.
Unless you are a pro at working with PVC adhesives, we would suggest that you do not go for ones that dry up too quickly as they are pretty challenging to handle.
Toggle TitleCan PVC cement be used to repair a leak in a PVC pipe?
Yes, PVC cement can be used to repair a leak in a PVC pipe. However, it is important to properly clean and prepare the surfaces before applying the cement, and to use an appropriate amount of adhesive to ensure a strong bond.
How do I remove excess Glue For PVC Pipes from a joint?
Excess Glue For PVC Pipes can be removed from a joint using a PVC pipe cutter or a hacksaw. It is important to wait until the adhesive has fully cured before attempting to remove any excess.
How strong is a joint made with Glue For PVC Pipes?
A joint made with Glue For PVC Pipes can be very strong, with a strength of up to several hundred pounds per square inch (psi). However, the strength of the joint can be affected by factors such as the quality of the adhesive, the condition of the PVC surfaces, and the type of PVC being used.
Can Glue For PVC Pipes be used for other types of plastic pipes?
No, Glue For PVC Pipes should only be used for PVC pipes and fittings. Other types of plastic pipes, such as ABS or CPVC, require specific types of adhesive.
Is there a difference between PVC cement and PVC primer?
Yes, there is a difference between PVC cement and PVC primer. PVC primer is used to clean and prime the surfaces of the PVC pipe and fit before applying the cement. The primer helps to prepare the surfaces for bonding and improve the strength of the joint.
That’s all we have for you today, folks!
Always make sure that you use the right PVC primer and cement in the correct proportion to ensure that the bond is right. Also, do not forget to prep the pipes well before you use adhesives on them. If there’s rust or mold on them, the chances are that PVC glue won’t really work that well.
Before we sign off, we want to let you in on our favorites - the Oatey 30246 takes the award for being our favorite overall. Apart from that, if you are looking for a product that can handle high temperatures, it is best that you try the Weld-On 12496.
In case you have any suggestions that you would like to share with us, write to us in the comments box below. And for more exciting reads, do not forget to keep a watch on this space.
If you’re into stained glass projects and want high-quality finishes while shaping them, then the Godora stained glass grinder can be the right choice. But if budget is a constraint, the Sylphid portable mini glass grinder can be the one for you.
Whether you’re a hobbyist or professional, a good stained glass grinder is important for your armory. From cutting stained to shaping and providing smooth finishes, it can help you do it all!
So, today, I have picked the 7 best-stained glass grinders suitable for different needs. I have also curated a short buyer’s guide to help you understand the crucial factors for making the right choice after I've spent hours using these stained glass grinders.
Listed below are the Best Stained Glass Grinders:
Godora Stained Glass Grinder: Known for easy operation, its 4200 RPM motor ensures speedy grinding. Auto water fill aids clean operation. Its weakness is the potentially ineffective wide baffle design.
Sylphid Portable Mini Glass Grinder: A budget-friendly choice with a robust 4200 RPM motor. The limitation is the single 5/8-inch bit, impacting its versatility.
Gryphon Gryphette Glass Grinder: Ideal for beginners, offers compatibility with all standard bits. Its drawback lies in the smaller work surface, limiting the size of projects.
Gryphon Convertible Stained Glass Grinder: Prioritizes user comfort with its unique convertible workspace. The lower speed motor of 3000 RPM is a limitation of its premium price.
Anbull Stained Glass Grinder: Stands out for portability with its compact design and 4200 RPM motor. Difficult assembly due to unclear instructions is a potential challenge.
1. Best For Easy Operation- Godora Stained Glass Grinder
What We Like
Durable, lightweight build
Automatic water fill
Recessed power switch
Comes with two bits
Comes with extra fuse
What We Don't Like
The wide baffle design may not be very effective
Featuring a high-power 4200 RPM (revolutions per minute) DC motor and a unique automation process, the Godora stained glass grinder kit can help users achieve the desired shape quickly. All you need to do is add water to the base, and its distinctive spiral design will automatically draw water into the grinding bit. As a result, you can save the time and effort required to perform the step manually.
Talking about the bits, I should also mention that this kit has two of them- ⅝-inch and 1-inch. And their interchangeable design means you can use the same kit to work with different thicknesses of stained glasses. I also observed that the rigged grinding base reduced friction and helped me maintain a firm grip while holding the glass for better precision.
We have also found from using this product that it has a wide baffle design to reduce splashing the glass mixed liquid from traveling too far. The brand claims this feature can protect your eyes and the surfaces around the grinder. But I am not too sure of this, as the sides may still result in considerable splashing, this did not happen in our tests though.
The recessed power switch is a good way to reduce the chances of accidental power cuts, and the kit also includes a spare fuse for emergencies. Plus, the brand has backed this kit with a satisfaction policy, so buyers can contact customer service in case of any issues.
Motor Speed: 4200 RPM | Power Source: Corded electric | Bit Size: ⅝ and 1-inch | Spare Fuse: Yes
2. Best Budget Pick- Sylphid Portable Mini Glass Grinder
What We Like
Transparent baffle to reduce splashing
Recessed switch prevents electric conduction
Auto water fill feature
Sturdy exterior
What We Don't Like
Comes with only one bit
Drawing from experience, this unit may be worth considering if you’re looking for a stained glass grinder kit on a budget. It has many similar features to that of its predecessor, like the high-speed 4200 RPM DC motor. Similarly, its auto water fill function works just as well, helping you save a few dollars on the purchase.
However, it comes with only one bit (5/8-inch), which won’t likely be suitable if you have to work on glass projects with varying thicknesses.
At first glance, I wasn’t expecting much from this unit, primarily due to its humble design. But it didn’t take me many trials run to comprehend the durability our investigation demonstrated, besides, the lightweight structure makes it easy to move around your rooms or workshop, provided there’s a 110v power outlet in the vicinity.
The recessed power switch is located on the right side of the grinder, with the fuse below it. You will also get a replacement fuse that’s easy to install should the existing malfunction. Finally, this grinder kit comes in 4 color variations, so you can choose the one that best matches your aesthetics!
Motor Speed: 4200 RPM | Power Source: Corded electric | Bit Size: ⅝-inch | Spare Fuse: Yes
3. Best For Beginners- Gryphon Gryphette Glass Grinder
What We Like
Compact build
Omnidirectional motor
Accepts standard bits
Comes with a ¾-inch bit
What We Don't Like
Small working surface
People new to stained glass grinding would want a simple kit that helps them achieve different shaped-edges without much effort. And if you, too, are in the same boat, based on our firsthand experience, the Gryphon Gryphette glass grinder may fit the bill.
At the helm of this compact unit is an omnidirectional 3600 motor with decent speed to help with most beginners’ projects. Keep in mind, though, that the work surface isn’t too wide, so don’t try to shape bigger glass pieces. Otherwise, you may lose control of the process, damaging the piece and, perhaps, injuring your finger.
Another thing to note is that this glass grinder kit doesn’t have an auto water fill feature. That is to say, you need to lubricate the grinder head with a wet sponge for grinding glass. But this isn’t a caveat for me, considering it’s an entry-level model.
As its peers mentioned above, this unit also comes with a fast-acting spare fuse that goes below the recessed power switch. And although the kit includes a ¾-inch bit, it accepts all standard bits so you can easily work with glass projects of varying thicknesses.
Last but not least, the zero maintenance design can make it suitable for people on the go.
Motor Speed: 3600 RPM | Power Source: Corded electric | Bit Size: 3/4-inch | Spare Fuse: Yes
4. Best Premium Grinder Kit- Gryphon Convertible Stained Glass Grinder
What We Like
Convertible work surface
Can help reduce neck strain
Spongless cooling electric pump
Comes with two bits
What We Don't Like
Low-speed motor compared to the price
If you’re on the lookout for a more ‘advanced’ stained glass grinder and don’t mind extending your budget from it, then here’s another product from Gryphon you may want to check out.
With a 3000 RPM motor and practically ‘all bits’ compatibility, it aims to help users accomplish intricate finishes easily. But honestly, I did expect the motor to be a little more powerful, especially considering the premium price point of the model.
Now, let me tell you what makes this unit convertible. Well, by just rotating the base, you can utilize the highlight of this grinder, aka its inclined workspace. Not only does this allow users to grind the glass while sitting, but the angled surface also reduces the strain on your neck if you choose to work while standing, in the group tests our team found this feature to be an excellent feature And you can use it traditionally as well by keeping the work surface horizontal.
The auto water-fill feature, in this case, is an integrated electric pump equipped with spongeless cooling that ensures a constant flow of water to the grinder head, no matter the saw orientation. Moreover, the reinforced cooling may help expand the service life of the grinding bit.
Last but not least, you will get two grinding bits (1-inch and ¼-inch) with the package.
Motor Speed: 3000 RPM | Power Source: Corded electric | Bit Size: 1-inch and ¼- inch | Spare Fuse: No
5. Best For Portability- Anbull Stained Glass Grinder Machine
What We Like
4200 RPM motor
Spiral bit base design
Auto water-fill
Wide working surface
What We Don't Like
Difficult assembly
Having tried a grinder operating on a 4200 RPM motor, I wanted to see how this unit from Anbull with the same motor speed performs. And it’s safe to say that it didn’t function too differently after putting it to the test, however, after a couple of runs, the grinder did show a more refined polish and an easier, effortless experience thanks to its high RPM we always finished the testing tasks faster according to our test logs.
Firstly, the motor housing is equipped with water barriers that protect it from moisture- a feature you don’t get to see too often in stained glass grinders in this price range. On top of that, the distinct spiral base design of the grinding bits can suck up water in the bits pretty smoothly to automatically flush the grinding dust.
And unlike the Gryphon Gryphette stained glass grinder, it has a sufficiently wide work surface that ensures better grip and versatility for your glass projects. You can also carry and store it anywhere, thanks to the compact yet durable build of the machine.
Furthermore, the acrylic baffle reduces the chances of the water and glass bits splashing, making for a safe operation. But putting this machine together can be a hassle for first-timers, as the assembly instructions aren’t very clear, the effort is well worth it however.
I was relieved to find that, unlike its predecessor, this unit comes with a replacement fuse. Plus, the brand offers a 12-month exchange or return policy for any defects or malfunctions.
Motor Speed: 4200 RPM | Power Source: Corded electric | Bit Size: ⅝ and 1-inch | Spare Fuse: Yes
6. Best Durable Design- Lifancy Stained Glass Grinder
What We Like
Rustproof ABS material build
Smooth grinding with auto water fill
No leak switch
Two grinding bits included
What We Don't Like
Installing the grinding bits can be difficult
The Lifancy stained glass grinder is another budget-friendly option I came across during my research that doesn’t require you to compromise on your utility. It’s made from rust-proof ABS material that can take a blow or two, so you don’t have to look for replacements even when using this unit regularly.
The grinding head base is designed after the working principle of a screw pump, meaning it will automatically pull water into the bit to remove glass particles. This, in turn, will provide a smoother grinder experience for even edges, irrespective of the shape you’re aiming for.
As for safety, the acrylic bezel and protected switch design keep the chances of mishaps at bay. You can easily assemble the unit by following the instructions in the manual, as there isn’t any technical aspect involved. But I did take more time to figure out the installation of the drill bits. And until I did, the grinding glass produced an annoying rattle.
You will find two grinding bits (⅝ and 1-inch) in the package, which can also be used for ceramic and marble (besides glass).
Motor Speed: N/A | Power Source: Corded electric | Bit Size: ⅝ and 1-inch | Spare Fuse: Yes
7. Best For Mid-Range Budget- Inland Craft Wiz Glass Grinder
What We Like
Compatible with standard electric outlets
Rust and impact-resistant body
Comes with two grinding bits
Compact design
What We Don't Like
Heavy
The Inland Craft glass grinder is another versatile unit that can be used for glass and lapidary projects. Sporting an elegant design that will suit any workshop or garage, its small footprint won’t take up much space while effectively getting the job done.
This unit runs on a 115V motor and can be easily plugged into any standard electric outlet in your home or garage. Moreover, the grinding chamber is resistant to impact and rust, making it easier to travel with. But the weight is more than the other options I have tried so far, which may be problematic if you have mobility issues or need to travel light.
Apart from that, the wide work surface is a plus, as it helps with smooth hand movements without the user worrying about losing grip at any time. This isn’t an automatic model, though, so you’d need to dip the sponge in water to lubricate the grinder bit. However, I don’t really mind the absence of the feature at its reasonable price, this is a great disadvantage for professional use through.
Like most other kits mentioned on this list today, this unit also comes with two grinding bits (¾ and ¼-inch), and it’s compatible with other standard bits.
Motor Speed: 3550 RPM | Power Source: Corded electric | Bit Size: ¾ and ¼-inch | Spare Fuse: No
What Is the Best Stained Glass Grinders
Stained glass grinders are intricate tools essential for shaping and refining stained glass pieces. Considering various factors such as motor speed (measured in rotations per minute - RPM), power source, bit size, and the availability of a spare fuse, we provide a comparative analysis of some of the best stained glass grinders on the market.
Before warping up this guide, let me quickly discuss a few factors that will help you make the right pick, things that I have discovered through trial and error while testing these glass grinders.
1. Speed
As you may have figured out going through my reviews, the speed of a stained glass grinder is essentially the speed of its motor, measured in RPM. The higher the motor speed, the faster you can shape and finish stained glass with less effort. Besides, high-speed grinders can help achieve better precision and finishes.
As such, stained glass grinders are typically available in motor speeds ranging from 3000 to 7500 RPM. Motor speeds of less than 3300 are considered suitable for grinding small glass pieces that don’t require much precision. Likewise, grinders ranging between 3300 and 3600 RPM can help you get through medium to large pieces with better precision.
However, if you’re looking for optimum precision and seamless finishes for large glass pieces, I’d suggest going for models with more than 3600 RPM, according to our testing logs, this will have your time but will also save re-runs considerably and prevent material losses.
2. Cooling Mechanism
Glass grinders come with a manual or automatic cooling mechanism, so you can choose the one that best suits your requirements (and budgets).
While manual cooling grinders require users to place a wet sponge behind the grinding bit that keeps it from overheating, automatic models pull water to the bit from the water reservoir below. This process is achieved through a pump, which ensures a steady water flow to the bit.
If you’re still on the learning curve, I’d suggest going for the latter for ease of operation. How often you use the stained glass grinder should have the biggest say in this.
3. Space
The workspace (or working base) of a grinder is an important feature to consider. If the surface is too small, you may not be able to accommodate the glass pieces properly, resulting in uneven finishes. However, maneuvering the glass piece, especially near the grinding bit, will be difficult if it's too big.
You can easily find out the dimensions of the workspace on the package, so keep an eye on it to ensure you don’t face any issues later.
4. Accessories
Electric glass grinders like the ones I have reviewed today will generally require assembly. Hence, it’d be better to go for a model that comes with all the required tools like:
Hex wrench
Grinding bits
Spare fuse for replacement
Can I use any grinder for stained glass, or do I need a specific type?
Stained glass grinders usually come with diamond-coated grinding wheels, which are suitable for gently grinding or cleaning and cutting stained glass while facilitating optimum precision. But other grinders, like the ones for metal or wood, will employ too much force, thereby damaging the glass piece. You may observe large cracks or even see the glass shatter completely under that much force.
Hence, I’d strongly recommend getting a glass stained grinder for stained glass projects.
Can I use a stained glass grinder for other types of glass work or projects?
Yes, you can use a stained glass grinder for different projects, such as smoothening the edges of fused glass pieces or shaping mosaics. Other than that, these machines can be used to achieve intricate finishes on glass jewelry and glass sculptures.
How do I properly care for and maintain my stained glass grinder?
Firstly, ensure you wipe the grinder (including the grinding wheel and reservoir) with a clean damp cloth to remove debris after every use. And store it properly in a clean and dry place with a cover to prevent dirt from accumulating on the parts.
You should also lubricate the moving parts (like the shaft and grinding bit base) regularly to keep them optimally functional. Lastly, it’s important to use the grinder by strictly following the manufacturer’s instructions to avoid any issues.
After testing out these grinders, for me, the Godora stained glass grinder takes the first position due to its ease of use and high-power motor, which can be suitable for both pros and DIYers.
A close second is the Sylphid portable mini glass grinder that offers a satisfactory performance without burning a hole in your pocket. However, you may check out the other options, too, as I didn’t find any significant disadvantages while testing them.
Sometimes, it seems impossible to gather the motivation to leave an air-conditioned room - especially when it is too hot outside. But what if I told you that you can wear an air conditioner around your neck wherever you go?
The primary purpose of a wearable fan is to provide cool air on the go. They are typically worn around the neck to lower the body temperature while being outdoors, irrespective of how hot the weather is.
In this article, I present to you the top 5 wearable air conditioners that you can choose to go for. Let us begin!
Listed below are the Best Wearable Air Conditioners:
JISULIFE Portable Neck Fan: JISULIFE excels with a stylish, compact, and hair-safe bladeless design. The main concern is the sub-par battery life.
Arctic Air Cooler: The Arctic Air Freedom offers superior cooling efficiency due to its built-in water tank and lightweight design. It tends to be noisy at high speeds.
RIYA Bladeless Neck Fan: RIYA's fan sets a standard in battery efficiency with up to twenty hours of runtime on a single charge. The trade-off is the fan's heavier weight.
SAMISKO Portable Neck Fans: Noise efficiency is SAMISKO's forte, maintaining a meager 25 dB noise level even at the highest setting. Its rigidity could cause discomfort over long periods.
TORRAS Portable Neck Fan: The TORRAS Coolify quickly lowers body temperature while flaunting a stylish design. The flip side is its hefty price tag.
Here is the list of the 5 best wearable air conditioners that you can use to beat the heat and ensure a comfortable and enjoyable summer.
1. Best Overall: JISULIFE Portable Neck Fan
What I like
Fashionable design
Comfortable to wear
Durable
Low maintenance
What I don't like
Battery life could be better
The JISULIFE Portable Neck Fan is one of the best hands-free air fans on the market today. It features a stylish and compact design so that you can look cool and remain comfortable while going about your daily chores. All you have to do is short-press its button to turn on the fan and press repeatedly to turn off the fan or adjust the airflow speed and stay cool throughout the day.
That said, this neck fan has three different types of air-flow settings - weak wind, natural wind, and strong wind. And as the names suggest, the “weak wind” setting offers the lowest wind speed, while the “strong wind” cooling mode ensures the highest wind speed. It did emit a bit of a “hum” at the highest setting, but it wasn’t something I found disturbing.
Moreover, it doesn’t catch or tangle long hair because of its bladeless design. I didn’t find the battery life to be too impressive, though.
Controller type: One-button control | Battery: 4000 mAh | Weight: 9.1 ounces | Runtime: Four to 16 hours, depending on the level of fan speed | Noise level: 25 dB
2. Best For Cooling Efficiency: Arctic Air Freedom Personal Air Cooler
What I like
Lightweight design
Built-in water tank
Great cooling efficiency
Easy to use
What I don't like
Emits loud noise at high speed
The Arctic Air Freedom Personal Air Cooler is an ideal option for people who prioritize their comfort over anything else. Its lightweight design made working out in hot weather way easier for me.
The wind flow of this USB-rechargeable device was great. This neck fan comes with three fan speeds to cool you down as per your preferred settings even in high temperatures.
Furthermore, the Arctic Air Freedom Personal Air Cooler has a built-in water tank. One can add water to it for an enhanced cooling experience. I decided to add ice to the tank for even better cooling, and it worked to eliminate hot air efficiently.
The battery life of this device is quite decent. It lasts up to six hours when set at a lower setting. However, one minor issue that I faced with this neck fan was that when I used it at its highest speed, it started emitting loud noise. It is tolerable when set at a lower speed though.
Controller type: Touchpad control | Battery: 5000 mAh | Weight: 7.5 ounces | Runtime: Six hours | Noise level: 64 dB
3. Best Battery-Efficient Wearable Air Conditioner: RIYA Bladeless Neck Fan
What I like
Safe and easy to use
Decent cooling modes
Great battery life
Fast cooling
What I don't like
A bit heavy
The RIYA Bladeless Neck Fan is the best option to go for if you want your neck fan’s battery to last for long periods at a time. It can last up to twenty hours on a single charge, which is a lot compared to the previous two recommendations.
This bladeless and noiseless neck fan also comes with three airflow settings - weak wind, natural wind, and strong wind. You can adjust the wind flow levels based on your requirements. And since it is made of silicone and has a gooseneck design, it provides a very comfortable fit. It also has a sturdy and durable build, so you can take it for trips and outdoor activities such as hiking and camping.
The only downside to this device is that it’s a bit heavy compared to the others. But that’s nothing major. It comes with a 360-degree surround air supply feature that supports fast cooling and increases the volume of air around the neck by up to 90%.
Controller type: Button control, touch | Battery: 5200 mAh | Weight: 9.5 ounces | Runtime: Up to twenty hours | Noise level: 25 dB
4. Best For Noise Efficiency: SAMISKO Personal Cooling Portable Neck Fans
What I like
Two fans provide 360-degree cooling
Ultra-quiet operation at all fan speeds
Bladeless design
USB rechargeable
What I don't like
Discomfort on the neck and shoulder region when used for a long period
If you are looking for a wearable air conditioner with uncompromised cooling efficiency, then the SAMISKO Personal Cooling Portable Neck Fans won’t disappoint you. It comes with two sturdy and well-built fans with 48 wind outlets and 60 twin-turbine fan blades that provide cool breeze.
I was a little concerned about the efficiency of this portable neck fan due to its size. However, it had a surprisingly great airflow because of its 360-degree full-air outlet that blows air both on your neck and face. The highlight of this fan, however, is its whisper-quiet operation at different fan speeds. It only produces 25 dB of sound even at the strongest wind speed setting.
What’s more, the SAMISKO Personal Cooling Portable Neck Fan is priced at a reasonable cost. However, I found this wearable AC to be a little rigid. It might cause one a little discomfort around the neck and on the shoulder due when used for long periods.
Other than that, the SAMISKO neck fan is a great option for people who want to enjoy a great cooling experience even at the lowest setting.
Controller type: Button control | Battery: 5200 mAh | Weight: 8.8 ounces | Runtime: Three to twenty-one hours, depending on fan speed | Noise level: 25 dB
5. Best For Stylish, Bladeless, And Hands-Free Design: TORRAS Coolify Portable Air Conditioner Neck Fan
What I like
Semiconductor refrigeration technology
Lowers body temperature quickly
Decent battery life
Bladeless and hands-free design
What I don't like
Quite expensive
The TORRAS Coolify Portable Air Conditioner Neck Fan is compact and easy to wear around the neck. With its semiconductor refrigeration technology and bi-directional vent, I was quickly able to lower the temperature around my neck down to about 18 degrees F within just 3 seconds.
This wearable air conditioner also emitted surprisingly low noise as compared to other coolers at all three fan speeds (light breeze, mild wind, and cool wind). Since it is built with a bladeless design, I was able to use this portable neck fan in quiet areas like my office too.
The battery of this portable neck fan lasted for about 8 hours (on a single charge) before dying out completely at a time. And it fully charges in about two hours, which is fair in my opinion. I’d say the battery life of this stylish wearable air conditioner is decent for people who want to use it for longer periods throughout the day.
In fact, you can wear it comfortably around your neck the entire day because of its hands-free design and adjustable hinges. And it will look just like wearing a pair of headphones. The only downside is that it’s quite expensive compared to the other options I’ve reviewed in this guide.
Controller type: Button control | Battery: 4000 mAh | Weight: 12.3 ounces | Runtime: Up to eight hours | Noise level: 25 dB
What Are the Best Wearable Air Conditioners?
Wearable air conditioners are an innovative solution that offers personal cooling in a convenient, portable manner. The table below provides a comparative analysis of some of the best wearable air conditioners available in the market. The analysis factors include the type of controller, the capacity of the battery (in milliampere-hour, mAh), the weight of the wearable (in ounces), runtime (which is the operational hours provided on a single charge), and the noise level during operation (measured in decibels, dB).
Buying Guide For The Best Wearable Air Conditioner
Purchasing wearable air conditioners the minute you hear about them may not be the best idea. One should always keep certain factors in mind like the average customer rating before buying any product, and our portable neck fans are no exception in this case.
Since a portable neck fan is relatively simple in design, there is no need to research extensively on its specifics. However, one should keep other factors in mind that will help them differentiate between different brands and models to find one that suits their needs.
In this buyer’s guide, I have compiled a few such factors for you. They are:
Type Of Fan
One of the first things that you should look out for when browsing for the best wearable air conditioners is their fan type. There are broadly two kinds of fans in such devices - bladed and bladeless.
Bladeless fans do not have blades in them, which is why they are much quieter when used. On the other hand, the bladed fans emit some noise since the blades rotate to blow cool air. Portable neck fans with the former type of fan are costlier than the ones with the latter.
Your choice of fan type should depend on two factors - your budget and your needs. It is best if one manages to find a perfect middle ground between the two.
Battery
One of the most important factors that I consider while buying wearable air conditioners is their battery life. Since there is no use for great features if the device can’t last long enough, one must consider it when buying a portable neck fan.
For instance, if I have to be outside for long hours at a time and need constant cooling - I will need a wearable air conditioner with strong battery life. On the other hand, if I have access to a charging point and a USB nearby, I can settle for neck fans that offer a relatively lower runtime.
Overall, I would advise not to go below six to eight hours of functioning when it comes to portable neck fans.
Noise
Loud noise emitted from wearable air conditioners can be an embarrassment while working in quiet spaces like an office. Hence, it is best to consider the noise level of the fans before purchasing such cooling devices.
As I mentioned before, bladeless fans emit the least amount of noise due to the absence of blades. Thus, if your priority is a noiseless environment, you can go for a bladeless wearable air conditioner.
Even if you are not in a quiet space, it is advised not to compromise on the aspect of noise emission when it comes to wearable air conditioners. Since the neck fan is placed too close to the face and ears, loud noise may be intolerable for most people.
Weight
Since wearable air conditioners are supposed to be placed on the shoulders, it is important to consider their weight. If the device is unnecessarily heavy, it might lead to chronic pain in the future. Further, it may cause a stiff neck.
Hence, it is always advised to go for lightweight options when it comes to buying a portable air conditioner. Based on the age of the user and other factors such as physical conditions, the purchased neck fan must stay within the range of 7 ounces to 9 ounces.
A factor that strongly influences the weight of a wearable air conditioner is its material. If the product is made up of materials such as silicone, it will be lighter in weight.
That said, if you’re someone who suffers from chronic back and shoulder pain, I’d suggest opting for a portable air conditioner like the Zero Breeze Mark II instead.
Is wearable air conditioner safe to use?
Yes, wearable air conditioners are generally safe to use. However, like any electronic device, they should be used as recommended by the manufacturer. Never immerse the device in water if it’s not water-proof and following the recommended charging practices to ensure safety.
How effective are wearable air conditioners?
Wearable air conditioners can be surprisingly effective at regulating body temperature, but they aren’t meant to cool large spaces. Their effectiveness will depend on external factors like ambient temperature and the individual’s physiological response.
Can I wear a wearable air conditioner while exercising?
It depends on the design and water resistance of the specific unit. Some wearable air conditioners are sweat-resistant and designed for use during physical activities, but it’s best to check the manufacturer’s guidelines before wearing them during vigorous exercise.
Can a wearable air conditioner help with hot flashes or other symptoms of menopause?
Many people find wearable air conditioners to be helpful for dealing with hot flashes or other thermoregulatory issues related to menopause. However, the effectiveness might vary between individuals, and they are not a substitute for medical treatment.
Wearable air conditioners have made battling conditions like heat flashes easy to deal with. However, it is understandable if one gets confused as to which one to go for. After all, several labels claim to be the best on the market.
The final choice as to which wearable air conditioner to go for depends on your requirements. Hopefully, my recommendations of the top 5 wearable air conditioners will help you make a more sound decision.
While none of those answers are incorrect, an indispensable piece of equipment would be the wheelbarrow. We know you might be reading this with raised eyebrows but let us explain. These simple units have tremendous capacity, allowing you to carry heavy loads from one spot to another.
Apart from that, they’re low maintenance, thanks to their innovative tires, while the sturdy construction provides much-needed longevity. You can use it for numerous purposes, and best of all, the incredible comfort reduces fatigue, allowing extended periods of work.
But the question is, how do you decide which unit is ideally suitable to fulfill your needs? To help, we've narrowed down nine quality options that are taking the market by storm.
Listed below are the 5 best wheelbarrows for concrete from our list:
WORX Yard Cart. The WORX Yard Cart combines the strength of a 300 lbs. capacity and the convenience of lightweight, ideal for undertaking various functions. Its eight-in-one nature and flat-free tires provide multiple uses and smooth functions. Although some users found it narrow, the hindrance is measurable and only requires getting used to.
Marathon Yard Rover. The Marathon Yard Rover offers a large carrying capacity of 300 lbs. Its 5-cubic feet tray is designed with polypropylene, delivering outstanding longevity and reliability. The contoured design and loop handles ensure easy maneuverability, despite some issues with installation.
Ames Garden Cart. The Ames 2463875 Garden Cart's standout feature is its built-in tool tray, making organizing tasks a breeze. Its 4 cubic feet capacity and rust-resistant tray make it hardy and reliable, although some users might find the handle too low, which could be inconvenient.
Garden Star Garden Cart. The Garden Star Garden Cart offers simplicity, ease of use, and high efficiency. The 4-cubic foot tray incorporates multiple compartments, and the unit showcases impressive balance and stability thanks to air-filled tires. The primary issue is installation, which some found challenging due to mismatching bolts and holes.
True Temper Wheelbarrow. The True Temper Wheelbarrow excels in versatility, offering a range of options to choose from. The dual-wheel conversion kit, an 8-cubic foot poly tray, and an all-steel undercarriage make it a reliable workhorse, though some might find the higher price point a drawback.
Here is the list of the 9 best wheelbarrows for concrete that you can use to easily and quickly transport heavy items.
1. WORX Yard Cart - Best for Multifunctional Use
The WORX Yard Cart has quickly made its way up the charts to cement a place among the top brands. There's a lot to like about it, including its refined look, which is sure to grab your attention. So, let's get down to brass tacks.
The striking aspect of the model is the remarkable capacity of 300 lbs., making it suitable for various purposes. We loved how the designers have kept the weight within reasonable limits despite having numerous functions.
But don't worry because you can use it as a heavy-duty model since it has combined eight carts in one. Users can employ it as a yard cart, bag holder, extended dolly, and cylinder carrier, among other things. It delivers much-needed comfort and significantly reduces stress, allowing you to quickly complete any task.
We also need to talk about the flat-free tires, which save you the trouble of inflating them. It features a rugged design and provides smoothness on various surfaces. You won't have trouble maneuvering it, while the smart two-wheel placement provides easy access to all functions.
Whether it's your first time using a cart or you need it for professional purposes, this wheelbarrow takes care of most situations.
Some users have found the unit too narrow, which can be inconvenient. It has several advantages, but if you're unaccustomed to using a narrow cart, it'll take time to get the hang of it. Also, you may need to purchase additional components, driving up the overall cost of the model.
What We Like
Innovative two-wheel placement
Lightweight
Doesn’t need inflating
Sturdy construction
Versatile
What We Don't Like
Narrow
Doesn’t include all components
Dimensions: 42" x 12" x 18" | Weight: 49lbs | Load Capacity: 300lbs | Tub Material: Metal | Caster Type: N/A | Number of Wheels: 2
2. Marathon Yard Rover - Best for Heavy-Duty Tasks
Those of you who liked our earlier recommendation, don't make up your mind just yet because the products keep getting better. Next up is the Marathon Yard Rover, which comes with several exciting upgrades, making it suitable for numerous tasks. Rest assured, you'll get your money's worth.
Straight off the bat, the large capacity allows you to handle a wide range of tasks with ease. The 5-cubic feet tray is well-supported by the polypropylene construction and has several benefits. It's both impact and rust-resistant, delivering much-needed longevity to provide reliability at work.
Furthermore, the contoured design makes work more manageable, ensuring you can carry large loads and dump them in any suitable spot. In fact, it has a total carrying capacity of 300 lbs, permitting you to work with bark bags, debris, mulch, and yard waste. In that regard, the loop handles provide exceptional maneuverability, allowing you to push or pull with ease.
Once work is over, you won't have any trouble storing the unit. If you don't have sufficient room in the shed, there's no need to worry simply hang it from the wall. Finally, we can't end this discussion without mentioning the air-filled tires for smooth movement.
The primary problem users face is installation since, in some cases, the bolts and holes don't match up to the instructions. So, it'll take longer to arrange and fit all the components, and you may have to redrill the holes for better alignment. If you haven't done something like this before, it's better to seek professional help.
What We Like
Loop handles
Easy to store
Air-filled tires
Highly maneuverable
300 lbs carrying capacity
What We Don't Like
Tricky installation
Dimensions: 53.5" x 55" x 27.5" | Weight: 25lbs | Load Capacity: 300lbs | Tub Material: Polypropylene (PP) | Caster Type: Pneumatic | Number of Wheels: 2
3. Ames Garden Cart - Best for Organizing Tools
Ames 2463875 Garden Cart has been making all the right noise, and a closer look at the model reveals why. It may look like a simple unit but don't be fooled as Ames has made the necessary upgrades, delivering improved performance. So, read on to find out more.
One of the first things that you notice about the wheelbarrow is its ease of use. It comes in an easy-roller yard cart, making it convenient for first-time users and seasoned professionals. But what's exciting is the multi-purpose nature of the tray given that it's divided into several compartments.
The cart has a total capacity of 4 cubic feet and comes with an integrated tool tray to store all necessary items. Therefore, it's highly convenient for carrying out numerous tasks and allows you to quickly complete work, highlighting its efficiency. Additionally, the tray is rust-resistant and lasts a long time for the best results.
Apart from that, what grabbed our attention are the four sets of wheels, including two smaller wheels, and two larger wheels for more portability. It provides even weight distribution and reduces fatigue as you navigate harsh terrains. Therefore, you can work for prolonged periods made possible by its comfortable performance.
Depending on your preference, the handle might seem slightly lower, making it inconvenient for tall users. But this isn't a significant issue and certainly feels better once you start working. Apart from that, you should be wary about overexposure to the sun and other natural elements, causing the color to fade.
What We Like
More balance
High efficiency
Wider wheelbase
Rust-resistant
Multi-purpose model
What We Don't Like
Low handle
Color may fade
Dimensions: 12.1" x 20" x 11.1" | Weight: 5.4lbs | Load Capacity: 225lbs | Tub Material: Plastic | Caster Type: Swivel | Number of Wheels: 4
4. Garden Star Garden Cart
Garden Star Garden Cart has many similarities with some other models available out there, so why should you opt for it? The primary reason would be user-friendliness, but that doesn't mean it compromises on other aspects. We guarantee you'll get a reliable performance during tasks, making it stand out.
Firstly, several factors need to be considered when buying a wheelbarrow, but capacity and maneuverability are perhaps the most important. This product does well in both these aspects, thanks to the 4-cubic foot tray and loop handles. Further adding to the convenience is the impact-resistant and anti-rust construction, ensuring it lasts a long time.
You can carry various materials, be it hay, debris, rocks, or mulch, and then deposit them in any suitable spot. This is made possible by the innovative handles, permitting you to pull or push the wheelbarrow quickly.
But the significant upgrade is the pneumatic dual air-filled tires, providing excellent balance and weight distribution. This ensures stable performance in most situations. Also, once work is over, it's exceptionally convenient to store the unit as it can be hung from the wall or placed in the shed.
You must keep the loads closer to the handle; otherwise, the wheelbarrow tends to flip. It's not an ideal scenario and may make prospective buyers hesitant about the purchase. Besides, the installation procedure takes time because certain nuts and bolts aren't best suited for the purpose.
What We Like
Air-filled tires
Even weight distribution
Accurate
Fast performance
Provides stability
What We Don't Like
Installation takes time
Tends to flip
Dimensions: 37" x 25.5" x 27" | Weight: 20.13lbs | Load Capacity: 300lbs | Tub Material: Polyurethane | Caster Type: Pneumatic | Number of Wheels: 2
5. True Temper Wheelbarrow
We're at the halfway point of our list, but there are several quality products we're yet to review. Next up is the True Temper Wheelbarrow, primarily focusing on versatility so that you can handle several tasks with ease. You'll love all that it offers, and it makes for a wonderful addition to the workshed.
First and foremost, you've got a lot of options to choose from, highlighting the unit’s incredible versatility. True Temper has added all relevant components, meaning there's no need for additional purchases; you can quickly complete the installation. Among all the upgrades, the dual-wheel conversion kit is extremely convenient, making work more manageable.
It has an 8-cubic foot poly tray, which shows the fantastic capacity you get on most tasks. In that regard, the anti-rust coating proves useful and ensures that it'll last a long time to deliver consistent performance. You won't have to worry about it breaking down in the middle of work, providing much-needed reliability.
Furthermore, thanks to its quick maneuverability and fast performance, the wheelbarrow reduces work time without compromising accuracy. We also loved the dual-wheel design well-supported by the all-steel undercarriage, allowing users to work for long hours. So, it's suitable for all age groups and comes in handy irrespective of the job at hand.
For all that's good, there's one point of contention for buyers, which is its higher price. The cost of a unit is one of the most important considerations for customers, and given the range of available options, we understand why. You need to be flexible with the budget or choose a different model.
What We Like
All-steel undercarriage
Conversion kit included
Flat-free tires
Suitable for all ages
Fast installation
What We Don't Like
Expensive
Dimensions: 58.75" x 30.5" x 33" | Weight: 53.9lbs | Load Capacity: 499.44lbs | Tub Material: Plastic | Caster Type: Pneumatic | Number of Wheels: 2
6. Polar Trailer
The Polar Trailer has most bases covered, and you can use it on various terrains while getting a superb output. Designers have paid a lot of attention to the details, making it suitable for first-time users and professionals alike. No surprise, it has mostly received a positive response from prospective buyers.
Let's begin by discussing the weight of the model to give you a clear idea of the load-bearing capacity and versatility. It weighs 35 lbs and consists of a high-impact polyethylene tub, which is sure to last a long time. Therefore, you can use it for construction work or gardening activities to carry a substantial load of 400 lbs.
Once you start working, you'll see that the tub has 7 cubic feet of space, sufficient to hold an array of materials. It's well complemented by the suitable dimensions of the wheelbarrow, providing several benefits. So, you won't have any trouble moving it over different terrains to pour the contents over the desired spot accurately.
In that regard, we must talk about the wide-rugged, wide-track rubber tires, which prove highly useful in managing weight. You can work for long hours as it reduces fatigue while the shielded ball bearings provide a seamless experience.
Like some other units, you'll have problems with poor instructions, making it difficult for first-time users to complete the installation. On top of that, some holes haven't been drilled; you’ll need to do it yourself, which can be cumbersome. We suggest you take your time and call someone to help you.
What We Like
7-cubic feet space
Suitable dimensions
Wide-rugged wide-track rubber tires
Shielded ball-bearings
Ergonomic design
What We Don't Like
Holes need to be drilled
Poor instructions
Dimensions: 50" x 28" x 29" | Weight: 36lbs | Load Capacity: 400lbs | Tub Material: Polyethylene (PE) | Caster Type: Pneumatic | Number of Wheels: 2
7. Goplus Wheelbarrow
Even a cursory glance at the Goplus Wheelbarrow will leave you coming back for more, meaning it's on most people's wish lists. There's a lot to like about it, and if you're searching for a feature-heavy model, it's hard to look past this unit. So, let's take a closer look at the details.
There are several fantastic features we need to cover, so let's get right into it. The unit is highly versatile and features a glossy design, well-complemented by its lightweight nature. You can use it for numerous tasks and in various places such as the patio, warehouse, or farm.
What's more, a lot of attention has been given to the sturdiness seen with regard to the heavy-duty steel frame and PP container. Now, if you're wondering how to maneuver the wheelbarrow, let us tell you that the 13-inch pneumatic rubber tires provide the answer. You can quickly turn, lift, and navigate across the bumpy terrain.
Other than that, it has a large capacity of 5 cubic feet, capable of carrying a load of 330 lbs without hassle. We should also let you know that the container won't bend or break under substantial weight, delivering a long lifespan. You get much-needed reliability during tasks while the ergonomic design permits extended work hours.
Price is one of the first things that users notice, and given the range of functions, we understand the higher cost. However, if you've got a tight budget, it might be difficult for you to make the purchase. In such a scenario, it's better to opt for a different unit.
What We Like
Loop handle
13-inch pneumatic tires
Doesn’t get deformed
Fast installation
Easy to maneuver
What We Don't Like
Higher cost
Dimensions: 57" x 26" x 26" | Weight: 23.1lbs | Load Capacity: 330lbs | Tub Material: Polypropylene (PP) | Caster Type: Pneumatic | Number of Wheels: 2
8. Ames CP6PS Wheelbarrow
While choosing any unit to feature on our list, we've had to ask ourselves what makes it stand out. With regards to the Ames CP6PS Wheelbarrow, the answer is the fantastic range provided by the model. It strikes the right balance between various functions, turning quite a few heads in the market.
At the very outset, what grabs your attention is its refined look, which isn't usually seen for a wheelbarrow. Good looks are the least of your concerns for a product that's designed to work in construction sites or gardens. However, Ames has backed up the elegant design with sturdy and efficient features.
The significant addition comes in terms of the pour spout mechanism, ensuring you get more accuracy in your tasks. Whether it be for heavy-duty work or small-scale purposes, the precision performance allows you to complete any task for the best results. In that regard, the double-coated American ash handles prove useful, permitting you to work for long hours.
Coming to robustness, we liked the corrosion-proof poly tray, which delivers a long lifespan and much-needed reliability. Since a significant part of the work is situated outdoors, designers have carefully chosen the components, so the wheelbarrow doesn't break down.
There are a couple of issues with the model, and we found that the instructions aren't suitable for first-time users. If you haven't assembled something similar, you might feel lost, which doesn't bode well for the unit. Plus, the axle needs improvement and may not perform well under a heavy load.
What We Like
Ergonomic design
Excellent wheels
Highly maneuverable
Weather-resistant
Long-lifespan
What We Don't Like
Poor instructions
Axle needs improvement
Dimensions: 59.75" x 29.5" x 26.5" | Weight: 29lbs | Load Capacity: 374.58lbs | Tub Material: Plastic | Caster Type: Pneumatic | Number of Wheels: 1
What is the Best Wheelbarrow for Concrete?
The following table provides a detailed comparison of the top wheelbarrows engineered for concrete-related tasks. It meticulously evaluates key attributes, including Dimensions, Weight, Load Capacity, Tub Material, Caster Type, and Number of Wheels.
Buying Guide for the Best Wheelbarrow For Concrete
We're done with our reviews, but that doesn't mean the guide has come to an end. Now, we arrive at the most exciting part where we'll divulge the secret of how to choose a wheelbarrow.
If you get confused between two top products, keep the points listed below in mind to make an informed decision.
Portability
Firstly, a wheelbarrow has to be portable and must carry numerous items from one place to another. You've got a lot of work to do, and it's not possible to lug around heavy material. So, to reduce fatigue, designers should add flat-free wheels that can handle multiple terrains with ease.
Price
Price is an essential factor for many people, especially those who are on a tight budget. Therefore, manufacturers have to find a way to add relevant functions while keeping the cost within reasonable limits. It'll allow a larger section of customers to make the purchase.
Robustness
Finally, the wheelbarrow has to be robust. There can be no compromises on durability because the last thing you need is for it to break down while working. It should last a long time for a seamless experience, ensuring you get your money's worth.
Can I use a regular wheelbarrow to move concrete?
In theory, you can, but wheelbarrows designed for concrete are often more durable and stable, which is needed for the heavy weight of the concrete. Using a regular wheelbarrow may not be as safe or efficient.
Can I assemble a wheelbarrow for concrete myself?
Yes, many wheelbarrows come unassembled and can be assembled with common tools. However, ensure to follow the manufacturer’s instructions closely to maintain the integrity and safety of the unit.
What safety measures should be taken when using a wheelbarrow for concrete?
Safety measures include wearing appropriate protective gear such as gloves and safety footwear, not overloading the wheelbarrow, ensuring the path is clear of obstacles before moving and avoiding uneven or steep terrain that could cause instability.
How to balance a heavy load in a wheelbarrow for concrete?
Distribute the load evenly while loading and try to maintain the center of gravity over the wheel or wheels. Also, it’s helpful to push the wheelbarrow rather than pulling, keeping the load upfront helping to avoid tipping.
How should I maintain my wheelbarrow for concrete?
Regular maintenance includes cleaning the wheelbarrow after each use to prevent concrete from hardening and damaging the surface. Also, periodically check the tire pressure, tighten loose nuts and bolts, and protect it from extreme weather conditions when not in use.
Decorating glass ornaments is an integral and exciting part of Christmas celebrations. What is the best paint for glass ornaments today?
From glass baubles to stars, crystal spheres to snowman figures, doves, and reindeer – glass ornaments are available in almost all shapes, sizes, and colors. The festive spirit of Christmas, the excitement of decorating the fir tree - grows if you make your glass ornaments or customize the basic ones you have purchased.
Painting the ornaments using enamel paint is the simplest and most effective way of adding your personal touch to the Christmas tree. With a variety of enamel paints available today, how do you select the best option that will help you decorate your glass ornaments?
We have compiled a list of the five best paints for glass ornaments that are available in the market today. Read on to find out what paint suits your requirements!
Listed below are the 5 best paints for glass ornaments from our list:
Testors 9146XT Promotional Enamel Paint Set. The Testors 9146XT set provides a comprehensive selection of more than 45 colors, allowing for a wide array of creativity on various surfaces, including glass; thinning brushes are included.
FolkArt ENAM8SET Enamel Paint Set. FolkArt ENAM8SET stands out for its ability to deliver beautiful, fade-resistant colors on surfaces from wood to glass; it dries quickly, is easy to clean, and offers excellent value for money.
Martha Stewart Crafts Gloss Opaque Glass Paint in Assorted Colors. Martha Stewart Crafts Gloss Opaque Glass Paint provides a clear gloss effect on glass, plastic, mirror, or ceramic surfaces; it's weather-resistant, so it's suitable for outdoor applications.
DecoArt 6 Piece 1mm Brights Glass Paint Marker Set. Ideal for personalizing glass ornaments, DecoArt's 1mm Glass Paint Markers can be baked for a durable, dishwasher-safe finish; the set includes six vibrant colors.
Sharpie Oil-Based Paint Markers, Medium Point, Assorted Classic Colors. Sharpie Oil-Based Paint Markers come in a variety of bright colors and four versatile tip styles enabling creativity on most surfaces including glass; they're resistant to abrasion, fading, and water damage.
Painting glass is a great way to express your creativity and create unique decorations for your home. Whether you're looking to create a special gift or spruce up your own decorations, painting glass ornaments is a rewarding DIY project. Here is the list of the 5 best paint for glass ornaments you can use to create beautiful art pieces:
Testors 9146XT Promotional Enamel Paint Set - Best For Comprehensive Starter Kits
Enamel Paint sets from Testors come in more than 45 colors in conventional glass bottles. The ¼oz enamel paints are available in a variety of combinations ranging from 6-bottle sets to 12-bottle kits with accessories. The Testors paint sets serve as an excellent way to let out your creativity.
The 9146XT Promotional set weighs 13.8 ounces and measures 9.9 x 1 x 4.6 inches. The essential selling point of this set is that it includes more than just paint bottles. The thinner paintbrushes that are included in this set take away the additional work of buying them separately. The paint can be easily applied on various surfaces like wood, paper, plastic, and glass.
It is advisable that you invest in a larger thinner bottle and a brush cleaner to increase the usefulness of the setas in our tests the tinner provided was used way before we were half done with the paint the kit is offering. Before applying paint to the glass ornaments, you should clean the surface with alcohol to remove the natural oils and allow the enamel to adhere firmly.
Andrew has tested this set on miniature models and dioramas, on plexiglass and glass alike, and was extremely satisfied with the quality, with his only comment being that at times more coats were required than usual. In our tests also seemed a little off, requiring even more coasts of paint than usual, but considering we are painting on translucent surfaces, that is too expected with any paint.
FolkArt ENAM8SET Enamel Paint Set - Best Value-For-Money
FolkArt is a part of the Plaid family of brands. Plaid has been one of the global leaders in the art and craft industry since 1976. The Plaid FolkArt Enamel Beginner Paint set includes eight 2oz bottles in the following colors: Wicker White, Licorice, School Bus Yellow, Pure Orange, Engine Red, Perfect Purple, Cobalt, and Hauser Green Medium.
All FolkArt enamel paint sets are made in the USA. The ENAM8SET weighs 1.65 pounds and measures 2 x 6.1 x 11 inches. The USP of the FolkArt Enamel Paint set is that it can be used on a wide array of surfaces like wood, Styrofoam, plaster, terra cotta, tin, ceramics, and glass. The paint may need a couple of coats on glass surfaces to get the desired look.
The colors apply smoothly to the surface, dry rapidly, look beautiful, and do not fade away soon. The paint can be conveniently cleaned with soap and water and are safe for the top shelf of the dishwasher. The FolkArt paint set is one of the most reasonable sets that allows you to paint on ceramics and glass and hence offers excellent value for money.
To test this out I painted glasses for my friend's party and I'm happy to report the nice assortments of paints did the job well but somehow I received a pack in which the red paint was just normal acrylic paint, not enamel paint like the rest. Now for these glasses, I didn't need that much red so it didn't ruin the experience for me, acrylic still works on glass, but this is something to keep in mind, and maybe inquire with the seller before purchasing if your project requires red enamel.
Type: Enamel Paint | Colors: 8 | Volume: 2 fl oz per bottle | Suitable Surfaces: Glass, Ceramic, Metal, Terra Cotta, Stone, Porcelain, and Resin
Martha Stewart Crafts Gloss Opaque Glass Paint in Assorted Colors - Best For Fine Detailing
Martha Stewart Crafts is a part of the Plaid family of brands. Plaid has been one of the global leaders in the art and craft industry since 1976. The Martha Stewart Crafts Glass Paint set is made in the USA and has diverse uses ranging from painting, silk-screening, and outlining on glass surfaces.
The opaque glass paint from Martha Stewart Crafts allows you to create evident gloss effects on any glass, plastic, mirror, or ceramic surface. The fine tip allows quick and easy paint application. These paints from Martha Stewart Crafts are safe for the top shelf of the dishwasher. The color is water-based, non-toxic, and weather-resistant.
Allow the paint to air dry or bake, as per the surface and your requirements. It can be easily cleaned before it dries out with a damp cloth, allowing you to rectify mistakes and redo a coat if needed. Given its weather-resistant feature, this paint can be used in outdoor applications as well which gives it an edge over similar paints in this price range.
The Martha Stewart Crafts opaque paint set includes 2-ounce bottles in a variety of colors. The paint does not leave any significant scent or fume, making it easy to use.
I've painted two mason jars, with the glitter blue variant and lupsa color and the good part is that it stuck to the jars, while the bad part is the blue is not really a solid blue but clear. This means that light will pass through the glass and creates somehow an unfinished look that is not fit for all projects, however, with a base coat, primer coat, or a lot of layers, you can achieve a solid look too.
A base coat will show on the inside of the glass while a lot of layers might be odd as the nice sparkles do have a texture and thus, the layers will be rather thick.
Overall, I would recommend going for a different set if you need the solid look, if you need a translucent glittery finish, this is your pick.
Type: Glass Paint | Colors: 12 | Volume: 2 oz per bottle | Suitable Surfaces: Glass, Ceramic, Porcelain, Metal, Terra Cotta, Stone, and Resin
DecoArt 6 Piece 1mm Brights Glass Paint Marker Set
DecoArt 6 pieces 1mm Glass Paint Markers is ideal for glass, glazed ceramic, porcelain, and metal surfaces. These paint markers can be used to personalize, draw, or outline on glass ornaments. You can even bake it in the oven for a dishwasher-safe and durable finish. It is recommended that the paint does not come in direct contact with any food items.
Each of the DecoArt Glass Paint Markers is water-based, non-toxic, and comes in a glossy, translucent finish. The paint markers have excellent adhesion and a sturdy fiber nib. The marker set includes six colors – Fuchsia, Citron, Yellow, Turquoise, Orange, and Violet. Other colors like white, red, green, blue, brown, black, silver, and gold can also be purchased individually.
To use the glass paint markers optimally, it is recommended that you shake the markers well before use and clean the surface with a glass cleaner. You need to press down gently on the tip to activate the marker and make the color appear on the surface. Ideally, you should allow the paint to air-cure for approximately eight hours. To get a dishwasher-safe finish, place the painted ornament in a cold oven and bake for 30 minutes at 325 degrees Fahrenheit.
I used these briefly in the office to create funny mugs and glasses with the nicknames of my colleagues, some of them were not amused and thus we erased them all at the end of the day. We didn't bake the mugs to get the dishwasher-safe finish but while drawing on mugs, the markers were exemplary, with really bright colors, great fine tips that allow you to create good details, and a solid marker set to paint on glasses and mugs.
Type: Paint Marker | Colors: 6 | Volume: 1mm tip | Suitable Surfaces: Glass, Porcelain, and Ceramic
Sharpie Oil-Based Paint Markers, Medium Point, Assorted Classic Colors
Since 1964, Sharpie has been a well-known brand in the arts and crafts industry. Being the world’s first pen-style permanent marker, Sharpie is a pioneer of paint markers. Sharpie’s Oil-Based Paint Markers are available in various bright colors. The markers are non-toxic, and the oil-based ink resists abrasion, fading, and water damage.
The valve-action design of the Sharpie markers guarantees smooth application on most surfaces, including metal and glass. The pens come in four versatile tip styles – bold, medium, fine, and extra fine. The 34971PP set weighs 4 ounces and measures 7.5 x 5.2 x 0.8 inches. The set includes oil-based markers in black, white, blue, yellow, and red colors.
It is recommended that before putting the markers to use the first time, place the tip to face upright and push against your finger. Recap the pen and shake it, and then press the tip on the surface several times for the paint to appear. The markers are xylene-free and non-toxic, which makes them safe for use by children too.
Sharpes require no introduction, they do the trick and they do it well, the different tip styles allowed me to experiment with the design and mix up different lines, ranging from extra fine to bold. Sharpie’s Oil-Based Paint Markers are ideal for creating designs on glass ornaments that you want to use in the long run but they're a bit more expensive than the Deco Art markers and needless to say not all projects are permanent. For crafts with kids and I'd always go for the DecoArt markers while for a more permanent mug, glass, or wine bottle centerpiece that I'd like to keep for years, I would order the Sharpies.
Type: Paint Marker | Colors: 5 | Volume: 0.5 oz per marker | Suitable Surfaces: Glass, Plastic, Metal, Ceramic, and Wood
What is the Best Paint For Glass Ornament?
Presented below is a comparison table proficiently designed to illuminate pivotal traits of the foremost paints suited for glass ornaments. The table weighs up factors such as type, colors, volume, and suitable surfaces.
Painting glass ornaments can be a fun and rewarding way to personalize your holiday decorations. With a few simple tips, you can get professional-looking results from your painted glass ornaments.
Choose the right brush
When it comes to painting glass ornaments, the right brush choice is essential. Use a brush with a fine tip that will allow you to paint intricate details without leaving any brush strokes. A brush with natural bristles is ideal, as synthetic bristles may leave streaks and brush hairs behind.
Allow ample drying time
To ensure that your painted glass ornaments last, it is important to allow them to dry completely before you move on to the next layer of paint. Depending on the type of paint you use, drying time can range from a few hours to several days, oils dry out harder while acrylics dry faster, do read the label of the paint and note that on glass, in general, all paints dry out slower, due to the perfect glass finish and lack of porosity. To ensure that your ornaments are completely dry, allow at least 24 hours before proceeding to the next step.
Use a clear sealant
To protect your painted glass ornaments, use a clear sealant such as a clear acrylic spray. This will help to protect the paint from fading and peeling and will give your ornaments a glossy finish or matte finish.
Guide to Store Glass Ornaments
Once the festival is over, the ornaments are taken off and stored safely for the next year. Here is a summary of the best ways to store your favorite glass ornaments:
Dedicated Containers
You would have thrown the original packaging of the glass ornaments most likely and could use special ornament boxes to store them. A variety of ornament boxes are available in the market, made from different materials and featuring unique designs.
DIY Containers
For those of you who are highly creative, creating a storage bin or container with readily available materials like cardboard, plastic cups, bubble wrap, and glue is the best option.
Egg Carton
To store small glass ornaments safely, an egg carton can serve as an original and effective storage space. You need to place the fragile ornaments inside the egg carton, and you may add a layer of bubble wrap or tissue for additional safety.
How do you get paint to stick to glass ornaments?
Pour 1 tsp of rubbing alcohol into the glass ball ornament. Shake the ornament, covering the opening with your finger. This will help to clean the interior surface of the ball, ensuring the paint sticks to the desired area, rinse and repeat if necessary.
How Do I Seal Paint on Glass?
You can choose to seal your glass artwork in two ways: by applying a chemical glass paint sealer or by baking it in an oven. Both options will make your artwork more durable thanks to the hard-wearing, long-lasting finish that will keep your art as new for years to come.
Can you use acrylic paint on the glass?
Acrylic paint can be used to paint on glass objects such as mirrors, vases, wine glasses, and mason jars. This is a great way to personalize these pieces; however, acrylic paint may not always adhere to glass easily, so using a primer or a base layer might come in handy.
Can I paint both the inside and outside of a glass ornament?
You can paint the outside of glass Christmas ornaments with any design you choose that showcases your artistic abilities. For a marbled effect, swirl various colors of craft paint inside the ornament.
Different color combinations and swirling methods result in unique results every time so do experiment with all options with paints that can be easily erased before sealer, or baking to find your ideal design.
How to Seal Acrylic Paint on Glass
To seal acrylic paint on glass, purchase an acrylic sealant that is suitable for glass surfaces. Opt for a glass paint sealer with a glossy finish for best results as they’re a bit more hard-wearing and long-lasting. This sealant is available in spray-on or brush-on formulas.
Thank you so much for taking the time to read our article on the best paint for glass ornaments! We hope that it has been both informative and exciting, walking you through some of the most exceptional products available in the market.
Out of these 5 exceptional paint products for glass ornaments, here are the top three expert recommendations:
Best for comprehensive starter kits: Testors 9146XT Promotional Enamel Paint Set is an ideal option that offers a variety of colors and accessories for crafting beautiful glass ornaments.
Best for value-for-money: FolkArt ENAM8SET Enamel Paint Set is a good option if you're on a budget, with its reasonable price, vibrant colors, and beautiful gloss finish.
Best for fine detailing: DecoArt 6 Piece 1mm Brights Glass Paint Marker Set is the right choice for those looking to create detailed, intricate designs on various surfaces like glass, glazed ceramic, porcelain, and metal.
As you embark on your journey to create dazzling glass ornaments, we hope our top picks help you achieve beautiful results. Remember that a little creativity, patience, and the right tools make all the difference in crafting the perfect piece. We encourage you to let your imagination run wild and have fun creating glass ornaments that reflect your personality and style. Happy painting!
The Kreg name in the woodworking industry is associated with a high-quality jig pocket hole system.
An extremely useful tool with one caveat: it can be expensive for many on a budget. So how can you get a jig pocket hole system that’s on par with a Kreg system at a lower price point? This guide will dive into this very issue and lay out what you need to be looking out for when choosing a suitable alternative.
Cheaper price points come with their own compromises to lower the cost. What then are the necessary features you should have in a pocket hole jig system?
Let us begin and find out!
Listed below are the 5 best alternatives for Kreg Jig Pocket Hole Screws:
Wolfcraft Pocket Hole Jig Kit. Made of durable nylon and glass, the Wolfcraft Pocket Hole Jig Kit provides a sturdy, lightweight jig pocket hole tool that comes with 40 screws of varying lengths, ready for creating pocket holes instantly.
General Tools Pocket Hole Jig. General Tools offers a cost-effective 850 model Pocket Hole Jig made from aluminum, which is a great performer and comes with 24 square drive self-tapping screws.
Armor Auto-Jig Pocket Hole System. Standing out for its unique features, Armor Auto-Jig Pocket Hole System offers a tool that creates invisible screws to join materials, automatically makes adjustments to the drill guide, and has screws that are easily identifiable due to a color-coded classification.
Silverline Pocket Hole Jig. Silverline offers a simple-to-use Pocket Hole Jig that provides three hole size options and screw pocket holes at a 15-degree angle, ideal for users who prefer simplicity and speed.
Big Horn Pock’It Jig. The Big Horn Pock’It Jig is a sturdy system made from solid metal that is great for moderate use and provides control over adjusting the hole depth and the angle of the drill.
Some screws can perform to their utmost potential if used in conjunction with an appropriate jig pocket hole tool. Matching a screw to the jig is a matter of considering the strengths of the jig and comparing it to the limitations of the screw.
Depending on how easy the jig is to use, the application of the screw can be a challenging task. Adjustments to angle, size of the hole and screw, and overall convenience are important factors that set jig pocket hole systems apart.
Furthermore, the flexibility of the jig tool itself can determine how effective it is in drilling into different thicknesses in materials. This flexibility refers to the versatility of adjustments that the jig can operate with. Everything from the hole type drilled to the angle and material thickness, a flexible jig can get the most performance out of a screw over a “rigid” model.
By taking into account how the screw is designed and performs, the jig can either be a great asset or a hindrance. Either way, it is essential to consider how different jigs will affect the performance of a screw based on their unique designs and features.
1. Wolfcraft Pocket Hole Jig Kit
A truly unique design choice by the Wolfcraft brand makes for a sturdy, lightweight jig pocket hole tool. It is an unbreakable, one-piece build made of nylon and mixed with glass.
The pocket hole jig kit from Wolfcraft has any and every tool you could need to get started with making pocket holes. With a starting amount of 40 screws of varying lengths, as well as a ⅜” step drill, a ⅜” stop collar, and a ⅛” hex key, you will have everything you need to make pocket holes right away.
All 40 screws included in the Wolfcraft kit is a square drive screw, similar to the Kreg screw. There are four sizes - 1”, 1 ½”, 1 ¼”, and 2 ½” screws; ten screws for every length type—a decent selection of sizes to begin making pocket holes for different material thicknesses.
This pocket hole jig kit is ideal for those who do not require any bells and whistles and want a simple tool that gets the job done. The Wolfcraft jig kit has pre-determined depths to control how deeply the screw is affixed to the material—these range from half an inch to an inch and a half.
Additionally, due to the compact size of the jig kit, it can be used in hard-to-reach spots as well. Weighing only 1.6 pounds, this jig pocket hole kit is portable while remaining functional with enough versatility to be helpful.
General Tools offers an inexpensive jig pocket hole system in their 850 models. With a primarily aluminum build, these jigs are still great performers with acceptable quality output. What’s more, General Tools includes 24 square drive self-tapping screws in the kit, similar to the Kreg screw design.
Using this jig system may not give you the best performance, but it is a good choice for those who are on a budget. Similarly, it can get you started by using screws that are similar to the Kreg design, a similar performance for a lower price.
Truly one of the more impressive advancements of a jig pocket hole system, the Armor Auto brand has pushed the envelope in woodworking engineering.
What makes the Armor Auto system shine is the ability to create invisible screws to join materials. Using a preset system that automatically makes adjustments to the drill guide, there will be no need for any manual input. Simply determine the thickness of the material to be joined, and the jig will do the rest.
In terms of the screw system on the Armor Auto-jig pocket hole model, it is phenomenal. With a color-coded classification, the screws are easily identifiable for different purposes. Determining which screw is suitable in terms of thickness and depth of the pocket hole is a much easier task using this color-coded system.
Beyond the convenience of selecting an appropriate screw, the color-coding of the screws increases the longevity of the screw. Corrosion and other elements are not able to have as strong of an effect due to the painted surface acting like a protective layer.
Other features that may be helpful in the Armor Auto-jig are the auto-changing clamp, flexible drill bit, and the number of dust collection ports. Having these extra features can go a long way when it comes to productivity and efficiency.
Material: Steel | Thickness Settings: 1/4 - 3/4"
4. Silverline Pocket Hole Jig
Expensive models of jig pocket hole systems can be overwhelming in their large number of uses and features. If a simple system that does the bare minimum well is what you need, this system from Silverline is an excellent choice.
Coming with three options for hole sizes, the Silverline system does not offer much besides getting the job done quickly and accurately. It provides a six mm, eight mm, or ten mm hole size in a small package. Additionally, the Silverline model screws pocket holes at a 15-degree angle.
Overall the build is lightweight as it has one solid body construction. While it may be a simple system to use without any bells and whistles, it is still durable and can go a distance. The materials it is constructed from are heavy-duty aluminum, ensuring a long working life.
Using any type of screw is not an issue as there are no prerequisites as to what screw is compatible or not. This opens up a world of experimentation to see which screw is the best-performing option for a project.
Due to the ease of use and portability, this Silverline model is a great starting point for casual users or those less experienced in this tool.
Material: Plastic | Thickness Settings: 6, 8 and 10 mm
5. Big Horn Pock’It Jig
Another alternative to the Kreg jig pocket hole system is the BigHorn Pock’It Jig. This model is great for those who get light to moderate use out of their jig pocket hole tool but need more control while using it.
With a solid metal design, this is a sturdy system that does not have too many extra features. Rather, the Pock’It Jig gives control over adjusting the hole depth and the angle of the drill. A stop collar determines how deep the hole will be drilled, while an adjustable drill guide controls the angle of the drill.
Included with this system are a square drive bit, a hex wrench, a ⅜” step drill, and a working clamp. Additionally, it also includes square drive pocket screws.
Material: Steel | Thickness Settings: N/A
6. MASSCA Pocket Hole Screw Jig Set
MASSCA is a fierce competitor when it comes to pocket hole systems. It is a popular choice for many woodworkers due to its budget-friendly price and highly efficient setup. Exceptional performance in areas such as safety, ease of use, speed, and efficiency, makes this system stand out from other alternatives.
It is recommended to use this jig with materials of thickness ranging from ½” to 1 ½”. A magnetic clamp will keep the board secure while also automatically gauging its thickness. The MASSCA system also has an adjustable drill depth setting which is intuitive and straightforward.
Pairing this system with MASSCA’s own jig pocket hole screws will give an outstanding performance in repair or joint work. All the features of the pocket hole screw jig set, with the performance of the specially designed screws, work in harmony to create a seamless joint.
What is the Best Alternative for Kreg Jig Pocket Hole Screws?
Below is a comparison table, proficiently structured to elucidate the fundamental characteristics of the top alternatives for Kreg Jig pocket hole screws. Careful comparison of attributes like the material used and their suitability to various thickness settings has been undertaken.
There are a number of screws that can replace a Kreg model with enough shared characteristics to act in place of the Kreg screw adequately. These come at a number of price points and build qualities to save you from spending a fortune.
If using a Kreg jig pocket hole is not in your plans, there is a workaround method you can try. This method is known as a mortise and tenon joint and does not require any screws at all. However, this method requires more practice to get down.
The mortise and tenon joint takes time to complete as it is highly technical and can be challenging to master. As a result, it is not a widely used method by many woodworkers due to the convenience that a jig tool brings. On the other hand, this joint provides a stronger hold than pocket holes.
Another excellent method to finding a suitable replacement screw is simple trial and error. Buying a few screws from different manufacturers and brands can help you decide what you like or what doesn’t work. However, this can be time-consuming and add up in cost if you don’t know what to look out for in an alternative screw.
If there is absolutely no way to avoid purchasing Kreg screws, compare different outlets as the pricing may range between them. Additionally, bulk buying the Kreg screws can save you money in the long run.
However, if an alternative screw is what you are looking for, several options are available that can work well with the Kreg jig pocket hole tool. These alternatives have the necessary characteristics, along with some of their own, to match a Kreg jig pocket hole screw.
These screws are likely the most recommended alternative to using a Kreg jig pocket hole screw. It shares almost every important characteristic required in the Kreg screw.
The CSH Pan-head screw, as evident from its name, has a pan-head style head. This design is similar to the washer head style of the Kreg screw. The Pan-head design has a flat underside that will keep the screw securely fastened and keep it from sinking.
Additionally, the CSH screw also has a crucial self-tapping design in the tip. This is one of the essential characteristics of the Kreg screw as it allows for a clean and smooth drilling process.
Purchasing these screws can save you lots of money as they come at a fair price. They can be bought in packs of 500 or individually at about four cents a screw—a great alternative to the expensive Kreg screw for its similar functionality and price.
A zinc-coated screw from SNUG, this screw has enough shared characteristics with a Kreg screw to be a candidate for a replacement. The zinc coating and slightly longer length set it apart from a Kreg screw.
For the characteristics that are shared with a Kreg screw, the SNUG screw has a self-tapping head and a square head bit. The self-tapping tip keeps it from slipping too deep into the wood, and the square head bit affords extra torque when drilling.
If you are looking to replace not just the Kreg screws but the entire assembly as well, Massca may be a suitable choice for you. Massca has its own line of pocket hole screws that are priced lower, with their own pocket hole jigs to match.
Selling their screws by 1,000 in a set, Massca gives a large volume as well as options for screws. The set comes with two types of screws for working on different projects and materials. These screws are either a finely threaded screw for hardwoods or a coarsely threaded screw for softwood.
Finely threaded screws have the ability to have a much tighter grip on the wood as the space between threads bites into the surrounding recess better. On the other hand, coarsely threaded screws have more space between the threads. This spacing keeps the screw from splitting the fibers of the wood too much and causing damage or splitting.
To get the most savings out of an alternative screw option, buying in bulk is a good idea. The Quick Screw line sells alternative jig pocket hole screws in large quantities for an affordable price.
As for their compatibility with a Kreg jig pocket hole, they share the characteristics of the self-tapping and square-head bit, similar to the Kreg screw. Both of these characteristics are essential to achieve a similar quality work result than using the genuine Kreg screw.
However, these screws are not zinc-coated, unlike the other alternative screws. This compromise means the Quick Screw alternative loses some resistance to corrosion and strength.
These screws are ideal for those who are using a jig pocket hole tool extensively for a project. Quick Screw advertises their screws as being an alternative screw option that is compatible with any jig tool—as such, purchasing the Quick Screw bulk package is a great option to stock up on jig pocket hole screws for large projects.
Strengths Of The Pocket Hole Jig System
To establish an idea of what features a pocket hole jig needs, the basic understanding of what it does should be made clear. It is essentially the go-to tool for joining materials and creating high-quality joints.
With the way the pocket hole jig system is designed, it is easy to access tight spaces where other joining techniques would fail. The drill bit is pushed through the holes on the pocket hole jig to create perfect, level joining points. These can then be used to connect the material to another surface having the corresponding recess to hold the screws.
It is a rigid, portable tool that can accurately produce the same result if used correctly. This consistency is what makes the pocket hole jig so great, especially for intricate projects that demand precision.
The jig can be adjusted to achieve variations in angles or when working at different angles and tight spaces. A simple adjustment saves you the time and effort in calculating the angles of the hole. The jig will adjust according to the angle and width of the board.
Additionally, when using a pocket hole jig system, the ability to make repairs or interchange pieces at the joints is easy. This is as compared to using traditional methods, which are more permanent once joined.
It is never a bad idea to have a pocket hole jig tool handy in your woodworking shop.
Types Of Pocket Hole Jigs
Pocket hole jigs vary based on their price points and quality. The price tag of the jig is directly related to the quality of the performance of the pocket hole jig. Higher-priced tools are usually superior in quality with a better build and output.
Among the pocket hole jigs available, the models from Kreg are widely used for their top-notch performance. However, as they are a top-of-the-line model, they are also priced accordingly. This can make it inaccessible to those who have a limited budget.
On the other hand, purchasing a lower-priced model is by no means a complete loss. There is simply a lower-quality performance output that is still acceptable.
Differences in the build quality of the jig itself are another different characteristic between an expensive and cheaper jig pocket hole model. Some may have a durable, metallic build, while others consist of some plastic components.
Additionally, expensive jigs occasionally have unique features that can help boost the efficiency of the tool. Performance, as well as convenience, take a significant boost with these top-of-the-line models.
If it is possible to purchase a high-quality jig pocket hole, then it is an excellent investment that will pay for itself in no time.
Using A Kreg Jig Pocket Hole
The advantage of using a high-quality jig pocket hole tool from Kreg is how well the screws are held in place. Rather than a straight insertion of the screw through the grain of the wood, the jig inserts the screws along the grain at an angle.
In order to use the Kreg jig, simply use the clamp to secure the board to the jig. It will adjust the angle of the holes according to the width of the board. A helpful feature in the Kreg jig tool is the ability to use integrated slots in order to make them exactly sized recesses.
Now, a common inconvenience faced by Kreg pocket hole jig owners is in the screws used for the tool. They have unique screws that their jigs are designed to accommodate. This means screws that are not similar to the Kreg screw model will not perform as well as using an original Kreg screw.
As a result, finding a cheaper pocket hole screw model for the Kreg model can save a lot of money. But it will not be a suitable replacement option if there are not enough similar characteristics between the alternative screw model and the Kreg model.
What Makes A Kreg Pocket Hole Screw Unique?
In order to find the best replacement screw possible, there are specific characteristics of the Kreg model that should be matched. If the screw has matching characteristics, then it is a suitable replacement for the Kreg model.
Square Head Bit
Kreg screws have a unique recess for the pocket hole that is squared off. Also called a “Roberts” head screw, the shape of this recess increases the overall grip of the screw without stripping it.
This square recess in the head is not a required characteristic of a replacement screw; however, it can help to secure it better. Using a replacement screw that has a traditional Phillips head or other types of recession can make drilling it difficult and cause slippage.
Self-Tapping Screw
An essential feature that a replacement screw should have is ‘self-tapping.’ A self-tapping screw means it can put threads into the recess to keep it securely fit.
When drilling into a material, the drill makes a space that hides the head of the screw. The self-tapping screw will fill up this space with its threads that hold it in place. A small section at the head will dig into the space created by the drill to keep it in place.
Washer Head
Kreg jig pocket hole screws have a washer head style, which is a fundamental characteristic to match on the replacement model. A washer head-style screw has what appears to be a washer attached underneath the head of the screw.
What makes these washer head screws so unique and a necessary characteristic for the Kreg pocket hole jigs? When drilling the screw into the material, it is pushed deep into the surface. This is due to the design of the washer head, which will dig into the material to be flush against the surface.
Other benefits of using a washer head screw come in the future-proofing of the screw itself. Having the head of the screw flush increases the strength of its grip on the material. Any necessary repairs are possible as the head is accessible; it has not sunk too deep into the hole.
Another benefit of the washer head is the control that is afforded in how deeply it pierces the material. If it is drilled too deeply, it can be retrieved because the washer acts as an anchor. Additionally, the washer can protect the wood grain from being split and damaged. Controlling the screw’s depth can prevent it from going too far into the wood and damaging the fibers.
Choosing An Alternative Jig Pocket Hole System
In order to choose an alternative to the expensive Kreg jig pocket hole system, keep in mind the different strengths and weaknesses of models. A screw’s grip is only as good as the system that embeds it in the first place.
Different manufacturers have designed their systems to give a balance between quality and an affordable price. As such, different models have various combinations of strengths and weaknesses.
Choosing the right jig pocket hole system is just a matter of prioritizing what you would like in a system. Keep in mind some points to select a suitable combination for you.
Build Quality
The jig pocket hole system should have a strong build for a better quality result. There is a correlation between the system’s build quality and the performance you’ll get.
Having a system that can go the distance is highly preferred over one that will break down after only a few months of use. Looking into the materials that the system is made with can save you money in buying a replacement at a later date.
For example, a full-metal body will be able to stand multiple uses for a longer time compared to one with a simple plastic body. If the jig pocket hole is a tool that you can see working with a lot in the future, invest in a sturdily built one now to save money in the future.
Experience
Using a jig pocket hole screw can be a different experience depending on how familiar you are with the tools. A novice, for example, may not be experienced enough to take full advantage of the features of a complicated system. On the other hand, a professional will be able to utilize the system to its full potential.
Choosing a system that matches your experience with the range of tools involved is a good route to go. However, if you plan on using the tool extensively or need a system with advanced features, a complex system is a great choice.
Additionally, in order to get the most out of a jig pocket hole, look for a model that has numerous adjustments to angles, material thicknesses, and different drilling hole types. This range of options can help you get a variety of work done, no matter the project.
Many jig pocket hole models have an included guide or manual that details the various functions the tool has. Going through these instructions is a great idea to use the jig pocket hole to its utmost potential if you are unfamiliar with the features.
Maintenance
Simple systems are easier to maintain as the number of moving parts is less than complicated builds. Time spent cleaning the dust and debris as well as the jig pocket hole system varies on the level of maintenance required.
On the other hand, more complex jig pocket hole models typically have a dust collection system built into them. This can save time in cleaning the system and the dust and debris around the workplace by keeping it in one, easily disposable bag.
Sizing
Depending on the size of the workshop, the real estate tools can be a valuable resource. Smaller-sized systems can give you a different quality result as compared to a larger model.
Stability is not too much of an issue as the jig pocket hole can easily secure itself to the material. As such, this gives you the freedom to have a portable system if needed. Not many features will be compromised if you choose a smaller system over a larger one.
If a permanent setup in your main workshop is what you are looking for, you can invest in a system with many helpful extra features. On the other hand, smaller systems can give you a satisfactory result while maintaining their portability and ease of use.
Where can a pocket hole be placed with the best result?
Pocket holes act as invisible connections between two pieces of wood. As such, to keep the joint between two surfaces clean, it should be used on surfaces that are not immediately visible.
Utilizing a pocket hole on a surface with complete visibility can destroy the effect of a clean joint. This choice to keep the pocket hole hidden away is purely for aesthetic purposes. If having a pristine surface is not an issue for you, then it does not matter where the hole is placed.
Using plugs or painting over the pocket hole is a great way to maintain the illusion of a seamless connection. This can come in handy when it is difficult to hide the pocket hole or if it is in an awkward position to drill a pocket hole.
What is the most robust connection to join boards?
Woodworking has many different styles of joints that have their own level of strength and skill attached to them. What would be the best joint to use to have the most secure fit between boards?
Some common joints used are the pocket hole, dowel, or mortise and tenon joints. Dowel joints can vary in their strength depending on the number of dowels used in the joint. Using four dowels in place of two can increase the joint’s strength significantly.
A mortise and tenon joint is one of the strongest joints in woodworking. It is twice as strong as a pocket hole joint. Comparatively, a dowel joint is only 1.5 times stronger than a pocket hole joint. To achieve the same strength as a mortise and tenon joint, four dowels would be needed instead of the standard two.
That is not to say that the pocket hole is a weak joint by any means. It is still durable and sturdy enough to handle many loads. In fact, it is possible for the pocket hole joint to be stronger than a mortise and tenon joint.
In a study conducted, the pocket hole joint was able to withstand a trim load of 707 pounds. Meanwhile, the mortise and tenon joint only lasted 453 pounds before breaking. The strength of a joint is dependent on many factors, but using a pocket hole joint remains an excellent option for hidden joints.
What is the smallest board thickness that is compatible with a Kreg pocket hole jig?
Kreg jig pocket hole systems come with a guide specifically when working with smaller board thicknesses. The Micro-Pocket Drill Guide ensures the pocket hole won’t pierce through the entire board.
Additionally, applying a layer of instant glue to the hole after drilling is a helpful step to take. This instant glue, when dried, makes the rim of the hole harder. A more rigid rim will help keep the screw securely fastened.
A Kreg jig pocket hole is definitely a great tool to have for working in any woodworking shop, especially for projects with precise joints like furniture. However, the high pricing of the Kreg system makes looking for an alternative screw a necessary route to take if you want to save money.
Selecting the right screw for your project is simply a matter of finding a suitable screw with enough similarities to a Kreg screw that meet your needs. Keep in mind these qualities to find the best replacement: self-tapping, square-drive screw with a washer head.
Mixing and matching these characteristics with others in the replacement screw can help you get the most out of your Kreg system without breaking the bank.
Drawing manga is one of the most challenging and rewarding experiences for an artist.
If you are not familiar with manga, it is the comic book version of Japanese anime. So why should you take up drawing manga?
The Japanese manga market is already worth billions of dollars today, while international markets are seeing a steady rise in the popularity of manga comics. Now is as good a time as ever for manga enthusiasts and beginners to take it up professionally.
Having the right drawing books can help you overcome the somewhat steep learning curve of this art form.
We have shortlisted 21 books that will help you learn everything you need to know to get started with this exciting and immensely creative art form.
Without further ado, let’s get straight to our top recommendations for Manga drawing books today.
Listed below are the 5 best manga drawing books to help hone your skills and create stunning manga artwork:
The Master Guide to Drawing Anime. Authored by best-selling artist Christopher Hart, The Master Guide to Drawing Anime provides valuable insight into drawing six popular anime-type characters, offering detailed illustrations and exercises that allow readers of all ages and skill levels to create original characters.
Manga for the Beginner. Another gem from Christopher Hart, Manga for the Beginner is an ideal resource for novices who can hold a pencil and wish to start drawing manga, providing comprehensive information extending beyond the basics to cover special effects, perspective, dynamic action poses, light, and shading.
Mastering Manga with Mark Crilley. Crafted by popular YouTube art instructor and graphic novelist Mark Crilley, Mastering Manga with Mark Crilley is best-suited for individuals with a basic understanding of manga art, offering extensive content on drawing figures, faces, hands, eyes, and more, along with advanced lessons on inking and layout options.
How to Draw Manga: Mastering Manga Drawings. How to Draw Manga: Mastering Manga Drawings by Andrew Harnes is a comprehensive guide providing insights into the fundamentals of manga art starting from materials to use and character drawings from different angles, available at affordable prices and suited for drawing fantastic manga illustrations quickly.
Basic Anatomy for the Manga Artist. Christopher Hart's Basic Anatomy for the Manga Artist makes anatomical features of manga characters easy to understand, offering step-by-step illustrations, anatomical information, and before-after comparisons to grasp the unique aesthetics of Japanese characters in manga.
Here is the list of the 21 best manga drawing books to help you hone your skills and create stunning manga artwork.
1. The Master Guide to Drawing Anime - Best for Character Creation
Christopher Hart is a bestselling how-to-draw author who is well-known amongst Manga artists. It is only fair that the numero uno spot on our recommendations list should be one of his books. It is the first book in a series of three; you will find the other two books as well on this list.
This book gives you valuable insight into drawing six popular anime-type characters – schoolboys, schoolgirls, preteens, humorous personalities, fantasy figures, and vengeful bad guys. We especially like the thoughtful inclusion of templates along with a diverse range of options for head, body, accessories, and outfits for each of these six characters.
The detailed, step-by-step illustrations and exercises will ensure that you can create original characters by the time you finish this book. Irrespective of your age and manga skill level, you can learn something from this book. And did we mention that it has exceptional print quality too?
Format: Paperback | Author: Christopher Hart | Publisher: Drawing with Christopher Hart | Edition: Illustrated Edition | Publication Date: July 7, 2015 | No. of Pages: 144 | Dimensions: 9" x 0.5" x 10" | Weight: 1.2lbs | Other Format/s: Kindle
2. Manga for the Beginner - Best for Absolute Beginners
The next manga drawing book we want to recommend comes from Christopher Hart again. As the name suggests, it is a book that has been specially designed for beginners. If you can hold a pencil, you can start drawing manga with the help of this book.
The author uses his signature style involving step-by-step illustrations and instructions to explain how to draw the basic body, head, eyes, hair, and more. It is a comprehensive book consisting of 192 pages of everything you need to know to begin your manga journey.
Unlike other books for manga beginners, it goes a step further beyond the basics by covering special effects, perspective, dynamic action poses, light, and shading. You will get an overall understanding of what goes into creating excellent manga art. Moreover, you get to explore some popular types of manga characters, including anthros, animals, shoujo, and shounen.
It is available in paperback, library binding, and Kindle versions.
Format: Paperback | Author: Christopher Hart | Publisher: Watson-Guptill | Edition: First Edition | Publication Date: August 5, 2008 | No. of Pages: 192 | Dimensions: 8.5" x 0.52" x 10" | Weight: 1.56lbs | Other Format/s: Spiral-Bound, Kindle
3. Mastering Manga with Mark Crilley - Best for Intermediate Artists
Mark Crilley is one of YouTube’s most renowned art instructors and graphic novelists. This drawing book will work best for people who have a basic understanding of manga art. It can help you create original webcomics or graphic novels.
It contains 30 step-by-step illustrations and detailed instructions about drawing figures and faces for various ages and types of bodies. You will not run out of content anytime soon as it features a comprehensive gallery. It consists of 50 ways to draw hands, 101 eyes, 12 common expressions, 40 hairstyles, 30 classic poses, and so on.
If that wasn’t enough, you could even find some advanced lessons in this book dealing with inking, backgrounds, layout options, and sequencing. We especially liked the easy-to-follow tutorials for creating several realistic settings.
This book is available in paperback as well as Kindle versions. You can rest assured that your manga skills will improve significantly with it.
Format: Paperback | Author: Mark Crilley | Publisher: IMPACT Books | Edition: N/A | Publication Date: March 8, 2012 | No. of Pages: 128 | Dimensions: 8.29" x 0.31" x 10.86" | Weight: 1.1lbs | Other Format/s: Kindle
4. How to Draw Manga: Mastering Manga Drawings - Best for Fundamentals
Andrew Harnes has written this book as a comprehensive guide for all things manga! At 90 pages, it is one of the shortest books included in our recommendations list. It consists of over 90 colorful drawings and hand-held, step-by-step illustrations with instructions.
You should get this book if you want to understand the fundamentals of manga art, starting from the materials to use and going to the process of drawing characters from different angles. There are specific chapters that focus on various aspects like eyes, hair, nose, ears, and facial expressions. The author goes on to explain different character poses and actions.
With the help of the information in this book, you can learn to draw fantastic manga illustrations in a negligible time. It was published in 2015 and is available in paperback and Kindle versions at affordable prices.
Format: Kindle | Author: Andrew Harnes | Publisher: N/A | Edition: N/A | Publication Date: May 26, 2015 | No. of Pages: 91 (Print Length) | Dimensions: N/A | Weight: N/A | Other Format/s: Paperback
5. Basic Anatomy for the Manga Artist - Best for Anatomical Understanding
We are down to our fifth recommendation, and it is another book from Christopher Hart (the third time’s a charm). If you have compared American comics to manga, you would have probably noticed that the faces of manga characters are quite different. But did you know that the bodies of those characters are also different?
As it turns out, they are. Who better than Christopher Hart to break it down for you? In this book, you get easy-to-follow, step-by-step illustrations and instructions, anatomical information and charts, and before-after comparisons. All this will help you understand the unique aesthetics of Japanese characters in the manga.
Perfecting the anatomical features of manga characters cannot happen overnight. This book does not have all the information you can find on anatomy but includes enough
content in its 160 pages to get you started. It is available in Kindle and paperback versions.
Format: Paperback | Author: Christopher Hart | Publisher: Watson-Guptill | Edition: N/A | Publication Date: June 21, 2011 | No. of Pages: 160 | Dimensions: 8.53" x 0.45" x 10.88" | Weight: 1.43lbs | Other Format/s: Kindle
6. The Manga Artist’s Workbook
The Manga Artist’s Workbook is an easy-to-understand book for anybody interested in manga. It will help you perceive the fundamentals of manga characters, including the face, figure, eyes, hairstyles, and costumes. By the time you are done with this book, you will be able to create unique manga characters.
Unlike the majority of drawing books on this list, it is a complete workbook of 160 pages consisting of grid lines and tracing paper. The purpose of this book is to get you to practice and perfect each lesson. It comes with detailed instructions that ensure a sufficient learning experience for you.
We especially liked its small size, which makes it easy to carry and will allow you to draw on the go. It is available in paperback and spiral-bound versions. And did we mention that the supremely talented Christopher Hart has written this book?
Format: Spiral-Bound | Author: Christopher Hart | Publisher: Potter Style | Edition: Illustrated Edition | Publication Date: October 13, 2009 | No. of Pages: 160 | Dimensions: 7.78" x 0.6" x 6" | Weight: 0.68lbs | Other Format/s: N/A
7. Beginner’s Guide to Creating Manga Art
3DTotal offers some excellent books. It would be impossible to complete our list of recommended manga drawing books without including their Beginner’s Guide to Creating Manga Art. This book contains the work of various artists, including industry legends like Steven Cummings and Gonzalo Ordoñez.
As this book is written by various authors, each being an established artist, you get an exciting array of techniques, perspectives, and lessons. It is a comprehensive book containing 240 pages of tutorials covering anatomy, features, clothing, expressions, poses, and more. You can also learn how to color characters using traditional as well as digital tools.
We recommend this book to beginners and hobbyists who want to get an overview of all the different aspects of manga art. If you are an expert who is looking for a book that deals with one of the elements in detail, you should check out the other recommendations on this list.
Format: Paperback | Author: Steven Cummings, Gonzalo Ordoñez | Publisher: 3DTotal Publishing | Edition: SLP Edition | Publication Date: April 2, 2013 | No. of Pages: 240 | Dimensions: 12" x 0.5" x 8.5" | Weight: 2.09lbs | Other Format/s: N/A
8. Drawing Manga Characters and Scenes from Start to Finish
Mina Petrovic is a famous YouTube artist, more commonly known as “Mistiqarts.” She has authored an excellent manga book for beginners titled “Manga Crash Course.” This book promises to teach you all you need to know to start drawing manga.
It contains over 25 step-by-step examples to help you create each body part of the characters. You will have adequate material with more than 130 lessons covering poses, accessories, clothing, facial anatomy, emotions, and hairstyles. This book is carefully designed to start with simple techniques and steadily progress to more challenging lessons.
We especially liked the included character invention game as it helps readers create unique manga stories and characters. This crash course for manga drawing consists of 128 pages. It was published in 2015 and is available in Kindle and paperback versions.
Format: Paperback | Author: Mina Petrovic | Publisher: IMPACT Books | Edition: Illustrated Edition | Publication Date: March 11, 2015 | No. of Pages: 128 | Dimensions: 8.3" x 0.3" x 10.8" | Weight: 1.05lbs | Other Format/s: Kindle
9. Drawing Manga Characters and Scenes from Start to Finish
If you are looking for a practical guide to anime and manga-style art for beginners, you should get this excellent book written by Li Shen. It is a short book consisting of 60 pages only. You can choose to get it as a paperback or Kindle version, as per your convenience.
What sold this book to us are its easy-to-follow lessons. You can use this book even if you have zero experience in manga-style drawing. In fact, even if you have never tried drawing anything at all, you can still use this book. So it is a “Practical Guide for Beginners,” in every sense of the phrase.
You can learn to draw a handsome boy (Bishonen) or a lovely girl (Bishojo) with the help of illustrations and step-by-step instructions. It is a perfect starting guide for anybody interested in getting into drawing unusual, original manga characters.
Format: Kindle | Author: Li Shen | Publisher: N/A | Edition: N/A | Publication Date: March 3, 2016 | No. of Pages: N/A | Dimensions: N/A | Weight: N/A | Other Format/s: Paperback
10. The Master Guide to Drawing Anime: Amazing Girls
As a follow-up to the book that bagged the first rank on our recommendations list, Christopher Hart’s “The Master Guide to Drawing Anime: Amazing Girls” was published in 2017. Unlike the first book in the Master Guide series, this one deals specifically with drawing female anime characters.
With this book, you will learn to draw manga heroines, fantasy characters, and schoolgirls. The book is thoughtfully divided into basic templates and tutorials. The templates will help you draw body proportions, head, clothing, hairstyle, and so on for your female characters. The tutorials will allow you to create entire scenes and master the art of manga.
This book has 144 pages of rich manga content for you to enjoy. It is available in a paperback version only. This book is better suited for people who have a basic understanding of manga art rather than absolute beginners.
Format: Paperback | Author: Christopher Hart | Publisher: Drawing with Christopher Hart | Edition: Illustrated Edition | Publication Date: November 7, 2017 | No. of Pages: 144 | Dimensions: 9" x 0.5" x 10" | Weight: 1.15lbs | Other Format/s: N/A
11. The Master Guide to Drawing Anime: Tips & Tricks
It’s time for the third book in the Master Guide series by Christopher Hart. It was published in 2022 and is available in a paperback version only. Irrespective of whether you are a beginner or an established artist in the manga field, you can learn a lot from this book.
The author delves into each aspect of manga art, especially the specifics of drawing anime scenes and characters. You will learn the secrets of a complete picture with the help of some topics that are rarely covered by manga artists. We especially liked the new tutorials that deal with drawing feet and hands in several gestures.
Being the final book in the series, it seems like the perfect last stroke on a piece of art. Christopher Hart has discussed more than 100 essential techniques in 144 pages to help you hone your manga drawing skills.
Format: Paperback | Author: Christopher Hart | Publisher: Drawing with Christopher Hart | Edition: Illustrated Edition | Publication Date: September 4, 2018 | No. of Pages: 144 | Dimensions: 9" x 0.55" x 10" | Weight: 1.15lbs | Other Format/s: Kindle
12. Mastering Manga 2: Level Up with Mark Crilley
Mark Crilley’s “Mastering Manga” was such a resounding success with manga artists that its follow-up was inevitable. The second part of the Mastering Manga series not only lives up to but also exceeds the standard set by its predecessor.
Irrespective of your skill level, you can learn a lot from this book. It contains over 30 step-by-step illustrations to help you draw manga art like a pro in no time. This book has lessons covering various aspects of manga such as proportion, clothing, body language, environments, useful poses, and the anatomy of a manga panel.
We especially liked the thoughtful inclusion of lessons on perspective and background, which will help you create entire manga scenes. This book has 128 pages of top-notch, easy-to-follow lessons and instructions. It is available in Kindle and paperback versions.
Format: Paperback | Author: Mark Crilley | Publisher: IMPACT Books | Edition: N/A | Publication Date: October 23, 2013 | No. of Pages: 128 | Dimensions: 8.29" x 0.35" x 10.83" | Weight: 1.04lbs | Other Format/s: Kindle
13. Draw Manga Faces for Expressive Characters: Learn to Draw More Than 900 Faces
This next book is hands down the most comprehensive guide to learning how to draw manga faces. Author Hosoi Aya has included over 900 sample illustrations in this book to ensure that you gain a good understanding of the key elements to capture emotions and facial expressions.
This book is capable of making you a pro at drawing manga faces. And seeing how that is an area where new artists tend to struggle the most, we had to include it on this list. We especially liked the way this book deals with positive expressions and negative expressions separately in dedicated chapters.
You can use this book to draw basic as well as specific manga character faces with immense ease. It has 176 pages of fun content for you and is available in a paperback version only.
Format: Paperback | Author: Hosoi Aya | Publisher: IMPACT Books | Edition: N/A | Publication Date: January 8, 2015 | No. of Pages: 176 | Dimensions: 8.3" x 0.5" x 10.9" | Weight: 1.5lbs | Other Format/s: N/A
14. The Go-To Guide for Drawing Stylish Outfits and Characters
If you want a book to help you improve specific skills for drawing characters and stylish outfits, go for Christopher Hart’s “The Manga Fashion Bible.” The author goes into full-on “manga chic” mode in this book to explain the unique fashion style of Japanese characters.
What sets this book apart is its dedicated troubleshooting guide dealing with grey areas that often confuse beginners. From drawing patterned fabrics to capturing folds and creases on clothing, this book simplifies it all. You get a glimpse of traditional outfits worn by classic manga characters as well as the newest fashion trends.
One hundred forty-four pages of exciting manga content are sure to keep you hooked. This book was published in 2016 and is available in a paperback version only. It does justice to its name - “Fashion Bible” – by covering fashion trends and styles for all kinds of characters and all seasons.
Format: Paperback | Author: Christopher Hart | Publisher: Drawing with Christopher Hart | Edition: Illustrated Edition | Publication Date: November 1, 2016 | No. of Pages: 144 | Dimensions: 8.5" x 0.25" x 11" | Weight: 1.25lbs | Other Format/s: N/A
15. Manga Art: Inspiration and Techniques from an Expert Illustrator
After the Mastering Manga series, Mark Crilley got “Manga Art” in 2017. This book is a bit different from the others we have shortlisted today, in the sense that it is meant to inspire and motivate budding manga artists.
You will get access to more than one hundred never-before-seen, original pieces of artwork created by the author. Chapters include the artworks with a list of the materials used and a summary of the inspiration behind them. The author has used various materials to create these artworks, including colored pencils, pens, pencils, ink, and digital tools.
Mark Crilley wants the readers to understand that the possibilities are endless when it comes to manga. This exceptional book has 176 pages of stunning manga art. It is available in both paperback and Kindle versions.
Format: Paperback | Author: Mark Crilley | Publisher: Watson-Guptill | Edition: Illustrated Edition | Publication Date: June 6, 2017 | No. of Pages: 176 | Dimensions: 8.7" x 0.6" x 10" | Weight: 1.6lbs | Other Format/s: Kindle
16. Manga in Theory and Practice: The Craft of Creating Manga
The next recommendation we have is a bit different from the others, in the sense that it is not a hardcore drawing book. Hirohiko Araki, the author of fan-favorite “JoJo’s Bizarre Adventure,” has shared the craft of creating manga through this book.
If you haven’t heard of JoJo’s Bizarre Adventure, it is one of the most popular and longest-running manga yet. You are guaranteed to benefit from the concrete examples of his work included in this book. There can be no better way to learn manga than going through lessons penned down by one of the industry legends!
If you are a fan of Hirohiko’s work, you will get more than a glimpse of how he creates manga, including his famous “golden ratio” for drawing. It is a detailed guide consisting of 280 pages covering a plethora of manga-related information. You can buy this book in either Kindle or hardcover version.
Format: Hardcover | Author: Hirohiko Araki | Publisher: VIZ Media LLC | Edition: Illustrated Edition | Publication Date: June 13, 2017 | No. of Pages: 280 | Dimensions: 5.75" x 1" x 8.25" | Weight: 0.91lbs | Other Format/s: Kindle
17. How to Draw Manga Chibis & Cute Critters
Manga art should not be restricted only to adults. For all the tweenagers out there who are interested in manga, Samantha Whitten’s “How to Draw Manga Chibis & Cute Critters” is an excellent book. Manga chibis and critters attract people of all ages, thanks to their soft squishy cheeks and big sparkling eyes.
This book consists of thoughtfully designed, step-by-step projects that will teach you to draw a furry bunny, a panda cub, a chibi princess, and a ninja. You also get instructions about ways to add color with watercolors or markers. We especially liked the chapter that explains how to “chibify” any person or animal.
This book contains 128 pages that have handy templates and fun practice exercises. It was published in 2012 and is available in a paperback version only.
Format: Kindle | Author: Samantha Whitten | Publisher: Walter Foster Publishing | Edition: N/A | Publication Date: August 1, 2012 | No. of Pages: 128 (Print Length) | Dimensions: N/A | Weight: N/A | Other Format/s: Paperback
18. Manga for the Beginner: Midnight Monsters
By now, you know that Christopher Hart is one of the best manga artists and the bestselling author of many manga drawing books. Here is another fabulous book that bears his name. “The Manga for the Beginner: Midnight Monsters” is the ideal book for people who are intrigued by the occult and want to draw dark manga characters.
This book is full of expert tips to help you draw vampires, zombies, Goths, werewolves, sorcerers, witches, and other dark, mischievous creatures. Unlike most of our other recommendations, this one caters to a specific part of manga art that may not appeal to everybody.
If you like spooky creatures and want to learn how to draw them in manga style, this book will not disappoint you. You can choose to get either the Kindle or the paperback version of this book. It consists of 176 pages of bone-chilling fun!
Format: Paperback | Author: Christopher Hart | Publisher: Watson-Guptill | Edition: N/A | Publication Date: September 3, 2013 | No. of Pages: 176 | Dimensions: 8.55" x 0.5" x 10" | Weight: 1.46lbs | Other Format/s: Kindle
19. Pop Manga: How to Draw the Coolest, Cutest Characters, Animals, Mascots, and More
If you are a fan of shoujo manga (a wide-eyed, beautiful girl) and want to learn how to draw it, you should get the “Pop Manga.” It is a stunning book co-written by Camilla d’Errico and Stephen W. Martin. Camilla is an expert when it comes to shoujo manga, and she has revealed the techniques she uses for creating her characters, which have become fan favorites.
This book is written in a simple yet effective way to ensure that you learn in the best possible way. You will find easy-to-follow lessons on how to draw basic body features, capture the action, create animals, and much more.
It serves as a comprehensive guide for anybody interested in shoujo manga. It consists of 192 pages of fun content you do not want to miss. You can get it in Kindle and paperback versions.
Format: Paperback | Author: Camilla d'Errico, Stephen W. Martin | Publisher: Watson-Guptill | Edition: Illustrated Edition | Publication Date: October 8, 2013 | No. of Pages: 192 | Dimensions: 8.54" x 0.5" x 10" | Weight: 1.59lbs | Other Format/s: Spiral-Bound, Kindle
20. Kids Draw Big Book of Everything Manga
The penultimate recommendation we have for you is yet another book from renowned artist Christopher Hart. It is one of the most comprehensive books on this list, having 256 pages of manga content. It was published in 2009 by Watson-Guptill as a collection of Hart’s four best-selling kids drawing books.
Manga is extremely popular with kids, and this book is meant for them. Young artists will have the time of their lives with this book. Clear steps and instructions are included for each character drawing, so kids will not face any problems following along.
Seeing how much content this book has, its affordable price makes it a must-buy for your kids. You can get its Kindle version for less than ten bucks, while the paperback version costs around 18 dollars.
Format: Paperback | Author: Christopher Hart | Publisher: Watson-Guptill | Edition: N/A | Publication Date: February 3, 2009 | No. of Pages: 256 | Dimensions: 8.52" x 0.74" x 11" | Weight: 2.28lbs | Other Format/s: Kindle
21. Drawing Manga Animals, Chibis, and Other Adorable Creatures
The final book in this comprehensive list deals with some of the most loved aspects of manga. If you want to learn how to draw animals, chibis, and other cute creatures, this is the ideal choice for you. We recommend this book to anybody who wants to master chibi art.
It is probably the only book on this list that works well with kids as well as adults. It has 160 pages worth of fun lessons having step-by-step instructions that will guide you through the process of drawing eyes, faces, and entire animals and chibis.
As good as this book is, it does not cater to beginners looking for overall manga guidance. As it deals with chibi art specifically, only a niche audience will benefit from it.
Format: Kindle | Author: J.C. Amberlyn | Publisher: Watson-Guptill | Edition: Original Edition | Publication Date: February 20, 2013 | No. of Pages: 160 (Print Length) | Dimensions: N/A | Weight: N/A | Other Format/s: Paperback
What is the Best Manga Drawing Book?
Laid out below is a comparison table expertly crafted to bring forth crucial elements of the reigning manga drawing books. The table analyzes details such as the format, author, publisher, edition, publication date, number of pages, dimensions, weight, and availability in other formats.
How helpful are the step-by-step examples and illustrations for learning to draw manga characters?
Step-by-step examples and illustrations in manga drawing books are designed to provide clear and precise explanations and guidance for learners. These examples make it easier for beginners to understand the process and replicate the illustrations, learning and improving their manga-drawing skills.
What is a good book for beginners to start drawing manga?
“Manga for the Beginner” by Christopher Hart is an excellent book for those who are stepping into the world of manga drawing. It offers step-by-step instructions and covers everything from the basic body, head, eyes, hair, special effects, perspective, action poses, light, and shading.
Can I learn manga techniques from different artists in one single book?
In “Beginner’s Guide to Creating Manga Art,” 3DTotal Publishing has compiled the work of various accomplished artists. It offers an exciting array of techniques, perspectives, and lessons, giving readers a broader view of manga art.
Which book can help me learn to draw female manga characters specifically?
“The Master Guide to Drawing Anime: Amazing Girls” by Christopher Hart is an excellent choice for those interested in drawing female manga characters. This follow-up book to “The Master Guide to Drawing Anime” focuses on drawing manga heroines, fantasy characters, and schoolgirls.
Which book will help me create original manga characters?
“The Master Guide to Drawing Anime” by Christopher Hart is a great option for learning to draw original manga characters. It includes extensive details about drawing different character archetypes, offering diverse and customizable heads, bodies, accessories, and outfits for each type.
After diving deep into the world of manga, we've seen a wealth of resources and techniques for artists of all skill levels to hone their craft. Choosing the best manga book might seem daunting, but with careful consideration for skill level, personal preferences, and dedication to practice, anyone can find the perfect fit for their artistic needs.
From the above 21 best manga books, here are the top three expert recommendations:
For those who want to create original, captivating characters, The Master Guide to Drawing Anime by Christopher Hart is an ideal option with its diverse range of templates, accessories, and outfits for various anime archetypes.
If you're a true novice in the world of manga art, Manga for the Beginner is a good option. Also written by Christopher Hart, this book covers everything from basic head and body proportions to special effects and perspective.
When looking to advance your skills further, Mastering Manga with Mark Crilley is the right choice, as it delves into more complex topics such as inking, backgrounds, and layout options.
With these expert recommendations in hand, there is no limit to the creativity and skill that can be achieved through practice and dedication to the art of manga. Dare to unleash your artistic potential and immerse yourself in the extraordinary universe of manga artistry.
We often use cardboard for DIY projects and other artistic endeavors, and we often need glue to stick it together.
Children, especially, need to get crafty for school projects, and they need a good adhesive for that purpose. But how does one decide which is the best glue for cardboard? There are many adhesives available, but it is a tough job to decide which is the best one.
It is pretty frustrating to get gluethat isn’t effective, and since cardboard is a little thicker than most materials, you need strong glue for it. This is why we have prepared this review of the best adhesive available for cardboard online, so read on to know more!
Listed below are the best glues for cardboard:
Adtech: The Adtech glue is highly efficient with a tensile strength of 377 PSI and cures in less than 30 seconds. Its safety is assured by being non-toxic but its strong odor could be overpowering compared to odorless variants.
Books By Hand: A polyvinyl acetate-based adhesive that is solvent-free, acid-free, and water-soluble, rendering it eco-friendly and non-hazardous. Weak bonding with metal and unclear water-thinning instructions are a drawback.
Aleene 17843: Aleene 17843 glue offers 50% faster binding in comparison to its rivals and maintains color stability. Its flexibility ensures no thickening around the joints and its non-toxic nature makes it suitable even for children. Difficulties in squeezing the glue through the tip might lead to wastage.
Lineco: This permanent PVA adhesive ensures a clear and transparent finish on drying and it remains flexible with excellent lay-flat properties. It's acid and solvent-free. Glue solidification is an issue.
Elmer E461: The Elmer E461 glue is designed primarily for school and light work. It offers a strong, wet tack suitable for porous and semi-porous surfaces. It dries clear and is easily cleaned up with water. Incompatibility with hard surfaces like metal limits its versatility compared to Adtech.
1. Adtech - Best for Fast-acting Bonding
Another highly-rated product, this glue works very well with cardboard and other light materials. This is perfect for any craft or DIY project where a strong bond and less curing time are required. It is locally manufactured in a quality-controlled environment and is perfect for a multitude of uses.
We like how this product comes in the form of a hot glue stick that can be used with pretty much any full-size glue gun. It is fast-acting and can form strong bonds in less than 30 seconds, which lets you get back to your work as soon as possible.
This glue can bond together wood, plastics, PVC, polycarbonate, and even aluminum. Another remarkable thing about this product is that it is crystal clear once applied. This means that you can read through it, and it won’t leave any color.
Moreover, it is essential for a glue that may be used by a younger age demographic to be non-hazardous. And the Adtech 220-115-5 is non-toxic and safe for people of all ages to use.
What’s more, it has a tensile strength of 377 PSI and is resistant to reasonably high temperatures, which makes it a winner in our book!
Though this product excels in terms of performance, we did notice some scope for improvement. It emits an unmissable, strong smell that can get a bit overpowering when using it. We believe that resolving this odor problem would improve the product even more.
The following product on our list is the adhesive from Books By Hand, a quality product that can be used with various materials. Books by Hand is one of the best businesses in the field of crafts and other art supplies and makes art supplies that are intuitive to their customers’ needs.
One of our favorite features of this product is that it is soluble in water. This implies that it can be mixed with water to thin it out, extending its drying time. This, however, does not compromise on its efficiency, and its tensile strength remains unchanged.
Furthermore, the adhesive is solvent and acid-free and is made of polyvinyl acetate. This indicates that it is environmentally friendly, non-hazardous, and suitable for people of all ages to use.
Most glues tend to lose their strength over time and need constant re-application, but the Books By Hand BBHM217 doesn’t grow brittle with time. It is additionally fast-drying and clear and leaves no color once it dries. According to us, it also adheres to most porous surfaces and is a great choice.
Even though it is compatible with most materials, we noticed that it wasn’t as effective with metal. It wouldn’t stick properly and needed a lot of quantity to stick things together.
Additionally, thinning the glue can also be tricky because there isn’t any clarity on how much water will extend its binding time.
What We Like
Can be mixed with water to extend its drying time
Eco-friendly
Non-hazardous
Fast-drying
Doesn’t grow brittle with time
What We Don’t Like
Doesn’t work as well with metals
No clarity on the amount of water needed for thinning
This adhesive from Aleene is ideal for people who use adhesive generously and need it to dry super fast. Hence, this glue is a hot-selling product and is well-known among artists who need fast-acting tacky glue for their work. Moreover, it is pretty affordable and measures 8 ounces.
One of the key highlights of this product is that it binds 50% faster than some of its competitors in the market, which is why it's always in high demand. Another reason for its soaring popularity is that it maintains its color even after a long passage of time and doesn’t yellow with age.
Another major point in its favor is its superior flexibility, which ensures that there’s no thickening around the joints. We also like how the adhesive is non-toxic and suitable for adults and children alike to use.
Efficient and multipurpose, this glue is great for use with crafts, art projects, and other DIY endeavors. It can bind materials like wood and plastic in addition to cardboard and takes only 30 seconds to dry.
We liked pretty much everything about this product, but we also felt that there were some things that the manufacturer could work upon. The tip of the container isn’t very conducive to squeezing the glue, which makes it hard to pour. This, unfortunately, leads to occasional wastage, and a brush is needed to bypass the issue.
What We Like
Multipurpose
Fast-drying
Doesn’t yellow with time
Flexible
Non-toxic
What We Don’t Like
Difficult to squeeze glue through the tip
Type: Tacky Glue | Drying Time: 30 min | pH level: 4 | Available Sizes (oz): 4, 8 | Waterproof: No | Heat Resistance: No | Non-Toxic: Yes | Solvent-Free: Yes | Acid-Free: Yes
4. Lineco
Lineco is a reputed company that is well-known for making multipurpose and efficient adhesives. You can use it for various purposes and a wide array of projects, including DIY art and craft and even office work and filing. Overall, the Lineco LIN-901-1008 has many features that make it a bestseller online.
This is a permanent PVA adhesive that doesn’t leave any color once it dries. We believe that a transparent finish is vital in an adhesive because an odd splotch of color on a piece of art looks out of place. In addition to this, it remains flexible even upon drying and has excellent lay-flat properties.
The manufacturers have also buffered the adhesive to add an extra layer of protection. These features ensure that the adhesive works effectively and that artists maintain their aesthetic standards.
Interestingly, the glue doesn’t wear out or becomes brittle with age. It remains just as strong after years and ensures that any project stands the test of time. We also like how the glue is acid and solvent-free and can be used with materials other than cardboard, for instance, wood.
Lineco is known for making quality products that are widely used and well-appreciated by artists. However, when we received the package, we saw that the glue inside was solidified and refused to come out from the nozzle. It’s unclear whether this was a one-off defect, but we do believe that the manufacturers should take note of this.
Next is the Elmer E461, a multipurpose glue packaged in an 8-ounce bottle that is ideal for home decor projects, holiday decorations, and handmade gifts. Elmer’s glue can be used for sticking together cardboard and other materials like light wood and paper.
This locally manufactured glue is an excellent product with a strong, wet tack and can be used for various projects. You can use it to stick photos into an album, and it is sure to last long and not weaken over time.
Another thing we like about it is that it is clear and transparent once it dries. This means that using it doesn’t ruin the look of your DIY project. In addition to that, it is convenient to use as it doesn't run, and is excellent for porous and semi-porous surfaces,
According to us, this glue is ideal for dry indoor use because it can be easily cleaned up with water. You can even use it with fabrics if you've got a blow-dryer with a cold setting on hand!
As we mentioned, this product is great for use with cardboard and paper. But it isn’t as versatile as some of the other options on the list and is incompatible with metal.
Note that the product was designed keeping school and other light-duty work in mind, and thus it isn’t strong enough to bind metal.
What We Like
Multipurpose
Easy to clean with water
Non-toxic
Clear and transparent
What We Don’t Like
Incompatible with metal and other hard surfaces
Type: School Glue | Drying Time: 30 min | pH level: 7 | Available Sizes (oz): 4, 7.625, 128 | Waterproof: No | Heat Resistance: No | Non-Toxic: Yes | Solvent-Free: Yes | Acid-Free: Yes
6. Gorilla
Gorilla is a well-known adhesive brand, and it makes glue for a variety of projects. This Gorilla glue can bind not just cardboard but also paper, foam board, fabric, and some light plastic, making it ideal for school use. Since it is marketed toward young children, it does not contain any hazardous substances, and thus, is safe for use.
The last entry on our list is the Gorilla 274201, which weighs 8 ounces and can bond with various materials. Paper, wood, cardstock, felt- you name it, and the glue can work with it. It can also be used to glue cardboard to sequins and glitter, which makes it ideal for craftwork.
One of the key highlights of this product is that it dries clear and doesn’t leave any color behind. This means that the transparent finish makes it easy to read words and see any designs on the surface.
We also like how the adhesive has a thick consistency, which doesn’t create a mess. Interestingly, the glue is easy to extract and can be done through a convenient anti-clog nozzle.
What’s more, it can even be used to make slime, which is a plus for people of a younger demographic.
Though the glue is perfect for cardboard and other basic materials, it dries slower than its competitors. This means that it takes longer to complete a project because not waiting long enough would lead to the materials not sticking properly.
What We Like
Dries clear
No mess formula
Non-toxic
Ideal and safe for children
What We Don’t Like
Dries slowly
Type: School Glue | Drying Time: 10-15 min | pH level: 7 | Available Sizes (oz): 4, 9 | Waterproof: Yes | Heat Resistance: No | Non-Toxic: Yes | Solvent-Free: Yes | Acid-Free: Yes
What is the Best Glue for Cardboard?
If you're in pursuit of the best glue for cardboard then the table below compares the type, drying time in hours/minutes/seconds, available sizes, waterproof properties, heat resistance, and whether they are non-toxic, solvent-free, and acid-free.
We believe that two major points must be kept in mind while buying cardboard glue. These are:
1. Kind of Glue
There are different adhesive types, such as tacky glue, PVA, etc. PVA glue is a water-based resin glue, and tacky glue is super-thick and sticks to surfaces easily. We also have spray adhesives that cover large areas and are usually not too precise for application.
However, when it comes to cardboard, we believe that PVA is the best kind of adhesive, and thus, we recommend the Lineco LIN-901-1008.
2. Method of Application
The glue can be applied on the surface in a variety of ways. It can be sprayed using a spray top, applied using a hot glue gun, or simply squeezed out through a nozzle. However, a nozzle provides the most accurate application, and hence we recommend the Gorilla 2754201.
Can I use hot glue on cardboard?
Yes, generally you can use hot glue on cardboard, although its effectiveness may depend on the specific application. While hot glue provides quick bonding, it may not withstand moisture or high temperatures over time. For stronger and more durable results, consider alternative options such as PVA glue or a two-part epoxy.
What type of glue is best for cardboard boxes?
The best type of glue for cardboard boxes is white PVA glue (polyvinyl acetate). Its strong bonding capabilities and ability to dry clear make it highly suitable for securing cardboard flaps and creating solid, durable bonds. When applied correctly, this type of glue provides reliable adhesion for various cardboard applications.
Can I use wood glue on cardboard?
You can use wood glue on cardboard in certain applications, although it might not be the most suitable choice. PVA glue is generally a better option for bonding cardboard as it is easier to work with and dries clear.
How do I glue cardboard to paper?
To glue cardboard to paper, apply a thin layer of PVA glue or use a glue stick. Press the cardboard firmly onto the paper, ensuring there are no air bubbles or wrinkles. Let the glue dry completely before handling the project for best results.
Can I use super glue on cardboard?
Yes, you can use super glue on cardboard as it creates a strong bond and dries quickly. That being said, it may not be the best choice for all applications as it can become brittle over time and may not withstand stress. Alternatives like PVA glue or a two-part epoxy may offer more flexibility and durability for bonding cardboard.
Can I use a spray adhesive on cardboard?
Yes, you can use a spray adhesive on cardboard. It is a suitable option for larger projects requiring ample adhesive, thanks to its easy application and even coating. Keep in mind that for smaller or detailed projects, controlling spray adhesive may be challenging, making it less ideal in such cases.
From the list of 6 best glues for cardboard, here are the top three expert recommendations:
For a fast-acting glue, Adtech is the ideal choice. Its crystal-clear finish and versatility make it perfect for a range of crafting needs.
Meanwhile, if you're looking for an eco-friendly, non-hazardous glue that doesn't become brittle over time, consider Books By Hand. Its PVA formula is buffered for extra protection and adheres well to most porous surfaces.
Lastly, if you need an all-purpose glue that is safe for even the youngest crafters and ideal for basic materials, Gorilla Kids School Glue is a great option. With a thick consistency to minimize mess and a clean dry finish, it's perfect for school projects, crafts, and more.
Choose the glue that fits your needs and complete your project without worry.
Cattle herding and rearing is a challenge that tests even the best farmers. When looking from afar, cattle and livestock may present a very calm and obedient demeanor; however, the reality of the situation is different.
Regardless of the benefits farm animals bring to their owners, handling them requires great patience and new techniques. The stubborn nature of the cattle animals and the fear of prowling predators need special attention. Ignoring these factors can put you in a very dicey situation—you, as a livestock owner, will have to negate both the threat of a strike and the aggressive attitude of your animals.
Given the significance of cattle rearing and the sensitivity that is involved in it, it is imperative to take the aid of tools for controlling the livestock’s movement. Cattle prods prompt your stubborn herd to move so you can protect them and yourself from wild animals which makes the job a lot easier.
However, of the various types of cattle prods available today, not all are designed for every kind of situation. This is why we have compiled a list of the five best cattle prods; to further assist you in forming an opinion, we will also highlight the best uses of each cattle prod. Before we begin an elaborate review, here is an overview of the five best cattle prods.
Listed below are the 5 best cattle prods from our list:
Miller Hotshot DX36 - Best Cattle Prod. The Miller Hotshot DX36 is a superior quality cattle prod, boasting design expertise from a company with over 70 years of experience in the livestock industry, featuring high-end components, impressive protection, and a 36-inch fiberglass shaft.
Magrath Livestock Prod - Best Budget Cattle Prod. The Magrath Livestock Prod merges market familiarity and affordability to create the top-budget cattle prod, offering a 22-inch shaft, insulated handle, rubber trigger, and a potent 5.5kV shock.
West Thorne Pro Cattle Prod - Strongest Cattle Prod. The West Thorne Pro Cattle Prod, built with professionals in mind, is recognised for its robust shock strength, sealed handle, and motor, along with its sizeable 41-inch shaft made of fiberglass.
SHZICMY Animal Electric Prod Hot Shock. Notably designed with both the animal and user in mind, the SHZICMY Animal Electric Prod Hot Shock is acknowledged for its premium build, gentleness on animals, easy handling, and versatile application, including training guard dogs.
Parker McRory S29 Stock Prod. The Parker McRory S29, an economic choice for close-quarter use, stands out for its groundbreaking "Instant On Technology," fully enclosed circuitry for enhanced safety, impressive energy efficiency, and budget-friendly price point.
Here is the list of the 5 best cattle prods that you can use to safely and effectively herd your livestock.
1. Miller Hotshot DX36 - Best Cattle Prod
Of all the cattle prods available today, the Miller Hotshot/Duraprod DX36 stands out. The purposes for which this cattle prod is used may not match your requirements but the quality and the state-of-the-art design make the Miller Duraprod DX36 stand above the other cattle prods.
With over 70 years of experience in the livestock industry, the Miller Manufacturing Company is well aware of the needs of the cattle industry today. Having expertise in the industry has led to the company dominating to the point where it faces no or little competition today.
Top Tier Components
One needs to understand that, in the cattle prod market, products are often sold as separate interchangeable pieces. Like all other industries, the big companies in the cattle prod industry are responsible for creating this trend, leaving other smaller businesses with no option other than to follow suit.
Therefore, it is more likely that a Miller component is connected to a competitor’s product than the other way around.
Protected
After assessing all the other products and the mechanics behind the production of cattle prods, we can safely say that using a handle as good as the one used in Miller Hot-Shot DX36 is very unlikely.
The built-in safety switch and the rubber grip provide ideal insulation in addition to ensuring that you don't accidentally shock yourself when using the product.
As livestock farmers, we all encounter an animal that is aggressive and difficult to deal with, a slight ping on the backside from a close distance may put them off, forcing them to react rather aggressively. The Duraprod DX36 covers this aspect with the presence of a 36-inch fiberglass shaft that provides you with enough length and stiffness; this makes the bad-tempered livestock think twice before pushing through.
2. Magrath Livestock Prod - Best Budget Cattle Prod
Although not the oldest company on our list, Springer Magrath has focused on providing products exclusively for animal care since its inception. With an experience spanning over half a century, Springer Magrath pays special attention to commercial and agricultural markets.
The exclusive nature of its products and the target market allowed the company to rise through the ranks. However, it is one of many companies acquired by Miller Mfg Co.
The takeover has not led to a decline in the standard of the products as Miller has experience and expertise in the cattle and livestock industry which is second to none. Magrath products are now better than before due to their success in keeping production costs lower than ever.
Although many ranchers may consider that the Magrath Prod is not worthy of being considered as one of the best cattle prods, the low price and the ideal specifications make it the best budget cattle prod.
Care and Diligence
The Magrath cattle prod is ideal only for experienced users. A short and flexible shaft means that the user will have to get close to the animal. While this may unsettle an inexperienced user, a person using cattle prods for quite some time now will be unfazed when using the Magrath Livestock Prod.
Close Shaves
The particular model of the Magrath Livestock Prod is not rechargeable but the included handle does have an add-on accessory that is rechargeable. Its rubber trigger and insulted grip save you from accidental shocks and given the powerful shock the product possesses, these features become a must-have for the Magrath Livestock Prod.
Additionally, given the short nature of the shaft, it is very likely that you’ll end up in close proximity of an irate animal. To ensure that the animal does not harm you if you wander off too close, the product makes up with having an electric shock as powerful as 5500 Kv.
3. West Thorne Pro Cattle Prod -Strongest Cattle Prod
Next up is the West Thorne Pro Cattle Prod. The fact that professional ranchers were already pleased with the performance of this cattle prod only means that it is a top-tier tool to effectively herd livestock.
However, of all the products made by West Thorne Pro, this one stands out in particular as their best offering. The extra features that the product possesses, predominantly due to its rechargeable nature, make it one of the best.
Impressive
As the name suggests, the West Thorne Pro Cattle Prod is there to provide an incredibly powerful jolt to animals. It is the only cattle prod that commercial truckers and hog producers can use—such is the significance of the product.
Made of stiff Fiberglass, the 41-inch shaft is the primary reason for the immense popularity the product has amongst users. In addition to ensuring that you are safe from the cattle prod itself, the large shaft also provides you a safe distance from the animal.
Self Defense
Similar to all other cattle prods, the West Thorne Pro Cattle Prod also prioritizes your safety and security. A safety clip that sits over the Trigger prevents any accidental shocks. Additionally, the permanent sealing of both the motor and the handle prevents any debris from getting inside.
The West Thorne Pro Cattle Prod also comes with a rechargeable battery pack, which ensures that you don't have to keep paying for batteries while using the product.
The SHZICMY Animal Electric Prod Hot Shock is a product crafted with the intent to keep the animals' and users' needs in mind. Constructed with top-notch engineering plastic, this livestock prod provides an enduring and efficient solution for managing and training farm animals without causing any harm.
Premium Build & Gentle
Built from high-grade engineering plastic, the SHZICMY Animal Electric Prod Hot Shock possesses exceptional electrical insulation properties, rigidity, and strength. This material guarantees that the prod is suitable for diverse applications and provides long-lasting service.
One of the most distinguishing features of this livestock prod is its ability to be both gentle and effective. While being useful for guiding the animals, it ensures they are not hurt, placing their well-being at the forefront. This combination of efficiency and gentleness makes it particularly appealing to farmers and livestock handlers.
Versatile & Easy to Use
The SHZICMY prod is versatile, as it can be utilized on cattle, goats, sheep, pigs, and even for training guard dogs. This multipurpose implement can be employed for efficient herding, catching, and training, establishing itself as an indispensable instrument for those in charge of livestock.
The updated version comes with a non-slip grip, offering both a safer and more accessible user experience than previous models, and benefits from an extended lifespan. This enhancement ensures that the user's experience remains optimal while managing their animals.
What We Like
No need for users to stoop while using it
Efficient at herding, catching, and regulating livestock movements
Enhanced version offers increased safety and effectiveness
Gentle, prioritizing animal welfare
Composed of superior-quality engineering plastic
Long-lasting, easy to handle, and budget-friendly
Compatible with cattle, dogs, pigs, sheep, and goats
For folks in the market for an economical cattle prod, one alternative presents itself quite prominently - the Parker McRory S29. This 29" cattle prod is designed for close-quarter use, particularly in chute-loading scenarios. Distinguished by its lack of moving parts and fully enclosed circuitry, the S29 combats unforeseen shocks and prevents water ingress quite commendably.
Cutting Edge
What stands out about the S29 is its groundbreaking "Instant On Technology." This feature ensures immediate electric discharges without requiring any sort of preparatory time. The Parker McRory cattle prod also boasts impressive energy efficiency, running seamlessly just off of 2 C batteries.
The relative lack of complexity in its design, coupled with a minimal number of parts, adds to the appeal of the S29. Its enclosed circuitry lends an additional layer of protection against accidental shocks and water damage.
Budget Friendliness
One cannot overlook the economic aspect of the S29. Its price point is nearly half of what other similar cattle prods in the market demand, validating its place as a stellar Budget Buy option.
What We Like
Economical choice
Fully-enclosed circuitry for enhanced safety
Instant-On tech for immediate shocks
Powered by just 2 C batteries
What We Don't Like
Suboptimal build quality leads to potential durability issues
Presented below is a comparison table aimed at illuminating the primary characteristics of the leading cattle prods available. It evaluates each product based on the material of the shaft, the length of the shaft, and its weight.
Considering the fact that a single manufacturer is responsible for producing the majority of the cattle prods today, there is less diversity in the cattle prod industry. The lack of diversity makes the models more or less the same and the differences between the various models are generally less than other sectors.
To help you figure out which cattle prod suits your needs, we have identified the materials that play a significant role.
The following buyer’s guide provides you an insight into these materials and guides you on ways you can assess whether the cattle prods are meaningful for the purpose you need them for.
Fiberglass
Made of an industrial-grade plastic base with glass fibers woven through them, fiberglass resembles plastic more than glass. The composition of plastic and fiberglass adds a much-needed stiffness to the product while not limiting its flexibility of the product in any way.
For all ranchers, the flexibility of the cattle prod is a must but the non-durable nature of fiberglass, especially during the winter season, limits the amount of flexibility.
Steel
Analyzing the modern cattle prod, it is fair to assume that steel, due to its conductive nature, is used either for the leads or as part of the frame. However, in reality, the steel is used to reinforce the shaft of flexible cattle prods.
The molecular structure of steel makes it more flexible than glass, creating an ideal amount of durability and flexibility in the shaft.
Rubber
This is another material that you expect in a cattle prod. Rubber serves as the insulator that protects the user from getting shocked accidentally.
Additionally, rubber is also used in combination with steel threads to provide flexibility while being durable for sticking onto your livestock.
However, the one thing that you need to be wary about rubbers is the organic nature of the product. This means that if you don’t protect the rubber and maintain it, there is a high chance that the rubber will start eroding.
ABS
Probably one of the best and most durable forms of plastic, ABS is the same material used in Lego building blocks. It is also used by NASA for research. In addition to not being affected by whatever you throw at it, ABS is also incredibly durable.
ABS is one of the significant components of cattle prods. In addition to the materials mentioned here, this plastic type is a regular feature in almost all cattle prods. The durable and resistant nature of ABS makes it an excellent cover for handles, saving them from accumulating all sorts of dirt and debris.
Copper
Another material found in almost every brand, copper is easily the least-used material in a cattle prod. Being one of the most conductive metals in the world is the only reason to include copper in a cattle prod.
Used primarily in the prod's contact base that transfers the charge, copper is alloyed with other metals in less reputable cattle prods. The mixture causes contact points to wear out quicker due to the flow of electric charge, resulting in a less effective cattle prod.
Rod
Considered an essential component of a cattle prod, the rod gives the user the space for safely prompting stubborn livestock. The contact is what drives the herd but it is the distance that allows you the space for issuing a warning to the cattle.
Many experienced ranchers claim that the use of electric current will annoy an already angry animal; this makes maintaining a safe distance from the animal even more important. There is also much discussion among ranchers about stiff rods, and flexible rods, and choosing one over the other. We feel that both the cattle prod types have their advantages and disadvantages but your use of the cattle prod type should depend on how aggressive your animals are.
The Debate on Stiff vs. Flexible
The cattle prod type preferred by you is heavily dependent on the kind of animals you have. Although flexible shafts are less likely to break, they don't give you the option of training your animal since it does not present a mental impediment.
With the use of a stiff shaft, you can time the shock properly training your animal on the actions that lead to the shock. The fear of impending electric shock will cause the animals to avoid circumstances that lead to it, convincing them to move or stop when desired.
In addition to having low chances of breaking down, flexible shafts are also less expensive considering that they are generally made of rubber and not fiberglass which is used in stiffer shafts.
Length
The length of the shaft is something that depends on your comfort level in dealing with an aggressive animal. If you are confident and have full faith in your abilities then a short shaft will also do the job for you. If you don't feel comfortable controlling an agitated animal from a close distance, then you need a rod with a considerable distance on it.
A person who is reasonably confident about their ability to control the livestock can do with a short shaft of around 2 inches. However, as a user, it is imperative to understand the limitations of using the product as well since there are not many short shafts that can support its weight.
The logic of shaft collapsing under its weight is true for rods over a length of 3 inches as shifts that are stiff or made of fiberglass run the risk of snapping and collapsing under their weight when used for long periods.
What are cattle prods used for?
Cattle prods are electric tools used to train and move cattle by delivering a shock or stimulating sensation. Cattle prods are usually composed of a metal shaft with a handle at one end and an electric current-emitting tip at the other.
The electric current is typically delivered in short, sharp pulses to get the animal’s attention, encouraging it to move in a desired direction, commonly to encourage animals to move through gates or onto trucks.
Can you use a cattle prod underwater?
Cattle prods are not designed to be used underwater because the electrical current could be dangerous to humans and animals in the water. Additionally, the electric shock generated by a cattle prod could be amplified and magnified due to its conductive properties in the water, resulting in a potentially greater shock to the cattle.
Do cattle prods make noise?
Yes, cattle prods typically make a buzzing or crackling noise when activated, the buzzing or crackling noise is meant to startle the animals and help direct them in the desired direction. The noise is usually loud enough to be heard by the person using the cattle prod and the cattle, after training the noise will be sufficient to encourage the movement of cattle.
How long is a cattle pod?
Cattle prods typically range from 18 to 24 inches in length. The length of the prod varies depending on the size and type of cattle being moved, with larger prods typically being used for larger animals.
Choosing the great cattle prod today is not an easy task. As mentioned before, the vast array of products available having little to no variety further complicates the problem. However, given the specific details discussed above, you can assess and choose the best cattle prod that suits your needs ideally.
Of all the products mentioned above, we have already nominated the clear favorite – Miller HOT-SHOT DX36. The flagship product of one of the premier manufacturers of cattle prods, HOT-SHOT DX36 has all the right features and components, providing users with the best handles and the best shafts in the industry. The delicate balance of price and service also adds in favor of the product, making it our best cattle prod.
However, if you are thinking of something different and need an option that has less impact on your pocket, then the Magrath Livestock Product is ideal. If you are someone who wants a distance from the livestock and is not afraid of spending more, then West Thorne Pro is what you are looking for.
This guide on the best cattle prods today and the significant components that play a critical role in making them the best will make your life easier for sure, don't you think?
We would love to hear from you in the comment section below!
The Midea Window Air Conditioner stands out due to its high efficiency and cooling capacity. Meanwhile, the hOmeLabs Window Air Conditioner is a close second and a functional alternative to the Midea AC unit with its noiseless operation and instant cooling.
With summer fast approaching, everybody is on the lookout for a functional solution to stay cool. And the answer is window air conditioners, as they are a cost-effective way to cool your home efficiently.
We’ve got you covered because mentioned below are 15 5,000 BTU window air conditioners that can make hot summer days more bearable.
These are the five best 5,000 BTU Air Conditioners on our list:
Midea Window Air Conditioner. Midea Air Conditioner, with its 5,000 BTU cooling capacity, is an energy-efficient and compact option equipped with seven temperature controls and a mesh filter offering superior air quality.
hOmeLabs Window Air Conditioner. hOmeLabs Air Conditioner is designed for larger cooling requirements, providing quick temperature dispersion in a room and two-way air direction control for better flexibility.
GE Window Air Conditioner. GE Window Air Conditioner is built for instantaneous cooling of small rooms and features an easy-install kit, offering ten different temperature settings and two-way adjustable louvers for effective air direction control.
Frigidaire Window Air Conditioner. Known for its energy efficiency, Frigidaire Air Conditioner also provides a programmable timer for automation and comes with a washable filter to improve air quality and a remote control for easy operation.
Emerson Quiet Kool Window Air Conditioner. Emerson Quiet Kool Window Air Conditioner is ideal for those in need of quiet cooling solutions, offering four cooling modes, eight-way adjustability for better airflow control, and a 24-hour timer with sleep mode for quieter operation at night.
1. Best For Temperature Control - Midea Window Air Conditioner
What I Like
Energy-efficient
Compact size
Easy installation
7 temperature controls
Ideal for smaller rooms
What I Don’t Like
Does not have a remote control
Midea Window air conditioner is a great air conditioner available on the market. With a 5,000 BTU (British Thermal Units) cooling capacity, this best 5,000 BTU air conditioner can cool a 150 square feet room effortlessly. Hence, if you need to cool a small living room or office space, this device is ideal.
Furthermore, the Midea air conditioner consists of 7 different temperature controls. So, depending on the weather or ambiance, you can personalize the temperature accordingly. The device also comprises 2 degrees of fan speed which is plenty to cool a room that is small.
On a colder day, instead of using the cooling feature, you can use the fan on its own. This way, your room temperature stays regulated, and you can stay comfortable. The air conditioner also features a mesh filter that is specifically designed to capture particles in the air and minimize room odor. This filter also reduces the bacteria buildup within the air conditioner, thus improving the overall air quality in your home. Additionally, if you’re worried about the unit's filter becoming dirty with time, you can simply remove it from the device and clean it.
If you are someone who tries to be sustainable, this product falls right under that category. This is because the product has a CEER (Combined Energy Efficiency Rate) of 11.0. Apart from minimizing the chances of an expensive energy bill, the Midea air conditioner is also environmentally friendly.
Installation is pretty easy and the product comes with all the needed mounting accessories. Typically, it fits a window sill that is 23-26 inches wide and 13 inches high, which is a standard measurement.
Noise level: 57 dB | Energy Star Certified: Yes | SEER: 11 | Special Features: Dust filter, Instant cooling, 7 temperature settings
2. Best Two-Way Direction Control - hOmeLabs Window Air Conditioner
What I Like
Washable filter
Long power cable
Noiseless functioning
Instant cooling
Energy-efficient
What I Don’t Like
Weighs more than the average 5000 BTU AC units
If you’re on the lookout for a more heavy-duty air conditioner, the hOmelabs window AC unit with 5,000 BTU is the one for you. It can cool a room that is 150 square feet in no time, be it a living room, dorm room, or office space.
Conveniently, the device comes with additional items such as filters, leaf guards, window seal foam, non-drip installation, and support brackets. You also receive an extra long power cord that is 6 feet, which can be plugged into an electric outlet to power the device. Be sure not to plug the power cable into an extension cord to avoid safety hazards.
Furthermore, the hOmeLabs air conditioner comes with 7 temperature controls that provide the user with immense cooling power and flexibility. To quicken the cooling process, two-way air direction control and adjustable fan speed settings are included. These features enable the AC unit to dissipate cool air across a room within 15 minutes or less. Though heavy-duty, the air conditioner is generally quiet and does not cause a lot of noise when used.
The air filter in the device can be removed and cleaned using water and dish soap or a handheld vacuum cleaner. This helps prolong the life of the filter as well as the air conditioner in general and enables optimal cooling.
Installation may take more than one person, but it is a fairly simple process. The air conditioner fits windows measuring 23-26 inches wide and a minimum of 13 inches high.
Noise level: 60 dB | Energy Star Certified: No | SEER: 10 | Special Features: Energy-efficient, Washable filters, Quiet functioning
3. Best For Easy Installation - GE Window Air Conditioner
What I Like
Low noise operation
Easy installation
Washable filters
Effective cooling power
Included installation kit
What I Don’t Like
No remote control included
The GE 5,000 BTU air conditioner is the best window air conditioner that can instantly cool any room size of 150 square feet. To make the installation process easier, the product comes with an easy-install kit. So, you can enjoy the cooling power and effects right away. Much like other 5,000 BTU AC units, the GE window air conditioner is ideal for cooling smaller rooms as opposed to larger ones. And you don’t have to worry about the fit as it installs effortlessly on various double-hung windows.
Furthermore, this air conditioner can be used at any time of the day thanks to its silent nature. This low-noise operation mechanism allows you to use the device at night without being disturbed by its sound.
The air conditioner features two cooling modes and a fan speed, which is sufficient for cooling power in a small room. Additionally, the temperature can be personalized according to your needs and comes with ten different settings. To adjust the temperature, cooling modes, and fan speed, you can easily make use of the mechanical dial on the device. To further enhance the functionality, the device comprises two-way adjustable louvers which allow you to control the direction of cool air.
The air filter can be removed from the air conditioner and cleaned. When the filter is cleaned every month, it prolongs the lifespan of the device and minimizes any chance of expensive repairs. As for the power cord, you will receive a standard three-prong plug that can be plugged into an electric outlet.
Noise level: 56 dB | Energy Star Certified: Yes | SEER: 2.6 | Special Features: Easy installation, Slide-out washable filters, Noiseless functioning
4. Best Energy-efficient AC - Frigidaire Window Air Conditioner
What I Like
Adjustable side panels
Energy savings
Remote control
Extra-long power cord
Energy Star Verified
What I Don’t Like
Hard-to-read display
The Frigidaire Window ACs are one of the most energy-efficient devices on the market. They use much less energy when compared to conventional air conditioners and ultimately lower your energy bills. The 5,000 BTU air conditioner is designed to fit any window effortlessly and the adjustable side panels further ensure that.
Additionally, you don’t have to depend on extension cords for connecting the device to an outlet. It comes with an extra-long power cable and a three-pronged plug that can be connected to a standard electric outlet.
A feature of the device that stands out is customizability. The air conditioner is equipped with a programmable timer that can be set for 24 hours. You can also automate it by setting increments, following which the device will automatically start cooling.
The Frigidaire air conditioners are designed to regulate the preset temperature of the room and enable you to stay comfortable always. Unlike its predecessor on this list, this air conditioner comes with a remote control that can be used to change the device settings, modes, and fan speed. This way, you can lay back and relax without having to get up and change the settings manually.
The 5,000 BTU air conditioner also comprises a washable air filter that can be detached from the machine to be cleaned. Since the filter captures all the dust from the air, cleaning it once a month can improve the quality of airflow. Additionally, proper maintenance can lengthen the lifespan of the product and save you from unnecessary repair costs.
Noise level: 52 dB | Energy Star Certified: Yes | SEER: 12 | Special Features: Washable filter, Remote control, Adjustable side panels
5. Best For Noiseless Functioning - Emerson Quiet Kool Window Air Conditioner
What I Like
Low Noise Operation
Programmable timer
Four cooling modes
Eight-way adjustability
Excess moisture removal
What I Don’t Like
Installation can be complicated
If you despise loud compressors on air conditioners, the Emerson 5,000 BTU air conditioner is the one for you. With only 52dB, this device is the quietest air conditioner on the market. Using the air conditioner on the lowest speed setting can further bring down the number to around 50 dB. Ideally, this device is designed to cool a small room that falls within the 150 square feet category.
In terms of customization, the air conditioner offers four cooling modes (cool, dry, fan, and auto), which allow you to personalize the temperature in your home. Furthermore, the device entails two individual louvers along with an eight-way adjustability. This allows you to control and direct the airflow in whichever direction you want. It also features an excess moisture removal cup that can help eliminate around 1.3 pints of water each hour, thus keeping your home humidity-free.
Additionally, the Emerson 5,000 BTU air conditioner comprises a 24-hour timer that can be set according to your preference. You can also make use of the sleep mode on the timer which will make the device quieter and still cool the room efficiently. The controls are user-friendly and can be found on the front of the device. If you do not want to use manual controls, the product comes with a remote control that can make it more convenient.
The Emerson window air conditioners also come with detachable and washable filters which makes cleaning an easy task. When the filters are cleaned regularly, you can avoid having to use filter replacements that usually fall on the pricier side.
Noise level: 50 dB | Energy Star Certified: No | SEER: 11 | Special Features: Quiet cooling, Washable filters, 8-way adjustability
6. Best For Airflow Control - AmazonBasics Window Air Conditioner
What I Like
Easy installation
Included mounting kit
Adjustable side panels
Washable air filter
Seven temperature controls
What I Don’t Like
Can be slightly loud when turned on
The AmazonBasics 5,000 BTU air conditioner is an energy-efficient device from Amazon that can easily cool smaller rooms sized 150 square feet. So, if you need better cooling output in any compactspace such as a dorm room or RV, this product would be ideal.
The air conditioner offers several options for customization with seven temperature settings, various fan speeds, and dual cooling systems. Furthermore, the louvers on the air conditioner can be adjusted based on your preference. This allows you to control the direction of airflow and enhance comfort levels.
To ensure that the air in your home is purified, the device comprises air filters that collect any unwanted dust and other impurities from the air. These filters can then be detached from the air conditioner and cleaned using water and dish soap or a handheld vacuum. Maintaining the air filter regularly can help improve air quality as well as prolong the life of the air conditioner. It can also minimize any repair or maintenance costs that may arise in the future.
The installation process is fairly simple and the device comes with an easy window mounting kit. You also get adjustable side panels along with the kit that can be expanded to fit the size of your window. Typically, the device fits most standard window sills, that is 36 inches wide and at least 13 inches tall.
Noise level: 56 dB | Energy Star Certified: No | SEER: No | Special Features: Energy-efficient, 7 temperature controls, Washable filters
7. Best For Customized Airflow - TCL Window Air Conditioner
What I Like
Easy maintenance
Energy-efficiency
Affordable
Mechanical design
Noiseless functioning
What I Don’t Like
Eco mode function is complicated
The TCL Window air conditioner is yet another functional 5,000 BTU air conditioner that can cool your living space efficiently. Additionally, it is also the most affordable option among other 5,000 BTU AC units on the market.
In terms of energy efficiency, the TCL window unit uses around 450 watts of power to function at its maximum capacity, i.e. 5,000 BTU. This gives the devices an energy efficiency rating of 11.1, making them one of the more powerful air conditioners.
Furthermore, you can customize the airflow based on how you need it with the AC's eight-way cooling system. It also entails a pair of four-way directional vents, which offer more flexibility in controlling the airflow. You can also control the two fan speeds it comes with using the mechanical rotary control on the device.
TCL has designed this window air conditioner to be a low-noise operation device with noise levels as low as 50 dB. This way, you wouldn’t have to wake up to loud compressor noises or sleep with the device turned off.
Additionally, the setup of the 5,000 BTU air conditioner is quite straightforward. You don’t need any expertise to install the system in your home. All you have to do is use the simple installation kit provided with the product and mount the device on your window. Make sure that your windows are approximately 36 inches wide and 14.5 inches tall.
Mechanical designs usually don’t require many repairs or modifications. If at all you do face some issue, you can fix it yourself with the help of a screwdriver. Apart from that, cleaning the filters at regular intervals is all the maintenance you need to do.
Noise level: 50 dB | Energy Star Certified: No | SEER: 11.1 | Special Features: Reusable, eight-way cooling
8. Best For Double-hung Windows - Haier Window Air Conditioner
What I Like
Easy installation
10 temperature controls
Low noise operation
Slide-out filters
2 cooling modes and fan speeds
What I Don’t Like
Cannot cool larger rooms
The Haier 5,000 BTU window air conditioner is designed to cool smaller rooms, specifically ones up to 150 square feet. So, if you want to cool a studio, home office, dorm room, or bedroom, this device is ideal. For easy installation, the product comes with a simple installation kit, so you can start using your AC units right away.
Since the window air conditioner is meant for smaller rooms, the noise factor has been taken into consideration by Haier. With noise levels as low as 50 dB, this 5,000 BTU window air conditioner can easily be used during the nighttime without any issues.
The 5,000 BTU air conditioner also comes with two cooling modes as well as two fan speeds that allow the user to customize the temperature in the room. Furthermore, the device comes with ten different temperature controls that enhance the aspect of customization. This way, you can ensure that the room temperature is set ideally.
The filters of this device can be removed and cleaned to ensure that the quality of airflow is optimal. Just slide it out of the air conditioner and clean it with some water and dish soap or a handheld vacuum. Be sure to clean the filters every thirty days or so, to avoid unnecessary repair costs.
Additionally, the installation of the 5,000 BTU air conditioner is fairly simple. Since it has a fixed chassis, it can easily be mounted on any double-hung windows. Ensure that the windows are sized 21-36 inches wide and 13 inches tall. The product comes with an EZ Mount installation kit that comprises all the needed tools to mount the device effortlessly.
Noise level: 50 dB | Energy Star Certified: No | SEER: No | Special Features: Removable filters, EZ Mount installation kit
9. Best Automatic Cooling - Keystone Air Conditioner
What I Like
Energy-efficient
Easy installation
Energy Star Certified
Follow me feature
Automated cooling
What I Don’t Like
Can be pretty loud
If you prefer operating your air conditioner remotely but don’t want to jump into Wi-Fi connectivity yet, then the Keystone 5,000 BTU AC units are ideal for you. The device comes equipped with a remote control that allows you to change temperature settings and cooling modes without getting out of your comfort zone.
However, a favored feature of this product is the “follow me” function of the remote. When you activate this feature, the remote control turns into the thermostat instead of the air conditioner itself. This ultimately improves the performance and range of your window unit. Furthermore, when this feature is activated, the air conditioner will keep cooling the room until the temperature reaches that of the one set in the remote. This way you can minimize the chances of hotspots, which is a common occurrence with other types of air conditioners.
Irrespective of the “follow me” feature, the device on its own can cool a room measuring about 150 square feet. Additionally, the 5,000 BTU air conditioner comes with a dehumidifier that can extract up to 1.3 pints of water from the air each hour. If you live in a humid region, this product can be beneficial for you.
In terms of energy efficiency, this device is energy star certified, which means you won’t have to worry about expensive energy costs anymore. The installation process is also fairly simple and requires just one person. Along with the device, you get an extra-long power cord that measures up to 6.5 feet, which is longer than the standard power cord on the market.
Noise level: 55 dB | Energy Star Certified: Yes | SEER: 11.2 | Special Features: LED Display, 6.5 feet power cord, Automated cooling
10. Best Environment-friendly AC - Black+Decker Window Air Conditioner
What I Like
Washable nylon filters
Rapid cooling capacity
Environment friendly
Mounting hardware included
Easy installation
What I Don’t Like
Can be slightly loud
The Black+Decker window air conditioner is yet another affordable alternative that can keep your house call even on the hottest summer day. It runs on two different cooling levels, low and high, so you can enjoy optimal cooling capacity at all times.
Similar to other 5,000 BTU AC units, this device can cool smaller areas more efficiently as compared to larger ones. Ideally, rooms up to 150 square feet can be cooled quickly and easily. So, if you want to cool spaces like playrooms, cabins, RVs, studio apartments, etc, this device is ideal.
Since it only weighs about 35 pounds, it can fit snugly in most standard windows. To make the installation process easier, the product comes with an easy installation kit and mounting hardware.
In terms of energy efficiency, this 5,000 BTU air conditioner uses the R32 refrigerant which has little to no impact on the ozone layer or the atmosphere. This makes the device much more energy efficient and enhances the same by around 10%. Furthermore, R32 is more efficient than the usual R-410A, which means only the lowest amount of refrigerant is needed for the device to function properly. This also elongates the lifespan of the air conditioner.
Cleaning this window air conditioner is perhaps the easiest part with its washable, removable nylon air filters. When the automatic filter check light on the device is on, simply slide the filter out and rinse it thoroughly under running water. Once the filter is fully dry, pop it back in, and you’re good to go. Cleaning the air filter regularly can also improve the quality of airflow in your home.
Noise level: 56 dB | Energy Star Certified: Yes | SEER: 11 | Special Features: Energy-efficient, Washable filters, Easy installation
11. Best For Dehumidification - Whirlpool Window Air Conditioner
What I Like
1.06 pints dehumidification
Quiet operation
Compact design
Simple Controls
Easy-to-clean filters
What I Don’t Like
The installation process is complicated
The Whirlpool 5,000 BTU air conditioner is a window-mounted device that can cool any smaller space with ease, specifically rooms up to 150 square feet. RVs, dorm rooms, studios, playrooms, etc can be cooled easily with this device. To power the air conditioner, you get a 6-foot power cord that can be plugged into any 115-volt electric outlet. The power cord also comprises a three-pronged plug that can be connected to the outlet.
For better temperature control in the room, the device entails a 1.06 pints per hour dehumidification rate. This ensures that the overall atmosphere, from temperature to humidity levels, is always regulated.
As for the controls, the mechanical rotary dials on the air conditioner offer simple yet effective control mechanisms. Just twist to either side to choose from the two temperature settings ( low and high) the AC unit comes with. A second rotary dial situated below the initial one allows you to choose between various cooling modes, specifically four. This way, you can customize the temperature in the room according to your needs.
If there is a power failure, the AC unit will automatically restart as soon as the power is restored. You would not have to go and turn the device on manually. The device is also designed to have a quiet operation, so you can stay cool as well as sleep well throughout the night. Additionally, the airflow capacity of this air conditioner is 135 CFM.
Similar to other 5,000 BTU units, the air filters can be detached from the device and cleaned using some water or a handheld vacuum. Before you slide the filter back in, ensure that it is fully dry.
Noise level: 50 dB | Energy Star Certified: No | SEER: No | Special Features: 6 feet power cord, Mechanical Rotary controls, Automatic restart
12. Best With Rotary Dials - PerfectAire Window Air Conditioner
What I Like
Washable filter
Efficient energy use
Safe refrigerant
Easy installation
Included mounting tools
What I Don’t Like
No included remote control
The PerfectAire window air conditioners are ideal for cooling smaller rooms measuring up to 150 square feet. So, if you’re on the lookout for window air conditioners that can cool your office space, RV, or dorm room, this AC unit will suit you well.
The installation process of this 5,000 BTU air conditioner is fairly simple even though it is a mechanical AC. You get a window mounting kit along with the product that includes expandable accordion panels, hardware, top rail, and window seal foam. Additionally, the easy-read mounting manual that comes with the AC units makes the installation process all the easier.
Typically, these window air conditioners fit windows measuring 36 inches wide and a minimum of 13 inches tall. Since these are the measurements of most standard house windows, you do not have to worry about fitting.
In terms of controls, the AC unit comprises rotary dials that can be used to adjust the temperature according to your needs. Furthermore, the dual-way cold air direction and two different settings for both speeds and modes, make the system much more customizable.
The air filter in the air conditioner can be detached from the device, cleaned, and reattached. All you have to do is slide the filter out, wash it with some soap and water, dry it thoroughly, and pop it back in. This way, you can prolong the lifespan of the device as well as save money on unnecessary repair and maintenance costs.
This air conditioner is also environment-friendly since it uses a premium R32 refrigerant, which is not only energy-efficient but also comparatively safe.
Before you use the air conditioner, ensure that you let the device stand in an upright position for a minimum of 24 hours. If it fails to do so, the AC unit can experience problems with compressor capabilities as well as the quality of airflow.
Noise level: 55 dB | Energy Star Certified: No | SEER: No | Special Features: Washable Filter, Safe refrigerant, Dual-way air direction, Adjustable temperature settings
13. Best With Removable Air Filter - Amana Window Air Conditioner
What I Like
Washable filters
Simple controls
Long power cord
Energy-efficient
Low noise levels
What I Don’t Like
Can cause hot spots occasionally
The Amana 5,000 BTU air conditioner is one of the most reliable window air conditioners available on the market. It covers a room that is around 15” square feet and is one of the most efficient 12 x 12 room air conditioners.
Similar to other highly energy-efficient 5,000 BTU units, it has a SEER rating of 11.1 and typically runs on 45 watts. Additionally, it comes with a 5.9-foot power cord that can be plugged into any 3-prong power outlet. The Amana 5,000 BTU air conditioner uses an R-410A refrigerant, which is generally not the safest but does not pose as much of a threat as other types.
Coming to the noise levels of this air conditioner, it is by far the quietest 5,000 BTU device made by Amana. Equipped with a silent compressor, the air conditioner only makes around 50/55 dB of sound.
The controls are simple and straightforward with two rotary controls that allow you to adjust the temperature speeds. You can turn the temperature up or down since the device only comprises two speeds.
Furthermore, the air filter of the AC unit can be removed and washed to get rid of accumulated dirt and bacteria buildup. This not only prolongs the life of your air conditioning system but also reduces any potential repair or maintenance costs.
Noise level: 55 dB | Energy Star Certified: No | SEER: 11.1 | Special Features: Washable Filter, Easy Controls, Long power cord, Energy-efficient
14. Best Wi-Fi Enabled AC - LG LW5016 Window Air Conditioner
What I Like
Dual-way air direction
Energy Star certified
Wi-Fi functional
9 cooling temperatures
Programmable timer
What I Don’t Like
Need two people to install the device
The LG LW5016 Window Air Conditioner is one of the most popular products on the market for a variety of reasons. The initial reason is its low noise operation with a noise level of just 50 dB. Most air conditioners tend to fall under 55 or 56dB whereas the LG air conditioner falls below the average range. This makes it ideal to be installed in bedrooms and living spaces as it will cause little to no disruption.
Secondly, the air conditioner is enabled with Wi-Fi. All you have to do is connect to the AC unit through your smartphone on the LG ThinQ app and you can easily switch between modes and settings remotely. Additionally, these smart features allow you to use the app to pair the air conditioner to any voice-activated home system such as Alexa or Google Home. This way, you can turn on, turn off, and control fan speeds or sleep mode using just voice control.
Furthermore, there are two fan speeds and 9 different temperature settings that you can choose from. This gives you more control over the temperature in the room and offers much more personalization aspects. To enhance the personalization aspect, you also get a dual-way direction which can be used to control the direction of the air.
Equipped with a programmable 24-hour timer, you won’t have to worry about your energy consumption or power bills rising too high. The LG air conditioner is also Energy Star certified and keeps your carbon footprint minimal. Maintenance is also made to be easy with removable and washable filters. The LG app also sends a notification to your phone when the filters need to be cleaned. This way your device will stay clean and will last a longer period.
Noise level: 55 dB | Energy Star Certified: Yes | SEER: 11 | Special Features: 2 cooling modes and fan speeds, Dual-way air direction, Adjustable thermostat, Washable air filter
15. Best For Smaller Spaces - KingHome Window Air Conditioner
What I Like
Easy installation
3-speed settings
Washable filter
1.6 pints dehumidification
Easy controls
What I Don’t Like
No remote control included
The KingHome mechanical window air conditioner is a 5,000 BTU air conditioner that can efficiently cool a 150-square-foot space. So, if you need to cool spaces like a bedroom, studio, dorm, playroom, guest room etc, this device is ideal. Additionally, this air conditioner offers up to 1.6 pints of dehumidification.
In terms of temperature range, there are three available options that can be accessed through the mechanical rotary dials. The variable temperature knob allows you to adjust the temperature based on your needs in a simple yet accurate manner. Furthermore, the rotary knob right before the temperature control can be used to access the different cooling modes such as low, high, medium, etc.
As far as cleaning is concerned, the air conditioner has removable mesh filters that can be cleaned using water or a small vacuum. When the air filters are properly cleaned and maintained, it can not only improve the quality of cold air dissipated but also elongate the AC unit's lifespan. Before you reattach the filters after cleaning, ensure that they are fully dry so as to avoid any mold buildup.
Installation is fairly simple with this device and it comes with a window mounting kit meant for double-pane windows. Ensure that your window is approximately 23-36 inches wide and 15 inches tall for the device to fit comfortably. However, you don’t have to worry about it too much since most standard windows are of said measurement.
Noise level: 55 dB | Energy Star Certified: No | SEER: 11.2 | Special Features: Window-mounted unit, Washable filter, Easy controls, Dehumidifier
What is the Best 5000 BTU Air Conditioner?
Set out below is a detailed comparison chart, mainly designed to emphasize the noteworthy features of top-ranking 5000 BTU air conditioners. It discerningly evaluates aspects like noise level, Energy Star certification, and Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio (SEER), alongside any special features.
Window-mounted unit, Washable filter, Easy controls, Dehumidifier
Buying Guide for the Best 5000 BTU Air Conditioner
Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER)
The Energy Efficiency Ratio or EER is what will ultimately decide the ratio of the overall cooling output against the total power the system requires to run efficiently on an hourly basis. This is how most heating as well as cooling systems are measured.
Naturally, one may assume that the lower the energy efficiency rating of a device is, the better its performance. In fact, it’s quite the contrary. Higher EER numbers correlate to better performance of an air conditioning unit.
Specifically, there are two main reasons why the Energy Efficiency Ratio should be considered when choosing an air conditioner.
The first and foremost reason is, as the name suggests, energy efficiency. Since most devices with a higher energy efficiency rating consume significantly less energy than other air conditioners, it can reduce your overall energy consumption. This, in turn, reduces your power bill and keeps it in check.
The second reason why the energy efficiency ratio matters is because it is more environmentally friendly than AC units with lower EER levels.
ECO Mode
Speaking of energy efficiency, environmentally friendly AC units are much more reliable and are becoming increasingly common in most homes. Most window air conditioners have a function known as the Eco mode which allows the device to run at a slower rate and ultimately improves the EER rating.
When the air conditioners run on Eco mode, they will use much less wattage per hour as compared to otherwise. Apart from reducing your carbon footprint, it also helps significantly reduce the total running cost of the device.
Furthermore, when switched to the Eco mode, the air conditioners can have lower noise levels as compared to the normal mode. So, if you plan on using the air conditioners at night, using them in Eco mode would be the sustainable and effective option.
Digital Controls
If you wish to switch through various cooling modes and adjust temperature settings as fast as possible, air conditioners with digital controls would be ideal.
Unlike the standard mechanical rotary dials that are used in most window air conditioners, digital controls are much easier to use. They also provide a better level of accuracy for the settings and allow you to set it accordingly.
Air conditioners that have a digital control panel also come with an LCD display that allows you to see the settings that you’ve used. This further increases the accuracy aspect and eliminates the guesswork needed to set the ideal temperature, which is usually the case with mechanical rotary controls. Typically, if an air conditioner comes with a digital control panel, there is a high chance that it would have more user-friendly features too.
Wi-Fi Enabled
Since technology keeps advancing, people prefer having everything, including their air conditioners, linked to their smartphones for easy access. This is essentially what a Wi-Fi-enabled air conditioner does. To take things a step further, some air conditioners even allow you to pair it with your voice-activated home assistants such as Alexa or Google Home. So, you won’t have to get up to change the settings or then turn the device on anymore. Just ask your home assistant to do it for you.
With most Wi-Fi-enabled AC units, you can do various things like set schedules, turn the air conditioner on or off, adjust temperature and cooling settings remotely, etc. All of this can be done even if you’re in the other room or not even inside the house. In other words, it makes life much more convenient.
The only drawback to Wi-Fi-enabled air conditioners is that they can be priced pretty high when compared to a standard window air conditioner. However, if you’re willing to spend a little extra for the added convenience and smart features, a Wi-Fi-enabled AC is definitely worth considering.
Remote Control
If you’re not as tech-savvy or a Wi-Fi-enabled system is too expensive for you, then a handy remote control can be a great alternative. A remote control allows you to adjust the temperature, select cooling modes, and turn the device on or off without getting up from your comfort zone.
Furthermore, remote control is not a feature that brings up the price of the air conditioner, so you don’t have to worry about it going outside the budget.
Noise Level (dB)
Last but certainly not least, is the noise level of the air conditioner that you plan on getting. Generally, 5,000 BTU window AC units will be on the quieter side when being used but, like most things, they can differ from brand to brand.
If you’re a light sleeper or even the slightest noise keeps you up, you might want to look for an air conditioner with noise levels that fall under 40-60 decibels. 40-60dB is the quietest noise level among traditional central air conditioners. This will also let you sleep comfortably or go about your day without being disturbed by loud air conditioning noises.
Looking at the noise levels is even more important if the primary reason you’re getting an air conditioner is to cool your bedroom. Sleeping on a hot summer day without proper cooling is frustrating as is. The last thing you’d want is to turn the air conditioning on to cool down the room and stay awake due to the loud and annoying noise it makes.
How much power does a 5,000 BTU air conditioner use?
The amount of energy a 5,000 BTU air conditioner uses depends on the size of the bedroom. Such units require only 450 watts of energy to cool a small room, which is much less than other air conditioners.
How much area can a 5,000 BTU air conditioner cool?
A 5,000 BTU AC cools around 150 square feet of space, which makes them ideal as budget investments.
What size room is perfect for a 5,000 BTU air conditioner?
Since a 5,000 BTU air conditioner is the smallest AC unit, it can cool a room smaller than 250 square feet. I recommend installing such units in rooms that aren’t bigger than 150-200 square feet, so the basic room dimensions should be 14×14 feet, 12×12 feet, or 10×10 feet.
How long can you run a 5,000 BTU air conditioner?
If you are new to using a 5,000 BTU air conditioner, it would be best to opt for a model having –
600 watts of tiltable solar power
2,000-watt pure sine wave inverter
A 40 amp MPPT charge controller
800 amp hours of lead acid/400 amp hours of Li-ion batteries
When a unit has all these components it can run for 8 hours.
How to calculate BTU for cooling?
To determine what BTU air conditioner you need, multiply the length of the room by the width or area that must be cooled. Then multiply the result by 25 to find how much BTU is needed to deliver ample cooling on a moist, rainy, sunny, hot, or humid day.
Is higher BTU good for an AC?
The power of an air conditioner is expressed through the BTU rating, which is the energy required to remove heat from a room. If an air conditioner has more BTUs, it can cool a larger space quickly and efficiently.
Why is it important to choose BTU depending on the room?
If you use a unit with a higher BTU for a room, it will cool the space quickly but also make it more humid. On the other hand, a low-BTU model will struggle to deliver ample cooling and run continuously.
If you’re looking for a functional air conditioner that can cool your room instantly, the Midea window air conditioner is an ideal choice. The air filter in the air conditioner can be removed and cleaned, which ultimately reduces room odor and minimizes dust particles.
An impressive alternative to the Midea air conditioner is the GE window air conditioning system. With rapid cooling technology, this device can cool rooms that are 150 square feet within a matter of seconds.
If you are still confused, make sure to go over the buyer’s guide and reviews again to make the right call!
Painting is a fantastic hobby that I have pursued in my leisure for years now. It is a productive way to vent my emotions and creativity.
I started painting on canvases about 4 years ago. Now, I have given up my sketchbooks just because of the experience I get on a canvas.
But paint behaves very differently on canvases and to many these mediums may be new as well.
Therefore, it’s extremely important to get the right paint for the job. You may already know that acrylic paint and oil paint work on canvas. But it can be confusing to choose the right medium for yourself.
So, here are some paints that I have fallen in love with over the years, the best paints for canvas are here!
Listed below are the 5 best Paints for Canvas from our list:
Liquitex BASICS Paints for Canvases: Distinguished for providing a budget-friendly painting option for beginners with impressive color stickiness and mixability.
Winsor & Newton Acrylic Set for Canvas Painting: Stands out for its consistent performance on canvas, bright colors, and excellent color retention, rendering it perfect for multilayered painting.
Golden Open Acrylics: Recognized for its slower drying time akin to oil paints, making it an excellent choice for detailed works and touch-ups that require more time.
Old Holland Classic Oil: Esteemed for its historical brand value, these paints provide the best experience with high-quality pigments, impressive lightfastness, and long-lasting nature, making it a favorite among professionals.
Holbein Duo Aqua Water-Soluble Oils: Celebrated for their high industry standards and water-soluble nature, these oil paints provide vivid colors and a healthier painting experience by eliminating harmful chemicals associated with most oil paints.
From traditional oil paints to modern acrylics, we have got you covered. So, without further ado, here's the list of the 5 best paints for canvas.
Liquitex BASICS Paints for Canvases - Best For Beginners
If you are getting started with painting and want to keep the budget on down low this is your best bet.
I used this acrylic paint set for quite some time when I started and still use it from time to time for my side projects. The reason is that this budget variant doesn’t make too many compromises in quality to achieve the price tag.
The color sticks well to the canvas and is viscous. What I love the most about it is that it also mixes well with other colors and mediums which gives me the modularity to get specific colors while painting.
But keep in mind that you’ll have to experiment quite a bit for it because the pigments don’t mix as expected all the time.
Unlike other cheap variants, this acrylic paint works incredibly well in layers and even when it’s thinned out with water, it sticks to the canvas well.
Due to its consistency, it sticks excellently with brushes. I use white horsehair flat brushes for most of the painting and I am amazed at how well it all works out. It functioned well with nylon paintbrushes as well.
For a beginner, I don’t think there is any better option in the acrylic paint market. It sticks well to canvas, works fabulously in layers, and sticks well to brushes. All you have to get used to is mixing colors on palettes. That’s more of a problem for veterans than for newcomers in my humble opinion. But even as an experienced individual, I have no complaints about this paint.
Type of Paint: Acrylic | Quantity: 48 tubes | Finish: Matte | Drying Time: 15-30 min | Lightfastness: Poor to Good
Winsor & Newton Acrylic Set for Canvas Painting - Best For Professionals On A Budget
This paint satisfies everyone’s needs even though it’s harder on the wallet than the previous entry.
Winsor & Newton has been a part of my acrylic paint set for a long time because I love how consistently it performs on canvas. The colors are strong and bright and work fantastically when mixed as well.
The color retains incredibly well on canvas which is great for multilayered painting. The pigments are of great quality and I am astounded that it’s as good as some of my oil colors. It totally justifies its price.
Even though it’s meant for more experienced and serious artists because of its price and quality, I’d recommend it to beginners as well because it reduces the steepness of the learning curve of painting - especially, on canvas.
The colors are very clean, behave truly on canvas, and it has a certain satin texture. That may not work with some art styles but artists around the world admire the finish of acrylic paints. Even I do.
It comes with 10 colors and it’s enough to create most other colors, especially because the color mixes so well and accurately. One gripe I do have is that this paint is softer than my liking. If it grinds your gears as well, I’ll advise getting some texture paste for medium. In my experience, it’s the most straightforward solution to the problem.
Even though this set is meant for students, I think this is well suited for professional use as well. The consistency and the grip leave no room for asking for more. I see this set as a budget option for professionals. It can very well be used for any side or personal project.
Type of Paint: Acrylic | Quantity: 10 tubes | Finish: Matte | Drying Time: 20-30 min | Lightfastness: Good to High
Golden Open Acrylics - Best For Detailed Works
This paint set is great for working on shades. It works great for softening, blending, and shading as it’s clean and bright. I use this for detailed works that most people call a “touch-up”.
Golden Open Acrylics dries more like oil paint - slower and giving you more time to work on it. It is a welcomed attribute because I use this paint for working on dried layers of paint when I need more time to work out the details. That's why I think that adding this paint is so necessary for your arsenal to be complete.
There are eight colors in the set which is enough for creating most colors. The colors blend very well and you can work it to make translucent spreads very easily. The pigments are of great quality as well, providing strong and consistent colors.
Most of the “touch-up” work needs a lot of mixing of colors to make it consistent with your primary application. I found these colors to be excellent for that job as the pigments are of top-notch quality and leave no room for complaint.
I recommend this acrylic paint set for working secondary and tertiary layers only. Mostly for shading, blending, and glazing. The properties these colors have are perfect for that. Now as a beginner, you may skip it. There are way many things to work on before you start perfecting “touch-ups”.
But if you have already been in the game for a while now and are serious about making your artwork more vibrant, then I can’t recommend Golden Open Acrylics more. Especially it works so much like oil paints. It has no comparison.
Type of Paint: Acrylic | Quantity: 8 tubes | Finish: Matte | Drying Time: 20-30 min | Lightfastness: Good to High
Old Holland Classic Oil
Now we are moving to oil paints. Oil paint is the best way to put your ideas on a canvas. And it’s just not me, many artists and professionals agree as well.
It’s just the way the oil paint blends and behaves on canvas that makes it the perfect experience with the best results.
Old Holland is one of the oldest brands of paint. It was established in the 17th century and has been used by several famous artists, like Van Gogh.
Of course, these colors don’t mess around. Starting from the pigments to the viscosity and consistency, there’s nothing that tops Old Holland in quality and experience.
There are no cheap fillers in this color, all you’ll get is the best pigments for the most accurate colors and consistent spread and behavior. Not only this, these colors don’t lose color and texture over time. In the community, it’s called lightfastness.
Except for Cremnitz White and Madder Lakes, every color is completely lightfast and even these two are almost lightfast as well.
May it be landscapes, still lifes, or figures, there’s nothing you can’t do with these paints as they offer transparent as well as opaque paints with excellent pigments.
These paints also last a lot longer than others as the medium has fantastic tinting strength and although it’s expensive, at least it’ll be quite some time before these run out.
The oil paint stretches quite a lot which not only saves paint but also is easy to paint with and looks more natural and pleasing. As expected, the spread and mixing are fantastic as well, although I’d recommend getting natural hair brushes for the best results. Old Holland deserves the best anyway.
Type of Paint: Oil | Quantity: 10 tubes | Finish: Gloss | Drying Time: 2-12 days | Lightfastness: Excellent
Holbein Duo Aqua Water-Soluble Oils
This is the modern-day standard for oil paints. Holbein Duo Aqua Water-Soluble Oils are meant for professional use through and through, and they scream quality in every way possible.
Unlike most oil paints which use linseed oils for spread and turpentine for the wash, these oils are crafted so that it can be used with water as well, as the name suggests.
These colors meet industry standards on every term and undergo rigorous testing procedures, like thermal stability, adhesion, and color tone. It even undergoes bacterial testing.
It even eliminates all the harmful chemicals and toxins that are associated with most oil paints and gives a healthy experience for the modern-day user.
If all of this sounds too scientific and less artistic to you, don’t worry. The paint performs excellently and is worth every penny of its high price tag. The paint is thick and has a beautiful consistency that feels mesmerizing on the first touch of a paintbrush.
The colors are more vivid and expressive than some of the other brands but I don’t see that as a negative trait. In my experience, it brings more life to my creation. It mixes accurately as well and it comes in a variety of colors, so you can go as close as you can get to your imagination.
The color even blends well within different layers and it comes with a dryer solution which, if added, makes the paint dry faster. Perfect for people who don’t want to wait for the oils to dry up. But I, for one, love the wait because in my opinion the color seems more vibrant and blends better when I let it dry naturally.
Type of Paint: Watercolor | Quantity: 20 tubes | Finish: Matte | Drying Time: 20-30 min | Lightfastness: Good to High
What is the Best Paint For Canvas?
Outlined below is a comparison table, diligently constructed to highlight the essential qualities of top-tier paints designed for canvas. The table examines each option in terms of paint type, quantity, finish, drying time, and lightfastness, a measure of color durability under light exposure.
Choosing the right paint for your canvas is crucial for achieving the effect and result you desire in your artwork. To help you make an informed decision, we have compiled a comprehensive buying guide that covers all the important factors you need to consider when purchasing the best paint for your canvas.
1. Type of Paint
There are three main types of paint that work well on canvas: acrylic, oil, and watercolor.
a. Acrylic Paint
Acrylic paints are versatile, quick-drying, and have vibrant colors. They are suitable for various painting techniques and can be used on different surfaces. They are also easier to clean up due to their water-soluble nature.
b. Oil Paint
Oil paints are classically favored by many professional artists. They provide rich, deep colors and allow the painter a longer working time to create details, blend colors, and achieve a specific texture.
c. Watercolor Paint
Watercolors are well-suited for beginners, offering translucency and ease of use. They dry quickly and can be reactivated with water, allowing for corrections and modifications.
2. Quality: Student vs. Artist Grade
Consider the quality of the paints you choose. Student-grade paints are more affordable but may lack pigment concentration, resulting in less vibrant colors. Artist-grade paints are typically more expensive, but they have higher pigment concentrations, better color quality, and improved lightfastness.
3. Pigment Concentration
Higher pigment concentration gives better color coverage and vibrancy. However, it also adds to the price of the paint. Determine the right balance based on your needs and budget.
4. Lightfastness
Lightfastness refers to how well a paint retains its color when exposed to light. Higher lightfastness ratings mean the paint is more resistant to fading and discoloration over time. Ensure you choose paints that have a good lightfastness rating.
5. Drying Time
Drying times vary among different types of paints. Acrylic paint dries the fastest, followed by watercolor, and then oil. Choose the paint type that suits your working style and preferred drying time.
6. Brand Reputation and Reliability
Choose a paint brand that has a good reputation for quality, consistency, and customer support. Some reputable brands include Winsor & Newton, Golden, Liquitex, Gamblin, and Daler-Rowney.
7. Safety and Toxicity
Many paints can be harmful if ingested or inhaled. Be sure to choose paints that comply with safety standards and are labeled as non-toxic. This is especially important if children or pets may come into contact with the materials.
8. Budget
Lastly, consider your budget when purchasing paint for canvas. While it is essential to invest in quality materials, it is also important to be mindful of your spending.
Important Tip: Remember that experimentation is essential in the world of art. Consider trying different paints and brands to find the one that suits your painting style and technique the best. It may take time, but discovering the best paint for canvas will ultimately lead to more fulfilling and enjoyable artistic experiences.
What is the difference between student and artist-grade paints?
Student-grade paints are less expensive and have a lower pigment concentration compared to artist-grade paints. Artist-grade paints are more expensive but have a higher pigment concentration and are of higher quality, making them ideal for professional artists.
How many coats of paint should I apply to a canvas?
The number of coats of paint required on a canvas depends on the opacity and thickness of the paint. It is recommended to apply at least two coats of paint for even coverage and to allow for a more durable finish.
Can I mix different brands of paint on canvas?
Yes, different brands of paint can be mixed on a canvas. However, it is recommended to use the same type of paint (oil or acrylic) to ensure compatibility.
Can I use spray paint on canvas?
Yes, spray paint can be used on canvas, but it is recommended to use a primer to prepare the surface before painting to ensure good adhesion and prevent the paint from soaking through the canvas.
Can I paint on a canvas without stretching it first?
Yes, you can paint on an unstretched canvas, but it is recommended to stretch the canvas first to prevent it from warping or buckling over time.
How long does it take for paint to dry on a canvas?
The drying time of paint on a canvas depends on the type and thickness of the paint, as well as the humidity and temperature of the environment. Acrylic paint dries faster than oil paint and typically takes about 30 minutes to an hour to dry, while oil paint can take up to several days to fully dry.
Thank you for taking the time to read our article on the best paints for canvas! We appreciate your interest and hope the information provided has been helpful and insightful. Now that we have looked at all aspects of the available paint options, it's time for the moment you've been waiting for – our top three expert recommendations.
Out of these 5 best paints for canvas, here are the top three expert recommendations:
Best for beginners: Liquitex BASICS Acrylic Paint Set is an ideal option. With budget-friendly pricing and decent quality that doesn't compromise too much on color vibrancy, this set is perfect for those starting their artistic journey or working on side projects.
Best for professionals on a budget: Winsor & Newton Acrylic Set is a good option. A trusted brand offering consistent performance, strong and bright colors, and excellent blending abilities make this acrylic set suitable for serious artists, whether they're students or professionals.
Best for detailed works: Golden Open Acrylics is the right choice. These paints behave more like oil paints, drying slower and providing more working time, making them excellent for secondary and tertiary shading, blending, and glazing layers.
As you continue to explore the world of canvas painting, remember that practice and exploration are key to finding your unique style and preferences. With these expert recommendations, you should now have a solid starting point to choose the best paints for your needs. Happy painting, and let your creativity flow!
Isn’t it relaxing to hit the shower after a tiring day? But why take a boring bath when you can really take it up a notch?
A well-designed shower system can not only elevate your showering experience but also give a new, sophisticated look to your bathroom. So, if you're thinking along those lines and don't know where to start, you've arrived at the right place.
Finding the right shower system may not be the most complicated treasure hunt, but it's important that you buy something compatible with the existing plumbing. So, take a look at our list of the 5 best shower systems with body jets and refer to the buyers' guide below for more relevant information.
Without further ado, let's get down to business.
Listed below are the 5 best shower systems with body jets from our list:
Blue Ocean 52" Stainless Steel SPV878392H Shower Panel: Its unique design, inclusive of a stainless steel frame and a blue tempered glass surface, offers a luxurious and highly functional experience featuring 8 adjustable body nozzles for maximum customization.
JiaYouJia Rainfall Shower System: Offering safety and comfort with its 6 body jets and a rain showerhead, it includes a thermostatic shower valve for scald prevention and stands out for its durable, corrosion-resistant brass construction.
PULSE ShowerSpas 1049B-BN Rio ShowerSpa Panel: Known for its attractive, minimalistic design, this shower system features 6 single-function silk body spray jets and a 10" low-profile rain showerhead, providing consistent water temperature with its Tru Temp pressure balance valve.
ELLO&ALLO Stainless Steel Shower Panel Tower System: Durable and performance-oriented, this shower system enables a wide range of water effects with its multi-outlet switch system and LED overhead shower, making its digital temperature display a highlight feature.
ROVOGO 304 Stainless Steel Shower Panel Tower: Well-constructed and designed for a comprehensive shower experience, this system, with its 100pcs non-clogging nozzle rainfall shower and two adjustable jet massages, is celebrated for its 3-function hand shower and easily switchable spray pattern.
Here is the list of the 5 best shower systems with body jets that you can use to relax and soothe your muscles, invigorate your skin, and bring next-level luxury to your shower experience.
1. Blue Ocean 52" Stainless Steel SPV878392H Shower Panel - Best for Luxury Spa Experience
The Blue Ocean 52" Stainless Steel SPV878392H has been creating quite a stir lately, and we decided to find out if it's worth the hype. After testing, we have to say that this shower system is one of a kind and deserves attention. So, if you're looking for something luxurious and highly functional, go for our topmost recommendation.
First and foremost, we're very impressed with the unique design of this system, combining a stainless steel frame and a blue tempered glass surface. Engineered for flat wall installation, the controls on the unit are intuitively arranged for convenient access.
It includes a temperature display and 8 adjustable body nozzles, allowing maximum customization to the users. Other than that, it features a multi-functional hand-held showerhead, a tub spout, and a rainfall showerhead for a thoroughly enjoyable experience. Also, it includes two controls for water flow and temperature so you can adjust them to your liking.
The best part about this unit is that all functions work independently to ensure adequate water pressure. Therefore, using one setting will not interfere with another set.
We're delighted about the design and features of this model and recommend installing it, especially if you plan on an upgrade. However, our only gripe is that it's quite noisy and makes squeaking and gurgling sounds when the water starts moving around. Nevertheless, the noise is not indicative of any plumbing issues.
What We Like
Stainless steel frame and tempered glass
8 body nozzles and a multi-functional hand-held showerhead
Temperature display and rainfall showerhead
Functions work independently ensuring proper water pressure
What We Don't Like
A bit noisy
Dimensions: 52" x 10" x 3.5” | Weight: 32.2lbs | Material: Stainless Steel, Brass | Finish Type: N/A | Mounting Type: Wall Mount | Number of Jets: 8 | Number of Handles: 1 | Warranty: N/A
2. JiaYouJia Rainfall Shower System - Best for Safety & Comfort
Now that we've reached the end of our list, we would like to finish with another stellar option - the JiaYouJia Rainfall Shower System. It is unlike any conventional shower system, both in terms of design and function. However, uniqueness does not guarantee functionality, but in this case, our 5th item is an exception.
First off, we love that it comes with 6 body jets that can be angled in any way desired to wash every inch of your skin for indulgent hydrotherapy. Furthermore, it includes a rain showerhead, which provides a wide radius of soft rain spray from above for an utterly relaxing sensation.
Apart from that, it also features a hand shower for targeted cleansing and washing. What we liked most is that it comes with a thermostatic shower valve that maintains the pre-set temperature, keeping things safe and reliable. Hence you can turn on the shower without worrying about getting scalded.
Lastly, since it's constructed from solid brass, this high-quality shower system is designed to last, thanks to its corrosion-resistant, oil-rubbed finish. Therefore, if you're looking to get your money's worth, this item is a great choice.
Well, there's no point sugarcoating here, but this Rainfall Shower System is not suitable for low-water-pressure plumbing. So if you choose to buy this, make sure that your plumbing can support this setup. Nevertheless, it's still a great purchase and offers superior comfort and convenience to the users.
What We Like
Includes 6 body jets and a rain showerhead with a wide radius
Equipped with a thermostatic shower valve for scald prevention
Features a hand shower for targeted cleansing and washing
Durable, corrosion-resistant brass construction
What We Don't Like
Unit is not suitable for low water pressure plumbing
Dimensions: 14.6" x 13.9" x 11" | Weight: 17.76lbs | Material: Brass | Finish Type: Matte Black | Mounting Type: Wall Mount | Number of Jets: 6 | Number of Handles: 3 | Warranty: 10 Years
3. PULSE ShowerSpas 1049B-BN Rio ShowerSpa Panel - Best for Modern Minimalistic Design
For our 3rd spot, we've picked the PULSE ShowerSpas 1049B-BN Rio ShowerSpa Panel, designed for comfort and convenience. That said, it is one of those rare shower systems that look and play the part, allowing users to enjoy hassle-free and personalized baths with mere changes in controls. So if you are looking for that sort of experience, get this stat.
First off, we love the black tempered glass and bronze stainless steel combination, as it'll look great regardless of the bathroom decor. Moreover, the brushed-Nickel fixtures add to the attractive, minimalistic appearance, keeping it simple yet neat.
Function-wise, we're super excited about the 6 single-function silk body spray jets with a soothing mist spray. Honestly, this feature alone will turn your shower area into a standing spa. Apart from that, this system includes a 10" low-profile rain showerhead with rub-clean soft tips to unclog mineral buildup for uninterrupted sessions.
Meanwhile, the Tru Temp pressure balance valve ensures zero changes in water temperature when switching between features or combining functions. Lastly, we like that it comes completely pre-plumbed and thus easily connects to the existing hot/cold stub-outs.
We are more than satisfied with the design and performance of this model as it does exceedingly well in both departments. However, if we had to find one flaw, it would be the lack of thread seal on the metal fittings, which seems like an unintended manufacturing defect.
What We Like
Minimalistic appearance suitable for all bathroom interiors
Includes 6 single-function silk body spray jets with mist spray
Features a 10" low-profile rain showerhead with rub-clean soft tips
Tru Temp pressure balance valve ensures a consistent water temperature
What We Don't Like
Does not have any thread seal on its metal fittings
Dimensions: 16" x 10" x 5" | Weight: 40lbs | Material: Brass | Finish Type: Brushed | Mounting Type: Surface Mount | Number of Jets: 6 | Number of Handles: 2 | Warranty: 3 Years
4. ELLO&ALLO Stainless Steel Shower Panel Tower System
The ELLO&ALLO Stainless Steel Shower Panel Tower System PS12-S2 incorporates superior design and functionality to deliver an indulgent shower experience. With a multitude of features and high-quality construction, this product introduces a polished, spa-like atmosphere into your bathroom.
Coming from the reputable brand ELLO&ALLO, this shower panel tower system does an excellent job in terms of durability and performance. The integration of SUS304 stainless steel and ABS materials ensures longevity, while the brushed stainless steel finish enhances the aesthetic of your bathroom.
Control is in your hands with the dual-functionality enabled PS12-S2: it hosts a 3-setting handheld shower, 4 adjustable jet nozzles for powerful mist massage, and an LED overhead shower. This means your preferences are always catered to.
You'll also find multi-outlet switches designed for multiple water effect combinations, further adding to the personalized experience. To cap it off, the digital temperature display allows temperature selection, making sure normal shower sessions turn into luxurious spa experiences.
Despite its impressive features, the ELLO&ALLO PS12-S2 falls short when it comes to installation. It isn't user-friendly and often requires professional help. The provided instruction manual is not adequately informative, particularly concerning the measurement of the wall mounting brackets and pipes, leading to additional hassle.
What We Like
Offers numerous combinations of water effects
Includes an LED overhead shower and temperature display
Enables simultaneous control of both showers
Durable construction
Features an elegant stainless steel finish
What We Don't Like
Installation process is complex
Dimensions: 18.1" x 7.87" x 48" | Weight: 19.41lbs | Material: Stainless Steel, ABS, PVC | Finish Type: Brushed | Mounting Type: Wall Mount | Number of Jets: 4 | Number of Handles: 3 | Warranty: 2 Years
5. ROVOGO 304 Stainless Steel Shower Panel Tower
The Rovogo Multifunction Shower System, a product from America's renowned sanitary brand, Rovogo, is a comprehensive solution to all your bathroom needs. Established in 2012, Rovogo is showcasing its commitment to quality sanitary ware production through products like this meticulously designed shower panel system that includes faucets, jets, handheld showers, and more. With a 3-year quality warranty, this offering from Rovogo guarantees reliability and longevity.
Rovogo’s Multifunction Shower System shines in both quality and utility. Known for its strong commitment to after-sales service, the brand backs this shower panel system with a 3-year quality warranty assuring long-term performance. Constructed with exact precision from 304 high-grade stainless steel, this system exhibits heightened durability and excellent resistance to rust.
One of its distinguished features is the 100pcs non-clogging nozzle rainfall shower, designed to cover your whole body completely, mimicking the refreshing sensation of natural rainfall. Further complementing this unique shower experience are the two jet massages; their adjustable nature allows you to revel in stress-free indulgence.
A standout attribute of the unit is the 3-function hand shower that comes with a long, extra-flexible hose, providing ease of access to those hard-to-reach areas. Additionally, the spray pattern switch, activated by simply pushing it, adds significantly to user convenience.
Despite its unmatched quality and functionality, users may encounter issues while installing the Rovogo Multifunction Shower Panel due to unclear instructions provided. You may need to engage professionals for the installation process, sticking by the adage - better safe than sorry!
What We Like
Independently functioning shower features
Temperature display powered by batteries
Functional diverter for seamless switching among functions
Single-handle control for volume and temperature
What We Don't Like
Installation instructions lack clarity
Dimensions: 52.9" x 10.2" x 8.6" | Weight: 18.31lbs | Material: 304 Stainless Steel, Brass | Finish Type: Brushed | Mounting Type: Wall Mount | Number of Jets: 2 | Number of Handles: 2 | Warranty: 3 Years
What is the Best Shower System With Body Jets?
Outlined below is a comparison table that effectively distills the features of the top-notch shower systems with body jets currently available. The table probes into crucial aspects like dimensions, weight, material used, finish type, mounting style, number of jets, the count of handles, and warranty.
Buying Guide for the Best Shower Systems With Body Jets
Knowing all about the 5 best shower systems with body jets is not enough. You still need to figure out which of these options will work perfectly in your bathroom. That's why we put together this brief and informative buyer's guide to help you make an informed choice.
We have listed the key factors that you should consider before purchasing a unit. Take a look now.
Compatibility
This may seem like a no-brainer, but the first thing you must check before getting a new shower system is whether it will work with your existing plumbing system.
Usually, showers are designed to be controlled with one or two valves. Simply put, if you have two handles on the shower panel, you'd want a dual-handle shower system. Likewise, those with one valve need a single-handle shower body spray.
Water Pressure
The 2nd important thing to remember is the level of water pressure as a lot depends on this particular parameter. If you are not sure about your home's water pressure, you may need to get a water pressure gauge or get it checked by a plumber before deciding on a system.
Energy Efficiency
Another thing that you should pay attention to is how a particular system uses water and the gas that heats the water. Essentially, the idea here is to find a shower that works best in your bathroom.
Therefore, make sure that the model you pick efficiently uses water and energy, so you don't have to face any problems moving forward. However, getting a shower system may not be the best idea if you are worried about higher utility bills.
Adjustability and Number of Jets
A hand-held shower is almost always included in any high-end shower panel with body jets. Besides, it should also have multiple jets that can easily be adjusted to suit your preferred angles. Also, if you're looking for higher customization, make sure that all the functions can be individually controlled and combined.
Showerheads and Jet Features
A premium-quality body shower jet will also have different features, which you can experiment with. These will allow you to change the pattern and flow of water. If you want the best possible experience, make sure that there are multiple settings to shuffle through while you are taking a shower.
Do shower systems with body jets consume a lot of water?
Shower systems with body jets tend to use more water than traditional showerheads. The exact consumption depends on the number of body jets and the rate of water flow. However, some systems come with water-saving features to manage water use effectively.
Are shower systems with body jets suitable for all ages?
Yes, shower systems with body jets can be enjoyed by all ages. However, each system should be configured appropriately. For instance, the jets can be adjusted to milder settings for children and elderly users.
How many body jets do I need in my shower system?
The number of body jets needed depends on personal preference. However, a typical shower system with body jets includes 2-6 jets. For a thorough full-body massage experience, at least four jets are usually recommended: two for the upper body and two for the lower.
How easy is it to install a shower system with body jets?
The complexity of installing such a system depends on the existing plumbing and the specifics of the new system. While some shower systems might be simple retrofits, others may require extensive changes to existing plumbing. It’s generally recommended to hire a professional to ensure proper installation.
Can a shower system with body jets be installed in an existing shower?
Yes, a system can be installed in an existing shower, although it may require substantial changes. The actual feasibility and cost entirely depend on the existing plumbing and the desired shower system.
How do I clean shower systems with body jets?
Cleaning these systems involves flushing the system to clear the buildup in the jets and wiping down the fixture’s surfaces with appropriate cleaning products. Avoid using abrasive materials to prevent scratches or damage to the finish.
How long do shower systems with body jets last?
The lifespan of these systems varies based on materials, usage, maintenance, and water quality. High-quality systems well-maintained can last many years.
As we wrap up our comprehensive review of the best shower systems with body jets, it becomes evident that a perfect shower system is more than just an appliance. It is an emblem of design, comfort, and luxury that can transform your first moments of the day from a daily routine to an immersive privileged experience.
From the above five best shower systems with body jets, here are the top three expert recommendations:
For an unforgettable spa-like experience, the Blue Ocean 52″ Stainless Steel SPV878392H Shower Panel is an ideal option. It boasts a unique design, combines stainless steel and blue tempered glass, and promises maximum customization with eight adjustable body nozzles and a multi-functional hand-held showerhead. However, it comes with a slight drawback of being a bit noisy during use.
If safety and comfort are your top priorities, then the JaiYouJia Rainfall Shower System could be a good choice for you. It features six body jets, a panoramic rain showerhead, and a hand shower. Besides, it incorporates a thermostatic shower valve that maintains a pre-set temperature, reducing the chances of scalding. Nonetheless, it may not be suitable for low-water-pressure plumbing.
On the other hand, the PULSE ShowerSpas 1049B-BN Rio ShowerSpa Panel is the right choice for someone who appreciates a blend of modern minimalistic design and functionality. While the black tempered glass and bronze stainless steel body contribute to its sleek appearance, features such as the six single-function silk body spray jets, a 10" low-profile rain showerhead, and the Tru Temp pressure balance valve ensure a comfortable bath experience.
Whether you prioritize a stylish design, convenient features, or the highest safety standards, any of these top-notch shower systems will undoubtedly upgrade your daily shower ritual. Whichever choice you end up making, we hope it turns your bathroom into a haven of relaxation and rejuvenation. Enjoy your new shower experience!
The subject of perspective in art is extremely vast and requires a lot of dedicated studying and even more drawing practice to get a firm grasp on it.
Artists often spend years studying the subject before it fully clicks, and even more on applying the concepts in their artworks. It is not something you learn in a day, but something that you need to study thoroughly and then put your ideas into practice over time.
If you're a beginner in the world of art, you most likely do not possess a lot of knowledge on this subject. However, it is one of the fundamentals that you absolutely need to learn as an artist.
Perspective is what defines how your artwork looks from different points of view. It applies to everything that you create in your art, be it a character or an environment.
While the subject is exceptionally detailed, there are plenty of books out there that can help you get a decent grasp on the subject in a fairly short amount of time.
Mastery will take time, but these books will definitely help you get started!
Listed below are the 5 best perspective books from our list:
Perspective Made Easy: Especially suitable for beginners, this book simplifies perspective's complexity and is celebrated for its affordability and easy-to-understand material.
How to Draw: Designed for intermediate artists seeking an in-depth understanding of perspective, it covers basic to advanced concepts, making it an ideal choice for artists past the beginner phase.
The Art of Perspective: The Ultimate Guide for Artists in Every Medium: This comprehensive guide offers a nifty blend of simple and complex techniques useful for artists at any skill level, creating a thorough analysis of perspective drawing.
Perspective Drawing Handbook: With a concise structure, this handbook provides an efficient shortcut toward mastering perspective drawing and is suitable for both beginners and experienced artists.
Perspective! For Comic Book Artists: This book focuses on perspective drawing specifically for comic artists, offering strategies for landscapes, characters, and animals, making it the go-to resource for comic book artists looking to enhance their perspective work.
Here is the list of the 10 best perspective books to help you hone your skills and perfect the technique of perspective drawing.
1. Perspective Made Easy - Best for Absolute Beginners
When it comes to understanding perspective in art, Norling's Perspective Made Easy is one of the best books for beginners to get started with!
At present, it is widely regarded as the best introductory text for beginners who wish to master this complicated subject. There are very few books out there on this subject that explain perspective in such a simple and straightforward manner as Ernest R. Norling has managed to do in this book.
Apart from being an extremely easy read, this book is also highly affordable. So if you're someone who has no idea where to get started on this topic, I highly recommend you get your hands on this.
Perspective Made Easy is one of the first books out there that was entirely devoted to clarifying the laws that govern perspective. The book begins with clear and concise discussions on topics such as vanishing points, horizons, and the relationship between eye levels to perspective drawings.
Irrespective of how much experience or pure talent you possess, you'll almost certainly be able to apply the techniques taught in this book instinctively once you're done studying it!
Author: Ernest R. Norling | Publisher: Dover Publications | Edition: Republication Edition | Publishing Date: January 19, 1999 | Number of Pages: 224 | Format: Paperback | Dimensions: 5.39" x 0.47" x 8.46" | Weight: 0.65lbs | Other Format/s: Hardcover, Audiobook, Kindle
2. How to Draw - Best for Intermediate Artists
How to Draw by Scott Robertson is a book that I keep on recommending to artists who are looking to get in-depth with the different concepts of perspective. It is a practical guide to constructing and seeing different objects in perspective and is primarily aimed at teaching how to draw from your imagination while inventing perspective.
Robertson, who currently teaches at Pasadena's renowned ArtCentre, is one of my favorite authors when it comes to Concept Art. His teaching style is one of the most unique that I've come across, and the vastness of his knowledge becomes evident as soon as you go through a few chapters of this book.
In this book, you'll learn all the basics of perspective, such as 1-point, 2-point, and 3-point perspective, apart from a lot of advanced concepts that require a lot of dedicated study. Every chapter follows the previous one with each of them building on top of one another.
While this book is one of the best on this subject, it's not exactly something that I'd recommend to complete newbies. If you have no prior experience in perspective drawing, you'll find it quite hard to go past the first few lessons. But if you've gone past the beginner phase, this is one of the best books to go for!
Author: Scott Robertson, Thomas Bertling | Publisher: Design Studio Press | Edition: 1st Edition | Publishing Date: December 15, 2013 | Number of Pages: 208 | Format: Paperback | Dimensions: 9.1" x 0.8" x 11.03" | Weight: 2.5lbs | Other Format/s: Hardcover
3. The Art of Perspective: The Ultimate Guide for Artists in Every Medium - Best Comprehensive Guide
The Art of Perspective by Phil Metzger takes a very different route on teaching perspective, making it a must-have for all those of you who want to get a detailed analysis of the subject.
This is a relatively new book on perspective drawing, and also one of the most simple and straightforward ones I've come across in a long time. In this book, you'll be guided through a series of exercises and mini-lessons that will help you grasp the different notions associated with perspective.
The author has taken a brilliant approach towards demystifying perspective. The book offers simple but effective techniques that will help you achieve a convincing illusion of distance and depth, irrespective of whether it's only a few inches or miles.
You'll start with simple, intuitive techniques and atmospheric perspectives and then slowly make your way towards more sophisticated challenges such as curves, stairways, and reflections. It is one of the most effective texts for all those artists who are getting started with perspective drawing.
Author: Phil Metzger | Publisher: North Light Books | Edition: N/A | Publishing Date: June 12, 2007 | Number of Pages: 208 | Format: Paperback | Dimensions: 8.53" x 0.55" x 11" | Weight: 1.81lbs | Other Format/s: Kindle
4. Perspective Drawing Handbook - Best Concise Handbook
This is one of the most concise books on perspective drawing that you'll find out there with only 96 pages worth of information. But don't let the tiny size fool you, this is one of the most effective resources to have by your side when you're doing perspective drawings!
This short and sweet guide on perspective drawing provides tons of insights and shortcuts to efficiently sketching perspectives. It's also an extremely versatile text that both beginners and experienced users can learn from.
The early chapters of this book by Joseph D'Amelio cover concepts such as foreshortening, diminution, convergence, and shading. As you gradually make your way deeper into the text, you'll come across discussions on more advanced techniques, and how you can master them quickly.
Apart from the written discussions, there are more than 150 illustrations throughout the book that explain every single feature in great detail. So irrespective of whether you are an experienced artist or just starting out, this is a book that you should get your hands on.
Author: Joseph D’Amelio | Publisher: Dover Publications | Edition: Republication Edition | Publishing Date: May 17, 2004 | Number of Pages: 96 | Format: Paperback | Dimensions: 8.2" x 0.3" x 10.7" | Weight: 0.6lbs | Other Format/s: Hardcover, Kindle
5. Perspective! For Comic Book Artists - Best for Comic Artists
As the title suggests, this book by David Chelsea is primarily dedicated to comic artists who wish to learn perspective drawing and apply different techniques in their work. It is one of the few books out there that teach perspective with a particular focus on Comic Artists.
The book was first published in 1997 and is widely considered one of the best texts for learning the fundamentals of perspective art and its subsequent application in comic strips. It teaches various core concepts such as landscapes, characters, animals, and the different techniques you can adopt to draw almost everything from a realistic perspective.
With this book, you'll learn how to draw the spectacular landscapes and fantastic interiors that you find in comic books. It's one of the best books for comic artists to step up their game and improve their artwork significantly.
However, I do not recommend this book to total beginners that are just getting started. This is for those of you who have a decent bit of experience with perspective drawing and wish to start doing comic strips.
Author: David Chelsea | Publisher: Watson-Guptill | Edition: N/A | Publishing Date: October 1, 1997 | Number of Pages: 176 | Format: Paperback | Dimensions: 7.05" x 0.48" x 9.98" | Weight: 0.98lbs | Other Format/s: N/A
6. Perspective for Artists
For all those of you who are looking to learn drawing and concept art on a budget, Dover Art Instructions has some of the best resources for you to choose from. Perspective for Artists is among a few of the publisher's best books on perspective drawing with over 400 diagrams and illustrations spread throughout the book.
Rex Vicat Cole has managed to make the process of learning perspective a highly fascinating and enjoyable experience through this book. The book comes with concise instruction, clear and straightforward language, and tons of illustrations to make learning a lot of fun.
You'll come across over 80 illustrations of drawings by old masters, as well as the author himself that demonstrate how perspective is utilized practically. The illustration problems are so well depicted that you'd not even need to depend on the text references to solve them at all.
However, since the book was written over a hundred years ago, some of the illustrations and the language may feel outdated. Apart from that, this is one of the best books out there for beginners to get started with.
Author: Rex Vicat Cole | Publisher: Dover Publications | Edition: Republication Edition | Publishing Date: June 1, 1976 | Number of Pages: 288 | Format: Paperback | Dimensions: 5.38" x 0.56" x 8.58" | Weight: 0.65lbs | Other Format/s: Kindle
7. Creative Perspective for Artists and Illustrators
Creative Perspective for Artists and Illustrators by Ernest W. Watson is one of the more advanced books in this list that is targeted mainly towards more experienced artists. This is not a text that you'll be able to grasp without a strong knowledge of the fundamentals of Perspective drawing.
You might have noticed how most illustrators, animators, and cartoonists exaggerate perspective in their artworks. With this book, you know how you can master this art while still abiding by the rules of perspective drawing.
The author, Ernest W. Watson, is a master on the subject having taught at Pratt for over 20 years. His style of writing is very clear, and he knows how exactly to reach his students through this text.
In this book, he teaches some of the more complicated techniques that can be used to manipulate perspective while still being consistent throughout your art. It is full of diagrams and illustrations by real artists to help you get a firm understanding of the complexities of perspective.
Author: Ernest W. Watson | Publisher: Dover Publications | Edition: Republication Edition | Publishing Date: January 14, 1993 | Number of Pages: 160 | Format: Paperback | Dimensions: 8.35" x 0.39" x 10.94" | Weight: 0.76lbs | Other Format/s: Kindle
8. Perspective Without Pain
Perspective without Pain is one of Phil Metzger's best works, and also one of the simplest books on perspective drawing that you'll find in the market. This is one of the author's older works and is recommended for beginners looking for an introductory text on perspective drawing.
As the title suggests, 'Perspective without Pain' attempts to teach new artists how to create perspective without complicated equations, mechanical terms, and T-Squares. The book adopts a hands-on approach with simple instructions to teach students how to create depth and perspective in their drawings and paintings.
The earlier chapters cover different techniques that will help you impart a sense of depth to your paintings by gradually decreasing the distances between similar objects and then decreasing their sizes. You'll learn how to manipulate color and value and draw from any viewpoint.
It covers pretty much everything that you'd need to learn as a beginner, and a lot more!
Author: Phil Metzger | Publisher: North Light Books | Edition: Reprint Edition | Publishing Date: March 15, 1992 | Number of Pages: 144 | Format: Paperback | Dimensions: 8.5" x 0.47" x 11" | Weight: 1.25lbs | Other Format/s: Kindle
9. Basic Perspective Drawing: A Visual Approach
Basic Perspective Drawing by John Montague is one of the most comprehensive guides on perspective drawing that you can find. It is incredibly detailed and covers a vast array of techniques, concepts, and theories that artists of all skill levels can make use of.
If you're looking forward to learning perspective drawing right from the basics to some fairly advanced concepts, this is one of the best books to go for. There are loads of illustrations, apart from tons of links that lead you to video tutorials to supplement the theories written in the book.
The thing that makes this book so effective at teaching perspective is the step-by-step approach adopted by the author. The book progresses gradually from simple concepts to distinct tools and methods, illustrating how to create perspective one step at a time.
Apart from the written theories and illustrations, there are also plenty of exercises wherein the readers can shade and highlight sections to reinforce their understanding of the book's contents.
Author: John Montague | Publisher: Wiley | Edition: 6th Edition | Publishing Date: January 29, 2013 | Number of Pages: 288 | Format: Paperback | Dimensions: 8.4" x 0.8" x 10.8" | Weight: 1.7lbs | Other Format/s: Kindle
10. Theory and Practice of Perspective
This book by G.A. Storey is considered to be one of the best books on perspective drawing, covering almost everything that an artist should know regarding the subject. This comprehensive guide on perspective drawing will help you understand and examine the theories of perspective from all angles.
G.A. Storey has designed the scores of chapters in this book in a highly concise format, thus covering a wide range of topics on the subject. There are discussions on theories that are both scientific as well as informal, apart from over 300 diagrams and illustrations.
Once you're done with the text, you'll master how to reproduce distance, shape, shade, proportion, shadows, reflections, and other effects that enhance two-dimensional works with realistic and lifelike qualities.
Author: G.A. Storey | Publisher: Dover Publications | Edition: N/A | Publishing Date: February 10, 2006 | Number of Pages: 288 | Format: Paperback | Dimensions: 5.25" x 0.75" x 8.25" | Weight: 0.85lbs | Other Format/s: Kindle
What is the Best Book for Perspective?
Subsequent is a comparison table, meticulously organized to highlight the salient features of the finest books that impart perspective. The table dissects factors including the author, publisher, edition, date of publication, number of pages, format, dimensions, weight, and the presence of other formats.
Can I use these perspective books alongside other art courses?
Yes, you can use these perspective books alongside other art courses. In fact, combining the knowledge gained from these books with additional courses can help reinforce your understanding of the concepts and techniques, allowing you to develop a well-rounded skill set.
It is essential, however, to ensure that the courses you choose complement the books and provide consistent information so that the combined learning experience is effective and meaningful.
How can these perspective books improve my overall drawing skills?
These perspective books can improve your overall drawing skills by providing detailed explanations, step-by-step instructions, and exercises to teach you the techniques and principles of perspective drawing. By learning and mastering these concepts, you will be able to create a realistic sense of depth, distance, and dimension in your artwork, enhancing the overall quality and appeal of your drawings.
These books cater to various skill levels and artistic styles, so you can find one that suits your needs and helps you improve your perspective drawing abilities effectively.
Are there any books on the subject of perspective drawing specifically for comic book artists?
“Perspective! For Comic Book Artists” by David Chelsea is a book dedicated to comic artists who wish to learn perspective drawing and apply various techniques in their work. This book covers the fundamentals of perspective drawing and its application to comic strips, making it a great resource for artists in this specific field.
Are there any books that focus on teaching perspective drawing without complicated equations and technical terms?
“Perspective Without Pain” by Phil Metzger is a book that aims to teach new artists how to create perspective without complicated equations, mechanical terms, or T-squares. The book adopts a hands-on approach with simple instructions, making it an enjoyable way to learn perspective drawing.
Is it necessary to have prior knowledge of perspective drawing techniques before using advanced books like "Creative Perspective for Artists and Illustrators"?
Having a strong understanding of the fundamentals of perspective drawing is recommended before delving into more advanced books like “Creative Perspective for Artists and Illustrators.” These advanced books often discuss complex techniques and concepts that might be challenging for beginners without a solid foundation in the subject.
As we reach the end of our journey through the top perspective books for artists, it becomes clear that the ideal book depends on your skill level, focus, and preference. Each book has its unique strengths, catering to different needs and expertise levels.
From the above 10 best perspective books, here are the top three expert recommendations:
The book Perspective Made Easy is an ideal option for absolute beginners. Ernest R. Norling's simple and straightforward approach makes understanding and mastering perspective achievable for newcomers to the subject.
How to Draw by Scott Robertson is a good option for intermediate artists, focusing on in-depth concepts and teaching how to draw from your imagination while inventing perspective. This book will help you elevate your skills and polish your techniques.
Lastly, The Art of Perspective: The Ultimate Guide for Artists in Every Medium is the right choice for artists seeking a comprehensive guide. Phil Metzger's book offers an effective combination of easy-to-follow instructions and challenging exercises, accommodating artists of all levels in their journey toward mastery.
No matter the stage of your artistic growth, the perfect perspective book awaits you, ready to help unlock your full potential and spur your creativity to new heights. Happy drawing!
Are you fond of finishing Lego projects but hate when the blocks come apart? Don't worry, we have a solution for you.
Most of us have played with Lego blocks as kids and have good memories attached to them. There must have been times when we really liked a project but couldn't keep it together as the blocks got loose over time.
Luckily, the adhesives industry has advanced since then, and now we have a number of glue options that can bond Lego bricks easily. Having said that, the numerous options can make it challenging to pick the perfect product, especially for newbies.
Therefore, we thought of creating a list with some of the best glue for Legos available on the market to help you out. We have even included a handy buying guide so that you can narrow down your options with ease.
So, without further ado, let's get started.
Listed below are the 5 best glues for Legos from our list:
Gorilla® Super Glue: This glue stands out for its no-mess application due to its thick gel consistency and anti-clog cap, which prolongs its usability. It's fast-drying and the compact bottle design is comfortable to handle, however, using too much can result in visible gaps between Lego blocks.
Loctite® Super Glue: This brand is known for its versatile and durable formula that includes features such as precise application and fast drying. A standout feature is its rubber-toughened glue that remains flexible yet resistant to heavy impact and vibration, though the applicator needs frequent cleaning to prevent clogging.
GLUEMASTERS® Professional-Grade Adhesive: Noted for its industrial-grade formula that works well for various projects including Lego construction. The precise applicator and different viscosity levels make it versatile and highly effective. Use in well-ventilated spaces is recommended due to its strong formulation.
Rhino Glue®: Its fast drying time and clear result make it a great choice for Lego constructions. The extra-strong formulation creates a shock-resistant bond that ensures longevity, yet its strong smell might be off-putting to some users.
Krazy Glue® All-purpose glue: This glue offers a strong bond that remains effective over a long period. The precision applicator allows for a smooth application process, and the stay-fresh container ensures multiple uses. Product quantity in individual packs might be less for bigger projects.
To help keep your Lego masterpieces intact, there are various types of glue available in the market that are specifically designed for use with Legos. But with so many options out there, it can be tough to determine which one to use. That's why we've put together a list of the 7 best glues for Legos, to help you choose the right one for your needs.
1. Gorilla - Best for Precision
Let's start with a brand that most people know — Gorilla, a manufacturer that has consistently produced the best quality adhesives. And if you want glue for permanent Lego constructions, then this product is bound to be a good choice.
There are several things to like about this Gorilla super glue. But, first, we would like to divert your attention toward its consistency. Unlike any other liquid glue, this formula comes in a thick gel, making it easy to apply on vertical and horizontal Lego pieces. That said, the no-mess Gorilla glue makes the application process easy as the glue won't get everywhere.
Another key feature of this glue is its packaging. You can now hold the cleverly designed compact plastic bottle in your hand for long hours while working on an intricate project.
However, what probably stands out the most is the anti-clog cap, which keeps the Gorilla glue from drying out, thus allowing multiple uses with each bottle.
Furthermore, the Gorilla super glue gel takes between ten to forty-five seconds to set, based on the amount of glue used. And, as it gets fully cured in 24 hours, you wouldn't need to wait for days before handling the Lego construction.
Overall, this is one of the best permanent glues for Lego blocks. But, our only concern is that laying down a thick layer of Gorilla glue may leave a visible gap between the blocks. So, you need to be a bit more careful while using the glue and only apply a few drops.
What We Like
Easy to use
Dries transparent
Ideal for intricate projects
Versatile adhesive
What We Don't Like
Thick layer may increase the space between pieces
Adhesive Type: Cyanoacrylate | Cure Time: 10-30 sec. | Bond Strength: High | Heat Resistance: No | Gap Filling: No | Viscosity: Gel | Waterproof: No
2. Loctite - Best for Flexibility
For the last 50 years, Loctite has remained a leading brand of permanent glues available on the market. The best thing about this product is its innovative formula that promises versatility and durability. And, as it's widely available from different retailers, you won't have a hard time searching for this super glue.
To begin with, what pulled us towards this product was the packaging. We really liked the bottle design, which is equipped with squeezable sides to make the application process easier. What's more, the sides have grooves to help you maintain a better grip on the bottle. Not to mention how the precise nozzle lets you apply drops of glue even on the tiniest of Lego bricks.
However, the property that truly makes this permanent adhesive a worthy product is its unique formulation. That said, it is a rubber-toughened glue that allows bonds to be flexible while also giving it the ability to resist heavy impact and vibration.
Moreover, this glue dries clear, so you wouldn't need to worry about any traces showing through the Legos, especially between darker-colored pieces. On that note, the transparency provides a seamless look to the blocks when the right amount of glue is applied.
One of our only concerns with this glue is that the product may build up on the applicator if it isn't cleaned after every use. So, you should always remember to wipe off the applicator with a paper towel to prevent it from clogging. Also, refrain from keeping the bottle uncapped for long periods.
What We Like
Easy to dispense
No clamping required
Suitable for vertical Lego surfaces
Fast drying
What We Don't Like
Applicator needs to be cleaned after every use
Adhesive Type: Epoxy | Cure Time: 5 Minutes | Bond Strength: High | Heat Resistance: Yes (up to 300°F) | Gap Filling: Yes | Viscosity: Thick | Waterproof: Yes
3. GLUEMASTERS - Best for Industrial Use
Are you in search of a permanent glue that won't lose its bond even after years? If yes, you can try this adhesive from GLUEMASTERS, which boasts an industrial-grade formula. This makes the glue excellent for all kinds of projects, from Lego construction to fixing heavy-duty machines. So, let's check out its features.
If you are a hobbyist who likes to indulge in different projects, it's a must to have this GLUEMASTERS professional-grade adhesive. It comes in various viscosity levels to choose from, but we recommend the thick variant for Legos as it works well for vertical surfaces. Nevertheless, this glue is available in different quantities, including an 80 oz bottle.
However, the best feature of this glue has to be its precise applicator. The nozzle allows you to place the smallest drop of adhesive on the Lego blocks before attaching the plastic pieces. Additionally, the bottles are only filled to two-thirds of the total capacity to give you more control while applying the glue.
Besides its function as a glue for Legos, this professional-grade glue is quite versatile. You can use it to bond materials like rubber, ceramic, wood, metal, and other plastic objects. Needless to say, it's a helpful glue to have in your toolbox.
Although not a dealbreaker, its industrial formulation is only suitable for use in a well-ventilated space. The manufacturer also suggests using protective gear, like gloves and goggles, to keep yourself safe from coming in contact with the glue. Apart from this, we don't have any complaints about this permanent glue.
What We Like
Durable bond
Applicator doesn’t clog
Available in larger sizes
Versatile adhesive for different materials
What We Don't Like
Needs to be used in a well-ventilated area
Adhesive Type: Cyanoacrylate | Cure Time: 5-15 sec. | Bond Strength: High | Heat Resistance: No | Gap Filling: No | Viscosity: Thin | Waterproof: No
4. Rhino Glue
Have you been looking for cyanoacrylate-based hobby glues for permanently bonding your Lego construction? If so, this heavy-duty Rhino glue can be an excellent choice to finish the task as fast as possible without the Lego set falling apart. This glue is also part of the Pro series by Rhino, guaranteeing top-notch quality.
Right off the bat, what we liked about this glue was its fast drying time. Notably, the drying time is exceedingly swift compared to other permanent glues. Rhino categorizes this product as a tough-instant glue, and it does live up to the claims. So, while using this product, you won't need to wait for hours as the glue cures within 20 minutes.
Moreover, the Rhino glue dries completely clear. Hence, there's no need to worry about needing to paint over the adhesive to match the color of the Legos. And, as applying a few drops does the job, your Lego bricks won't have a thick layer of glue between them.
Furthermore, one of the critical features of this glue has to be the unique formula that makes it stronger than other glues. Because it's a maximum-strength adhesive, your Lego bricks will remain glued together permanently. Plus, the glue has been toughened to make it shock-resistant and maintain a strong bond under pressure.
When it comes to this glue, the only drawback we found was its strong smell. It can be a bit overwhelming for people who may be averse to the smell of adhesives. So, we recommend wearing a proper mask while using this glue to keep yourself from inhaling it.
What We Like
Strong bond
Easy application method
Dries rapidly
Shock-resistant
What We Don't Like
Strong smell
Adhesive Type: Cyanoacrylate | Cure Time: 10-30 sec. | Bond Strength: High | Heat Resistance: No | Gap Filling: Yes | Viscosity: Thin | Waterproof: Yes
5. Krazy Glue
If you didn't know already, Krazy Glue comes from the house of Elmer's, so we were really thrilled about trying this product. And, this super glue didn't fail our expectations when it came to gluing together Lego bricks, as it does the job quite smoothly. So, let's learn a bit about its features.
Are you tired of using superglues that seem to lose their bond over time? Don't worry, as Krazy Glue has got you covered. The strong all-purpose bond of this glue helps to keep the blocks attached even after a long time has passed. So, your Lego piece won't suddenly crumble apart after a few weeks after you accomplish the whole building process.
Having said that, for us, the best feature of the Krazy Glue was the applicator which is perfect for attaching Legos, particularly the tiny pieces. The precision tip places a small dab that's enough to give a strong bond. And, as the tube is compact, the application process is pretty smooth.
On top of that, the glue comes in a stay-fresh container, so it remains viable for multiple uses. However, do make sure to cap it properly after every use.
To be honest, this is one of the best glues for Legos that we have tried out. However, our only complaint is that the individual packs have very little product. So, you'll certainly need to buy more than one tube of the Krazy Glue for a bigger Lego art piece.
What We Like
Straightforward application
Strong adhesive
Compact-sized tube
Doesn’t dry out after single use
What We Don't Like
Less quantity
Adhesive Type: Cyanoacrylate | Cure Time: 10-30 sec. | Bond Strength: High | Heat Resistance: No | Gap Filling: No | Viscosity: Thin | Waterproof: No
6. Le-Glue Temporary Glue
Did you know that a kid made the Le-Glue non-permanent glue? Yes, this product was designed by Tripp Phillips when he was in the third grade. Unlike the other Lego glues mentioned by us, this one can be safely used by kids to create their own fun Lego projects. So, let's check it out.
First of all, let's focus on the use of the Le-Glue temporary glue. As you can understand, this glue is meant to bond the Legos temporarily. But, that doesn't mean your blocks will fall apart, as this glue from Le-Glue has a hold that's twelve times stronger than other temporary glues.
Moreover, it works for all kinds of building blocks, including Lego, Nano Blocks, and Mega Blocks. You just need to apply a small dab of this temporary glue on one block and press the other block on it for some time to get a reliable bond.
Furthermore, Le-Glue temporary glue comes in a non-toxic and solvent-free formula. And, it's made from all-natural ingredients. So, your kids can safely play with it for as long as they want without facing any health issues.
Plus, it's pretty easy to break the bond of the Le-Glue temporary glue as all you need to do is soak the blocks or project in warm water.
One of the only problems with this product is that the application can quickly get messy, especially for kids. As this glue comes in plastic packaging, you need to pour it into a container before starting your project. However, the good thing is that it's easy to get rid of this glue from your clothes or skin, and it doesn't leave any residue.
What We Like
Easy to use
Cures within 24 hours
Safe for use by kids
Dissolving glue is hassle-free
What We Don't Like
Application can get messy
Adhesive Type: Temporary | Cure Time: N/A | Bond Strength: Low | Heat Resistance: No | Gap Filling: No | Viscosity: Thick | Waterproof: No
7. BrickShield
Have you been looking for a semi-permanent glue that's easy to apply? If so, then check out this non-toxic and kid's safe glue from BrickShield that has been designed specifically for Legos. It comes in a handy spray bottle that lets you apply the glue directly on the bricks without needing any applicator.
Straight away, what we liked about this product was the packaging which makes applying the glue pretty easy. Do follow the directions specified by the brand, and you'll be able to glue Legos with precision. A nice thing about the bottle is that the kids face no problems in spraying, and it doesn't hurt their hands.
Moreover, this glue has been specially designed for plastic blocks of all kinds, including Lego. And, it drastically reduces the time needed to glue Legos for elaborate projects because of its fast application.
Another one of the key features of this temporary brick glue is its non-toxic and kid-safe formula. This is rarely seen in aerosol products made for kids, so we were pretty impressed with this adhesive.
Plus, the brand provides a 100% satisfaction guarantee with this spray glue. So, if, for some reason, you're not happy with this product, there's an option to contact customer care to receive a refund.
We would like you to know that this isn't really a drawback that's exclusive to this glue as it's common in all spray glue products. When you spray to apply the glue from a distance, there's bound to be some wastage. This means that it's always better to keep a backup of this glue to avoid running out of it.
What We Like
Ease of application
Dries and cures quickly
Glue washes off easily with soap and water
Dissolves in warm water
What We Don't Like
Does have wastage
Adhesive Type: Silicone | Cure Time: 24 Hours | Bond Strength: Medium | Heat Resistance: Yes (up to 500°F) | Gap Filling: Yes | Viscosity: Thick | Waterproof: Yes
What is the Best Glue For Legos?
This section provides a straightforward comparison of leading glues for Legos. The table below outlines key Lego adhesive specifications, including type, cure time, bond strength, heat resistance, gap-filling capability, viscosity, and waterproofing.
When choosing the best glue for Legos, you need to know some essential points that'll help to make the right decision. As gluing the Legos is often based on specific projects, skipping any points may leave you with completely unusable glue. So, let's check out these key points.
1. Viscosity
One of the most important features to look for in glue is its viscosity. A thin consistency may prove to be challenging while gluing Legos as it may cause the blocks to slide around. Hence, it's better to opt for glue with thick viscosity or a gel texture for attaching the Legos easily.
Moreover, thicker glues are easier to apply on vertical surfaces. As Lego projects can have a mix of vertical and horizontal planes, opting for glues with thick viscosity proves to be an excellent choice. And it makes the process less messy.
2. Permanence
Would you like the Lego set to have a permanent bond? If so, it's best to choose a glue that comes with the capacity to bond the surfaces permanently. While choosing a permanent glue, make sure to handle your Lego construction properly before it cures properly.
However, while researching the glue for Legos, we found out that some people prefer semi-permanent or non-permanent glue. These options are better to display the completed project for a certain period. It also leaves you with the choice to dismantle the Lego structure whenever needed.
On that note, while choosing a non-permanent or temporary adhesive, don't forget to check the process of breaking the bonds. Typically, the glues are water-soluble and dissolve in warm water, but some may require the application of certain chemicals to come off the Legos entirely.
3. Curing Time
Another point to check while looking for the best glue for Legos is the curing time. As you may know, there's a wait time for most glues when it comes to handling the pieces after attaching them. In the case of Legos, we want it to be as fast as possible to avoid detaching the pieces.
Now, the cure time or the total time taken for the glue to dry is usually between 24-48 hours, depending on the brand and consistency of the adhesives. Superglues take the least time, while white glue takes the longest. So, make sure not to forget about the curing time while ordering your Lego glue.
4. Ease Of Application
On searching for how to glue Legos, a common suggestion you'll notice tells you to look for a suitable glue. And, that's why it's important to choose a Lego glue that comes with ease of application.
You don't want it to be too messy, as it can make working with small blocks frustrating. At the same time, try to find a product with a precise applicator to avoid using too much glue.
Having said that, the application technique does vary depending on the project, so try to find a product that fits your demands from the adhesive.
Can glue be used on all types of Legos?
Most Lego types, such as regular and Duplo Legos, can be bonded with glue. Nevertheless, ascertain that the glue implemented is compatible with the plastic material constituting your Legos for seamless application.
How do I remove glue from Legos?
The process of glue removal from Legos can prove problematic, with the potential for damage to the plastic. Usage of a solvent like acetone or nail polish remover is a common approach, but caution is advised as these substances could render the plastic brittle.
Can I take apart Legos after using glue?
Taking apart glued Legos is typically not feasible, as the glue tends to create a permanent bond. Thus, you’re advised to think carefully before deciding whether to permanently adhere your Legos together using glue.
Is glue safe to use on Legos?
Applying glue to Legos is perfectly safe, however, it’s crucial to use glue explicitly designed for Lego use. This ensures the adhesive won't inflict damage to the plastic, maintaining its structural integrity.
Tower air conditioners often deliver better airflow when compared to regular air conditioners due to their narrow, tower-like design. They are usually placed on a round base that enables them to circulate air uniformly at 90 degrees.
With summers getting hotter and longer due to global warming, it’s becoming increasingly difficult to bear the summer heat. And what's worse than an exhausting summer day? Lack of a functional HVAC system.
To help you out, I have compiled a list of the nine best tower air conditioners to keep your room cool and save you from high power bills.
Listed below are the 5 best tower air conditioners from our list:
Air Choice Swamp Cooler: This product stands out for its double water tanks and bladeless fans, making it not only efficient in cooling larger rooms but also child-safe and easy to clean; moreover, its built-in timer and energy-efficient feature contribute to cost-saving.
VAGKRI Portable Air Conditioner: This air conditioner shines because of its instant cooling feature and in-built temperature sensors, making it the best choice for quick and efficient cooling; additionally, it comes with an LED control panel and an energy-saving eco-mode, enhancing user experience and energy efficiency.
Dreo Evaporative Air Cooler: Ideal for spacious areas, this air cooler excels with its multi-layer cooling mechanism and 80-degree oscillating fan blades, providing extensive and efficient cooling; its easy-to-clean design and adaptive humidifier feature amplifies its desirability.
TRUSTECH Evaporative Cooler: This cooler distinguishes itself for its energy efficiency, wide-angle cooling, and quiet function; its safe design, multi-functional oscillating fan, and timer add to the overall user comfort, making it the top choice for reducing power consumption without compromising on performance.
Paris Rhône Evaporative Cooler: As a multi-functional product, this cooler provides effective cooling with its 3-in-1 function, large water tank, and variety of fan speeds; accompanied by a 15-hour programmable timer and user-friendly settings, it offers exceptional operational convenience.
Here's the list of the 9 best tower air conditioners, designed to deliver better airflow and combat the scorching summer heat while keeping your energy costs in check.
1. Air Choice Swamp Cooler - Best For Greater Coverage
What I Like
Bladeless fans
Budget-friendly
Energy-efficient
In-built timer
Cools larger rooms
What I Don't Like
Faint water-level indicator
Air Choice designed the Swamp cooler with double water tanks to cater to a wide variety of people. This feature makes the product the best tower air conditioner for pregnant women and senior citizens, enabling them to enjoy the cool breeze.
You don't have to worry about those extra hot days. Add two ice boxes to each of the tanks, and the cooler will cool the warm air in no time. The air conditioning unit is a 43-inch tall cooler with 20-inch air outlets to handle larger wind coverage.
This portable AC also features oscillation, which further enables it to cool larger living rooms with ease. And if you wish to use it at night, you can set a timer on the cooler, after which it will turn off automatically. The shortest timer is an hour, and the longest is 12 hours, giving you sufficient time to cool the room without using it all night.
But if you're worried about catching a cold from prolonged use, the cooler does not filter cool air consistently, so this possibility is minimal. It is also energy efficient so that you can say goodbye to expensive power bills.
What makes this product one of the best portable air conditioners is its versatility, and it is also safe to use around kids. The fans do not comprise any blades, and you don't have to worry about your child getting injured. This also makes the fan much easier to clean and maintain, thus prolonging its lifespan.
Item weight: 16.17 pounds | Number of speeds: 3 | Wattage: 60 watts | Special Features: Oscillating and bladeless
2. VAGKRI Portable Air Conditioner - Best For Instant Cooling
What I Like
Instant cooling
Wide-angle airflow
In-built temperature sensors
24-hour timer
Readable LED control panel
What I Don't Like
Loud compressor
The VAGKRI portable air conditioner is multi-functional with a maximum airflow of 350 m/hour. This makes it easier for the portable AC to cool down hot air in large rooms in an instant. Its cooling features make this one of the best portable air conditioners for harsh summer days since it cools the room faster.
This portable air conditioner has three different settings: cool, dehumidifier, and fan mode, all of which provide dehumidification and ventilation. The product also features in-built temperature sensors that keep the overall temperature in check to cool a room accordingly.
Additionally, it comes with a Smart Eco mode and Auto mode that prove handy when the portable air conditioner is switched on for prolonged periods. This also minimizes your energy consumption and reduces the overall power bill.
The fan comprises three-speed settings along with auto-swing fan blades that cool a room in all directions. It also has an impressive 80-degree wide-angle airflow that can be adjusted to ensure air is flowing evenly throughout the room. Moreover, the LED panels are designed to be readable, even in dark rooms and from a distance.
When you don't want to get out of your bed or couch to turn the cooler on or off, you can use the remote that comes with the air conditioner. The remote control allows you to set a timer, with the maximum time being 24 hours, for a comfortable experience.
Plus, these portable AC units can be transported from your living room to your bedroom with the help of 4 universal wheels on it.
Item weight: 63.1 pounds | Number of speeds: 3 | Wattage: 1,200 watts | Special Features: Auto-mode, 3-in-1 mode, and LED touch control
3. Dreo Evaporative Air Cooler - Best Oscillating AC
What I Like
Powerful cooling systems
Optimized impeller wheels
Easy cleaning and maintenance
Adaptive humidifier
Little to no compressor noise
What I Don't Like
Priced high
The Dreo portable air conditioner can cool any corner of the floor space, irrespective of how far away it is. Delivering 1,300 RPM, this air cooler is a powerful machine to keep your home cool during hot days. The British Thermal Units (BTU) stands at 12000
It also comprises 80-degree oscillating fan blades that blow cool air in all directions, complemented by its multi-layer cooling mechanism. With an optimized impeller wheel and a cooling pad, the portable AC allows more airflow, which can be beneficial for extra humid and hot rooms. Generally, the airflow volume ranges up to 13,000 cubic feet per hour.
Cleaning a tower air conditioner can be a challenging task, but with the Dreo cooler, this process is much easier. The cooler's water tank is detachable and can be removed from the portable AC for cleaning.
Additionally, you can remove the cooling and rear grille to ensure that it is dust and debris-free. This keeps the air coming out clean and safe while prolonging the product's life due to regular maintenance.
In terms of comfort, this is the best portable air conditioner and passes the dry, warm air through the damp cooling pad, which ultimately absorbs the heat. As a result, the air that is circulated back into the room is much cooler and lowers the humidity levels.
You can also use the fan-only mode during the night since it is designed to be extremely quiet.
Item weight: 13.2 pounds | Number of speeds: 3 | Wattage: 50 watts | Special Features: Remote controlled, bladeless, oscillating, timer
4. TRUSTECH Evaporative Cooler - Best Energy-Efficient Cooler
What I Like
Safe Design
Energy-efficient
Wide-angle cooling
Oscillating fan
Quiet functioning
What I Don't Like
Maintenance is cumbersome
The TRUSTECH is the best portable air conditioner with an all-in-1 system that can be used as is or like an evaporative air cooler. It comprises a water curtain system that contains tanks with a capacity of 2 liters, along with two ice boxes. This allows the product to deliver efficient cooling and air circulation in a room size of up to 120 square footage.
Moreover, it absorbs the humidity in the air and helps achieve a comfortable temperature. The multi-functional oscillating fan also has 70 degrees of oscillation and can cool down large areas with high ceilings in no time. For better cooling, the air conditioners come with three different cooling modes(normal, natural, and sleep) as well as three different speeds (low, medium, and high).
If you plan on using the portable AC when you go to bed, you can set a timer for up to 8 hours. And you don't have to worry about any noises from the cooler as it is designed to be ultra-quiet. In terms of energy efficiency, TRUSTECH portable air conditioners are an affordable way to cool your room since they use less energy to function.
It is much more environment-friendly and can further reduce your power bills if placed near a window. It even reduces overall power consumption by 50% and ensures your home can stay cool without burning your pocket.
The product is lightweight and portable, so you can move your cooler from one place to another without any trouble. It is also bladeless and you won't have any safety concerns, especially when children operate it.
Item weight: 11.97 pounds | Number of speeds: 3 | Wattage: 65 watts | Special Features: Oscillation, bladeless, energy-efficient
5. Paris Rhône Evaporative Cooler - Best Multi-functional Cooler
What I Like
3-in-1 cooling system
Large 6L water tank
Four fan speeds
15 hours programmable timer
User-friendly settings
What I Don't Like
Loud fan noises
The Paris Rhône Portable air conditioner is a device that has all 3, fan, humidifier, and cooler, in one product. This 3-in-1 function along with the oscillating fans, keeps your room extremely cool and comfortable even in dry climates. It also regulates the humidity in the air, maximizes airflow, and lets out a cool, calming breeze, all with the help of a single portable AC.
To access the cool mode, all you have to do is use the ice packs that are provided or add cold water to the tank. This, in turn, enhances the cooler's cooling power and allows it to produce quick and large quantities of cool air that lowers the room temperature and provides relief.
The fan blades have an oscillation of 80 degrees and comprise 19-inch extra-long air outlets that can blow air across the room with a velocity of 25 square feet. This not only ensures maximum coverage but also allows you to stay cool even if you're seated at the opposite corner of the room.
The 6-liter water tank capacity makes this device a great portable air conditioner for prolonged use without needing refilling at frequent intervals. Additionally, you can adjust the fan speeds up to 4 different degrees and use any of the three wind modes included. If you wish to use the air cooler when you go to bed, you can set a timer for up to 15 hours.
These additional features can be accessed through the user-friendly control panel situated at the top of the device. And if you're a little too comfortable in your bed or couch to do that, simply use the provided remote to change the settings.
Item weight: 30 pounds | Number of speeds: 4 | Wattage: 65 watts | Special Features: 3-in-1 cooler, 80-degree oscillation, four wind speeds, 19-inch air outlet
6. Balko Portable Evaporative Cooler - Best Allergy-Friendly Cooler
What we like
Lightweight
Allergy-friendly
Portable ACs
Six wind effects
Removable cartridges
What I Don't Like
The water tank has to be refilled often
An energy-efficient cooling system that can dehumidify the room is a mandatory requirement in every house. This is where Blako, one of the best portable air conditioners, comes into play. All you need to do is pour some water into the device's water tank, and you're good to go. For more intense cooling, you can add a couple of frozen ice boxes, which enhances the cooling effect.
This portable AC is beneficial if you have larger living rooms since it is a windowless air conditioner. Additionally, its 70-degree vertical and horizontal oscillation further ensures your better-moving air and that your room can stay cool no matter how large it is. The cooler comes with two different modes (natural and cooling) and three (low, medium, and high) fan speeds. However, what makes this product different is its six wind effects that you can control according to your needs.
The Balko cooler is by far the lightest cooler compared to other models, and its exterior linear design adds to its lightweight nature. Unlike other portable ACs, these portable air conditioners comprise an A4-sized body, which takes up little to no space in your room.
To add to the portability factor, the portable ACs have 360-degree wheels on all four ends, which makes moving around much easier. If you require functional portable ACs that can not only cool your home efficiently but also look good with your furniture, this is the product for you.
The cooler also consists of a thick cartridge that purifies and allows you to breathe fresh air. Additionally, these cartridges are removable and can be washed to ensure safety. This feature, particularly, can be pretty helpful for people with allergies pertaining to dust and certain bacteria.
Item weight: 10.36 pounds | Number of speeds: 3 | Wattage: 60 watts | Special Features: Adjustable speed, Auto shut-off
7. Costway Portable Evaporative Cooler - Best For Low-Noise Operation
What I Like
Easy to operate
Smart touch display
Silent functioning
Personalized cooling effects
Bladeless and stable design
What I Don't Like
The timer limit is 9 hours
Ice boxes can be hard to remove
With a 7-degree oscillating function, the Costway portable air conditioner provides even and effective airflow control throughout the room. For further enhanced cooling, you can use the evaporative cooler along with an HVAC system or centralair conditioner, which can not only save energy but also increase the effect of cooling. The device comprises three wind modes as well as three fan speeds to choose from.
The modes range from natural, normal, and sleep, whereas the speed settings range from low, medium, and high. This way, you can personalize the cooler to your preferred settings and enjoy efficient cooling effects. To access the cooling system, all you have to do is add some water to the tank and press the "cooling" button. This will let out a stream of cool air along with regulated humidity that can make you feel comfortable.
Though this is a powerful air conditioning unit, it runs pretty slow and quiet, with a noise level of less than 45 DB, close to white noise. This ensures you get a good night's rest without being woken up by sweat or loud compressor noises. Additionally, to further improve your sleep, you can set a timer for the cooler to turn off. This cools the room in such a way that you can go to bed in a thoroughly cooled room. The maximum timer setting is, however, 9 hours.
Costway is one of the best portable air conditioners since they are relatively user-friendly, with smart touch panels, an LED display, and a remote control. And if you're worried about using the cooler near your kids or pets, you can do so without worry thanks to its bladeless design. To improve safety, the air conditioning unit comprises a stable round base that prevents any tumbling over.
Item weight: 11 pounds | Number of speeds: 3 | Wattage: 45 watts | Special Features: Portable units, lightweight, bladeless, oscillating
8. HIFRESH Evaporative Air Cooler - Best Personalized Cooling Effects
What I Like
Personalized Cooling
Functional remote controls
User-friendly
12-hour programmable timer
Noiseless functioning
What I Don't Like
Unclear water-level marker
An economical solution to cooling your living space is needed, and the HIFRESH evaporative cooler provides just that. This 80W portable air conditioner allows your room to cool in less than 3 seconds so that you can say goodbye to those extra hot, sweaty days. It can also be used alongside a central air conditioner for optimal cooling. Additionally, it does not require any exhaust hoses or windows to be installed.
This mode enables you to get sound, comfortable sleep without waking up from loud, cooler noises. To further ensure sound sleep, you can set a timer up to 12 hours before bed and wake up feeling comfortable and refreshed.
These portable ACs feature an upgraded motor that blows gentle air into your room and regulates humidity as well as airflow. And don't worry about getting out of bed or the couch to change the settings. You can simply use the remote control that is equipped with the cooler. This remote has a sensitive response and ultra-long sensing distance so you can be comfortable in every aspect.
However, what makes this product different is its personalized cooling effects. With modes such as normal, nature, sleep, and cool, you can personalize the cooling effect in any way you want. Additionally, the fan comprises three speeds, which further increases the personalization aspect. Be it for a casual day, a powerful breeze, an after-workout break, or hot summer days, you can customize the cooling effects accordingly.
Item weight: 12.82 pounds | Number of speeds: 3 | Wattage: 80 watts | Special Features: Dual control, 12-hour timer, oscillation, 1-Gallon water tank
9. TRUSTECH Portable Air Cooler - Best For Easy Storage
What I Like
Compact design
Lightweight and portable
Rapid cooling
Bladeless
Swing function
What I Don't Like
Complicated controls
The TRUSTECH is a 3-in-1 portable air conditioner that is bladeless and comes with the latest cooling technology. So, you can bid adieu to those hot summer days and warm air. These portable air conditioners can be used either as a fan or for humidification purposes, which can cool down and humidify the air in just 5 seconds. They can also be used alongside a central air conditioner for better cooling.
Apart from the impressive cooling power, this product is extremely safe to use and child/pet friendly. Since these portable ACs are bladeless, you won't have to worry about your toddler or pet getting hurt accidentally, especially when you're not around. Furthermore, it is designed to not blow dust into the environment, thus making it a more environmentally sustainable alternative compared to other models of air conditioning.
The fan covers a large portion of your room and dissipates cool air to each and every corner, even if it has high ceilings. This is made possible by its swing function, which directs air in various directions. In terms of customization, this portable air conditioner offers three-speed settings that you can choose based on your needs.
The timer on the fan can be set to a maximum of 8 hours, which results in a significant reduction in your overall energy consumption and power bill. This timer feature also lets you get a good night's rest without having to wake up in the middle to turn the fan off. It can also be cleaned relatively quickly with the help of a soft cloth.
However, what makes it stand out is its compact form. This smaller unit is easier to store away when not in use and move around if and when needed.
Item weight: 14.77 pounds | Number of speeds: 3 | Wattage: 65 watts | Special Features: Portable, Bladeless, Compact
What is the Best Tower Air Conditioner?
This section presents a comparison of leading tower air conditioners. The table below outlines essential product specifications, including item weight, number of speeds, wattage, and special features
Before you get a tower air conditioning unit, there are some factors you have to consider to ensure you get a product based on your needs. These factors include:
Blades vs. Bladeless
Though tower air conditioners look much more complicated than a regular fan with a circular head, both these portable air conditioners rely on blades. Even the most popular bladeless fan, like the Dyson Tower fan, still has blades.
The only reason you cannot see them is that they are covered in a casement. However, these blades aren't as prominent as regular blades, which means they do not need constant cleaning. And even if you do clean, it can be done so easily unlike regular fans where it can be cumbersome to reach each individual blade.
Apart from the occasional, slight noise levels from the fan, you may hear squealing noises, especially when the air conditioning unit is switched on. This is a sign that your device is in need of repair or further maintenance to function smoothly.
Sound Output
This is an especially important factor to consider when you're using a tower air conditioner for your bedroom. You can pay attention to the decibel rating of the unit since it corresponds to noise levels that the device omits. Generally, people opt for coolers and fans with a maximum decibel rate of 50 and 60 decibels. This noise level is quite similar to that of a normal conversation or white noise. If the air conditioning system is any louder than this, it can be too distracting.
CFM Rating
CFM or cubic feet meter is what determines how well a fan can maneuver air in the room. When the CFM ratings are higher, it generally means they do a better job at moving the air. However, do remember to take into consideration the oscillation of the fan. Fan blades oscillate, which further help the portable AC units dissipate air evenly throughout the room instead of in a single direction.
Oscillation
Oscillation determines how the airflow is distributed throughout the room. CFM generally measures the strength of the airflow, whereas oscillation ensures that the air is dissipated in more than just a particular direction. Though most fans come preoccupied with oscillation, consider the supported oscillation angle, the overall length of the tower's fan portion, and the number of grates provided.
Additional Features
To make the air conditioning more intuitive, tower fans come equipped with several additional features. The most common ones are two fan speeds or more, oscillating, swing, and static positioning modes, as well as added air purifiers and dehumidifiers.
If you plan on using the air conditioning generally during night-time, you'll need a timer and remote control options. Additionally, you would also need a fan that has a night mode and does not have bright LED displays that cannot be turned off.
Are tower air conditioner units considered portable?
Tower air conditioners are differentiated from portable air conditioners as they consist of two units, one situated inside and the other outside. The external unit is devised to disperse warm air outward and is linked to the internal unit via a conduit. The mobility of a tower air conditioner is consequently limited by the length of the connecting hose.
Do tower air conditioners outperform air coolers?
Indeed, tower air conditioners generally outshine air coolers due to their design resembling a tower and their high structure fostering improved airflow. Moreover, their placement on a revolving base enables them to disseminate air throughout a room at a 90-degree angle. In addition to that, they exhibit an attractive and stylish outlook, adding a pleasing touch to indoor decoration.
How do tower air conditioners operate?
Tower air conditioners incorporate cooling towers, which employ evaporative cooling to diminish the temperature of a continuous water stream. Cooling towers are devised in a large box-like structure to maximize evaporation, attributed to the presence of materials such as PVC plastic sheets internally. These sheets amplify the surface area, boosting evaporation and thereby enhancing cooling.
What are the various types of cooling towers used in air conditioners?
Three principal types of cooling towers utilized in air conditioners, categorized based on their passage of water or air, include crossflow, counterflow, and hyperbolic towers. Furthermore, two additional types of cooling towers are delineated according to the airflow: passive draft and induced draft.
Which cooling tower is deemed the most efficient?
Among cooling towers, counterflow systems are considered the most effective as they utilize induced draft technology. Contrarily, crossflow systems employ forced draft towers to distribute water at 90-degree angles to the airflow, whereas counterflow systems disseminate water in direct correspondence to the airflow.
CR123A batteries have become a primary power source for wireless devices and various home devices such as alarm systems. Since CR123A batteries are extremely compact and powerful, they fit easily in all types of alarm systems.
Nowadays, many alarm manufacturers are making alarm sensors and systems that run on CR123A batteries.
Notably, alarm systems that use standalone batteries don’t require any wired connection. As such, you can easily place them wherever you want without any hassle. Besides, CR123A batteries can be used by many appliances, such as web cameras, smart doorbells, and others.
So, in this guide, we have listed some of the best CR123A batteries for alarm systems on the market. So, let’s begin!
Listed below are the 5 best CR123A batteries from our list:
Duracell CR123A 3V Lithium Battery: This lithium battery stands out with a 10-year shelf life and compatibility with a variety of wireless devices, besides being offered by a trusted brand.
Panasonic Lithium 3V Batteries: These affordable, efficient batteries by Panasonic feature a 10-year shelf life and are versatile enough to support most household appliances.
Voniko CR123A Lithium Batteries: Known for their robust safety measures and leak-free design, these batteries also offer operation in extreme temperatures and are environmentally friendly.
Rapthor CR123A 3V Lithium Batteries: These high-capacity batteries provide more power than regular batteries; they feature overheat and overcurrent protection, carry a 10-year shelf life, and come with a one-year free replacement guarantee.
AHJ Cr123A 3V Lithium Battery: Providing a stable output for high-current appliances, these batteries outperform regular alkaline batteries by lasting three to five times longer and come with multiple layers of protection.
1. Duracell CR123A 3V Lithium Battery
Duracell is one of the most trusted brands on the list since it designs some of the best batteries in the industry. The Duracell CR123A 3V lithium battery is designed to be compatible with a wide range of wireless devices, such as lighting equipment, wireless sensors, alarm sensors, security systems, photography devices, etc.
In addition, it has a shelf life of 10 years, which is rare to find in modern batteries. As such, you can easily store extra units for a long period without having to worry about them getting spoiled.
Another thing worth noting is that the batteries come in packages of 1, 2, 4, 6, and 12. Thus, you can stock up as much as you want for emergencies. Also, the battery comes in a standard battery size which makes it a universal power source.
Type: Lithium Ion | mAh: 1550 | Voltage: 3
2. Panasonic Lithium 3V Batteries
If you are looking for something affordable and efficient, then you should try the Panasonic BAT002 3V lithium batteries. Apart from making batteries, Panasonic also designs various household appliances such as TVs, air conditioners, music systems, and many more. The ultimate goal of the brand is to bring a smile to every customer’s face through innovative and high-performance products.
The Panasonic BAT002 3V Lithium batteries have an average shell life of 10 years, so you can store them for future use. Moreover, each battery is capable of delivering 3.0 volts and has a size of 0.67” Dia X 1.36” H, making it compatible with most household appliances. The brand also offers a reliable after-sales service if you face any problems while using the batteries.
Type: Lithium Ion | mAh: 1400 | Voltage: 3
3. Voniko CR123A Lithium Batteries
The Voniko CR123A lithium batteries come in a pack of 6, with each battery weighing around 3.84 ounces. One of the things we liked about these batteries is the RoHS certification. As such, each battery has PTC protection, circuit overcurrent protection, and an intelligent voltage surge safeguard to prevent accidents. This also protects your home appliances from getting destroyed.
Another handy feature of these batteries is the leak-free design. Therefore, you can store them anywhere without having to worry about them leaking in the future. Besides, the batteries can operate in extreme temperatures ranging from -40℉ to 140℉. Plus, the battery is environmentally friendly since it lasts longer and doesn’t cause any environmental hazards.
Type: Lithium Ion | mAh: 1500 | Voltage: 3
4. Rapthor CR123A 3V Lithium Batteries
Next on our list is Rapthor, a brand that specializes in producing high-capacity batteries. Each CR123A 3V lithium battery has a high capacity of 1650mAh, which is more than a regular battery can offer. As such, it can deliver 10% more power than a normal battery. Apart from that, the batteries have an in-built PTC protection design which prevents the batteries from getting damaged by overheating and overcurrent.
The batteries also have a low discharge rate which gives them a shelf life of 10 years. Thus, you can easily store extra units for future use. However, you must ensure to store them in the right temperature condition given by the brand.
Unlike most brands that don’t offer a warranty for the battery, Rapthor offers a one-year free replacement if the batteries show any defect. You can also ask for a refund if you are unsatisfied with the product.
Type: Lithium Ion | mAh: 1650 | Voltage: 3
5. AHJ Cr123A 3V Lithium Battery
AHJ CR123A batteries have one of the most steady voltage curves when it comes to delivering stable power for high-current home appliances and devices. As such, the batteries last three to five times longer than regular alkaline batteries. Besides, they are compatible with a wide range of appliances such as medical equipment, toys, smoke detectors, alarm systems, digital cameras, and more.
Each battery comes with multiple layers of protection which protects them from overheating, overpressure, and over-voltage. They also offer protection against corrosion, leakage, and explosion, making them safe for long-term use.
Type: Lithium Ion | mAh: 1600 | Voltage: 3
6. Enegitech CR123A Non-Rechargeable Batteries
Enegitech is an eco-friendly brand that produces reliable power sources that don’t cause any harm to the environment. Each battery has a capacity of 1600mAh, which is more than a standard battery can offer. The low self-discharge feature ensures that the cell doesn’t discharge quickly while storing them. This further ensures that the batteries last longer without losing any power.
Apart from that, the battery has a smart protection chip that provides advanced protection against power surges and overheating. The brand also offers a small family comic on the packaging, which provides interesting facts about the batteries through funny images and jokes.
Type: Lithium Ion | mAh: 1600 | Voltage: 3
7. EEMB CR123A Batteries
EEMB is a well-known battery manufacturer that has provided some of the best battery and power solutions since 1995. It designs a wide range of products ranging from lithium batteries to rechargeable batteries. In fact, EEMB is one of the best battery manufacturers on the global market.
The batteries have a reliable shelf life of 10 years without having a memory effect. This ensures that batteries don’t lose much power while staying ideal. Besides, each battery has received a UL certification, making them safe for household use. Additionally, the batteries have a high energy density core which allows them to deliver three to five times more power than regular alkaline batteries.
Type: Lithium Ion | mAh: 1700 | Voltage: 3
8. Bevigor CR123A 3V Lithium Batteries
Bevigor CR123A 3V lithium batteries have a capacity of 1500 mAh, which makes them ideal for various power-intensive home appliances such as security systems, flashlights, and many more. In fact, these batteries can last five times longer than normal alkaline batteries. Apart from that, the batteries have a self-discharge rate of less than 2% per year.
As such, the batteries will have plenty of power to spare even if you use them after a couple of years or so. Similarly, the new winding structure ensures that the batteries are protected against corrosion and leaking.
Type: Lithium Ion | mAh: 1500 | Voltage: 3
What is the Best CR123A Battery for Alarm Systems?
This section presents a comprehensive comparison of the top-performing CR123A batteries tailored for alarm systems. The ensuing table gives you each product specification such as battery type, milliampere-hour (mAh) rating, and voltage specifications.
Nowadays, most household electronic products and modern gadgets are dependent on CR123A batteries since they are a portable power source. Some devices that require CR123A batteries are music players, cameras, high-density flashlights, and home security systems. Moreover, these batteries are extremely efficient and capable of delivering high performance while being small and compact.
However, each battery type delivers a different performance, which makes it tough to choose the right one for the alarm system. As such, we have listed a few factors that can help you find the best batteries according to your requirements.
1. Battery Life
While choosing CR123A batteries for the alarm system, you should always ensure that they are durable and have long battery life. Most brands provide all the necessary information related to the battery life on the packaging. As such, you should always check the packaging to see which brand offers a longer battery life.
A longer-lasting battery is not only durable but also great value for money since you don’t have to replace it frequently. One of the best ways to check a battery life is to see the power rating score on the packaging. Batteries with high power rating scores can serve a longer lifespan without causing any hazard or harm to your home appliance.
In fact, some devices mention which power rating score batteries they require to run efficiently. For example, high power ratingCR123A batteries are ideal for Arlo cameras. Thus, you should always choose the one that is compatible with your device.
2. Affordability
Apart from being durable and long-lasting, you should ensure that the batteries are affordable. If the brand sets a high price for the batteries, you might not be able to purchase multiple batteries for your home appliances and electronic products. Nevertheless, you should never compromise by purchasing a cheaper battery with a poor power rating or short battery life.
But, if a brand offers more units for a slightly lower capacity, you take the deal since you can power more devices through one set of batteries. The excess batteries that are left out can be stored and used later on when old batteries run out. Such sets are actually more affordable since you can purchase a bunch of batteries at an affordable price.
3. Shelf Life
Another important factor to consider is the shelf life of the battery. This is especially important if you are planning to store excess batteries for a longer period. In general, CR123A batteries are well known for having a long shelf life since they don’t go out easily. As such, the backup supplies can stay ideal on the shelf for about 10 years or so.
In addition, high-capacity batteries are capable of lasting for a decade without having any drops in performance. On that note, it is advisable to check the shelf life of the batteries if you are planning to stock them for a long time. Some brands even offer rechargeable batteries, but they tend to be a bit more expensive than regular CR123A batteries.
Just ensure that the excess units are stored in a cool and dry area since excess heat and humidity can damage the cells within the battery.
4. Eco-Friendly Design
Lastly, you should always consider purchasing an eco-friendly product that doesn’t harm or cause any harmful pollution. Most brands prefer to design eco-friendly batteries since they cause less pollution and help to bring down e-waste significantly. Instead of purchasing use-and-throw batteries, you can always opt for rechargeable batteries that can last for a long time.
Normally, a regular dead battery contains harmful chemicals such as lead, lithium, cadmium, and more, which can be hazardous to your health as well as the environment. Fortunately, a lot of brands are now shifting to more sustainable and eco-friendly alternatives.
What is a CR123A battery?
A CR123A battery is a type of lithium primary battery commonly used in photographic equipment, flashlights, and home security systems due to its high energy output and long shelf life.
What appliances use CR123A batteries?
CR123A batteries are commonly used in a variety of devices such as cameras, flashlights, smoke detectors, alarm systems, and various medical equipment.
How long does a CR123A battery last?
The lifespan of a CR123A battery can vary depending on usage, but on average, it tends to have a shelf life of 10 years.
Are CR123A batteries rechargeable?
Typical CR123A batteries are not rechargeable. However, there is a rechargeable version of this battery known as an RCR123A or a 16340 battery. Always ensure the device can accommodate rechargeable versions before use to avoid damage.
What is the voltage output of a CR123A battery?
A standard CR123A battery outputs 3 volts.
Can different brand CR123A batteries be mixed in a device?
It is generally not recommended to mix batteries of different brands, types, or levels of charge in a device, as this might lead to leakage or damage.
What makes a battery like the Rapthor CR123A stand out?
The Rapthor CR123A stands out due to its high capacity of 1650mAh, which delivers more power than a standard battery, and its built-in protection design against overheating and overcurrent.
What are the safety measures for using CR123A batteries?
When using CR123A batteries, one should avoid short-circuiting, disassembling, or disposing of them in fire to prevent potential hazards. Also, brands like Voniko and AHJ CR123A batteries provide additional safety features like protection against overheating, overpressure, and over-voltage.
One classic way to make your living space more elegant is by hanging up some photos on the wall.
It may be family photos or some paintings by a local artist. In any case, what you want is to put the frames in the correct manner. You want the frames to be leveled correctly and evenly.
Now the task at hand may be trickier than you’d imagine. And when you are renovating your entire living place, and have dozens of photos to put up around the house, it can quickly escalate to a cumbersome job.
What makes this job a little more convenient are laser levels. These devices make level checking an extremely straightforward job. You won’t ever need to walk back after putting up a frame, tilt your head, and judge if it’s put the right way. Laser levels will make sure that the job is done perfectly every time.
But laser levels come in several varieties and it can be a difficult job to get the right one. Don’t sweat it though because we’ve come up with some of the best laser levels in the market for you!
Let’s get started, shall we?
Listed below are the 5 best best laser levels from our list:
Bosch GLL 1P Laser Level: Renowned for its user-friendliness and bright, accurate projections, this device can be affixed easily due to its versatile mounting accessories and serves as a spirit level too, making it suitable for level and alignment tasks, yet its working range and suitability for outdoor use could be improved.
Qooltek Multipurpose Laser Level: Exceptionally compact and robust, this laser level features triple-positioned leveling bubbles along with a measuring tape and ruler, providing versatile usability and excellent operation, though the dimness of the laser light restricts its application to indoor use.
Bosch GLL40-20G: Noted for its enhanced visibility and Visimax technology allowing up to 40 feet of line laser visibility, the GLL40-20G Self-Leveling Cross-Line Laser projects horizontal, vertical, and cross lines, equipping it for various indoor tasks, yet struggles with visibility in sunny outdoor conditions.
Johnson Level & Tool 40-6603: Designed to simplify leveling tasks like fixture installations and picture hanging, this laser level offers compatibility with common tripods and delivers impressive accuracy, despite lacking a comprehensive instruction manual and not being suited for outdoor use.
BLACK+DECKER BDL190S: This laser level, appreciated for its lightweight structure, comes with a hanging pin and a stud sensor, making it easily usable without a tripod and suitable for detecting studs, metal, and live A/C wires, despite lacking a vertical laser feature.
Whether you're a professional contractor or a DIY enthusiast, here's the list of the best laser levels that will help you hang pictures perfectly straight and level every time.
1. Bosch GLL 1P Laser Level - Best Overall
The Bosch GLL 1P is a laser level designed and manufactured by the well-known company Bosch, which is renowned for delivering high-quality tools and equipment to homeowners and professionals alike. In this comprehensive review, we'll discuss what makes this laser level stand out from the competition and what could be improved, all to help you make an informed decision.
What we found endearing about the Bosch GLL 1P was its simplicity, making it very user-friendly. This laser level comes with versatile mounting accessories that facilitate an easy setup. Its mounting thread enables compatibility with most universal tripods, and it also includes a magnetic mounting base for added versatility.
The projected light of the Bosch GLL 1P is bright and sharp, ensuring accuracy and precision as you work. It also excels in ease of use, as changing batteries and general handling of the tool are incredibly convenient.
Notably, this laser level also doubles as a spirit level with the inclusion of two vial bubbles. This feature makes it a valuable asset, even for projects unrelated to hanging picture frames or other leveling tasks.
Despite having many commendable features, the Bosch GLL 1P could benefit from a longer working range and suitability for outdoor use.
What We Like
High-quality design and manufacturing
Simple operation and straightforward use
Features spirit levels for added functionality
What We Don't Like
Limited working range and unsuitable for outdoor applications
Type: Point | Accuracy: +/- 1/8 in at 33 ft | Laser Color: Red | Laser Class: 2 | Self-leveling: No | Battery Life: 15 hours
2. Qooltek Multipurpose Laser Level - Best Multipurpose Option
The Qooltek Multipurpose Laser Level is a versatile device designed for a range of projects. It offers multiple features such as triple-positioned leveling bubbles, a fine-tuned measuring tape, and a sideways ruler for quick measurements. This review will cover our experience with this laser level, discussing the aspects we liked and the areas that could be improved.
We appreciated the Qooltek Multipurpose Laser Level for several reasons. Its compact and durable design meant that handling this tool was a breeze, contributing to its overall ease of use. Its straightforward operation also makes it a favorite, with only a simple on and off switch required.
The triple-bubble spirit level works excellently, making it suitable for any DIY project in your home as well as professional endeavors, such as carpentry or construction.
In our experience, this laser level performs well across multiple services. The included 8-foot measuring tape proves to be a handy addition, although it might require an extra hand for uneven surfaces.
The main downside of the Qooltek Multipurpose Laser Level is the dimness of the laser light, making this device only suitable for indoor use.
What We Like
Compact, sturdy, and well-built design
Efficient triple-bubble spirit level
Equipped with an 8-foot measuring tape
What We Don't Like
Dim laser light, best suited for indoor use only
Type: Line | Accuracy: +/- 1/8 in at 30 ft | Laser Color: Red | Laser Class: 2 | Self-leveling: Yes | Battery Life: 12 hours
3. Bosch GLL40-20G - Best for Enhanced Visibility
Bosch is recognized as one of the top laser-level brands due to its durable and task-specific designs. The Bosch GLL40-20G laser level can help you complete various tasks at home quickly and efficiently.
The GLL40-20G Self-Leveling Cross-Line Laser is equipped with Bosch's Visimax technology, providing up to 40 feet of line laser visibility in standard working conditions. With simple laser setup modes, it can project horizontal, vertical, and cross lines to help with tasks like hanging pictures, installing curtain rods, aligning cabinet doors, and other interior decorations. It has a Smart Pendulum Self-Leveling System, making it an easy-to-use tool with better accuracy than traditional spirit levels.
Although the Bosch GLL40-20G works well for indoor tasks, it struggles outdoors on sunny days as the laser line becomes less visible.
What We Like
2x Brighter green beam laser lines
IP54 rated to withstand rain and dust in tough job site conditions
Long laser line range, accurate and easy to use
Flexible mounting device for quick setup
What We Don't Like
The laser line isn't clearly visible outdoors
Type: Cross-line | Accuracy: +/- 5/16 in at 30 ft | Laser Color: Green | Laser Class: 2 | Self-leveling: Yes | Battery Life: 15 hours
4. Johnson Level & Tool 40-6603
The Johnson Level & Tool 40-6603 Self-Leveling Cross-Line Laser Level provides an easy and efficient way to hang pictures and align-items horizontally and vertically, making it perfect for various indoor leveling tasks.
This laser level is designed for a range of indoor leveling projects, such as fixture installations, wall picture hanging, and cabinetry. Its compatibility with most common tripods thanks to a 1/4"-20 thread makes it even more versatile. This tool was invaluable during a bathroom renovation, helping complete work that would have been time-consuming using a bubble level.
The Johnson 40-6603 doesn't come with an instruction manual, which means relying on online tutorials to get started. Also, it's not suitable for outdoor use.
What We Like
A 3/16-inch accuracy with a 30 feet laser range
Designed in a compact, durable build quality
Manual mode for non-level applications like stairs
What We Don't Like
A tripod isn't included in the package
Type: Cross-line | Accuracy: +/- 1/8 in at 30 ft | Laser Color: Red | Laser Class: 2 | Self-leveling: Yes | Battery Life: 12 hours
5. BLACK+DECKER BDL190S
The BLACK+DECKER BDL190S BullsEye Auto-Leveling Interior Line Laser/Stud is designed to be lightweight and sturdy, perfect for various indoor leveling tasks.
The BDL190S is equipped with a hanging pin, allowing for easy use without a tripod. It features a horizontal laser line mode and a stud sensor feature, making it suitable for hanging pictures and detecting metal, live A/C wires, wood, and studs during interior decor projects. The LCD digital screen makes the process even quicker and simpler.
The lack of a vertical laser may be a deal-breaker for some DIYers or interior remodelers, but the stud sensor feature makes the BDL190S suitable for basic indoor leveling and alignment tasks.
What We Like
An auto-leveling laser that works well
Convenient stud finder features
Built-in a compact, durable design
Inbuilt stud finder
What We Don't Like
Doesn't include plumb/vertical laser mode
Type: Line | Accuracy: +/- 3/16 in at 20 ft | Laser Color: Red | Laser Class: 2 | Self-leveling: Yes | Battery Life: 6 hours
What is the Best Laser Level for Hanging Pictures?
This section provides a detailed comparison of laser levels tailored for precision picture hanging. The following table meticulously scrutinizes critical attributes including type, accuracy, laser color, laser class, self-leveling capability, and battery life.
Buying Guide for the Best Laser Levels for Hanging Pictures
A laser level is an indispensable tool for hanging pictures with precision, ensuring your pictures are aligned correctly on your walls, creating a neat and clutter-free appearance. To help you pick the best tool for your needs, we've put together this comprehensive buying guide, outlining the essential factors to consider when purchasing a laser level for hanging pictures.
1. Type of Laser Level
There are primarily three types of laser levels available:
Dot Lasers: Emit a single point or multiple points in different directions. These are best suited for basic leveling tasks.
Line Lasers: Project a straight line across a surface. Perfect for tasks such as hanging pictures, installing shelves, and aligning tiles.
Rotary Lasers: Emit a 360-degree horizontal or vertical line. While they offer more versatility, they may be overkill when it comes to hanging pictures.
For most picture-hanging tasks, a line laser level is an ideal choice.
2. Accuracy
Accuracy is crucial when using a laser level. Look for models that offer an accuracy of ±1/8 inch or better at a range of 30 feet. A more accurate laser level ensures your pictures will hang straight and level.
3. Range
Check the maximum distance at which the laser level can project a visible line. While hanging pictures inside your home may not require a vast range, it's wise to select a laser level with at least a 30-foot range to account for larger rooms or future projects.
4. Battery Life
Consider how long the laser level can operate on a single battery charge. Most laser levels utilize AA or AAA batteries or come with rechargeable lithium-ion batteries. Longer battery life means less frequent replacement or charging, ensuring your projects won't be interrupted.
5. Mounting Options
A secure and stable mounting option is crucial. Most laser levels offer a mounting thread compatible with a standard camera tripod. Others include built-in wall mounts or come with a separate mounting bracket. Some even have magnetized mounts or clamps, allowing easy attachment to metallic surfaces.
6. Indoor vs. Outdoor Visibility
If you plan on using your laser level outdoors, consider one that's visible in sunlight or comes with a detector to assist in locating the projected lines. However, for hanging pictures indoors, a regular indoor laser level should suffice.
7. Durability & Warranty
Choose a laser level made from high-quality materials, such as a durable plastic or aluminum body. A good warranty period, typically ranging from one to three years, is also an indicator of the manufacturer's confidence in their product.
Important Tip
When using a laser level, it's best to calibrate it before use. This can be done by placing the laser level on a flat, level surface and checking the alignment of the projected lines against a carpenter's level or bubble level. A well-calibrated laser level will ensure that your pictures are hung straight, level, and look great on your walls.
How to Use Laser Levels
Usually, you just need to press two buttons to use a laser level.
First, level your laser level correctly. Some laser levels have an auto-leveling system and you can set those up pretty easily. While others require you to check the included spirit level. Once it’s leveled, all you need to do is project the light on the surface you want to work on. Use this laser light to align whatever you need to align like picture frames or wallpapers.
Voila! The job is done.
Safety Tips While Using a Laser Level
Laser levels are highly specialized devices that should be used with utmost care. Like most hardware tools, laser levels can hurt the user as well if not handled responsibly. Lasers are harmful to the eyes and sometimes, even the skin.
Here are some safety tips to keep in mind while using a laser level.
Be cautious about your eyes
Eyes are extremely vulnerable to laser beams and can get heavily damaged under direct exposure. So it's advisable to wear safety glasses that are meant for protection from laser beams.
Serious hazard to children
Be sure to keep laser levels from the reach of small children. Playing around with a tool like this can cause serious injuries to their eyes.
Flame inducing
Make sure that you don’t leave the laser level active and unattended. If it focuses for too long on any inflammable object, it can induce fire quickly.
Are there different types of laser levels for hanging pictures?
Yes, there are various types of laser levels, including line lasers and point lasers. For hanging pictures, a line laser is typically used as it provides a straight horizontal or vertical reference line.
How do I choose the right laser level for hanging pictures?
Consider factors like the size of the pictures, the distance at which you'll be working, and any additional features you may need (such as self-leveling or multiple laser lines). It's also important to choose a laser level with adequate accuracy.
Do I need a self-leveling laser level for hanging pictures?
While a self-leveling laser level is convenient, it's not strictly necessary for hanging pictures. A manual leveling laser can also be used effectively, but it requires more precision in setup.
How do I ensure that the laser level is accurate?
It's important to set up the laser level on a stable surface and ensure it is calibrated according to the manufacturer's instructions. Additionally, avoid placing the laser level on surfaces that may vibrate or shift during use.
Can a laser level be used for hanging pictures on uneven walls?
Yes, a laser level can still provide a straight reference line on uneven walls. However, it's important to adjust for any irregularities by using shims or adjusting the placement of hanging hardware.
Can I use a laser level outdoors for hanging pictures on an exterior wall?
Yes, there are laser levels designed for outdoor use. Look for models with higher laser power output and features like a pulse mode for visibility in bright light conditions.
Staining your walls with lovely colors and reinforcing them with a polyurethane finish has become so much easier. Just take a roller, dip it in paint, and apply.
But before we get deep into discussing rollers, let’s know what polyurethane is. It is a wooden finish that can add to the beauty of your kitchen walls, deck flooring, tabletops, cabinets, and other wooden surfaces.
Not only does it add a stunning look to it, but it also protects the surface against uneven moisture and seals even scratched surfaces. Rather than using a paintbrush, you can use a roller for its easy application.
You will find a whopping collection of these rollers both offline and online. But does each product deliver a perfectly even and smooth polyurethanefinish to your surface?
We know it will be difficult for you to select a suitable roller for your painting job. But don’t worry, as we have prepared a list of the best rollers for polyurethane application. So, without further ado, let’s dig in!
Listed below are the 5 best rollers for polyurethane from our list:
FOAM PRO 184: A compact yet versatile foam roller known for its durability and reusable quality, it excels at giving a smooth, spray-like finish and covers a commendable area with a single dip, ensuring a durable, even coating, especially when applying polyurethane, even though initial grip familiarity takes a bit of time.
FoamPRO 164: Esteemed for its detailed coverage given to small projects or hard-to-reach areas, this roller pairs well with oil-based finishes and offers a sturdy grip that ensures a consistent, lint-free finish, though its usability is somewhat limited to smaller workspaces and its lint needs regular replacement.
Katzco: A top-tier paint roller offering professional working experience and lint-free finishing, its foam cover provides an even finish with each stroke while the free-spin movement reduces paint splatter, earning brownie points for working in compact spaces, even though it's less compatible with thicker paints.
Bates: Providing a comprehensive painting package, this Bates Choice model comes with a lightweight roller and handle brush that holds more paint, thus offering extensive coverage and using synthetic filaments for a fine finish, even though those fibers can wear off over time.
Pro Grade Paint Roller Set: The Pro-Grade set is a thorough 10-piece kit designed for interior and exterior painting needs, known for the effortless application of paint and the ability to cover large areas swiftly for a smooth finish. However, it tends to leave behind brush strokes which can necessitate additional coats.
Foam Pro 184 mini roller is a multi-functional polyurethane foam roller. Besides its small size and functionality, its durability and repeated usability make it one of the best available models to complete your painting jobs effortlessly and effectively. Without wasting much time, let’s dive into the features of this unit.
When it comes to painting, this mini roller works like a pro and gives a smooth and gleaming finish to your walls. In fact, people might get deceived by the finish, which is equivalent to spray works.
In terms of functionality, the roller does everything from varnishing to painting. The foam applier absorbs an adequate amount of paint giving it a lint-free and consistent finish. Besides, foam can retain its finish for a longer time. As the roller absorbs more paint, it will be possible to cover more space with a single dip.
It can be considered the best foam roller on the market to apply polyurethane. The rounded sleeve edge leaves a thick and spotless coating that ensures greater durability of the finish, making the roller a perfect finishing tool for wooden surfaces. In hindsight, the combination of this roller and polyurethane can prolong the life of your wood floors, furniture, or other wooden surfaces.
Lastly, it has a washable build, and you can use it more than once. Moreover, you get two refill sleeves free on purchasing this unit.
Although the roller secures a firm grip, you might need some time to get used to the application process. Other than that, we have not found any major disadvantage of the product, as it can surely deliver the expected high-quality finish to your walls.
What We Like
Gives a spray-touch finish
Quick and easy application
Easy to clean
Provides solid coverage
Leaves no steak on the finish
What We Don't Like
Users might need time to get used to the grip
Size: 4" | Weight: 4 Oz | Material: N/A | Tray: No
2. FoamPRO 164
FoamPro has always committed to making it easy for people to complete their painting jobs in less time and achieve better results. And they have taken the FoamPro 164 to the next level in terms of functionality and ease of use. It provides a smooth, even, and glossy finish to your wooden furniture and other surfaces. Plus, you can have an effortless and exceptional painting experience by covering a large area with a single dip.
This unit by FoamPro goes perfectly with any oil-based finish and works wonders with varnish, paint, stain, and polyurethane. It provides an even and smooth finish with detailed coverage. Hence, it becomes a suitable choice for smaller projects, which require more attention to detail.
Being small-sized, it can cover hard-to-reach places and give users greater control over the painting. But that doesn’t mean it lacks speed. The greater soaking capacity of the foam allows you to have sufficient liquid in a single dip, thereby allowing you to work without interruptions. Also, the sleeve can easily be cleaned and dried out for subsequent uses.
Using this foam roller, you won’t have to worry about the grip and it glides smoothly with hand movements, thereby leaving a spotless finish with each swipe. A tight grip also means it doesn’t release a nap during application and a thick coating ensures greater durability. Moreover, you wouldn’t have to worry much about lint in the finish.
Despite being a quality high-density roller, it certainly has some downsides. The roller has limited usability and is more suitable for detailed works in small spaces. Also, you might need to change the lint regularly to make the most out of it.
What We Like
Smooth and clear oil-based finish
Leaves no lint on hardwood floors
Covers narrow areas
Gives lint-free finish
Easy cleaning and application
What We Don't Like
Limited usability
Regular changing of the lint can be a burden
Size: 4" | Weight: 2.08 Oz | Material: N/A | Tray: No
3. Katzco
Katzco, a household products manufacturing company, has been delivering innovative solutions to its customers. And this paint roller is no different. It provides a professional painting experience to users and ensures quality results without the need for too many coats. You can have a lint-free finish using this unit.
If you want a professional and quick painting experience, then the Katzco 743841487844 is tailor-made for you. Its design is such that the foam cover is secured with a 5-wire cage frame.
Moreover, this unit can fit in any cover due to its small size and interlocking pattern, which enables better absorption and release of paint. As a result, a user achieves an even finish with each stroke and can ensure that the paint is applied quickly.
Added to it, the free-spin movement of the roller minimizes splatter during painting, which ensures quicker application and cleanly. You can rest assured about obtaining a smooth and glossy finish every time.
Last but not least, it is suitable for any tight areas due to its small size and free-spin movement. Also, it can cover a large area with a single dip, which means you need not invest more in buying paints.
Despite providing impeccable performance in terms of finish and application, it is only suitable for small-area applications. Apart from that, the roller might not be suitable for extra thick paints. However, if you are looking for rollers to paint a smaller area and a clean finish, then this one will definitely fit the bill.
Bates Choice has always been passionate about manufacturing and producing high-quality paint equipment like paint sprayers, paint brushes, rollers, and others at prices that won't break the bank. Its Le23 roller is one such high-quality polyurethane roller that delivers faster and long-lasting painting results.
his comprehensive package by Bates Choice is a true luxury for DIY workers. It includes everything you will need to paint your house and make it shine. The professional-quality foam paint roller is meant to deliver guaranteed satisfaction due to its high-quality, durable, and superior finish. What else would one want from a roller?
Both the roller and the wooden handle brush are lightweight and easy to maneuver, ensuring that you can carry on with those prolonged and tedious paint jobs with ease. Moreover, the paintbrush made of synthetic filaments is designed to hold more paint at a time.
Its top-quality ½-inch nap is perfect for painting a house and is durable and long-lasting. This means it saves time and gets the finish you are looking for. Long story short, it saves your money and is easy to use, meaning you do not have to be a professional to use it.
Although this paint roller is bound to deliver a durable, smooth, and long-lasting finish, there might be some issues if you use it for a longer time. The synthetic filaments of the roller might come off readily, thereby making it messy and time-consuming. In that case, you will need to change it after a few uses.
This 10-piece all-in-one painting set by Pro-Grade is best for achieving professional quality painting results for anyone. This is just the perfect set if you are struggling with your staining projects. Just guide the rollers and brush to get excellent results every single time.
This complete painting set makes your work look professional and provides you with an easy application experience. You can use it to decorate the house with the colors of your choice.
The Pro-Grade set is designed to serve all of your interior and exterior painting needs, from walls, and ceilings to fences. Its applicators are made of high-quality materials and glide smoothly with your hand movements. Hence, you can carry out your tedious painting jobs with ease and ensure a smooth paint application.
Apart from that, these paint rollers are extra-durable, washable & made for repeated use. You can easily wash these rollers and use them again and again. Moreover, its no-shed covers ensure a lint-free finish or perfect paint for stunning results.
Last but not least, the roller leaves thick layers in a single coating and covers large areas in a short time. You no longer have to apply a final coat and save the liquid. These roller sleeves also retain more polyurethane for delivering a smooth and spotless finish in each stroke.
The toolset can be very convenient for DIYers, but it isn’t perfect. Its rollers leave brush strokes behind it, making walls look messy and dull. You might need to apply further paint coats of polyurethane to cover the brush marks, making it a costly affair.
What We Like
Extra durable and long-lasting polyurethane rollers
Rollingdog focuses on providing a range of quality and affordable paint applicators to its customers worldwide. Super-micro rollers of the company can be an excellent choice for a painter who will use them more than once. This durable, reusable, and washable paint roller provides you with a professional painting experience and gives your surface a satin finish.
An all-around paint roller by Rolling Dog is a pocket-friendly choice for anyone who provides professional painting services or who does a single-term painting project. It does not leave brush marks or lines on your surface and gives a clean and smooth polyurethane finish.
The unit is easy to hold, which makes it glide smoothly over rough or flat surfaces according to your needs, and provides the right balance and control for perfect application. Additionally, its high paint retention ability gives a thick and beautiful solid coating that enhances the durability of hardwood floors, walls, furniture, and other surfaces.
This unit can be regarded as the best polyurethane roller for arts and craftworks. Moreover, it serves as an optimal choice for people owing to its easy application and ability to deliver a satisfying experience.
Although the rolling hand roller provides an easy and smooth painting experience and a durable frame, many customers have complained about the poor quality of the main part. They claimed that small roller pieces start falling off and stick to the surface after a few uses. You need to pick up the pieces yourself, which can be a hassle.
Microfiber Roller Kits are specially designed for professional painters, woodworkers, carpenters, and epoxy artists who always expect the best results. This multi-functional roller is capable of doing a wide number of tasks from painting to varnishing.
A countertop paint kit is everything one needs to complete a painting job quickly and with a superior polyurethane finish. The microfibers of the foam cover don't allow the solvent to stick in and are perfect for applying finish in tight areas.
The ergonomic and comfortable handle of the unit is designed for easy usability and therefore ensures a smooth finish even in tough-to-reach areas. Along with that, its durable arm lasts through a number of painting jobs while providing an even and solid finish. Its multi-functionality and durability allow users to perform a wide range of jobs using a single roller.
Furthermore, the high-density roller ensures retaining more paint for a longer period and avoids any dripping, thereby minimal or no wastage of paint. The light, small but durable roller covers rough and flat surfaces in one coat, without any bubbling or stippling.
Apart from its exciting features, it might present a number of disadvantages to a user. The major one is that it leaves many odd dot traces after finishing and bits of lint. Other than that, it might not be suitable for all epoxy resin and people might find it easy to use. However, as stated above, this product is mainly suitable for professional painters and workers.
What We Like
Perfect for wet or dry rolling
Can be used for a range of jobs and projects
Easy to use on edges and trims
Easy to attach with extension poles
Ergonomic and comfortable handle ensures a firm grip
What We Don't Like
Leaves traces of odd dots
Not suitable for all epoxy resins and difficult to clean
Size: 6.5" | Weight: 8.1 Oz | Material: Micro-Fiber | Tray: No
What is the Best Roller for Polyurethane?
This section presents a comprehensive comparison of top-rated rollers designed for polyurethane applications. The table below meticulously outlines critical attributes, encompassing size, weight, material composition, and tray specifications.
Now that you have gone through our comprehensive list of the best polyurethane rollers on the market, it might help you make an informed choice of purchasing one according to the task at hand. However, prior to purchasing a roller that gives a lustrous shine to your surface, you need to look at the same thing from various angles. So what are these angles?
Not all rollers are suitable for applying polyurethane and using any traditional roller, you will see a lot of brush marks or lines on your surface no matter how well it is being prepared. In order to get a smooth finish, you need to look into factors including roller frame, length, cover material, and others. Let's get into the details.
Roller Frame
The material of the roller determines its durability and how long you can use it for polyurethane painting projects. Besides, a good and sturdy design will ensure a tight hold over the sleeve and prevent it from wobbling during the application of paint. It ensures a better workflow with minimum splatters and that your hands do not get strained from holding it for a long time.
Best polyurethane rollers are made of heavy-duty steel which keeps the rollers intact and ensures better paintwork. Also, these frames are easy to wash off compared to woodenones.
Length
A mini roller is suitable for applying polyurethane paint in small areas and ensures a smooth application. Also, it is suitable for staining corners and edges. On the other hand, long stick rollers are best suited for long area applications, like walls or a hardwood floor.
Cover Material
Roller covers come in different fabrics and sizes. Besides, the sleeve edge impacts the quality of the finish as well.
Wool cover absorbs and releases a better paint finish during application and can cover a greater area in a shorter time despite its small size. Wool roller sleeves are perfect for polyurethane paints and provide more gloss to your surface.
The foam cover holds a lot of paint at a time and delivers an impenetrable coating with each stroke. In terms of absorbing liquid better and getting an even finish, foam rollers tend to be a better choice.
On the other hand, a fiber paint roller works well with all kinds of paints respect rather than specializing in one. These covers deliver a smooth and shiny finish with all kinds of urethane. Besides, they are more long-lasting and easy to wash. Additionally, these rollers prevent lint or dust from mixing with the finished surface.
Nap Size
The nap size of a roller determines the uniformity of the finish. In this case, a thin one can deliver a lint-free and even finish compared to a thick one.
Resistance Capability
Synthetic and wool covers come in double-layer sleeves and their core is composed of highly resistant fabric. It prevents any waterborne urethane and solvents from sipping in. This in turn enhances the texture and durability of covers. As a result, using these covers will enable you to save money and cleaning time.
Clean Finish
In the end, the quality and texture of the finish matter. A polyurethane roller that delivers a spotless polyurethane finish without shedding on the surface will be most suitable. Therefore, it will be viable to look for a roller that gives a lint-free and bubble-free finish during polyurethane application.
How are polyurethane rollers made?
Polyurethane rollers are typically made through a process called casting or molding. Liquid polyurethane is poured or injected into molds and allowed to cure. The resulting material is then machined to achieve the desired specifications.
Can polyurethane rollers be customized to specific applications?
Yes, polyurethane rollers can be customized in terms of size, shape, hardness, and other properties to suit specific applications. Customization may be necessary for specialized machinery or unique operating conditions.
How long do polyurethane rollers typically last?
The lifespan of a polyurethane roller depends on factors like the application, load, and environmental conditions. Generally, they have a longer lifespan compared to rollers made from other materials due to their wear resistance.
How do I choose the right hardness for a polyurethane roller?
The hardness of a polyurethane roller is measured in durometers. Softer durometers provide better traction and are suitable for applications with delicate surfaces. Harder durometers are used for heavy-duty applications. Consider factors like load, speed, and environment when choosing.
Do you have problems driving a fence post? Well, you won’t anymore with gas-powered post drivers.
There are pneumatic post drivers as well, but the gas-powered version causes much less stress, ensuring that you can enjoy your weekends. It provides quick installation and saves you the trouble of driving posts using manual labor.
With the help of vibrations, much like in a jackhammer, you will get precision in your work. And due to the vibration dampening system, long working hours won't be an issue. Plus, the fact that they are lightweight makes them portable and easily maneuverable.
Now, how do you choose from the plethora of options that are lining the market? We have formulated a list of the 12 best gas-powered post-drivers today to give you in-depth coverage of the world of post-drivers.
Listed below are the 5 best Gas Powered Post Drivers from our list:
REDI Driver Boss: An exceptionally durable gas driver, famed for precision and high-quality components, offers versatility through optional reducer sleeves and handle extensions and includes a storage case, albeit at a higher cost. It shines for its robust 4-Stroke Honda GX35 engine and high Beats Per Minute (BPM) at 1820.
Rhino GPD40 Fence Pro Honda 4-stroke Gas Powered Post Driver: Notable for its combined power and versatility energized by a Honda GX35 4-stroke gas engine, this model accommodates both T-posts and smaller round posts with an ergonomically designed handle for comfort, alongside chuck adapters for wide application, though it is slightly pricey.
Titan PGD3200X: Recognized for managing heavy-duty tasks, the model's added weight delivers a powerful performance with 1850 BPM and can drive metal posts up to 3-1/8 inches. It also comes with a storage case and is attractively priced, but lacks handle extensions and additional accessories.
Rhino Multi Pro: Renowned for commercial contracts, this model offers 35% more driving force due to its substantial weight and includes different-sized Chuck-Lok adapters for driving a variety of posts. Despite its weight and the lack of a storage case, its versatility and reliability make it a compelling choice.
Titan PGD3875 4" Barrel Post Driver: Hailed for its large capacity, this 50lb model can drive posts as large as 3.5" quickly and offers three different adapter sleeves for flexible use. It also affords a quicker setup time and comes with a serviceable tool kit, although the positioning of the anvil might pose challenges in getting the post started.
Here is the list of the 12 best gas-powered post drivers that can help you to drive posts into the ground quickly and effectively.
1. REDI Driver Boss - Best for Precision & Durability
The first product here is the best tested, the REDI Driver Boss, an absolute failproof gas driver that will post in seconds, with a legendary engine and extremely high-quality components, a driver built to last. The driver provides unparalleled performance, and you can get a precise output in most of your tasks.
You get improved versatility with the model, thanks to the 3-1/8-inch guide tube, which is more significant than on some of the other units. Now, because the machine is more substantial, it adds a little to the weight bringing it around to 35 lbs. But it is not something to worry about, and you will still get great portability.
You can choose to use optional reducer sleeves, which are available in four sizes – 13/16-inch, 1-3/4-inch, 2-1/4-inch, and 2-1/2-inch. Likewise, you can choose to use the optional handle extensions that speed up your work and come in handy when driving taller posts.
Moving on, you have the option of a storage case that keeps it safe from damage and offers a long lifespan. Finally, you can use it for precision work due to the inclusion of an integrated throttle and a polymer piston that delivers a complete performance.
It is more expensive than the other units in the market, and while we think one can’t put a price on quality, you may beg to differ. So, if a budget restricts you, you will have to choose some other option. Also, there are no spring cushioned grips that may affect comfort.
What We Like
Integrated throttle
Polymer piston
Speeds up your work
Storage case
Durable
What We Don't Like
No spring cushioned grips
Expensive
Dimensions: 25" x 15" x 12" | Weight: 35lbs | Engine: 4-Stroke Honda GX35 | Horsepower: 1.6HP | Barrel Size: 3.12" | Barrel Capacity: N/A | Beats Per Minute: 1820BPM
2. Rhino GPD40 Fence Pro Honda 4-stroke Gas Powered Post Driver - Best for Versatility & Power
The runner-up is the Rhino GPD40 Fence Pro Honda 4-stroke Gas Powered Post Driver which offers a lot of power. Plus, the latest design makes sure that you get unmatched performance, but the most significant upgrade is the versatility.
It is another lightweight model owing to its weight of 38 lbs even though it has a large body. The hammer and the anvil are substantially sized as well, along with the overall design. All the components then come together to produce 30% more hitting power.
Hence, it has a considerable edge over other models and further complements the powerful functions is the Honda GX35 4-stroke gas engine designed for industrial use. The 4-stroke engine is invaluable in generating the necessary power for completing most tasks. Moving on, it comes with a 2'chuck sleeve.
It offers you the desired versatility allowing you to use it with both T-posts and smaller round posts. Meanwhile, for maximum comfort, there is an ergonomically designed handle and an integrated throttle to make long working hours possible. Finally, it has 1-¾” and 1" chuck adapters that ensure you can use it for erosion control, agriculture, and other tasks.
It is slightly pricey compared to the other units in the market, but most users have reported that it is money well spent. But in case you have a tight budget you should consider some other options. Also, the sturdiness may decline over time, but that is true of any product.
What We Like
Versatile
Ergonomically designed handle
Lightweight
Integrated throttle
1-3/4-inch to 1-inch chuck adapters
What We Don't Like
A bit costly
Durability may decline over time
Dimensions: 11" x 14" x 24" | Weight: 38lbs | Engine: 4-Stroke Honda GX35 | Horsepower: N/A | Barrel Size: N/A | Barrel Capacity: Up to 2.12" | Beats Per Minute: Approx. 1720BPM
3. Titan PGD3200X - Best for Heavy-Duty Tasks
The Titan PGD3200 is another powerful model that comes with many features you may find to your liking. The designers have been smart to use the weight to make it robust and amplify the performance.
It is slightly heavy, given that it weighs 45 lbs, but that allows it to generate a lot of power. As a result, you can get 1850 beats per minute, which can considerably reduce the amount of time you need to spend on one job.
Likewise, you can drive metal posts measuring 3-1/8 inches without much effort. Furthermore, it comes with a 2-inch adapter sleeve, which is useful for driving pipes, jobs, and rebars, measuring 1 to 2 inches in diameter. Plus, you have the added advantage of getting a storage case.
Therefore, you can keep your tool safe, including enabling you to use it for a long time. Meanwhile, you will be able to enjoy all the functions at a reasonable price. Hence, you do not have to burn a hole in your pockets to get the much-needed reliability.
There are no handle extensions with this unit, so you may have to compromise on comfort while sweating it out in the field. Thus, it may not pose an attractive option for people. Besides, there are no additional accessories, so you will have to spend extra depending on the type of work.
What We Like
Powerful
Safe operation
Durable
Affordable
Fast
What We Don't Like
No handle extensions
No additional accessories
Dimensions: N/A | Weight: 45lbs | Engine: 4-Stroke Honda GX35 | Horsepower: 1.3HP | Barrel Size: 3.25" | Barrel Capacity: Up to 3.12" | Beats Per Minute: 1850BPM
4. Rhino Multi Pro - Best for Commercial Contracts
The Rhino Multi Pro can deliver unmatched power to help you get through numerous tasks with ease. So, it is quite a favorite among the masses.
It is one of the more massive models on the market due to its weight of 44 lbs, but there is a reason for making it slightly heavy. It generates a lot of power, and for that, it has to be well-built. So, you will see that it has a large body to support the hammer and anvil.
As a result, it can produce 35% more driving force, invaluable in taking care of heavy-duty projects. Furthermore, it includes Chuck-Lok adapters available in three sizes – the 1-inch, 1-3/4-inch, and the 2-inch. You can then use them for driving in round posts that measure 2-3/8 inches.
Meanwhile, you can use the power to perform several tasks which makes it extremely versatile. Therefore, you can drive both T posts and Terminal posts for commercial contracts. Likewise, you can use U-channel and Square Anchor Posts for installing municipal signs. Plus, optional adapters and chucks are also available.
It is heavier than some of the models on our list, so you could be tempted to opt for a lighter option. Many people do not like their units to be heavy, which could affect maneuverability. Also, there is no storage case meaning that you will have to spend extra.
5. Titan PGD3875 4" Barrel Post Driver - Best for Large Capacity
The has the Titan PGD3875 4" Barrel Post Driver that is armed with some great functions nonetheless, you will find the features to your liking.
It weighs in at 50 lbs and therefore offers an excellent hammering effect, but that does not compromise portability. While it uses weight to produce a strong performance, you can rest assured that it will still be easy to lift and carry around. Moreover, in comparison to other models, you will get a much smoother installation.
It reduces the time required to set it up by almost half, which means you can use it without delay. And what is sure to grab your attention is the large capacity that enables it to drive posts as large as 3.5" quickly.
Moreover, it comes equipped with three different adapter sleeves – the 1", 2", and 3" – that permit you to use it with various types of posts. Plus, you can also use it with rebar and rods that measure less than 3". Lastly, you get a serviceable tool kit with the unit.
We have seen that the anvil is situated close to the bottom of the tube. Thus, there is a chance that it could be challenging to get the post started. This leads to the other issue where the tube may fail to keep it aligned, thereby causing it to wobble.
What We Like
Powerful hammering
Portable
Reduces installation time
Fast operation
Service tool kit included
What We Don't Like
Difficult to get the post started
May wobble
Dimensions: N/A | Weight: 50lbs | Engine: 4-Stroke | Horsepower: 1.3HP | Barrel Size: 4" | Barrel Capacity: Up to 3" | Beats Per Minute: 700 to 1350BPM
6. Skildril G2XD
The Skildril G2XD, which comes armed with several new functions that have earned it a lot of praise from users, has ticked most of the right boxes, and you get variations to choose from depending on the type of work. The air cushion dampening system gives it the edge.
You can use it with 4-inch posts because a 4-stroke engine from Honda powers it. The GX35 engine is also available in the 2-stroke variation, but in either case, you get a lot of energy. Therefore, it can produce 1100 to 1800 beats per minute, which reduces your work time to a great extent.
Meanwhile, it weighs all of 42 lbs, which is slightly heavy but not a lot to cause maneuverability issues. However, the significant upgrade is the natural oil sight glass that offers sufficient lubrication of the hammer assembly. Thus, you can generate a smooth performance as well as a lot of driving force.
Besides, it is easy to use, and you will enjoy the simple on-off function that makes sure you can continue with your work uninterrupted. Another great feature is the multi-collet option air cushion dampening that ensures there is hardly any recoil even on tough jobs.
It does tend to leak oil, which is seen in a lot of other models as well. While it is not a severe issue, it could lead to problems in the long run. On top of that, there are no cushioned handles, which might cause you some difficulty during prolonged hours in the field.
What We Like
Lots of driving force
Oil sight glass
Smooth performance
Simple on-off function
Effective lubrication
What We Don't Like
May leak oil
No cushioned handles
Dimensions: 29" x 11.5" x 13" | Weight: 42lbs | Engine: 2-Cycle/4-Cycle OHV | Horsepower: 1.8HP (2 Stroke)/1.4HP (4 Stroke) | Barrel Size: N/A | Barrel Capacity: Up to 4" | Beats Per Minute: 1100 to 1800BPM
7. Titan PGD2875 Gas Powered Post Driver
We have several top-notch products to go through, so without wasting any more time, we kick things off with the Titan PGD2875 Gas Powered Post Driver. It has secured the top spot on our list due to its ability to blend power and design to produce a strong performance.
It is incredibly lightweight as it weighs only 30 lbs, which makes it one of the lighter models in the market. As a result, it is easy to use and highly portable. Moreover, you get a high degree of maneuverability that ensures you can acquire the desired finish on most tasks.
The design is well complemented by the powerful 4-stroke engine that can deliver 1.3 Horsepower. Thus, it can generate a speed of 1500 to 2000 beats per minute quite quickly. Thanks to all that power, your work time is cut down significantly, and you can drive in posts that have a diameter of up to 3".
The excellent output is due to the 3.25" barrel that gets the job done by cutting down the time required to half as compared to a manual driver. On top of that, it comes with 1” as well as 2” adapter sleeves suitable for driving in posts, rods, or rebars.
You have to be careful while using it lest you burn yourself because the housing gets hot quickly. You may need to cover it with a shroud to avoid accidents. Plus, as per the instructions, you cannot start working with it right away and have to wait for at least five minutes.
What We Like
Powerful
Lightweight
Easy to use
3.25-inch barrel
Drives posts in a quick time
What We Don't Like
value1
value2
Dimensions: 13" x 12" x 26.5" | Weight: 30lbs | Engine: 4-Stroke | Horsepower: 1.3HP | Barrel Size: 3.25" | Barrel Capacity: Up to 3" | Beats Per Minute: 1500 to 2000BPM
8. Skidril 2-stroke Gas Powered Post Driver
Next up, we have the Skidril 2-stroke Gas Powered Post Driver that has secured the runners-up spot as it has several similarities with our topmost recommendation. The good thing about it is that it is straightforward to use, which will allow you to use the power it generates as per your requirements.
You will find it to your liking because of the 2-stroke engine that generates 1.8 Horsepower. Therefore, it is easy to use, and you can start it without any trouble. Further adding to the comfort is the ergonomic design that is well complemented by the device's lightness.
Likewise, the Cyclone gasoline engine has very few moving parts that ensure you will not need any hoses to make it compatible. Thus, it is also easy to maintain, which is sure to please most customers.
Meanwhile, you can drive posts as large as 4” in diameter, thanks to the multi-chuck system and the air cushioning feature. Both functions work together to reduce the recoil effect which goes a long way in providing much-needed longevity. Lastly, you can enjoy all these features for a reasonable price which has made it a highly desirable option.
It is a slightly heavy model but that should not be too much of an inconvenience. However, after a long day in the field, you may have trouble getting through the final few posts. Besides, it does tend to leak oil but not too much; therefore, you should be on the lookout.
What We Like
Air cushioning
Reduced recoiling
Affordable
Ergonomic design
Easy to start
What We Don't Like
Slightly heavy
May leak oil
Dimensions: 26x10x11” | Weight: 38lbs | Engine: 2-Cycle/4-Cycle OHV | Horsepower: 1.8HP (2 Stroke)/1.4HP (4 Stroke) | Barrel Size: N/A | Barrel Capacity: Up to 4" | Beats Per Minute: 1100 to 1800BPM
9. Titan PGD2875H
Next up, we have the Titan PGD2875H which has paid a great deal of attention to comfort. It is for this reason that buyers are interested in the model which is why it has generated a lot of positive feedback.
You can use it comfortably throughout the day, thanks to the easy-grip handles and the vibration-dampening springs. Thus, not only will your fatigue be reduced, but it will also help prevent back strain. Therefore, the designers have focused on making it as user-friendly as possible.
Further adding to the ease of use is its weight of 28 lbs, making it ideal for transportation. You will be able to lift and carry it down the fence line without much difficulty. Likewise, it comes with a trigger throttle that allows you to start it easily. Moreover, it has an integrated stop button for added safety.
Meanwhile, the 4-stroke gas-powered engine from Honda produces 1.3 Horsepower that is effective in generating 1500 to 2000 beats per minute. Therefore, you can use it for commercial purposes or simple tasks around the house. Lastly, it has a 3.25-inch barrel along with adapters.
The designers have included plastic sleeves, which do not make it very durable. So, there is a chance that it could break after regular use. Plus, installing T posts could produce a lot of noise, which is not an ideal work environment in which to find yourself.
What We Like
Storage case
Lightweight
GX 35 4-stroke engine
Reliable
Fast
What We Don't Like
Plastic sleeves
Could get loud
Dimensions: N/A | Weight: 28lbs | Engine: 4-Stroke Honda GX35 | Horsepower: 1.3HP | Barrel Size: 3.25" | Barrel Capacity: Up to 3" | Beats Per Minute: 1500 to 2000BPM
10. Yescom 32.7cc 2-stroke
The Yescom 32.7cc 2-strokeis quite similar to the earlier tool, so it is no surprise to see that some of the functions may overlap. But some fascinating additions have driven its popularity among buyers. Therefore, it has received mostly positive reviews.
The significant upgrade that is noticeable with the model is the inclusion of the spring-isolated handles. It absorbs the vibrations that pass through the hand even when you are working in the field, and you will not have to use any additional tools. It is made available with a vertical shaft engine that is ideal for working on T posts.
Likewise, there is an adapter that makes it suitable for posts measuring 2-3/16-inch and 2-3/4-inch. And the tool kit, fuel mixing tank, and optional adapters deliver an excellent performance. Moving on, we see that the designers have added muscle to it by including a substantial-sized hammer and anvil.
Hence, you can use it for agriculture, construction, or geophysical exploration. Besides, because it weighs 34.2 lbs, it is easy to lift, and you can take it from one post to the next without any difficulty. Finally, you get secure handling as well for precise results.
It does not come with extended handles like some of the other tools, so you may not get the same degree of comfort for extended work hours. Besides, there is no storage case, and you will have to be mindful of minor bumps or scratches from impacting your unit.
What We Like
Powerful
Weight of 34.2lbs
Spring isolated handles
2230 beats per minute
Versatile
What We Don't Like
No storage case
No extended handles
Dimensions: 24" x 13.4" x 9.8" | Weight: 34.2lbs | Engine: 2-Stroke | Horsepower: 1.2HP | Barrel Size: N/A | Barrel Capacity: N/A | Beats Per Minute: 1700 to 2230BPM
11. Field Tuff FTF-33GPD Gas Post Driver
The Field Tuff FTF-33GPD Gas Post Driver features an exquisite design that allows you to work several jobs, making it very versatile. Apart from that, the powerful engine is well complemented by the many components that come with it to ensure that you don’t have to incur any additional cost.
When you have to install a new fence, you will like that it is lightweight, which will offer you more excellent maneuverability. But you can also use it for various structures, farm fences, orchard fences, and barriers. Hence, you get great versatility so that you can work on many projects.
Furthermore, it has a 2-cycle gas-powered engine that produces 1.2 Horsepower, which is enough to generate 7500 rotations per minute. Likewise, you will be able to use it to drive 2.67” in diameter stakes at a time, which will help you quickly complete your work.
The numerous components that it comes with, such as the storage stand, blow mold case, and fuel tank, make it fully compatible. You won’t require any hose or external power source, which makes it very convenient to work with and lowers the operation cost. Finally, there is a vibration-dampening system for more comfort.
It is an expensive model, and so most customers might opt out of buying it given the numerous units they can choose from. Plus, the housing does tend to get hot, which raises safety concerns, so you may have to use a shroud to avoid accidentally getting burnt.
What We Like
Blow mold case
Lightweight
Storage stand
34.16 oz fuel tank
Two-way dampening spring
What We Don't Like
Expensive
Housing gets hot
Dimensions: N/A | Weight: 40lbs | Engine: 2-Cycle | Horsepower: 1.2HP | Barrel Size: N/A | Barrel Capacity: Up to 2.67" | Beats Per Minute: 1700 to 2230BPM
12. Titan PDG2000
The Titan PDG2000 because it offers a high degree of reliability, which is in short supply. So, most customers have marked it down as one of the models on their wish list. Plus, due to the powerful engine, you get a stable performance and the components to back it up.
It derives power from the GX35 4-stroke engine from Honda, one of the best gas-powered drivers in the market. As a result, it can generate 1750 beats per minute which can take care of most projects. But you do not need to worry because the internal dampening springs will help you effectively control it.
Thus, you will be able to drive ¾-inch rods along with T posts without any problem. Besides, you get two types of sleeves measuring ½-inch and ¾-inch respectively for use with rods or rebars. Moving on, the handles have been designed in a way to provide you with maximum comfort.
Therefore, extended work hours will no longer be an issue, and you can carry on without succumbing to fatigue. Moreover, it comes with a storage case that helps to extend its lifespan and makes sure that you can use it under various circumstances without having to worry.
The issue with the unit is that it faces problems when driving posts into compacted dirt. Users have reported that if the surface is hard, there is a chance you could have performance issues. Besides, there is no extended handle option for amplifying comfort, so long work hours may be a problem in some instances.
This section provides a thorough comparison of the top gas-powered post drivers available. The table below outlines key attributes, including dimensions, weight, engine specifications, horsepower, barrel size, barrel capacity, and beats per minute.
Before you venture into the market, we would like to raise your attention to a couple of points. Based on these aspects, we have formulated our list, and you will see why they form an indispensable part of post-drivers.
By keeping these points in mind, you can distinguish between great products and merely good ones. Thus, you can make an informed choice and understand the intricacies of the products you are willing to buy.
Durability
Your unit must be durable to survive the daily wear and tear of working in the field. There is no point in purchasing it if it breaks down after a while. There can be numerous problems from oil leaks to the handles breaking. The designers must, therefore, use only quality materials for the construction.
Buying a post-driver is a one-time investment, and you cannot afford to pitch in for a new one quite often. It is not only about the central unit but for the components as well because they must be sturdy enough to handle the job.
Ease of Use
It must be easy to use. The primary purpose of any tool is to make your life easier and in that regard; there can be no compromises. All the functions must be easily understandable, along with the installation process. You won’t want to waste time on a cumbersome installation procedure.
You will want to get your device up and running quickly time. Plus, the components that come with it should be easy to gauge for you, and you should know almost at a glance what each part does. You should be able to operate it with minimum fuss to get the best performance.
Power
Finally, it should have enough energy because installing poles is a tough job. You will have to come across lots of different surfaces, and your model should be capable of penetrating most surfaces for a complete performance.
The power drives all the other functions in the unit. Every component revolves around the availability of power, but you must remember that too much power could make it hard to control.
It must have vibration absorption features that will allow you to control it better to get precise results. You must be able to manage the power according to the demands of different jobs.
Do gas-powered post drivers require any additional tools or accessories?
Gas-powered post drivers often come with some standard accessories, but it’s essential to check the included items before purchasing. Specific adapters or collars may be required to accommodate different post sizes and materials.
Is a gas-powered post driver easy to operate?
Yes, gas-powered post drivers are designed to be user-friendly and easy to operate. With minimal training, most users can quickly familiarize themselves with the tool, and its easy start-up features help eliminate common operational issues.
What safety measures should I take when using a gas-powered post driver?
To ensure optimal safety, you should wear appropriate personal protective equipment, such as gloves, safety goggles, and hearing protection. Always consult the product manual for specific safety guidelines and recommendations.
Are gas-powered post drivers suitable for all-weather conditions?
Gas-powered post drivers are designed to be resilient and can be used in various weather conditions. However, wet or muddy soil can make post-installation more difficult. Always use caution and follow the manufacturer’s guidelines when operating in adverse weather.
What types of posts can I use with a gas-powered post driver?
Gas-powered post drivers can be used with a variety of post materials, such as wood, steel, and vinyl. Be sure to consult the manufacturer’s recommendations for specific post types and sizes.
How deep can a gas-powered post driver drive a post?
The depth to which a gas-powered post driver can drive a post will depend on the model and the soil conditions. However, most gas-powered post drivers can firmly set a post several feet into the ground.
Can I use a gas-powered post driver for other applications besides fencing?
While primarily designed for driving fences and signposts, some gas-powered post drivers can be used for other applications, such as anchoring posts for decks, mailboxes, footings, and more. Be sure to consult the owner’s manual for additional compatible applications.
How do I maintain my gas-powered post driver?
To maintain your gas-powered post driver, regularly check and replace engine oil, air filters, and spark plugs. Keep the tool clean and properly store it when not in use. Consult your owner’s manual for detailed maintenance instructions specific to your model.
Cosplay is one of the most interesting and characterful hobbies you can have. However, cosplay does take a lot of effort - and a significant part of the effort you put goes into painting.
Paints are the final link between living the character and simply dressing up as one; hence, you should get to work with paints as frequently as you can and put in as much effort as possible!
To make your life a little bit easier, we now put together a list of some of the best paints and brands that are on offer today.
They all offer the same economical yet vibrant painting experience, though they are all unique in the value that they provide. Without saying more, let’s jump right into the reviews.
Listed below are the 5 best body paints for cosplay from our list:
Mehron Face & Body Paint: Offers vibrant, high-quality pigments and shades using safe and soft materials, but comes with a high price tag, which may limit its appeal to those on a budget.
Snazaroo: Known for its long-lasting wear, this brand provides a great variety of paint shades at affordable prices, catering to a broader audience but may lack the pigment concentration found in some other brands.
Graftobian ProPaint Kit: This is a standout option for sensitive skin due to its high-quality and safe ingredients, providing great value despite its premium price.
TAG Face Paint: This reasonably priced set offers vibrant and punchy shades that can be used both for face and body painting, making it a versatile choice for cosplayers.
Mosaiz Face Paint: As a unique offering of easy-to-apply, hypoallergenic, and non-toxic paint sticks, this product is cost-effective and travel-friendly but may not be sufficient for a full cosplay look.
These body paints have been carefully selected based on their quality, durability, and ease of use. So, whether you're a seasoned cosplayer or a newbie, here's the list of the 6 best body paints for cosplay that will help you create the perfect look for your next event.
Mehron Face & Body Paint- Best for Vibrant Colors
If you’re looking for the best in the business - a manufacturer who has known the product long enough that they are a reason for the popularity of face paints today, you’re in the right place. With over 90 years of experience, they’re bastions of the body paint industry. Their pigments and shades are highly punchy and bright, and the raw materials are par excellence as well.
Experience
Mehron has been behind countless circus shows, Broadway shows, and theater performances - you name it, Mehron has been a part of it. Their credibility is beyond reproach, and their products still follow the winning formula they’ve been using for decades. This formula uses wonderful, extremely safe, and soft raw materials that can last for hours on the skin easily.
Coupled with a few sprays of a setting spray, it lasts for hours easily. The only thing that will pinch is the price. These are among the most expensive products on the market, but these will never fail you whether it comes to quality, the softness of paint on your skin, or the safety of paint.
If you do not consider the price and focus solely on the quality of the product, these are about the best cosplay paints money can buy.
What We Like
Extremely safe and soft, comes loaded with moisturizers like cocoa seed butter and avocado oil
Vegan-friendly, hypoallergenic, rated safe by the FDA
With a setting spray, you can last through a single competition with ease
What We Don't Like
Mighty expensive, perhaps the most expensive mass-produced body paint
Snazaroo has consistently been placed among the topmost brands when it comes to cosplay and body paints in general. Their face paints have been rated as some of the best on the market today. The reason behind almost universal praise is not belonging to the professional side of the market entirely - they make something for everyone and that too at affordable prices!
Experience
Snazaroo’s entire range of products is rated as being extremely safe, whether you see if it’s safe for sensitive skin or being approved by the FDA on all major parameters. This, coupled with the value that they bring by getting you around 36 varieties of paint, gets you a fantastic overall experience that is simply unbeatable for the price.
Whether it’s Overwatch characters, your favorite Anime protagonist, or the superhero you’re cosplaying - these colors are available in a variety of shades, so you have nothing to worry about. The only compromise that comes, is in the form of a little bit less pigment concentration than we generally like to see in face paints - but it’s sufficient for any cosplay convention!
All in all, Snazaroo has been around on the market long enough to establish itself as a reliable, safe, and reasonably priced body paint brand.
What We Like
Comes with a number of paint shades, enough for you to find your own unique shade easily
Paints can be ordered individually as per need
Extremely safe and delivers a satisfying yet economical experience
What We Don't Like
Some paint shades lack the concentration that’s offered by some other brands
If you’re looking for a competitor to the Mehron face painting kit, this is an equally wonderful offering from Graftobian. The pigment quantity and quality are second to none, while the paints last incredibly long compared to most other paints on the market.
With a wide variety in paint shades and superb quality of paints, the Graftobian is a contender for the top spot among cosplay paints!
Experience
The quality of the paints on offer is beyond reproach. Besides Mehron, no one else delivers such high-quality ingredients in their paints. They are also FDA-compliant, so you can be sure that your skin will not bear the brunt of poor-quality body paints. You get 12 shades in this set, which can be easily mixed to create new shades as per your specifications.
These paints are water-based, making them easier to apply and remove from the skin. The paints are manufactured on-site in the USA, so you can forget about lax safety standards. Interestingly, the president of Graftobian provides their phone number on each box - we’ve never seen such commitment to consumer satisfaction in this segment before!
This kit requires that you can digest the premium it asks for over many others. At the same time, do bear in mind that you’re getting the best experience from a very premium cosplay paint brand.
While not branded as a “body” paint, you can easily apply these TAG face paints while cosplaying all over your body if you wish. These almost escaped our radar, since these paints are not advertised as cosplay paints. However, a number of cosplayers have reported strong results, and the quantity is also sufficient for at least a full body paint of each color.
Experience
This paint set delivers in terms of safety, quality, and value. This set comes in at around a fifth of the price of Mehron’s individual paints if you consider the per-paint price, though it will last half as much too. The quality of these paints is solid, so you will not face any issues relating to longevity or safety.
Another point that plays out in the favor of the TAG Face Paints is the compactness of these paints - the box measures 10” x 4”, which can easily fit inside any bag, handbag or purse. You can easily carry these around to conventions directly!
Out of the 12 shades that you get, 9 are basic and three are special paint shades that you’re unlikely to find elsewhere. Thus, as an unconventional but ultimately economical choice, TAG Face Paints delivers well.
What We Like
Much cheaper than Mehron and even Snazaroo if you get the kit
Paint shades are vibrant and punchy, paints are FDA-approved
Having covered a number of water-based liquid cosplay paints, we now come to paint sticks, a.k.a crayons. These body painting crayons are rated safe, are much easier to apply and remove compared to liquid cosplay plants - and are cheaper too! The only caveat is that finer details are much harder to pull off with paint sticks - all in all, a wonderful combination.
Experience
These cosplay paints are very useful for getting the details right or providing rudimentary outlines or accents to your cosplay attire. These are incredibly safe and reliable when it comes to paint quality, and are likely to last you multiple cosplaying sessions and events. These paints also come with two metallic shades, which gives them an edge over the others reviewed.
When it comes to safety, these are hypoallergenic, non-toxic, FDA-approved, and food-grade permitted - which makes this set ideal for those with sensitive skin. These are all around 3” long, which makes them perfect for traveling around with. While these may not be enough for a full cosplaying experience, it’s a must-have in any case.
What We Like
Comes in a number of colors including metallic paints for accents
Perfect to carry around while traveling and to deliver some last-minute touches
As safe as the safest paints around today
What We Don't Like
Cannot suffice for a full-fledged liquid cosplaying paint kit
Ben Nye is perhaps the most popular cosplay supplies brand and for good reasons. These paints easily deliver one of the most well-rounded painting experiences, whether you consider the quality, safety, reliability, long-lasting nature of the paint or the overall value delivered by the paint.
Experience
Unlike most other brands listed here, Ben Nye products are generally available individually. The paint bottles are available in a number of sizes, and the one-ounce bottle can easily last between 20 to 70 painting sessions depending on your use. With the paint, you can also get their highly-rated range of glitters, which are also every bit as safe and as vibrant.
Ben Nye makes a number of products that are considered the de facto standard. You can easily get hair paints, face paints, body paints as well as glitters. However, the face and body paints which are available in a huge variety of shades are in a different league entirely.
What We Like
Paints sold individually and are among the safest on the market
Can be coupled with Ben Nye glitters and hair color for the most comprehensive cosplay look
Paints last longer than most other brands at an equivalent price
What We Don't Like
Cannot be had as a kit, may cause some logistical issues
With this, we come to the end of our discussion on the top 6 brands and paint kits for cosplaying. However, we now move to an equally important part of cosplay painting which often gets ignored - the extras you need in order to cosplay like a pro. Paints themselves aren’t enough to last you through conventions without nature playing spoilsport.
What is the Best Body Paint for Cosplay?
This section is dedicated to evaluating and identifying the top-quality body paints specifically tailored for cosplay enthusiasts. The ensuing table meticulously examines crucial attributes including type, palette size, water-resistance, and vegan-friendliness.
Cosplaying, a beautiful art form where enthusiasts recreate their favorite characters or create entirely new ones, is a craft that requires skill, creativity, and attention to detail. One of the most important aspects of cosplay is body paint, as it adds an extra dimension to the character. In order to make your cosplay truly stand out, it's crucial to choose the right body paint. This buying guide will provide you with the most important factors to consider when purchasing body paint for cosplay.
1. Type of Body Paint
There are several types of body paint available in the market, and it's essential to select the best one for your needs:
Water-based Paints: These paints are easy to apply, non-toxic, and straightforward to remove. They are best for sensitive skin and provide a matte finish. However, they can be less durable as they may smudge or wear off with sweat.
Alcohol-based Paints: These paints offer excellent durability, smudge and sweat-proof coverage, and a smooth finish. However, they can be tough to remove and may not suit sensitive skin.
Cream-based Paints: These provide excellent coverage, blend easily, and have a long-lasting effect. They can sometimes feel heavy and may require touch-ups throughout the day.
Hybrid Paints: These are a mix of water-based and alcohol-based paints. They offer the advantages of both types with better durability than water-based paints and a more skin-friendly approach than alcohol-based paints.
2. Pigmentation and Coverage
High-quality body paint should provide rich pigmentation and even coverage. Coverage should be consistent and not streak, crack, or fade easily. Always look for reviews and test the product before purchasing to ensure that it provides the desired level of pigmentation.
3. Application Method
Body paint can be applied using different methods such as brushes, sponges, airbrushing, or fingers. Consider the complexity of your character's design and which application method would work best for you.
4. Skin Type and Safety
Consider your skin type when choosing body paint. Alcohol-based paints can be drying, while cream-based paints may clog pores. Additionally, ensure that the paint is non-toxic, hypoallergenic, and FDA-approved. A patch test is recommended for those with sensitive skin to check for any adverse reactions.
5. Ease of Removal
While some paints are designed to last all day, they should still be easy to remove after your event. Water-based paints are easiest to remove, while alcohol-based paints may require special removers.
6. Budget
Body paint prices can vary widely, so it's essential to set a budget and strike a balance between quality and affordability. Often, mid-range products provide good quality without breaking the bank.
7. Availability
Make sure that the body paint is widely available, either in-store or online, and factor in shipping time if necessary.
Important Tip
Always perform a patch test with any new body paint to check for possible allergic reactions. Apply a small amount to your skin, let it dry, and wait for at least 24 hours to see if any irritation occurs.
By considering these factors and adhering to the tips provided, you'll be well-equipped to find the perfect body paint for your next cosplay event.
The Setting Spray is used both before and after the application of paints. It acts just like a second skin, where it protects the paint from chipping and breaking off your own skin. It is generally made using a combination of alcohol and water and is crucial in making the paints stick to all parts of the skin - especially when it comes to the face which is more oily.
A coat of setting spray applied before the paint brings out the best properties of the paint - pigmentation, vibrance, punchiness, etc. If you intend to take lots of pictures and make the paint last as long as possible, you have to get setting spray as well.
You won’t notice its presence so it’s hard to miss - but only until a few hours pass, by when you will really want to have applied a layer before.
For the most uniform painting experience, you should also have sponges at hand always. For maintaining evenness and to ensure the paint does not streak, the sponge is the best tool on the market. A word of advice: apply only thin layers as far as possible. This will help your paint stick around for longer times without chipping. Paint around your joints will last much longer this way!
You should be very particular when it comes to brushes. You will need a larger brush (e.g. a kabuki brush) to get the larger details just right - however, you will also need thinner brushes for the finest of details. For this, synthetic artist-grade brushes are the de facto standard. You want to have a number of stroke varieties as well as brush styles at hand for a unique look.
Finally, we come to a particular chemical solution for the oil-paint removal problem. Oil-based paints can be notoriously difficult to remove, and that’s why you must always have a remover at hand (especially for the times when the artist goofs up). The remover can be any of a heavy-duty bar of soap, a waterproof make-up remover, or a strong facewash.
You might notice that we’ve only reviewed water-based products. This is simply because of our personal preference for water-based paints, which are much easier to apply and remove compared to oil paints.
8. Budget
Another important consideration while getting cosplay paints is the budget. If you’re not a professional cosplay artist yet, you’re not expected to have perfectly painted cosplay attires as well - and hence, you should get a set that doesn’t break the bank. Go for the best if you’re a professional - nothing else would suffice.
9. Colors
This can be a deciding factor if you’re confused among equivalent sets of cosplay paint kits. Some kits come only with generic paint shades, while others offer you just the right shade you need to make your character look as realistic as possible. Hence, think about the color first and then the budget.
Remember, an expensive shade which is an approximation is worse than an accurate but cheaper paint shade.
What type of body paint is best for cosplay?
The best type of body paint for cosplay depends on your specific needs and the character you are portraying. Some popular options include water-based face and body paints, alcohol-activated paints, and silicone-based paints.
How do I apply body paint for cosplay?
The application process for body paint can vary depending on your paint type. Generally, starting with clean, dry skin and applying a base layer of paint before adding any details or designs is recommended. You can use brushes, sponges, or airbrushes to apply the paint and seal it with a setting spray or powder.
How do I remove body paint after cosplay?
The best way to remove body paint is to use a gentle cleanser or makeup remover that is safe for use on the skin. You can also use baby oil or coconut oil to help dissolve the paint before washing it with soap and water.
Can body paint cause skin irritation or allergies?
Yes, some people may experience skin irritation or allergies when using body paint. It’s important to test the paint on a small area of skin before applying it to larger areas and to look for hypoallergenic options if you have sensitive skin.
How long does body paint last on the skin?
The longevity of body paint can vary depending on the type of paint used, the application method, and other factors such as sweating or rubbing. Generally, water-based paints may last for several hours while alcohol-activated or silicone-based paints can last for up to 24 hours or longer.
Can I swim or shower while wearing body paint?
Swimming or showering while wearing body paint is not recommended, as water can cause the paint to break down and smear. If you need to remove the paint, it’s best to do so before getting wet.
Using a good sharpener can go a long way than just keeping your pencils sharp.
Listed below are the top 5 recommendations for the best sharpeners for colored pencils:
Staedtler Metal Sharpeners: Featuring dual sharpening holes (8.2 mm and 10.2 mm) and durable all-metal construction, this sharpener offers versatility for artists. Lacking child safety measures and a small size requiring frequent disposal of shavings may impact user experience.
Staedtler Pencil Sharpener: Known for sharp blades, affordability, and a child-friendly design, this sharpener is favored. Yet, the single chamber limits tip size options, potentially affecting its appeal to advanced artists.
Bostitch Electric Pencil Sharpener: Recognized for removable blades, a soundproof design, and six chambers accommodating diverse pencil shapes, this electric sharpener caters to varied user needs. A comparatively higher price point and electric operation may influence user preferences.
Maped Shaker 2 Hole Pencil Sharpener: Standing out for its economical pricing, durable metal build, and versatility with various coloring mediums, this sharpener is not recommended for children due to sharp blades. It offers fewer features compared to higher-priced alternatives.
The Duet Manual and Battery Pencil Sharpener: Offering adjustable tip sizes at an affordable rate, this sharpener serves both studio and outdoor use. User reports indicate occasional lagging in battery mode, and manual tuning demands attention during use.
Here is the list of the 10 best sharpeners for colored pencils that you can use to achieve a sharp, precise point for your artwork.
1. Staedtler Metal Sharpeners - Best for Dual Sharpening Holes
Staedtler is a German company that has been around for almost 200 years now. It is one of the most respected brands when it comes to stationery supplies.
And we have metal sharpeners, each with dual sharpening holes to serve two purposes. If you want a pointy tip on your colored pencil, use the 8.2 mm hole, while if you’re planning to draw wider lines, then the 10.2 mm hole will be perfect.
Experience
The sharpener is ideal for working with a piece where you can use your pencil for many different textures since it offers two sizes for the tip.
We love that there are two high-quality pieces within the pack, so we can take one out for plein air projects and keep one as a backup or for use at home. They can also sharpen soft oil-based pencils without breaking them in the process.
For their use and durability, we think the price is very reasonable. It’s worth investing in a sharpener that won’t malfunction as soon as regular ones do after a certain period of usage.
However, the sharpener is not designed to be safe for children as it is fully constructed from metal and there are no outer plastic covers to prevent possible cuts. It is also very small so we don’t suggest giving it to younger kids.
And since the pencils don’t come with a shell, you must have a trash can by your side all the time to prevent creating a mess.
Nonetheless, the sharpener is great for those who are in search of quality and reliability since it has already withstood the test of time.
What We Like
The sharpener has dual holes and can be used to sharpen tips in two different sizes
It is highly durable and has withstood the test of time
Besides durability, the sharpener offers great-quality sharpening that will take good care of colored pencils
What We Don't Like
Without any outer cover, this sharpener is not suitable for kids
Dimensions: 4" x 3" x 0.5" | Weight: 0.11 lb | Material: Metal | Operation: Hand-Operated
2. STAEDTLER Pencil Sharpener - Best for Kids & Portability
Here is another sharpener from Staedtler. This one comes in a very simple, yet attractive design which also happens to be child-friendly and portable.
It’s also one of the cheapest sharpeners on the list, but that doesn’t compromise its functionality.
Experience
Those who are starting out with colored pencils as a coloring medium will find this sharpener very handy and suitable to carry around.
We personally love that a high-quality sharpener from a renowned name such as this comes at a very reasonable price. Its sharp blades allow for clean and pointy tips.
You can use it for both graphite and colored pencils. But the reason we included it on this list is that it takes good care of your colored pencils by keeping them fine and pointy at all times.
While the quality is good, the only limitation is it does not have dual holes for sharpening. For advanced artists, this might not be preferable when working with more than one tip size.
However, it’s a perfect sharpener to carry around for outdoor drawings since it has a secured plastic cover to hold the shavings inside. It’s also a good pick for kids since the cover hides away the sharp blade.
So, if you want a good, reasonably-priced sharpener for kids, give this one a try. It also comes in different colors!
What We Like
It has sharp blades with good performance, yet comes at a very cheap price
The sharpener is available in multiple colors so it’s perfect for children too
It is small and portable
Keep your colored pencils sharp and in clean shape all the time
What We Don't Like
There is only one chamber for sharpening and that limits pencil tip size
Dimensions: 1.5" x 1.5" x 2" | Weight: 0.04 lb | Material: Metal | Operation: Hand-Operated
3. Bostitch Electric Pencil Sharpener - Best Multi-Functional Sharpener
Bostitch is a name that has won the Teachers Choice Award of 2023.
The sharpener is made to meet both classroom and industrial requirements. It can be used for graphite pencils, but it works excellently with colored pencils too.
It has a blade that can easily be removed while using in case the oil/wax binder gets stuck inside and prevents the pencil from sharpening.
Experience
Many artists love this sharpener for many reasons. First of all, unlike other sharpeners, the blade on this electric sharpener can be removed for easy cleaning if the wax ever gets clogged inside while sharpening colored pencils.
On top of that, the blade is very sharp and is always able to produce pointy tips in every single use without damaging the outer wood casing as cheap sharpeners do.
We love the design as it is sturdy and compact. It adds to the overall high-quality performance. Moreover, it is also soundproof which even makes it more desirable. Unlike sharpeners from older days, this one creates very little sound which eliminates distractions.
Besides its removable blades, the sharpener has 6 chambers meant for different pencil shapes and tip sizes. So if you’re using round or triangular-shaped pencils, this is the perfect pick.
And if you are looking for a more reliable or long-lasting option, this one would be a pretty good investment.
Although the price of this sharpener is much higher than that of other more popular sharpeners from the same brand, we are very satisfied with the quality and multiple features it offers.
All in all, we recommend investing in this sharpener as it lasts long and you can buy separate replacement blades. Moreover, it can be used by both adults and children.
What We Like
The sharpener has 6 sharpeners suitable for any common pencil shape and tip size
Blades can be removed, easily cleaned, and also be bought separately if you lose one
It is soundproof to prevent distractions
It is ideal for professionals, beginners, as well as children
What We Don't Like
Compared to other sharpeners from the same brand, this one comes at a higher price
Dimensions: 10.63" x 6.13" x 9" | Weight: 4.03 lbs | Material: Metal | Operation: Electrically-Operated
There are a lot of reasons to love this sharpener from Maped.
One of the main reasons is because of its very low price for only $1.79 for a double chamber and $0.79 for a single chamber.
We included this one on our list solely because it comes at an inexpensive price, but still performs as other high-end sharpeners do.
Experience
If you’re planning to buy a sharpener that will last for a very long time, we recommend the Maped Hand-Held Sharpener. Not only is it cheap but it is also highly durable.
This metal sharpener is suitable for professionals and it has a rating of 4.8 on the Blick art supplies website. All of this is a reason for its multiple features.
It has a perfect grip on both of its sides for precise pencil sharpening. The double-chambered unit has one large hole which can be used for graphite pencils, colored pencils, and even pastels or charcoal. And it works incredibly well with all of them.
Because it accepts more than one coloring medium, artists find this sharpener to be more convenient than other ridiculously priced high-end units out there that only serve one purpose. Rather than buying multiple sharpeners to meet different requirements, this one already serves 4 coloring mediums.
We can say that the only setback is that it is not suitable for kids even though it comes at a very cheap price. Because it also has sharp blades, you’ll also want to store it in a place where kids won’t find it.
But other than that, this sharpener is one of the cheapest options that comes with amazing features you’ll find in the market.
What We Like
Inexpensive price
Suitable for mediums such as graphite pencils, colored pencils, pastels, and charcoal
Will last for a very long time
What We Don't Like
Not recommended for children to use
Dimensions: 10.63" x 6.13" x 9" | Weight: 4.03 lbs | Material: Metal | Operation: Electrically-Operated
5. The Duet Manual and Battery Pencil Sharpener - Best for Adjustable Tip Size
We have here another electric pencil sharpener. Duet has come up with this electric pencil sharpener which operates on two batteries and has manual settings.
The innovative idea by Duet for this sharpener allows users to have control over the size of the pencil tip by tuning it.
Experience
We love how colored pencils can be sharpened effortlessly. The only time you need to pay undivided attention to it is when you have to choose a tip size for your pencil, right before the sharpening is complete.
It also falls under the inexpensive sharpeners on this list which is around $7 and may be highly favored by users on a tight budget. It has most of the features one would look for in an electric pencil sharpener. Moreover, it is perfect to take along for outdoor projects. So, investing in it will be a pretty good idea.
However, some users reported that when keeping it on battery mode, it has a tendency to lag or stop. Other than that, the manual option works pretty well.
For what it’s worth, this will be a good pick for those who are looking forward to having control over the pencil tip.
What We Like
The pencil sharpener only needs 2 AA batteries to operate
Inexpensive price
This is perfect for both studio and outdoor use
It has a casing to save shavings and is safe for children to use
What We Don't Like
Sometimes, going on battery mode can cause lagging or stopping
Dimensions: 3" x 3" x 3" | Weight: 0.23 lb | Material: Plastic, Metal | Operation: Hand & Battery-Operated
6. Prismacolor Premier Pencil Sharpener, 2-pack
Prismacolor is a brand name that is respected for its high-quality pencils that come at affordable prices. For this reason, they came up with a sharpener that works well with their colored pencils, but we don’t doubt it is excellent for other colored pencils too.
Experience
If you have been around the world of colored pencils for some time, you’ll know Prismacolor is a very trusted brand. So, when they introduced the colored pencil sharpener, we knew it was going to be nothing short of a good-quality product.
And as we expected, their sharpener performs very much like the other high-end ones. It has a large casing which allows us to store the shavings when working outdoors. There are also two chambers - one for a wider tip and another for a finer tip.
One thing to keep in mind is that this sharpener is only meant for colored pencils. Although it might work well for graphite pencils too, we recommend sticking only to the intended purpose as the blade is not replaceable.
As we have seen from many online reviews, users said the sharpener is more than enough for those who daily work with colored pencils. They found that the price is worth its performance.
If you always use Prismacolor colored pencils, this would be the perfect sharpener for all your projects. But we also urge you to try it for other colored pencils as well since it has everything you might be expecting from a colored pencil sharpener.
What We Like
The sharpener comes at a reasonable price
It has a casing that can be used to store shavings as long as the user is outdoors
There are two chambers to let the user select either a wide or fine tip
What We Don't Like
It is only suitable for use with colored pencils and not for other media
Dimensions: 3" x 6.1" x 0.2" | Weight: 0.2 lb | Material: Stainless Steel | Operation: Battery-Operated
7. X-ACTO Electric Sharpener
X-ACTO is a brand known for producing some of the sharpest knives and razors universally. And now, they introduced this electric sharpener for multipurpose uses.
It can be used for colored and graphite pencils. The blade is incredibly sharp which allows users to cut pencils easily.
Experience
We love that this sharpener keeps our pencils pointy all the time until they become too short to use. Besides graphite and colored pencils, it can also be used for either soft or hard leads and triangular pencils. Therefore, this increases its versatility.
Like most of the options we mentioned before, this one is suitable for children and adults to use, as well as for taking outdoors.
However, what sets it apart from the rest is that it comes with a warranty of 10 years. This hints that the sharpener is of very high quality. We take this as an opportunity to get the most performance from the sharpener. Rest assured, it is incredibly durable.
Another feature we must include is that the blades can be removed for cleaning. In case we lose them, there are replacement blades that are available online.
Expect to find the blades dull after a long while of use which means there is a need to change them.
Besides artists, professionals who are looking for a heavy-duty sharpener to carry to their work site found this sharpener very handy.
What We Like
Sharpener suits various media like hard/soft leads, graphite, triangular, and colored pencils
Suitable for all ages and professions
Blades are easily replaceable
What We Don't Like
The blades can become dull and blunt after a while of use, which they will then require to be changed
Dimensions: 7" x 3.13" x 4.5" | Weight: 0.87 lb | Material: Plastic, Metal | Operation: Electrically-Operated
In our review of the Alvin Brass Bullet Pencil Sharpener, we mentioned that the blade it utilizes is from this particular brand.
Mobius & Ruppert is a company making stationery that has been around for more than a hundred years now. All of the products are known for their premium quality, and that’s the same case with this sharpener.
Experience
As the name suggests, the Brass Round Double Hole Sharpener has double chambers - for wide and fine sharpening. It comes at a very affordable price, so students as well as artists with a restricted budget can use it.
The round body is made entirely of brass. It is one of the smallest sharpeners on our list. Although its shape is round, we can still get a good grip for smooth sharpening, all thanks to the side grooves.
The blades on this sharpener can be removed as well as replaced with new ones which you can find on any online stationery-selling platform.
Many artists who have used this sharpener for a while now said that it is durable and still functions pretty well.
Since it is an open-blade sharpener, it means that it is not designed to have a casing. Therefore, its usage is restricted only to adults, and not children.
What We Like
Sharpener comes at an incredibly low price for everyone to be able to afford it
Blades can be removed and replaced to ensure clean cutting
It has two chambers and lasts for a long time
What We Don't Like
The open-blade design exposing sharp blades might not be suitable for little children to use
Dimensions: 3.9" x 2.7" x 0.7" | Weight: N/A | Material: Brass | Operation: Hand-Operated
9. Dahle 155 Professional Pencil Sharpener
The Dahle Professional Pencil Sharpener is used for sharpening a variety of coloring mediums such as watercolor pencils, pastels, colored pencils, and charcoal.
One important feature about it is that it has the looks of a crank sharpener but functions as a modern one.
Experience
This sharpener is one of the best that we have reviewed.
What we truly love about it is that it allows us to choose the right tip size simply by tuning the adjustment lever. Moreover, it contains a chamber opening that is large enough for any pencil size to fit inside. It has a small casing to save unwanted shavings.
The benefit you’ll get from manually tuning the tip is if the art piece requires patches and lines of different sizes, which the sharpener can easily provide. You will also have more control over the outcome of the piece.
We also like that it is inexpensive so that everybody can have access to it. We can use it both in the studio or outdoors too.
One drawback is that, unlike automatic or even hand-held sharpeners, you need to actually turn the handle for sharpening, and this requires more time and effort.
But apart from that, this would be a good pick for your studio or if you want an accurate tip size.
What We Like
The sharpener allows its users to choose the tip size according to their preferences
It comes at an inexpensive price
It is ideal for both outdoor and studio use
What We Don't Like
Can take time to sharpen pencils by turning the handle
Dimensions: 3.9" x 2.7" x 0.7" | Weight: N/A | Material: Brass | Operation: Hand-Operated
10. Derwent Super Point Manual Helical Pencil Sharpener
Another manually operated crank sharpener is the Derwent Super Point Manual Helical Pencil sharpener. It can be used for pencils of different sizes.
Its features include having helical blades to ensure long-point sharpening and many more.
Experience
We love this sharpener because of the multiple features it includes. It is ideal for pencils with a size that reaches up to 8mm.
First of all, the secured metal casing is one feature that assures us that the sharpener will last for a long time.
Although you have to turn the lever, it automatically stops when the cutting process is done. The sharpener will slack and that’s when you know it’s ready. There is no need to hold the sharpener with your hand since it comes with a clamp that can be attached to a desk or work table.
The blades are easily reachable for cleaning since all you have to do is pull out the reservoir tray.
This is a professional-grade sharpener, hence, it falls under the expensive options on this list. It may not be suitable if you’re either on a tight budget or just looking to sharpen your colored pencils with a cheaper alternative.
Overall, the sharpener produces amazing extra long and extra pointy pencils.
What We Like
Auto-stop feature to make sure you don’t waste your precious colored pencils
Comes with a clamp that can be attached to various surfaces such as a desk, work table or chair
Blades are easily accessible for proper cleaning
What We Don't Like
The price can be expensive for students and budgeted artists
Dimensions: 5.31" x 2.95" x 4.92" | Weight: 1.1 lbs | Material: Metal | Operation: Hand-Operated
What Is the Best Sharpener for Colored Pencils?
This table offers a concise overview of essential attributes for various pencil sharpeners, detailing dimensions (in inches), weight (in pounds), number of chambers, operation mode, and material composition.
Can I use a regular pencil sharpener for colored pencils?
Although it is possible to use a regular sharpener, it is preferable to use a sharpener designed for colored pencils. Colored pencil leads are generally softer than graphite, and a specialized sharpener will provide better results and prevent breakage.
What types of sharpeners are best suited for colored pencils?
The best sharpeners for colored pencils include manual, electric, and battery-powered options. Look for sharpeners with high-quality blades and sharpness adjustment features to better protect the delicate leads of the colored pencils.
How do I choose the right sharpener for my colored pencils?
To choose the right sharpener for your colored pencils, consider the sharpener’s compatibility with the pencil diameter, the quality of the blades, and adjustable sharpness. It can also be helpful to read product reviews and consult fellow artists for tips and recommendations.
Do I need a separate sharpener for each color?
No, it’s not necessary to have a separate sharpener for each color. You can use the same sharpener for multiple colors; just make sure to clean it periodically to avoid mixing colors.
How often should I sharpen my colored pencils?
The frequency of sharpening depends on your usage and desired level of precision. Frequent sharpening helps maintain a fine tip, but over-sharpening can waste the colored lead. It’s essential to find a balance between performance and pencil life.
How do I prevent lead breakage while using a sharpener?
To prevent breakage, use a gentle grip, rotate the pencil slowly, and avoid excessive pressure. Make sure the sharpener is clean and free of debris. High-quality sharpeners with adjustable sharpness also help to prevent lead breakage.
How do I clean and maintain my colored pencil sharpener?
Regularly clean your sharpener to remove debris and prevent lead/color mixing. Use a small brush, toothpick, or pipe cleaner to remove lead remnants. Always handle the sharpener carefully, and replace the blades when they become dull.
As we've explored various sharpeners for colored pencils, it's apparent that the right sharpener can make a significant difference in the quality and precision of your artwork.
Having analyzed the top 10 best sharpeners on the market, we've narrowed down our expert recommendations to the following top three options:
For those who appreciate quality and durability, the Staedtler Metal Sharpeners with their dual sharpening holes are an ideal option. Providing two different tip sizes and withstanding the test of time, it's a reliable investment for artists who want a versatile, long-lasting sharpener.
The STAEDTLER Pencil Sharpener, on the other hand, is a good option for kids and artists on the go. With its child-friendly design, sharp blade performance, and reasonable price, this might be just the sharpener you're looking for.
Lastly, the Bostitch Electric Pencil Sharpener is the right choice for artists seeking a multi-functional sharpener. Its removable blades, ability to accommodate various pencil shapes and tip sizes, and wide range of use make it an excellent investment.
No matter which one you choose, you'll be equipping yourself with the right tool for creating exceptional artwork with vivid, precise colors. Happy coloring!
We'd like to take you through the best utility sinks of 2023 to help make the right selection for your daily chores at home. Utility sinks are usually located in a specific area to ease your tasks and increase your efficiency. You can put a nice-looking tub in the laundry room to wash clothes, or in the garden to clean tools.
You can improvise and choose a utility sink with cabinets that can accommodate all your items and accessories. Utility sinks can be equally helpful in washing and storing any household equipment.
Moreover, there are various types of utility sinks that come completely assembled to suit your needs. What’s more, they can be customized to help improve washing and cleaning.
Depending on what you are looking for, we have put together a list of top-quality utility sinks to help you choose the best of the lot available today.
Listed below are the top 5 recommendations for the best utility sinks and laundry sinks:
Black Utility Sink Laundry Tub: I was impressed by this sink's classic style and durable features, including its rust-proof and stain-resistant attributes. One thing to consider is that certain components are made from low-grade plastic, which might impact its overall longevity.
Vetta 040 JS6507GRY Utility Sink: This sink stands out with its high-quality stain resistance and high arc pull-down faucet. For enhanced stability, it might need additional support from wall or floor mounting.
JS Jackson Supplies 040 JS6502BLK Utility Sink: I admired the customizable high arc faucet in this sink. The slope design has the potential to create challenges with drainage.
TRINITY THA-0307 Utility Sink: The easy installation process of the swiveling faucet and adjustable legs are major highlights of this sink. One thing to keep in mind is the large size, which might not be suitable for smaller spaces.
Kraus KHU24L Utility Sink: While the sleek design and noise-minimizing technology are great features, the angle of the base might prove difficult with drainage.
What Is a Utility Sink?
A utility sink is a type of sink used for various utility tasks as the name suggests. It is usually larger than a standard bathroom sink and can be made from different materials such as ceramic, porcelain, marble, stainless steel, and even cast iron. They are usually installed as drop-in sinks which means they are placed in an opening cut into the countertop or cabinet.
This allows for easy installation and great flexibility around the cabinet or counter in which they are placed. Utility sinks are commonly used in laundry rooms for washing clothes, cleaning large items such as pots and pans, pet bathing and grooming, and general cleaning. For these uses, stainless steel sinks are often chosen as they are highly durable and resistant to scratches while also being easy to clean.
Are you looking for the best utility sink? From stainless steel to cast iron, you'll find the perfect sink for your laundry room, basement, garage, or outdoor workspace. Here is the list of the 10 Best Utility Sinks to help you keep your household clean and clutter-free!
1. Black Utility Sink Laundry Tub - Best for Classic Styling
This sleek utility tub comes with a chrome faucet that fits easily into your workshop, laundry room, washroom, or garage area. The laundry tub has a classic look and is also black in color, which adds style to the look of the room where it is installed.
The best part about this utility sink is that it is both rust-proof and stain-resistant. That helps take care of complex and cumbersome jobs that could otherwise cause damage to the sink. This laundry sink is quite rugged and can help with almost all cleaning requirements at home.
Also, the drain of the sink is molded into the tub for easy drainage. The sink has a standalone base that can be fixed to the floor using pre-cut holes. You will find these holes just beneath the leg-levelers.
The best part is, that it is easy to install this sink in the house all by yourself. There is a step-by-step manual available, which is easy to follow. The levelers can be adjusted to sit the whole tub perfectly on rough or uneven surfaces and provide stability.
The tubs are freestanding stations that help in washing and cleaning efficiently.
Some parts of the tub are made of plastic. For example, the legs seem too thin for the entire apparatus to seem sturdy. Even though the sink has many valuable features for your home, this one problem might keep you from buying the sink immediately.
What We Like
Pull-out faucet
Slop sink
Helps ease heavy work
Easy floor installation
What We Don't Like
Some parts are made of low-grade material
Short life-span
Dimensions (inches): 23.3 x 22.88 x 41.75 | Material: Plastic, Metal | Color: Black | Faucet Included: Yes | Weight (lbs): 20
2. Vetta 040 JS6507GRY Utility Sink - Best for Stain Resistance
The advantage of having this sink is that it has a faucet with a high arc. That gives you the option of washing large things in the tub. The faucet can also be pulled down for spraying water to remove stubborn dirt. Along with that, drainage equipment and supply lines accompany the set for complete installation.
The washbasin is large and can accommodate a lot of items. The faucet not only gives more room for cleaning oversized things, but it also helps in making the washing process easy and comfortable.
Apart from the high arc, the faucet in this utility sink has both stream and spray functions. It can also be pulled down to blast a stream of water on stubborn dirt and stains. The pull-down function gives the flexibility to maneuver the faucet as you want.
Moreover, the entire set comes with all the accessories required to fix the sink in place at home. There is an instruction guide and customer support is also available for you to reach out to if there is a problem with the installation.
The best part is, that you would not have to buy any accessories apart from the set with this Vetta utility sink providing everything for a clean home!
The sink is sturdy and can also stand alone. But without fixing it to the floor, or the room's wall, it tends to flex. Some flex is perhaps alright in a sink; the trouble is, this product seems to flex a lot without the necessary stability of a floor or wall mount.
3. JS Jackson Supplies 040 JS6502BLK Utility Sink - Best for High Arc Faucet
The sink is perfect for washing and cleaning all oversized and bulky items at home. The metal legs are sturdy and have a smooth black finish. The legs keep the tub stable even when it is full of water. The utility sink is available in 4 attractive colors.
If you are enthusiastic about customizing a utility sink, this JS Jackson is perfect for you. The tub comes with plenty of holes and a slop sink without an attached faucet. These holes can be used to customize the sink's abilities according to the kind of utility room that has to be set up.
So, add a soap dispenser, a side spray, and many other accessories to the sink you like most for the utility room. The tub has several preformed holes that can accommodate any faucet you choose in order to customize the utility sink.
To install the faucet, all you have to do is punch out a 1" hole in diameter. There are seven preformed holes available in this set. Any 4" or 8" faucet can fit into these preformed holes. In case you have a larger or more widespread faucet, just drill holes into the existing options.
The tub is large and spacious, but the slope of the design is such that it could cause water retention. The pitch of the sink is something to watch out for. You could get this fixed by a professional if the problem occurs while washing and cleaning.
What We Like
Fairly easy installation
Rust-free
Durable
Customizable sink
What We Don't Like
Might be unstable
Improper drainage
Dimensions (inches): 23.5 x 22.87 x 33.75 | Material: Plastic | Color: Black | Faucet Included: No | Weight (lbs): 31
4. TRINITY THA-0307 Utility Sink- Best for Customization
This sink has a stainless steel tub with a large basin. It has a single-handle chrome faucet that includes hoses. The drain is simple without any inner basket. The entire design is sleek and enhances the room's look - be it a mudroom, laundry, or garage.
The quality of the stainless steel used for the body of this utility sink is high-grade. That ensures that the sink lasts long at home, as the wear and tear are quite slow due to the high-grade material.
Also, the sink is easy to clean and maintain. The body is sturdy and looks good in any room of your house. In fact, it looks as professional as any of the sinks usually found in a cafeteria or a restaurant.
The installation is fairly simple as well. You can do it all by yourself, or get expert help to fix the sink properly in any room. It also offers complete value for money as it combines the functions of a utility sink with great design. The features and look of this sink make it one of the best utility gadgets for a home!
The utility sink is bigger than the usual utility sink. The disadvantage is that it can occupy a large part of the room which might make your home feel congested and uncomfortable. This product has to suit the dimensions of your room to be worth your while.
5. Kraus KHU24L Utility Sink- Best for Sleek Design
The KHU24L is one of the largest kitchen sinks that can be found in the utility sink range. It is excellent for washing oversized objects and is built to support all kinds of washing and cleaning.
So, put it in a greenhouse, or workshop today to wash up all the big items!
It is a unique home utility sink that has been inspired by professional sinks used in restaurant kitchens. The designs are made to suit the modern home, so you will surely be happy when you notice those square-shaped designs.
The body of the sink is resistant to denting, as it is made of T304 stainless steel. It also has an 18-gauge thickness. These features aid both the strength and longevity of the utility sink. It has NoiseDefend soundproofing technology that lets you enjoy a quiet time while washing and cleaning.
Also, the utility sink is long-lasting with corrosion and rust-resistant features. The resilience of the sink makes it a handy tool to clean and wash those oversized items at home that could be difficult to wash otherwise.
Lastly, the sink's finish is satin smooth; it can easily fit into your home and match the interiors flawlessly.
You might notice that water does not go entirely down the drain while washing utensils, clothes, etc. The water may not flush down 100% after cleaning because of the angle of the base of the sink. You could get a professional to fix the problem if this occurs.
What We Like
Durable
Easy to Clean
Rust-resistant
Resilient
What We Don't Like
Some plastic accessories
Faulty drainage
Dimensions (inches): 18.5 x 24 x 12.25 | Material: Stainless Steel | Color: Stainless | Faucet Included: No | Weight (lbs): 17.71
6. Mustee 14CP Utility Sink
The tub is made of polypropylene and can stand on its own. In other words, it is a freestanding tub that can be mounted on the floor. The 14CP also has a great look and sturdy body that complements your house both in terms of style and stability.
A simple utility sink can be very handy for washing and cleaning which is a daily requirement in all households. The 14CP utility sink is excellent for light and everyday jobs at home.
What's more, the sink can be put outside in the yard and used for multiple functions. For example, clothes can be washed just near the clothesline on a bright, sunny day. The small yard tools can be cleaned up right after use. All the more, the installation in the yard can be done quite quickly without any trouble.
So, for the yard installation, all you need to do is buy a simple adapter that would attach the hose to the utility tub. Let the drain run out into a tree hole or a large plant, and you are ready to wash the dirt off all your tools, utensils, and equipment!
The leg levers are an essential part of the sink that stabilizes it in the utility room. However, be cautious about the leg levelers that come with this setup. They do not support the weight of the entire sink for long-term use sometimes. Check the levelers before choosing this sink.
What We Like
Easy floor mount installation
Easy to use
Easy to operate
What We Don't Like
Non-durable materials
Average leg leveler performance
Dimensions (inches): 23.5 x 25.5 x 15.5 | Material: Polypropylene | Color: White | Faucet Included: Yes | Weight (lbs): 15.8
7. Simpli Home, Ltd. AXCLDYHEN-SS Utility Sink
The utility sink is constructed with strong materials such as stainless steel and PB MDF. It has a high-arc faucet that can swivel easily. There is also a cabinet beneath the sink with two Shaker-style doors. The cabinet gives plenty of room for storing things in the utility room.
The cabinet and the Shaker-style doors are sturdy and have a simple yet unique design. The sink can look good in any utility room at home. Just place it where your washing and cleaning jobs need to be done.
Also, the storage area of the cabinets is quite big; it can accommodate a lot of things related to the chores that you do at home. For example, the white cabinet can store laundry, washed clothes, soaps, cleaning agents, detergents, etc., all in one place for your convenience.
Moreover, the cabinet is useful and decorative, as it can tuck away the small things you need while enhancing the house's overall look. The good news is that the cabinet and the sink combo are pretty easy to install by yourself.
Lastly, the faucet has a toggle switch that can help turn either stream or spray functions on as per your need.
The sink is prone to denting if a heavy object is put in it or accidentally dropped in, without you meaning to do so. Otherwise, you can freely wash any lightweight thing that needs cleaning and store it away later in the cabinet. Maintain proper precautions while using this gadget.
What We Like
Easy and clear instructions
Deep sink
Easy to install
Sturdy
What We Don't Like
Might need a wall mount
Cannot handle much weight
Dimensions (inches): 19.7 x 23.6 x 52 | Material: Stainless Steel | Color: White | Faucet Included: Yes | Weight (lbs): 60.5
8. Transolid TC-2420-WC Utility Sink
The sink and cabinet combo have a faucet with a flexible neck. The cabinet is pre-assembled which helps save time during installation. It is made of brushed nickel and Shaker-style doors that enhance its look. It is good for everyday use and decor with ample storage space and an excellent finish.
The sink is made of 19 gauge stainless steel and serves as a powerful agent in cleaning and washing at home. It is handmade and features an integral backsplash as well. The sink also has a center drain location and a pre-drilled faucet hole. There is a matching strainer for your convenience at all times.
Also, the sink bowl is large and spacious, with a 13-gallon water capacity. Fix it in the laundry room or the garage and find the perfect utility for this new Transolid sink. The faucet has a flexible neck covered with white silicone, which looks good with the entire product.
You would love the garden hose adapter that comes with the faucet. The dual-function spray head with a 1.8 GPM flow rate and the ceramic disc cartridge are impressive additions. All these parts and features make this faucet superior in quality and design.
The utility sink is excellent if you have lightweight things to wash. The features and functions of the sink make it a good value for money. However, make sure your requirements at home are not heavier than the sink’s weight limit. Do be careful and attentive about its weight-bearing capacity.
What We Like
Easy to use
Adjustable legs
Easy DIY soap dispenser installation
Multiple function faucet
What We Don't Like
Small laundry load capacity
Dimensions (inches): 19.7 x 23.6 x 34.6 | Material: Stainless Steel | Color: White | Faucet Included: Yes | Weight (lbs): 79
9. JS Jackson Supplies 040 JS6503SS Utility Sink
The 040 JS6503SS from Jackson Supplies is a rectangular-shaped tub made of metal, plastic, and ABS. It has a freestanding mode of installation. The faucet of the utility sink has metal shanks and handles and is constructed of metal overall for a sturdy and solid performance over a long duration.
Both the tub and the faucet are made of resilient and good-quality materials. That gives the tub and the faucet durability and an excellent finish. You definitely have a good buy in hand when it comes to the longevity and look of this tub.
The convenience of having this sink is that it solves all your washing and cleaning problems in one go. The high-end faucet adds far more functions and style than the good old kitchen faucet to your specific utility room!
Also, the faucet has a high arc and leaves lots of room for washing and cleaning bulky clothes and other items. The arc also helps avoid the need to maneuver the faucet to wash things, making it easier for you to focus on getting them cleaned quickly.
Finally, the sprayer can be pulled down to wash those corners and edges that are difficult to reach while washing.
The sprayer is of great utility as it washes off stubborn dirt from clothes and other items. But the sink tends to flex when the spray hits the back of the basin. That could make you uncomfortable as the product might seem fragile and make you hesitant about its durability.
What We Like
Multipurpose utility kitchen
Illustrated step-by-step instructions
Rust-proof metal legs
Compatible with garden hoses
What We Don't Like
Sink flexes with a strong spray
Trap may need early replacement
Dimensions (inches): 23.5 x 22.88 x 49.75 | Material: Stainless Steel | Color: White | Faucet Included: Yes | Weight (lbs): 21.4
10. Ruvati USA RVU6100 Utility Sink
The RVU6100 is a 16-gauge premium utility sink built with stainless steel that has a modern look. The sink is perfect for mudrooms, laundry rooms, and other utility rooms. In fact, the stainless steel construction is best suited for the mudroom, but can easily adapt to different kinds of rooms.
The bowl in the utility sink is big and can accommodate large items for washing and cleaning. At 12", it can fit any big bucket, so you can even wash your boots in the sink! The rinse grid of the sink is made of stainless steel that allows water to flow freely.
Moreover, the material protects the sink bottom from getting scratched by heavy or long hours of washing. The brushed finish of the sink helps hide scratches. The body is built and finished to match standard appliances in the kitchen.
What’s more, the grooves in the drain are designed to perfection. There are four grooves in the drain at the bottom of the sink channel water that bends towards the drain. That helps in keeping the sink dry and clean.
Finally, the sink is covered in heavy SoundGUARD padding that minimizes noise while it is in use.
The stainless steel material is A-grade and can last quite a long. But the sink, unfortunately, has to be handled with care. The corners and the body are prone to bending and denting and cannot be used roughly. That means an accident might leave unwanted bumps and scratches in the body.
What We Like
Rust-proof
Stain-proof
Thermal insulation
Easy waste dispensing mechanism
What We Don't Like
Stainless steel material can bend easily
Rust spots may occur
Dimensions (inches): 18 x 23 x 12 | Material: Stainless Steel | Color: Stainless | Faucet Included: No | Weight (lbs): 20
What Is the Best Utility Sink?
This table provides a detailed comparison of leading utility sinks, evaluating key attributes such as dimensions (in inches), material, color, faucet, and weight (in lbs).
Utility sinks are a great addition to any home, offering the perfect place to clean up after projects, a safe place to wash your pets, or more commonly: a place to take care of laundry.
These versatile sink ideas can be installed in a base cabinet, mounted on the wall, or even as a floor-mount sink, they come in all materials, shapes, and sizes. A stainless steel laundry sink is the most common sink, and the most common mounting type would be under-mount sinks, this sink setup is ideal for those who want a utility sink that looks stylish and modern.
Utility sinks are also incredibly durable and easy to maintain, making them an excellent choice for busy households. With so many benefits to choosing a utility sink, it's easy to see why they remain popular today.
It is worth noting that your home deserves to look great and a utility sink can help in that regard as well as it keeps the less-desirable day-to-day washing activities off the main sink, thus allowing you to splurge on the main bathroom sink or kitchen sink without worrying about damaging it.
It goes without saying that a dedicated space for a laundry room, a mudroom, or a wet room can also increase the value of your home overall, a feat to which utility sinks come in as well.
Buying Guide for the Best Utility Sink
It is alright to feel overwhelmed even after reading our comprehensive reviews to choose the best utility sinks for your home. Just follow the buyer's guide that we have added to this review. We realize you need important insights to pick the perfect sink that can help ease tasks at home.
A utility sink is an appliance that can last for a long time. You must always look for an option that you can use for many years, like a refrigerator or a cooking range. Luckily, many utility sinks offer not only longevity but performance, versatility, as well a finish to match home décor.
You will not even need to change the look of your home when you decide to buy a sink for the chores that are frequently performed at home. These latest sinks in our review will help you in quick and easy decision-making to set up a utility room.
Also, we have factored in the latest technology and features of the best utility sink in the market. Just consider the following characteristics before homing in on the sink you want to buy.
Durability
Always check for durable material in the main parts of the utility sink to ensure you are getting the best deal. For example, in a sink that offers a tub, adjustable feet, legs, cabinets, a faucet, etc., each part should guarantee the quality of the materials that are used.
So, if the base materials of the utility sink are durable, you stand a better chance of investing in a superior sink that can last you for a long time, utility sinks are made in all materials, and cast iron utility sinks can be as durable as plastic ones if the use case is correct, a plastic sink is a great option for temporary spaces or places in which only light use cases are carried out, such as washing light textiles.
That should keep you on top of your buying options.
Look and Finish
There are many utility sinks or laundry sinks that are popular for their design and finish. Sellers and manufacturers alike usually share the shapes of the sinks, or the color, for you to be able to match a sink to the décor of your home.
In fact, there are quite a few sellers who assure that the look and finish of their product blend in with the style of your home. Look out for words like 'modern,' 'sleek,' 'stylish,' and 'high-end' to add to the list of advantages of the utility sink you are planning to buy.
Once that is done, you are ready to go!
Performance
Evaluate the faucet functions, the sink, drainage, etc., to see how they compare to other utility sinks in the reviews. Some utility sinks may have faucets with multiple functions that are useful for your utility room.
Or, a drain might be designed to soak in water and dirt better than others. It might be a good idea to assess what you require most for the utility room and then come to your decision.
What are the positives of owning a utility sink?
Owning a utility sink brings numerous benefits such as added convenience and versatility, facilitating a gamut of tasks like hand–washing, laundry, and diverse cleaning activities.
How is a laundry sink distinct from a utility sink?
Distinctness between a laundry and utility sink originates from size and function. Laundry sinks tend to be smaller and cater to laundry-specific chores like hand-washing sensitive garments or soaking items.
Do laundry rooms necessitate the inclusion of a utility sink?
Laundry rooms don't necessarily mandate a utility sink, but having one can augment the functionality for specific, often messy, tasks.
Which sink type stands out as an optimal choice for a utility room?
For a utility room, the ideal sink type would be one that guarantees longevity and ease of maintenance. Stainless steel or porcelain sinks are commonly chosen for their resilience and easy-to-clean nature.
What dimensions would be apt for a laundry room sink?
Typical laundry room sinks measure between 18 to 24 inches in width, with a minimum depth of around 8.5 inches to ensure efficient water drainage.
Can one build a cabinet surrounding a floor-mounted sink?
Absolutely, constructing a cabinet around a floor-mounted sink is entirely feasible.
What styles are on offer when choosing a utility sink?
Utility sinks are available in a variety of styles encompassing drop-in, under-mount, wall-mounted, and pedestal designs.
Oil pastels are one of the easiest mediums to work with since they don’t require extra work to get started.
If we think about paint mediums that are great for a number of surfaces, oil pastels are one of them. With good preparation on a fine platform, these mediums can give any surface a colorful and rich appealing look regardless you are using canvas or other heavy-weight papers. And in the case of paper surfaces, oil pastels give out exceptional results even though it depends on the type and quality of the paper.
Finding the best paper surface for oil pastels artwork can be tricky especially when you’re a beginner and not certain which one will best meet your expectations. There are many good brands out there that offer a wide range of papers for oil paints. Speaking of which, we have a list of 9 paper surfaces that we personally find to be the best in the market.
Listed below are the best papers for oil pastels:
Strathmore Assorted Pastel Paper Pad: The Strathmore pastel paper has an 80 lb paper weight, acid-free composition, and different size options. Its light surface texture is less capable of enabling thick layers of oil pastels compared to Faber-Castell's smoother texture.
Faber-Castell Black Oil Paper Pad: A paper that shines with a unique black canvas that boasts a 74 lb paper weight and a smooth texture, excellent for bringing out bright colors. The tooth is very shallow, unlike the Canson Mi-Tientes, limiting the creation of effects and textures.
U.S. Art Supply's Premium Pastel Paper Pad: The U.S. Art Supply pastel paper pad has a paper weight of 80 lb and offers a medium texture. Its requirement for fixatives for long-term paint preservation is a weak point compared to other options.
Canson Mi-Teintes Pad for Pastels: The Canson Mi-Tientes is a pastel paper with a 98 lb weight that excels in versatility, catering to both dry and wet medium artists. It's more expensive than most other options.
Hahnemuhle Bugra Oil Pastel Paper: Hahnemuhle Bugra oil pastel paper is crafted in Germany. With an 88 lb weight, it's notable for its high lightfastness and acid-free features. It needs fixatives like the U.S. Art Supply pastel paper for paint durability, which is a drawback.
1. Strathmore Assorted Pastel Paper Pad - Best for Budget-friendly Versatility
Strathmore is a brand that has been around for 100 years and above and is very popular among students. It would be a rare case if any dedicated art student has not heard of the brand before. Their products are available in most art stores.
The reason they are widely used by students and art schools is the price of their products - and it’s no exception with the Assorted Pastel Paper Pad as well.
Experience
One might think that because the price is reduced, the quality is also compromised. No doubt, it would drop by a certain extent since the price is meant to be affordable for students. But the fact stands that these pastels still produce amazing pieces.
We find the availability of these pastel pads in almost every local art store very convenient.
First of all, it saves the artist a lot of time from hunting for decent papers all over, especially if it’s someone with a tight schedule.
Secondly, we don’t personally prefer to buy art supplies online because then we get to inspect the products firsthand before purchasing unless, of course, the items are not available anywhere else besides online.
This is because sometimes the products you expect are nowhere near the real ones. So, we find the Strathmore pastel pads to be very useful for artists with similar preferences.
Besides the availability, these pads are also wallet-friendly and great for artists who like to try out papers with other colors for their artwork. The colors of the papers inside this pad are medium brown, green, blue, pink, cream, and white.
The feature we love most about paper pads is their versatility. Although they work wonders with oil pastels, they are also great for other mediums such as soft pastels, chalk pastels, and even crayons.
Besides that, they can take some liquid paints too except for heavy watercolor projects since these papers are more on the lightweight side.
They are also available in three different sizes, which leaves us with more options to choose from.
But given these are light paper pads, we find there is only a little amount of tooth. Nonetheless, there are many artists who prefer light teeth when working with a few layers of oil pastels.
All in all, the Strathmore 400 Series pastel papers are great for archival purposes because they are acid-free.
What We Like
Easily available in many local art stores
Affordable
Works well with other pastel mediums
What We Don’t Like
Lacks tooth for thick layering on paper
Paper Weight: 80 lb | Texture: Medium | Acid-free: Yes | Size Options: 9 x 12 inches, 11 x 14 inches, 18 x 24 inches
2. Faber-Castell Black Oil Paper Pad - Best for Highlighting Bright Colors
In the world of art, any form of creativity is always welcomed. And today we have the Faber-Castell Black Paper Pad which as the name suggests, is black in color.
This may not seem like the traditional paper one would look for but with the thought of getting totally different results, you might just love the idea of having this in your collection of oil pastel surfaces.
Experience
First off, this is perfect for all those bright colors we’ve always kept aside for a long time. The black background just enhances those shades which would normally go unnoticed on regular white paper.
Although it totally depends on your preferred techniques, this truly brings out the unique appeal which you don’t get with bright-colored papers.
We also noticed that this paper is quite versatile with other mediums besides pastels because of its thickness and color itself. Media such as crayons, gel sticks, and metallic pencils can be used on this surface. Even when it comes to papers for crafts, this also makes a great pick for fancy DIY projects.
We would recommend keeping liquid mediums away from them as much as possible. Since they are meant for oil pastels, it is not expected that they can’t take any kind of liquid paint. However, through research and experiments, we found these papers can take acrylic paints given that they are not too watery.
But overall, we like that the papers are not that expensive which means they are great for students and artists who are on a budget. Not only that, but they are also ideal for young artists and children to practice on.
Since it is a black paper pad, it is already obvious that it will not highlight dark colors as it does with bright colors. However, we can say that the only setback we found with this paper is that it has a very shallow tooth which is not ideal when working on effects and textures.
But keeping that aside, the paper’s quality is amazing for archival purposes.
What We Like
Ideal for bright shades & other dry mediums
High quality with archival properties
Affordable for students, budget artists, & kids
What We Don’t Like
Minimal tooth in paper challenges effect creation
Paper Weight: 74 lb | Texture: Smooth | Acid-free: Yes | Size Options: 9 x 12 inches
3. U. S. Art Supply Premium Oil Pastel Paper Pad - Best for Mixed Media Enthusiasts
Similar to Strathmore, U. S. Art Supply is a brand that is easily available mostly everywhere. From its great quality and high-performance products to its affordable prices, the brand has become very popular among students and learning artists.
Their Premium Pastel Paper Pad in Natural Tone Colors is great for both professionals and beginners because it is easy to use and delivers good-quality artwork.
Experience
We will first look into the natural tones of the papers. They include light beige, cream white, beige grey, and eggshell white.
We find every single color perfect for doing beautiful landscape pieces. All these colored papers make great backgrounds for such portraits. Apart from that, they also work well with other preferred concepts.
The quality of these papers is smooth, yet still, has enough thickness in terms of mixing paint mediums. They can actually accept mixed mediums in case the artist wants to try out different effects.
You can tell from the touch of the sheet how much moisture it can accept because if the paint is too runny, it can cripple and damage the paper. We would suggest having a separate page for testing the consistency if you are unsure while using mixed mediums.
Keep in mind that liquid mediums such as acrylic paints can be used while watercolors can pose a risk to the paper.
As we have mentioned earlier, the paper has a perfect combination of texture/tooth and smoothness which makes it easy and pleasurable to use throughout the painting.
But the papers require the use of fixatives if we plan to keep the pieces in the long run.
Overall, the sheets are very affordable and great for self-taught beginners and art students.
What We Like
Balances smoothness & tooth for exceptional art
Thick paper receptive to mixed media
Affordable papers suitable for students & beginners
What We Don’t Like
Fixatives needed for long-lasting paint adherence
Paper Weight: 80 lb | Texture: Medium | Acid-free: Yes | Size Options: 9 x 12 inches
4. Canson Mi-Teintes Pad for Pastels
Being one of the popular brands that produce quality art supplies, Canson is a name that we’re sure everyone in the art world knows.
Because they have been focusing on this line for about 450 years now, you can be sure the pastel sketchpad too is of the best quality.
It not only serves oil pastels but markers, soft pastels, colored pencils, charcoal, and crayons as well.
Experience
We can’t help but appreciate the versatile feature of this paper. Unlike other oil pastel papers, with this one, we can actually venture into using a wider range of mediums. Because it is made from cotton with just the right level of thickness, it also receives liquid paints such as oils and watercolors.
This helps save the artist a few bucks to purchase surfaces for each and every media they own. In fact, they can use this with almost any kind of paint medium.
Furthermore, what sets this sketchpad apart from the rest is the papers that come in delicate colors such as moonstone, buff, champagne, eggshell white, light blue, and steel gray.
In addition to its wide versatility, we can also use these colored papers for our DIY crafts which saves us time looking for some.
From a lot of reviews and research, this paper earns a gold standard in quality and performance when working with oil pastels.
We hardly need to rely on the paints because this paper is truly magnificent in highlighting and enhancing even the most average mediums.
With a more than enough deep tooth, the artist can manipulate the effects as much as they want with no unnecessary concerns about the pigments wearing off too soon or the binder popping up to the surface.
Working with oil pastels, we always tend to focus on layering bit by bit. And with a tooth like this, there is no problem adding multiple layers to our piece.
Coming to a very similar feature, the paper excels in providing texture as well. On one side of the sheet, we have a rough texture while on the other, a fine one.
This is an aspect that most of the other papers don’t offer. If you want to work on different surfaces every now and then, this would be a great choice since this and many other features are included.
They are also available in two different sizes which gives us a choice to pick out one that best suits our requirements. Besides, we can always cut them into our preferred sizes.
And the best part of this pad is that it contains sheets with 50 different tones so you can choose the one that is best for the artwork every time.
Finally, the papers are available for purchase both in a pad and individually. This way, if you ever run out of your favorite tone, there is no need to buy the whole pad anymore instead, you pay only for the desired one.
It would be no surprise if the price of this sketchpad costs more than most of the other pads out there given its variety of great features. However, we would recommend this if you are looking for a worthy investment.
What We Like
Versatile for dry, wet, & non-oil pastel mediums
50 toned papers for diverse color selection
Sheets sold individually or in a pad
Sheets feature rough & fine textures
What We Don’t Like
Price is significantly above the average range
Paper Weight: 98 lb | Texture: Medium | Acid-free: Yes | Size Options: 9 x 12 inches, 12 x 16 inches, 16 x 20 inches
5. Hahnemuhle Bugra Oil Pastel Paper
Here is a paper that is crafted in Germany.
The Hahnemuhle Bugra Pastel Paper is dual-sided and is entirely made up of alpha-cellulose. Similar to the Mi-Teintes Pad, this sheet also has one side with a rough texture and a fine one on the other.
Although it is made of color charcoal and pastels, it also works pretty well with graphite, pencils, and other dry mediums.
Experience
We like that these sheets are highly lightfast because most of the time, papers with poor composition face degradation as years pass by.
The good news is these papers contain pigments that resist UV light for a long period of time. Therefore, our paintings remain good as new for years to come.
Along with that, we can say these papers aim to last for a very long time because they are acid-free as well. There is no need to worry about discoloration or brittles as long as the papers are assured to have a normal pH balance.
We also find the size to be pretty much convenient for normal-sized artwork with just the right thickness to use oil pastels.
The amount of tooth and fine binder makes the process of creating effects very simple and easy. Other artists find that they have more control over the texture.
One downside would be that the surface is not able to hold the paints for long without the help of both workable and final fixatives.
All in all, we would highly recommend this for oil pastels if you’re searching for long-lasting papers.
What We Like
Paper's surface gives artists control over texture & effects
High lightfastness & acid-free for long-term artwork preservation
What We Don’t Like
Fixatives needed to stop future paint cracking
Paper Weight: 88 lb | Texture: Medium | Acid-free: Yes | Size Options: 33 x 41 inches
6. Sennelier Oil Pastel Card Pads
Sennelier is a French-based high-end brand that produces one of the best art supplies. From research, we found that many famous artists like Picasso and Van Gogh used art products by Sennelier.
And coming to pastel papers, we know exactly the kind of quality we expect from them.
The Sennelier Oil Pastel Card Pads is a perfect substitute for the Canson Mi-Teintes except that it’s more expensive.
Experience
We can list down many reasons why this paper is favored by artists all over.
First of all, the sheets come in 4 different sizes to meet the normal requirements of the artist. This already provides us with more options than most papers would.
Before we move further, the pad only contains 12 sheets in white color which are too less compared to the price tag.
But keeping those aside, there are more advantages to these sheets. For instance, the pad is not glued but spiral bound which is good to preserve for future use.
With glue, there is always a chance of the chemicals or acids interfering with the quality of the paper in the long run, but that is not the case with spiral binding. Another advantage of this particular binding is that they are relatively strong.
But the best part about the pad is the glassine paper. If you have not heard of it before, it is a glossy and smooth paper sheet that is used by laying it on the artwork to prevent pigments from transferring to the immediate sheet while the work is paused.
Glassine also acts as an alternative protection layer to fixatives whose price is much higher.
To sum it up, all the paper’s features - from the spiral binding to the glassine - are made to serve the artist who loves to work and travel. Also, the papers are thick enough to resist wear and tear while hitting the road.
What We Like
Available in four sizes for variety
Spiral-bound pad for longevity & damage prevention
Includes glassine sheets to protect unfinished work
What We Don’t Like
Pricey for a pad with only 12 sheets
Paper Weight: 160 lb | Texture: Medium | Acid-free: Yes | Size Options: 11.75 x 15 inches
7. Art Spectrum Colourfix Coated Pastel Paper
Art Spectrum is an Australian brand whose product quality is very similar to that of UArt, which we shall review in a minute.
This is a sanded paper which is good for both beginners and intermediates since the price of each sheet is only $2.69. Along with that, they also provide discounts for purchasing in bulk.
Experience
With their inexpensive price tag and high-quality sheets, we would absolutely recommend these for any artist who is looking for a steal deal.
There are 20 sheets in total, each with a different tone. Although the colors seem less than other papers we reviewed, we find that they complement any kind of desired artwork with the right application of oil pastels. And the results this pad delivers are excellent and stunning.
Since Art Spectrum uses high-quality binders, the papers have a strong grip over the oil pastels, as well as they are acid-free. We love this aspect because it is perfect for archival purposes, allowing the piece to stay fresh for years to come without any yellowing issues.
One of the most preferable features of these papers is that they are sanded in medium-coarse grit type. This is the reason why oil pastels can stay on paper for a long time without cracking.
These are available in two sizes: 9” x 12” and 5” x 27.5”. For normal pieces, these two will work out perfectly, otherwise, we would suggest looking at other brands for larger sizes.
We find that the tooth is fine and deep enough to allow the artist to manipulate the outcome as much as possible. While layering can be tough with other inferior-quality binders, these papers make the process seem simple and easy.
Most importantly, both intermediate artists and beginners love using these papers because they meet all the requirements one has while learning the art of oil pastel work. But rather than buying one sheet after another, it is better to get them in bulk quantities since the price would be lesser.
What We Like
Quality binders in pad enable desired effects
Affordably priced for beginners & intermediate artists
Features uniquely toned papers for any artwork
What We Don’t Like
Only 20 sheets of paper within the pad
Paper Weight: 140 lb | Texture: Coarse | Acid-free: Yes | Size Options: 9 x 12 inches
8. UArt Premium Sanded Paper Drawing Pad
Within the period of time spent searching for the best oil pastel surfaces, we found that UArt is one of the most highly-rated companies that produce art supplies.
Among many of their endless list of products is the Premium Sanded Paper.
Experience
This is another sanded paper that we find perfect for oil pastel artworks because of its ability to cover all the requirements that we look for in our oil pastel surface.
But the first thing worth mentioning is that out of all the other papers we have seen, UArt offers its papers in 6 different sizes. That is more than enough options to match our basic intentions.
On top of this, every paper has unique grit options which make these papers even better when it comes to versatility. If our artworks call for a moderate or a fine grit size, we can choose any one of these papers without any hassle.
However, the only setback is that the papers come only in two colors: dark and natural. Although the natural tone will undoubtedly go with any art concept, it still won’t serve artists who like to explore other creative ideas for their pieces.
On the other hand, the dark-tone paper will be perfect when working with bright oil pastels since it serves as a perfect background.
But what most artists usually would look for in an oil paper surface is its texture or tooth. With this paper, we are not even a tad worried about the tooth since it is deep enough to let the artist work smoothly and has full control over the effects.
Therefore, if you are looking for a fine tooth that can grab the paints tightly without having to worry about them flaking or peeling off, we would recommend going for this option and not getting disappointed.
What We Like
Six unique sizes for diverse artwork needs
Papers come in various grits for specific effects
Deep, flexible tooth ideal for oil pastels
What We Don’t Like
Limited to two tones
Paper Weight: 400 lb | Texture: Coarse | Acid-free: Yes | Size Options: 9 x 12 inches
9. Arches Watercolor 140 lb Hot Press Papers
So far, we only discussed surfaces that are made for oil pastels purposes.
But like the Arches Watercolor 140 lb Hot Press Paper, there are many surfaces out there that are not meant for this sole purpose but surprisingly fill the position very well.
Hence, we find this paper to be highly versatile and we are sure you will too.
Experience
As the name suggests, these are originally made for watercolor projects but we cannot deny that it works magic when it comes to oil pastels as well.
In case you’re wondering about its versatility, this paper can be used for printmaking, calligraphy, and digital printing as well. It is a multipurpose paper and it saves us from spending money.
The reason we find this perfect for oil pastels is because of so many reasons. Firstly, besides the multipurpose aspect, the papers come with the most amount of surfaces, grits, and textures on this list.
If you do not like the idea of having to look for other brands frequently in order to find the right paper size or texture, then this is the best pick we found.
Secondly, knowing that they are also acid-free ensures that our artworks will stay safe and fresh for a very long time, and not worry about the improper aging process.
Since this is not an oil pastel paper surface, we’re not surprised if it does not include all the features of oil pastels. One of them being the paper is only available in the color ‘Natural White’ which limits the artist to work with only suitable projects.
But if you want to save a decent sum of money and look for an inexpensive oil pastel as well as a multipurpose paper, we would suggest giving the Arches Watercolor 300lb Hot-Press Paper a try.
What We Like
Multipurpose for non-oil pastel or watercolor uses
Varied sizes, textures, & grits available
Price is relatively inexpensive
What We Don’t Like
Limited to natural white tone only
Paper Weight: 140 lb | Texture: Smooth | Acid-free: Yes | Size Options: 9 x 12 inches
What is the Best Paper for Oil Pastels?
If you're looking for the best papers for oil pastels, listed below is a table that compares paper weight in pounds, texture, whether it's acid-free, and available size options measured in inches.
Before getting oil pastel paper surfaces, there are a few things that require some considerations to ensure the surface is right for you and your artwork.
Tones
The tone is nothing different from the wash you create with liquid paints - it highlights the painting. So, always make sure the tone you get will go along well with any concept, or find one that is perfect for your piece.
Type of Paper Surfaces
For oil pastels, papers are available in the form of pads, sheets, or sanded.
Because papers can come either as an individual or a pad, you would want to purchase them in bulk quantity so that you can get a lot of discount with it.
Sanded paper, on the other hand, is harder and stronger than the two. A single unit will also cost higher. But we still recommend buying them in bulk for a pretty good discount.
Texture and Tooth
As we have stated, the top features most artists would first look for is the tooth or texture of the paper. The final look of the piece depends on how much control the artist has over it.
Also keep in mind that with a fine or deep tooth, the paint will stay firmly onto it, preventing them from cracking. But most importantly, artists get to create different effects and textures with a good tooth.
Versatility
If you’re on a tight budget, finding versatile papers can really help. Although it does not have to be as versatile as the Arches Hot-Pressed paper (unless you own a printing studio as well), one that works for other mediums is more than enough.
Interestingly, we find that the thickness or weight of a paper is pretty responsible for making it versatile. For example, if the paper is too thin, it will not work with wet mediums. So, we advise looking for one that is about 160 gsm.
Can I use regular paper for oil pastels?
While you can use regular paper for oil pastels, it's not typically recommended because regular paper lacks the necessary tooth or grain for the pastels to adhere properly, and it may not hold up well to the oil content in the pastels. Specialized pastel paper or canvas, which has a textured surface for better pigment grip and is more durable, is generally a better choice for oil pastel artwork.
What is the difference between sanded paper and pastel paper?
The difference between sanded paper and pastel paper lies primarily in their texture and durability. Sanded paper has a gritty surface that holds more layers of pastel and can withstand erasing or heavy application of pastels without getting damaged. Pastel paper, on the other hand, has less grain and a lighter texture, which might not hold as many layers of pastel but provides a delicate touch for lighter pastel works.
Can I use watercolor paper for oil pastels?
Yes, you can use watercolor paper for oil pastels. Watercolor paper, particularly rough or cold-pressed variants, have a textured surface that can hold the oil pastel quite well. Due to the oil content of pastels, some artists prefer to use a barrier such as a pastel ground or gesso to prevent the oil from seeping into the paper over time.
How do I choose the right paper for oil pastels?
Choosing the right paper for oil pastels involves considering the paper's texture and its weight. Paper with a texture or 'tooth' will allow the pastels to adhere better, leading to richer color application. Heavier weight paper (like cardstock) or specially designed pastel paper is preferable as oil pastels can be heavy and regular paper might tear. The choice may also depend on your personal style and the intended effects of your artwork.
Can I use acrylic paint on oil pastel paper?
Yes, you can use acrylic paint on oil pastel paper. Oil pastel paper typically has a texture that can hold paint well, and its heavier weight can withstand the water in acrylics without warping. That being said, you should still consider using a primer, such as gesso, to seal the paper and stop the paint from soaking in and causing the paper to degrade over time.
How do I prevent oil pastels from smudging on paper?
To prevent oil pastels from smudging on paper, artists often use a fixative spray. This substance is lightly sprayed onto the completed artwork and forms a protective layer that helps keep the pastel pigments in place, reducing smudging. Another method is to place a piece of glassine paper, a smooth, inert paper, over the artwork to protect it from being disturbed.
Thank you for taking the time to explore our comprehensive article on some of the best papers for oil pastels. We are confident that you found the information valuable, and now have a better understanding of what to look for when purchasing oil pastel papers. Now that you're equipped with this valuable knowledge, you're ready to create beautiful masterpieces with your favorite oil pastels.
Out of these 9 best papers for oil pastel, here are our top three recommendations:
Strathmore Assorted Pastel Paper Pad is an ideal option for artists on a budget in search of a versatile and easily available paper. It works well with different mediums, offering convenience and variety.
Faber-Castell Black Oil Paper Pad is a good option for artists looking to highlight bright colors and experiment with unconventional backgrounds. This affordable paper works best with dry mediums and can be effectively used for fancy DIY projects.
U. S. Art Supply Premium Oil Pastel Paper Pad is the right choice for those who appreciate a perfect balance of smoothness and tooth in their pastel paper. It works well with mixed media and is suitable for students and beginners.
With these recommendations, we trust that you will have an exciting and exhilarating time creating vibrant and unique artwork on your chosen oil pastel papers. So, go ahead, unleash your creativity, and let your imagination soar with every stroke of oil pastel on these incredible papers. Happy painting!
III. Bevel cuts
![7 Types of Wood Router Tools Explained [With Pictures]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2023/11/Types-of-Wood-Routers.jpeg "7 Types of Wood Router Tools Explained [With Pictures]")
![7 Best TIG Torch Of 2023 [Reviewed & Buyer’s Guide]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2023/11/Best-TIG-Torch.jpg "7 Best TIG Torch Of 2023 [Reviewed & Buyer's Guide]")
![10 Best Dual Shower Heads Of 2023 [Reviews & Buyer’s Guide]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2023/10/Best-Dual-Shower-Heads.jpg "10 Best Dual Shower Heads Of 2023 [Reviews & Buyer's Guide]")
